Graupner and KG MC-16 ComputerSystem Graupner/SJ HoTT User Manual Manual 3

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG ComputerSystem Graupner/SJ HoTT Manual 3

UserManual.wiki >

Graupner and KG >

MC-16 User Manual >

Manual 3 HTML Version

Manual 3

Receiver initialization

not correspond to the product (e.g. a transmitter

update ﬁ le instead of a receiver update ﬁ le), the

"Product code error" popup window will appear

and the update process will not start.

Activate the control labeled "Program". Wait for

the progress bar to start. Depending on the speed

of the computer being used, this may take several

seconds. Now switch on the receiver while holding

its SET button down. After a few seconds the

"Found target device …" message will appear

in the status display. Now you can release the

receiver's button. The actual ﬁ rmware update

will begin autonomously after this message has

appeared.

However, if the receiver is not detected, the "Target

device ID not found" popup window will appear.

If this process terminates before reaching the

100 % mark, switch off your receiver's power supply

then try to start the update process all over again.

Do this by performing the above steps again.

The status display and progress bar will show you

the progress of the ﬁ rmware update. The update

is concluded when the text "Complete … 100 %“

or "Complete!!" appears in the bottom line of the

status display.

Both LEDs on the receiver will illuminate during

the update process. Upon successful conclusion

of the update process, the green LED will

extinguish and the red LED will begin to blink.

Switch the receiver off and remove the interface

cable. Repeat this procedure for any other

receivers present.

Receiver initialization4.

Following a successful update process you MUST

perform a receiver initialization procedure before

using the receiver again. This is necessary for

reasons of safety.

Do this by pressing and holding the receiver's SET

button then switching the receiver's power supply

on. Now release the SET button again. When you

subsequently switch the receiver on again, the

receiver's green LED will illuminate continuously

for about 2 or 3 seconds. Except for binding

information, all other settings that may have been

programmed into the receiver will now be reset

to factory defaults and will have to be re-entered

again if they are needed.

52 Installation notices

In order to prevent uncontrolled movements of servos

connected to the receiver during startup

always ﬁ rst switch on the transmitter

and then the receiver

and when ﬁ nished with operation

ﬁ rst switch off the receiver

and then the transmitter.

When programming the transmitter, be sure that

electric motors cannot start running without control

or that a combustion motor equipped with automatic

starting cannot start up unintentionally. To be safe,

disconnect the receiver's drive battery or, in the case

of a combustion motor, disconnect the fuel supply.

Several notices and suggestions for installing

remote control components into a model are

provided below.

Wrap the receiver in a foam rubber pad that is at 1.

least 6 mm thick. Attach the foam rubber to the

receiver with rubber bands so it will be protected

against vibration and/or the jars of a hard landing.

All switches must be installed such that they are 2.

not affected by exhaust gases or vibration. The

switch knob must be freely accessible over its

entire range of movement.

Mount servos on rubber bushes/spacers with 3.

hollow brass bearings to protect them from

vibration. Do not tighten the fastening screws

down too tight as this would negate the vibration

protection to be provided by the rubber bush/

spacer. Only when servo fastening screws are

properly tightened will this arrangement provide

security and vibration protection for your servos.

The ﬁ gure below shows how a servo is mounted

properly. The brass bearings are to be pushed into

the rubber bushes/spacers from below.

Servo mounting lug

Retaining screw

Rubber grommet

Tubular brass spacer

Servo arms must be free to move throughout their 4.

entire range of motion. Pay attention that there are

no objects which could hinder servo arm motion.

The sequence in which servos are connected to the

receiver depends on the type of model. Follow the

connection layouts provided for this on pages 61 and 65.

Also observe the safety notices provided on pages 4 … 9.

Installation notices

Receiver installation

Regardless of which Graupner receiver system you

use, the procedure is always the same.

Please pay attention that the receiver's antennas

must be mounted at least 5 cm away from all large

metal parts or any wiring that is not directly routed

out of the receiver itself. In addition to steel parts, this

also includes carbon ﬁ ber parts, servos, fuel pumps

and all kinds of cables etc. Optimally the receiver

should be placed at a readily accessible location

that is well away from all other equipment. Under no

circumstances may servo cables be wrapped around

the antennas or routed close to it.

Please note that cables are subject to the

acceleration forces which occur during ﬂ ight and

these forces may cause such cables, to shift in

position. Therefore be sure the cables in the vicinity

of the antennas are not able to move. Such moving

cables can cause reception disturbances.

Tests have shown that vertical (upright) antennas

provide the best results during wide-range ﬂ ights. In

the case of diversity antennas (two antennas), the

second antenna should be oriented at a 90° angle to

the ﬁ rst antenna.

The connectors designated "B + -" on the GR-

32 DUAL HoTT receiver are intended for battery

connections. The power supply is bussed across

all numbered connections so it can be attached

at any of these 16 connectors. However, due to

additional voltage losses associated with the traverse

connectors, connections 13 through 16 should not be

used for connecting the receiver's battery.

The function of every individual channel is determined

by the transmitter used, not by the receiver. However,

channel assignments can be changed in the receiver

by programming done in the »Telemetry« menu.

Nevertheless, it is recommended this be done on the

transmitter side via the "Transmitter output" option,

see page 218.

For your notes

54 Term deﬁ nitions

Term deﬁ nitions

Control function, control, function input, control channel, mixer, switch, control switch, ﬁ xed switch

To make use of this mc-16 HoTT manual easier, a

number of the terms used repeatedly throughout this

manual have been deﬁ ned below.

Control function

A "control function" is to be perceived – initially

independent of its signal path – as a signal intended

to affect a given control function. For example, this

could be for throttle, rudder or aileron in a winged

aircraft or pitch, roll or crow for a helicopter.

A control function signal can be applied directly over

a single control channel or also through a mixer and

then applied over multiple control channels. A typical

example of multiple control channels is separately

operated aileron servos or the use of two roll or crow

servos in helicopters. The control function explicitly

includes the inﬂ uence of the control's mechanical

travel on the respective servo. This can not only

be spread or compressed by software but even the

travel characteristic can be modiﬁ ed from linear to

extremely exponential.

Control

"Controls" include all operating elements on the

transmitter, which are directly activated by the pilot,

that impose an effect on servos, speed controllers

etc. connected to the receiver. This includes:

both • joysticks for control functions 1 through

4, whereby these four functions can be freely

swapped around for both model types ("winged

aircraft" and "helicopters") by way of software

"Mode" settings, e.g. throttle left or right. The

joystick function for throttle/airbrake control is often

also referred to as the C1 control (channel 1).

both proportional controls located on the •

transmitter's sides, which are, for example,

given the designations SD1 (right-side "rotary

slider") and SD2 (left-side "rotary slider") in the

»Control adjust« menu, page 108 and 112.

the three • proportional sliders in the middle console

designated SR1 … 3, for example as shown in the

»Control adjust« menu, page 108 and 112,

all ﬁ ve • proportional rotary controls on the

transmitter's front side, which are, for example,

given the designations DR1 … 5 in the

»Control adjust« menu, page 108 and 112,

the switches present, if they are assigned to a •

control channel in the »Control adjust« menu.

The proportional operating elements produce a direct

effect on servos which is commensurate with the

control's position whereas switch modules can only

effect a two or three increment change.

Just which of these controls and switches operate which

of the servos 5 … 16 (max.) is freely programmable.

Important notice:

Inputs 5 … 15 for helicopters and 5 … 16 for

winged aircraft are generally "free", i.e. not

assigned, in the transmitter's basic programming.

Function input

This is an imaginary point in the signal path and

must not be considered the same as the point on

the circuit board where the transmitter control is

connected. The choice of "Stick mode" and settings

in the »Control adjust« menu have their effect

"downstream" of these imaginary connection points.

Thus differences between the physical control's

number and the number of the downstream control

channel can indeed emerge.

Control channel

From the point at which a signal contains all control

information necessary for a particular servo – whether

directly from the physical control or indirectly by way

of a mixer – the term "control channel" is used. This

signal is only yet to be inﬂ uenced by settings made in

the menus »Servo adjustment« and »Transmitter

output« before it leaves the transmitter's RF module.

Once it arrives at the receiver, this signal may still

be modiﬁ ed by settings made in the telemetry menu

before ﬁ nally being applied as a control quantity for

the respective servo.

Mixer

The transmitter's software contains a variety of mixer

functions. These can be used to apply one control

function to multiple servos or, conversely, to apply

multiple control functions to a single servo. Please

look over the numerous mixer functions in the text

beginning on page 159 of this manual.

Switches

The four standard toggle switches, the two 3-way

switches and both push-button switches can also

be incorporated into control programming. However,

these switches are generally intended for switching

program options, e.g. to start and stop timers, to

switch mixers on and off, or as a teacher/pupil

switchover, etc. Each of these switches can be

assigned any number of functions.

Appropriate examples are detailed in the manual.

Control switches

Since it is very practical to have some functions

automatically switched on or off for a certain control's

position (e.g. switch on/off of a stopwatch for

acquisition of model run time, automatic extension of

spoilers and other possibilities), eight control switches

have been integrated into mc-16 HoTT software.

These software switches, designated "C1 … C8", are

merely deﬁ ned by virtue of their contact state along

the physical control's course of travel by the touch of

a key. The switching action can be correlated to the

physical control's travel direction by software.

Of course control switches can also be freely

combined with the aforementioned physical switches

to solve even more complex problems.

There is a series of instructive examples which make

Term deﬁ nitions

this programming child's play. Learn about this by

taking advantage of the programming examples

beginning on page 268.

Logical switches

These functions permit two switches, control switches

and/or logical switches or any combination of these to

be combined with one another to create logical "AND"

and "OR" functionality. A total of 8 logical switches,

"L1 … L8" can be programmed, see page 138.

Fixed switches FXI and FX

This type of switch turns a function, e.g. a timer,

permanently on (closed ﬁ xed switch) or off (open ﬁ xed

switch) or they can provide a ﬁ xed input signal for a

control function, e.g. FXI = + 100 % and FX = -100 %.

For example, in ﬂ ight phase programming, these

ﬁ xed switches can be used to switch a servo or speed

controller between two settings.

56 Physical control, switch and control switch assignments

Physical control, switch and control switch assignments

Principle procedure

Maximum ﬂ exibility is offered by the mc-16 Hott

system when it comes to assigning standard

equipment operating elements to certain functions.

Since the assignment of controls and switches is

done in the same way, even though different menus

may be involved, it is appropriate at this point to

explain the fundamental programming technique so

that users can concentrate on the particular contents

when reading the detailed menu descriptions.

Physical control and switch assignments

The third column of the »Control adjust« menu

can be used to assign transmitter inputs 5 … 16 to

operate servos, both in any given joystick direction

(C1 … C4) as well as to assign any present control

or switch. After tapping on the center SET key of the

right touch pad, the window shown below will appear

in the display.

Gewünschten Schalter

oder Geber betätigen

Now simply move the desired control or switch.

Notes:

The control will only be recognized beyond a certain

amount of travel. Therefore these controls can be

moved back and forth until the correct assignment

is shown in the display. If adjustment travel is

insufﬁ cient, activate the control in the other direction.

On the other hand, if the »Control switch« menu,

page 135, is used to assign a control, the message

shown below will appear:

Move desired

control adj.

Important notice:

Controls to be assigned MUST be pre-assigned in

the »Control adjust« menu to one of the inputs 5

through 16!

Switch assignment

Wherever programming permits a switch to be

assigned, a switch symbol will appear in the screen's

bottom display line.

Use the selection keys in the left or right touch pad to

select the appropriate column.

How to assign a switch

Brieﬂ y touch the 1. SET key of the right touch pad.

The message shown below will appear in the

screen.

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Now it is only necessary to put the selected switch 2.

into the desired "ON" position or, as described

at the right in "Assignment of external switches",

to select a switch from the list of "External

switches". This concludes the assignment. The

switch symbol to the right of the switch's number

indicates the current state of the particular switch.

Changing switch action

If the activation of a switch is to result in the opposite

action, put the switch or joystick in the desired OFF

position, again activate the switch assignment and

reassign the switch again so it will respond with the

desired action.

Clear switch

A switch which has been assigned as described

under point 1 can be cleared with a brief

simultaneous tap on the  or  key combination

in the right key pad (CLEAR).

Assignment from the "external switch" list

Those menus in which the message …

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

… appears permit the assignment of switches

belonging to the so-called "external switches".

Do this by conﬁ rming the message text with the

SET key. A new window will appear with a list of the

eight control switches "C1 … C8", followed by two

so-called "FX" ﬁ xed switches and the eight inverted

switches "L1 … L8".

M wünschten Schalter

to die EIN Position

(erw. Schalter: SET)

Control/Logic/fix switch

C2 C4 C5 C6

C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2

C3C1

Use the selection keys in the left or right key pad to

select the desired switch then assign it with a brief

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Notes:

Switching for some special functions may •

be better implemented from a certain freely

programmable control position rather than

switching them manually with a normal switch.

To this end, there are a total of 8 so-called "control

switches", C1 … C8, available whose switching

direction can be established, even inverted, in the

»Control switch« menu, page 135.

Two switches and/or also control switches can be •

combined with one another to form the logical "AND"

or "OR" functions via the »Logical switch« menu,

see page 138. A total of 8 logical switches "L1 … L8"

(as well as another 8 inverted logical switches with

inverted switching direction) are available.

The result of a logical switch function can also

be used as an input for another logical switch

function. Refer to the appropriate menu for more

details about this.

Physical control, switch and control switch assignments

The two FX switches switch a function on "FXI" or •

off "FX " permanently.

All other switches mentioned can have multiple •

assignments. Pay attention that you do not

UNINTENTIONALLY assign reciprocally conﬂ icting

functions to a single switch. If necessary, note

down the given switch functions.

Typical applications:

Shut-off of an on-board glow plug heater upon •

underrun or overrun of an idle threshold point

programmed for the C1 joystick. In this case

the glow plug heater switch is controlled by a

transmitter mixer.

Automatic switch on/off of the timer to measure •

pure "ﬂ ight time" for a helicopter by way of a

control switch on the throttle limiter.

Automatic switch off of the "AI •  Rud" when

brake ﬂ aps are extended, for example to adapt

the roll of a model to the ground when making a

landing on a slope without inducing a change of

ﬂ ight direction due to inﬂ uence on the rudder.

Extending landing ﬂ aps with elevator trim adjustment •

during a landing as soon as the throttle stick is

moved beyond its switch point.

Switch on/off of the timer for measuring the •

operating time of electric motors.

58 Digital trimming

Digital trimming

Functional description and description of C1 cut-off

Digital trim with visible and audible indicators

Both joysticks are equipped for digital trimming. By

default, turning trim wheels will offset the joystick's

neutral position by 4 increments (out of a possible

100 steps per side). This offset is also reported

acoustically. A brief press on the trim wheel will

reset an existing trim offset back to "0". Any other

"zero points" can be speciﬁ ed with the help of the

»Trim memory« menu. If ﬂ ight phases have been

created and each assigned with a ﬁ tting name in

the »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment«

menus, then these names will appear at the bottom

left in the »Trim memory« menu and their trim values

will be stored on a ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c basis.

The default 4-steps per click increment range placed

in every new model memory upon initialization can

be changed at any time in the »Stick mode« menu,

page 104 or 106, separately for each joystick plane,

in a range of 1 … 10 for ﬁ xed-wing models and in

a range of 0 … 10 for helicopter models. (A trim

function can be deactivated by selecting "0" steps,

which can be advantageous in helicopters with

certain gyro systems.)

Current trim values are automatically stored

when a model memory change is made.

Furthermore, – except for the trim of the throttle/

airbrake joystick, the so-called "C1"(channel 1)

control function – digital trim can be set to operate

globally or on a ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c basis within a

memory location. This choice is made, separate for

each joystick plane, in the second column of the

»Stick mode« menu, page 104 or 106.

Notes:

Finding the mid-point position during a ﬂ ight is •

easy and can be done without even looking at the

display. A brief press on the trim wheel will reset

trim to "0" or, in the »Trim memory« menu, will

reset a stored ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c trim value.

The "cut-off trim" function, known from other •

Graupner remote control systems in the mc and

mx series, and typically described in this section

can be realized with the help of the "Thr. CutOff"

option in the »Basic settings, model« menu,

see page 81 and 90.

For your notes

60 Winged models

Winged models

Convenient support is provided for up to four aileron

servos and four ﬂ ap servos on normal models or, for

V tail and ﬂ ying wing/delta models, up to two aileron/

elevator servos plus four ﬂ ap servos.

The majority of motorized and glider models belong

to the tail unit type "normal" and are equipped with

one servo each for elevator, rudder and ailerons

in addition to a motor throttle or electronic speed

controller (or for brake ﬂ aps in the case of a glider

model). Beyond this, tail unit type "2 HR Sv 3+8"

permits the connection of two elevator servos to

receiver outputs 3 and 8.

"V-tail" is to be selected from the »Model type« menu

if the model has a V-tail instead of a "normal" tail.

This V-tail option provides coupled control functions

for elevator and rudder such that both tail ﬂ aps – each

controlled by a separate servo – are able to handle

both elevator and rudder functionality.

For delta and ﬂ ying wing aircraft models, aileron and

elevator functionality is affected by way of a common

rudder ﬂ ap on the trailing edge of each side (right and

left) of the wing. The program contains appropriate

mixer functions for both servos.

If ailerons, and conditionally the ﬂ aps, are each

actuated with two separate servos then settings can

be made for differentiated control of all aileron and

ﬂ ap pairs in the »Wing mixers« menu, i.e. settings

for downward rudder throw independent of upward

throw. And ﬁ nally, the positioning of ﬂ aps can also

be controlled by one or even more of the three

proportional sliders or the seven proportional rotary

controls.

Alternatively, there is a phase-dependent trim function

available for ﬂ aps, ailerons and elevators in the

»Phase trim« menu.

Up to 8 ﬂ ight phases can be programmed into each of

the 80 model memory locations.

Except for C1 trim, digital trim will be stored on a

ﬂ ight-phase basis. C1 trim permits easy location of a

carburetor idle setting.

Two timers are always available for ﬂ ight operation.

The transmitter operating time expired since the last

battery charge is also displayed.

All transmitter controls and switches can be assigned

in the »Control adjust« menu to inputs 5 … 16 with

almost no restrictions.

The "Dual Rate" and "Exponential" functions for

ailerons, rudder and elevators are separately

programmable and each are convertible between the

two variations on a speciﬁ c ﬂ ight-phase basis.

In addition to 8 freely allocatable linear mixers, 4 curve

mixers (»Free mixers« menu) and 4 dual mixers

(»Dual mixer« menu) there are also ﬂ ight-phase

dependent 8-point curves available to control channel

1 (throttle/brake), see »Channel 1 curve« menu).

Depending on the number of wing servos, ﬁ xed-

deﬁ nition mix and coupling functions can be selected

from a list in the »Wing mixers« menu.

Multi-ﬂ ap menu: control of ﬂ aps as ailerons, •

the inﬂ uence aileron trim on ﬂ aps controlled as

ailerons, ﬂ ap differentiation, ﬂ ap function throw

magnitude for all aileron and ﬂ ap pairs, ailerons

controlled as ﬂ aps, elevator mixer  ﬂ aps

Brake settings: butterﬂ y, differential reduction, •

elevator curves

aileron •  rudder mixer

ﬂ aps •  elevator mixer

left

right

Airbrake Flap

Airbrake Elevator

Airbrake-Function 1

left

right

Rudder/Elevator

V-Tail

Brake FL, FL2

Brake Elevator

Brake AI, AI2

FL2

AI2





RU  AI

EL  AI



AI2





Winged models / Receiver layout

Installation notices

Servos MUST be connected to the receiver in the

sequence illustrated here.

Outputs which are not used are simply left empty. Also

be sure to follow the notices on the next pages.

Winged aircraft with and without motor having up

to 2 aileron servos and up to 4 ﬂ ap servos …

… and tail plane type " normal" or "2 elevator

servos"

Receiver power supply

free or AIL2 left or aux. function

free or AIL2 right or aux. function

Rudder

Aileron or left aileron

Elevator or 1st elevator

free or 2nd Elevator or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake or throttle servo

or speed controller (electric motor)

Right aileron or aux. function

Flap or left flap

Right flap or free or aux. function

free or left flap2 or aux. function

free or flap2 right or aux. function

13 14 T 15 16 S

77 8910 11 12

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

… and tail plane type " V tail unit"

Receiver power supply

free or left AIL2 or aux. function

free or right AIL2 or aux. function

Aileron or left aileron

free or 2nd elevator or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake- or throttle servo

or speed controller (electric motor)

Right aileron or aux. function

Flap or left flap

Right flap or free or aux. function

free or left flap2 or aux. function

free or right flap2 or aux. function

13 14 T 15 16 S

77 8910 11 12

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

Left elevator/rudder

Right elevator/rudder

Delta/ﬂ ying wing aircraft models with and without

motor having up to two aileron/elevator servos

and up to 2 ﬂ ap/elevator servos

Receiver power supply

Airbrake- or throttle servo

or speed controller (electric motor)

13 14 T 15 16 S

77 8910 11 12

Receiver power supply

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function or AIL2 / left EL

free or aux. function or AIL2 / right EL

free or aux. function

free or flap / left elevator

free or flap / right elevator

free or aux. function or flap2 / left EL

free or aux. function or flap2 / right EL

free or aux. function

AIL / elevator left

AIL / elevator right

free or aux. function

free or rudder

62 Winged models - Servo direction wrong

Because of orientation differences for installed servos

and their rudder linkages, the actuating direction of

some servos may be initially backward. The table

below provides remedies.

Model

type

Servo

direction

wrong

Remedy

V tail Rudder and

elevator reversed Reverse polarity of

servos 3 & 4 in the

»Servo adjustment«

Rudder correct,

elevators reversed Swap servos 3 & 4 on

the receiver

Elevators correct,

rudder reversed Reverse polarity of

servos 3 & 4 in the

»Servo adjustment«

menu AND swap them

on the receiver

Delta,

ﬂ ying

wing

Elevator and aileron

reversed Reverse the polarity

of servos 2 & 3 in the

»Servo adjustment«

Elevator correct,

aileron reversed Reverse polarity of

servos 2 & 3 in the

»Servo adjustment«

menu AND swap them

on the receiver

Aileron correct,

elevators reversed Swap servos 2 & 3 on

the receiver

All "program descriptions" for menus relevant to a

winged aircraft model are marked with a winged

aircraft symbol …

… so only these menus need to be dealt with to

program a winged aircraft model.

For your notes

64 Helicopter models

sledom retpocileH

The advanced developments incorporated into the

transmitter as well as those now in helicopter models

and their components like gyros, speed regulators,

rotor blades, etc. make it possible to master a

helicopter even in 3D acrobatic ﬂ ight. On the other

hand, a beginner needs only a few settings to get

started with hovered ﬂ ight training then, step-by-

step, take advantage of mc-16 HoTT features with

increasing expertise.

The mc-16 HoTT program can operate all

conventional helicopters having 1 … 4 servos for

pitch control.

Seven ﬂ ight phases plus autorotation are available

within a model memory, see menus »Control adjust«,

»Phase settings« and »Phase assignment«.

As with winged aircraft, here too, in addition to the

basic screen's standard timers there are additional

timers as well as a lap counter with ﬂ ight-phase-

dependent stopwatch functionality which are available

for selection (menus »Timers (general)« and »Fl.

phase timers«).

Except for pitch/throttle trimming, digital trimming can

be stored as "global" for all ﬂ ight phases or as "ﬂ ight

phase speciﬁ c". C1 trim permits easy location of an

idle setting.

The control assignments for inputs 5 … 16 is made

separately for each ﬂ ight phase (»Control adjust«

menu).

A ﬂ ight phase copy function is helpful during ﬂ ight

trials (»Copy / Erase« menu).

"Dual Rate" and "Exponential" functions can be

coupled for roll, nick and tail rotor and programmable

in two variations in every ﬂ ight phase.

There are 8 freely assignable linear mixers. There

are also 4 curve mixers that can be programed and

these can also be switched on or off, depending on

the ﬂ ight phase, in the »MIX active/phase« menu.

Beyond this, there are also 4 dual mixers available.

The »Helicopter mixer« menu provides ﬂ ight-

phase-dependent 8-point curves for the non-linear

characteristics pitch, throttle and tail rotor mixer as

well as two independent swashplate mixers each for

roll and nick. Independent of this, the control curve

of the channel 1 joystick can be deﬁ ned with up to a

total of 8 points in every ﬂ ight phase. The beginner

will initially only adapt the hover ﬂ ight point to the

control middle for the non-linear characteristics.

Pre-programmed mixers in the »Helicopter mixer«

menu:

Pitch curve (8-point curve)1.

.2 1C  throttle (8-point curve)

Channel 1 3.  tail rotor (8-point curve)

Tail rotor 4.  throttle

.5 lloR  throttle

.6 lloR  tail rotor

Pitch-axis 7.  throttle

Pitch-axis 8.  tail rotor

Gyro suppression9.

Swashplate rotation10.

Swashplate limiter11.

The "Throttle limit" function (input Tl16 in the

»Control adjust« menu) allows the motor to be

started in any ﬂ ight phase. The right-side proportional

rotary slider is assigned to input "Tl16" by default.

This "throttle limiter" establishes – depending on its

given position – the maximum possible throttle servo

position. This makes it possible for the motor to be

controlled in the idle range, if necessary even by the

proportional regulator. The throttle curves become

effective only when the proportional regulator is

pushed toward the full throttle direction.

Collective

Pitch Curve

Swashplate

Rotation

Roll Throttle

Pitch-Axis Throttle

Channel 1 Throttle

Roll Tail Rotor

Pitch-Axis Tail Rotor

Channel 1 Tail Rotor

Helicopters / Receiver layout

Notice for those transitioning from older

Graupner systems:

In comparison to previous receiver layouts, servo

connector 1 (pitch servo) and servo connector 6

(throttle servo) have exchanged places. Servos must

be connected to receiver outputs as illustrated at the

right in the bottom ﬁ gure. Outputs which are not used

are simply left empty. More details about respective

swashplate types can be found on page 98 in the

»Helicopter type« menu.

Installation notices

Servos MUST be connected to the receiver in the

sequence illustrated here.

Outputs which are not used are simply left empty.

Also be sure to follow the notices on the next pages.

Note:

A speed control is also to be connected to receiver

output "6" in order to take full advantage of the

throttle limiter's convenience and safety features, see

text beginning on page 117. See page 181 about this.

Receiver allocation for helicopter models with

1 to 3 swashplate servos

Receiver power supply

13 14 T 15 16 S

77 8910 11 12

Receiver power supply

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

Tail rotor servo (gyro system)

Roll-1 servo

Pitch-axis 1 servo

frei or speed governor or aux. function

Collective pitch or roll 2 or pitch-axis 2 servo

free or aux. function

Throttle servo or speed controller

Gyro gain

Receiver allocation for helicopter models with

4 swashplate servos

Receiver power supply

13 14 T 15 16 S

77 8910 11 12

Receiver power supply

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or speed governor or aux. function

Throttle servo or speed controller

Gyro gain

Tail rotor servo (gyro system)

Roll 1 servo

Pitch-axis 1 servo

Roll 2 servo

Pitch-axis 2 servo

All menus relevant to helicopter models are marked

in the "program descriptions" section with a helicopter

symbol …

… so only these menus need to be dealt with to

program a helicopter model.

66 Detail program description - Loading a new memory location

Anyone who has worked through to this part of

the manual has certainly already tried out a bit of

programming. Nevertheless a detailed description of

every menu should not be left out.

This section begins with the loading of a "free"

memory location, a procedure which would be

performed if a new model was being "programmed".

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

RX VOLT:0.0v

00:00h

From the basic display, a jump to the "Multi-function

list" is made with a tap on the center SET key of the

right touch pad. (The center ESC key of the left touch

pad will cause a jump back to the basic display.)

By default, when the multi-function list is called for

the ﬁ rst time after switching on the transmitter, the

»Model select« menu option will be active and

displayed in inverse video. Otherwise use the 

or  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to

select the »Model select« menu option , whereby the

upper of the two following ﬁ gures shows a selection

list for a ﬁ xed-wing model and the lower shows the

selection list for a helicopter model.

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Model select Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup model Model type

Detail program description

Loading a new memory location

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Model select Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup model Helicopter type

Tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch

pad to open this menu option:

 free

E16

 free

00:12h

In the transmitter's delivered state, the ﬁ rst model

memory is initialized to the "ﬁ xed-wing model" type

and the receiver in the delivery is "bound" to this

model. The time display located near the line's middle

indicates the overall operating time of the respective

model memory.

The remaining memory locations, marked with

"free", are still unoccupied and therefore

also "non-bound". If you wish to program a ﬁ xed-wing

model then, after leaving the »Model select« menu

with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad,

programming of the model can begin right away … or

now use the  or  keys of the left or right touch pad

to select one of the free memory locations …

R16

 free

00:12h

 free

… and then tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad to conﬁ rm the choice.

Afterward you will be prompted to select the basic

model type, i.e. either "winged model" or "helicopter

model".

Select model type ( free model memory )

Use the  or  keys of the left or right touch pad to

select the basic model type then tap on the center

SET key of the right touch pad. This initializes the

selected model memory with the selected model type

and the display will return to the base screen. The

memory location is now accordingly occupied.

However, if you wish to begin with a helicopter,

select one of the memory locations marked

"free" with the  or  keys of the left or

right touch pad then conﬁ rm the selection with a brief

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. You

will be now be prompted to specify the basic model

type, in this case the "helicopter model". Select the

appropriate symbol with the  or  keys of the left

or right touch pad then again tap brieﬂ y on the center

SET key of the right touch pad to conﬁ rm the choice.

This initializes the selected model memory with the

Detail program description - Loading a new memory location

Further details about binding a receiver can be

found on page 77 or 85.

At the right and above the aforementioned "BIND. •

N/A" warning message, the warning …

Fail Safe

setup

t.b.d.

… will appear (also for just a few seconds) to

indicate that no no failsafe settings have yet been

made. More about this can be found on page 208.

If the screen should display the warning …•

Throttle

too

high!

… then move the throttle joystick, or the limiter for

a helicopter, (by default this is rotary slider SD1)

into its idle position.

Whether or not this warning appears also depends

on the settings selected for the "Motor on C1"

and "Pitch min." options in the »Model type«

menu, see page 94, or »Helicopter type« menu,

see page 98. For winged aircraft models, select

"None" to deactivate this message if you have no

motor

to enter.

If the transmitter already has occupied model •

memories then sub-menus of the »Copy / Erase«

menu will display a pictograph of the selected

model type at the respective memory location

followed by a blank line or the model name which

was entered in the »Basic settings, model«

menu, page 76 or 84. To the right of this will be as

display of the model operating time and, if present,

"Info" about the model.

If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover •

cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An

selected model type and you can now program your

model into this model memory.

Changing over to another model type is still possible

if you ﬁ rst erase this memory location (»Copy /

Erase« menu, page 70).

Notes:

If, from the base screen, the currently active model •

memory is to be erased then immediately after the

erase action one of the two model types, "Winged"

or "Heli" must be deﬁ ned. You cannot avoid this

selection even if you switch the transmitter off.

When the transmitter is switched on again the

undesired occupation of the that model memory will

have to be erased from another memory location.

If a non-active memory location is erased, it will

subsequently be marked as "free" in the

"Model select" menu.

After the selected model memory is initialized with •

the desired model type, the display will switch to

the base screen of the freshly occupied model

memory. At this time the warning …

BIND. N/A

… will appear for several seconds as notiﬁ cation

that a binding connection to a receiver is "not

available". A brief tap on the center SET key of

the right touch pad will cause a direct jump to the

appropriate option.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Info

n/a

Module bind

HoTT

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

appropriate message will appear in the screen:

not possible now

voltage too low

As a basic principle, there are four different ways to

assign the four control functions, aileron, elevator,

rudder and throttle or brake ﬂ aps for winged models

as well as rolling, pitching, tail rotor and throttle/

pitch for helicopter models, to the two joysticks. Just

which of these methods is used depends on the

preferences of the individual model pilot. This function

is set for the currently active model memory in the

"Stick mode" line of the »Basic settings, model«

menu, page 76 or 84.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS MODEL

Info

n/a

Module bind

HoTT

SEL

If this setting is desired as a default for future models,

the setting can also be entered into the »General

basic settings« menu, page 258:

Owners name

Pre-set stick mode

Pre-set DSC Output

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

PPM10

SEL

Pre-set modulation HoTT

It should be noted here once again that, in the interest

of greatest ﬂ exibility in combination with the prevention

of unintentional operating errors, no controls are

preassigned to control channels 5 … 16 by default.

This means that, in the system's delivered state,

68 Detail program description - Loading a new memory location

only servos attached to receiver outputs 1 …

4 can typically be operated by the two joysticks

and that any servos attached to receiver

connectors 5 … 16 (max) will remain in their

middle positions. A newly initialized helicopter

model is also able to more-or-less move servo

6 – depending on the position of the right-side

proportional rotary slider, which is the default throttle

limiter control. With either model type, this situation

will only change after appropriate assignments have

been made in the »Control adjust« menu.

On the other hand, if a newly initialized model

memory is to be put into operation then it MUST

ﬁ rst be appropriately "connected" with one or more

receivers before the servos attached to the receiver/s

can be operated. More about this can be found in the

section "Binding" on page 77 or 85.

A fundamental description of programming steps

for a winged aircraft model can be found in the

programming examples section beginning on 268,

or for helicopter models beginning on page 308.

The menu descriptions below are arranged in the

sequence individual menus are listed in the multi-

function list.

Detail program description - Model select

Model select

Call up model 1 … 80

The basic operation of the transmitters keys was

explained on pages 28 and 29 and, on the previous

double-page, explanations were provided for

navigating to the multifunction list and about how

to make allocations for a new model memory. At

this point we now wish to begin with the "normal"

description of individual menu items in the sequence

they are arranged in the transmitter. Therefore we will

begin with the menu …

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Model select Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup model Model type

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup model Model type

As many as 80 complete model settings, including

digital trim values for the trim wheel, can be stored.

Trimming is stored automatically such that a

switchover from one model to another does not cause

a loss of current trim settings. To the right of the

model number, each occupied model memory line in

this display shows a pictograph of the model type as

well as the model's name entered for the model in its

»Basic settings, model« menu, page 76 or 84. The

code, if present, for the receiver "bound" to the model

memory location will appear after the model number.

Select the »Model select« menu with the selection

keys of the left or right touch pad then brieﬂ y tap on

the SET key of the right touch pad.

Attention!

Switch-OFF

the Receiver first!

If this message appears, there is a telemetry connection

to an operationally ready receiver system. Switch that

receiver system off.

Ultimate

02 00:44hR12

Starlet

BELL47G

00:33hR08

00:22hR08

Test

trim needed

 free

01 01:23hR16Graubele 1234g/080811

Now, with the  selection keys of the left or right

touch pad, select the desired model memory from the

list and activate it with a tap on the SET key. A tap on

the ESC key will cause a return to the previous menu

page without activating a model change.

Notes:

If, after a model change, the "Throttle too high" •

warning appears, the throttle/pitch joystick (C1)

or the throttle limiter – by default, the right-side

proportional rotary slider – is too far in the full

throttle direction.

If a model change causes the message …•

BIND. N/A

… to appear then binding settings should be

checked.

If a model change causes the message …•

Fail Safe

setup

t.b.d.

… to appear then respective failsafe settings

should be checked.

If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover •

cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An

appropriate message will appear in the screen:

not possible now

voltage too low

70 Detail program description - Copy / Erase

Copy model  model

Select the »Copy model  model« sub-menu with

the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad

then tap the SET key.

Copy flight en kopieren

Erase model

Copy modelodell –> Modell

Export to SD-Karte

Import fromn von SD-Karte



OFFON

Please select

RF on/off?

If the message shown above should appear, the

transmitter's RF module is still active. Switch the RF

module off as described on page 80 then also, if a

receiver system is currently switched on, switch off

that receiver too. This is to be done for reasons of

safety.

Choose the model to be copied with the  selection

keys of the left or right touch pad …

 free

01:23hR16

Ultimate

Graubele 1234g/080811

00:44hR12

Starlet

BELL47G

00:33hR08

00:22hR08

Test

trim needed

Copy from model:

… then, following the change into the "Copy to

model" window caused by another tap on the SET

key of the right touch pad, the destination memory

can be selected with the  selection keys of the left

or right touch pad. Yet another tap on the SET key

will then conﬁ rm the copy process or a tap on ESC

key will cause the copy to be canceled. A memory

location which is already occupied can be overwritten.

01 01:23hR16

Ultimate

Graubele 1234g/080811

00:44hR12

Starlet

BELL47G

00:33hR08

00:22hR08

Test

trim needed

Select model to be erased :

… whereby another tap on the SET key will cause the

conﬁ

rmation request …

Model really

Ultimate

to be erased?

NO YES

… to appear. A NO response will cause the process

to be canceled and a return to the previous screen.

Selecting the YES response with the  selection key

of the left or right touch pad followed by conﬁ rmation

of the selection with a brief tap on the SET key will

erase the selected model memory.

Caution:

This erase process cannot be undone. All data

in the selected model memory will be erased

completely.

Note:

If the currently active model memory is to be

erased, a model type "Winged" or "Heli" must be

deﬁ ned immediately after the erase process. If,

however, an inactive memory location is erased, it

will subsequently appear in "Model select" list as

"free".

Copy / Erase

Erase or copy model  model, copy from or to SD card, copy ﬂ ight phases, store/cancel changes

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to select the »Copy / Erase« menu …

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Model select Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup model Model type

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Model select Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup model Helicopter type

… then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right

touch pad.

Erase model

Copy flight phase

Erase model

Copy model –> model

Export to SD

Import from SD =>



Select the "Erase model" sub-menu with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad then

brieﬂ y tap on the SET key.

Choose the model to be erased with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad …

Detail program description - Copy / Erase

01 01:23hR16

Ultimate

Graubele 1234g/080811

00:44hR12

Starlet

BELL47G

00:33hR08

00:22hR08

Test

trim needed

Copy to model:

 free 

After conﬁ rming the selected model memory with

a tap on the SET key, a conﬁ rmation request will

appear:

Model really

Ultimate

to be copied?

NO YES

02 05  free

A NO response will cancel the process and return

the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES

response is selected and conﬁ rmed with a tap on

the SET key then the selected source model will be

copied into the selected model memory destination.

Note:

In addition to model data, binding data is also copied

by this process. This means that a receiver system

which was/is bound to the original model memory can

also be operated by its copy without establishing the

bond again.

Exporting to SD card

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to select the »Export to SD« sub-menu then tap

on the SET key.

Copy flight sen kopieren

Erase model

Copy modeModell –> Modell

Export to SDach SD-Karte

Import from von SD-Karte



OFFON

Please select

RF on/off?

If the message shown above should appear, the

transmitter's RF module is still active. Switch the

RF module off as described on page 80 then also, if a

receiver system is currently switched on, switch off that

receiver too. This is to be done for reasons of safety.

Choose the model to be exported with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad …

 free

01:23hR16

Ultimate

Graubele 1234g/080811

00:44hR12

Starlet

BELL47G

00:33hR08

00:22hR08

Test

trim needed

export to SD-Card:

After conﬁ rming the selected model memory with a tap

on the SET key, a conﬁ

rmation request will appear:

Model really

Ultimate

export?

NO YES

A NO response will cancel the process and return

the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES

response is selected then conﬁ rmed with a tap on the

SET key, the selected model will be copied to the SD

card.

Notes:

Should the notice …•

SD-CARD

INSERT

… appears instead of a screen for model

selection, there is no SD card in the transmitter's

card slot, see page 23.

In addition to model data, binding data is also •

copied by this process. This means that a receiver

system which was/is bound to the original model

memory can also be operated in the SAME

transmitter by its copy without establishing the

bond again.

An exported ﬁ xed-wing model will be stored on •

the memory card in the \\Models\mc-16 folder

with a ﬁ lename format of "aModelname.mdl"

and a helicopter model with a ﬁ lename format

of "hModelname.mdl". On the other hand, if a

"nameless" model is exported, its data will be

stored on the memory card under "ahNoName.

mdl" or "hNoName.mdl", as appropriate.

Some special characters that can be used in •

model names are subject to speciﬁ c restrictions

associated with the FAT or FAT32 ﬁ le system used

by the memory cards and these special characters

will be replaced during the copy process with a

tilde (~).

A model ﬁ le already on the memory having •

the same name as the ﬁ le to be copied will be

overwritten without warning.

72 Detail program description - Copy / Erase

pad then conﬁ rmed with a tap on the SET key, or the

process can be canceled with a tap on the ESC key.

A memory location which is already occupied can be

overwritten.

01 01:23hR16

Ultimate

Graubele 1234g/080811

00:44hR12

Starlet

BELL47G

00:33hR08

00:22hR08

Test

trim needed

Import to model:

 free 

After conﬁ rming the selected model memory with a tap

on the SET key, a conﬁ

rmation request will appear:

model

Extra 300

import?

NO YES

05  free

A NO response will cancel the process and return

the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES

response is selected and conﬁ rmed with a tap on

the SET key then the selected source model will be

imported into the selected destination model memory.

Notes:

If the message …•

SD-CARD

INSERT

… appears instead of a screen for model

selection, there is no SD card in the transmitter's

Importing from SD card

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to select the »Import from SD« sub-menu then

tap on the SET key.

Copy flight sen kopieren

Erase model

Copy modell –> Modell

Export to mnach SD-Karte

Import from von SD-Karte



OFFON

Please select

RF on/off?

If the message shown above should appear, the

transmitter's RF module is still active. Switch the RF

module off as described on page 80 then also, if a

receiver system is currently switched on, switch off that

receiver too. This is to be done for reasons of safety.

Select the model to be imported from the SD memory

card with the  selection keys of the left or right

touch pad.

01 11/06/06 06:06

Extra 300

Soarmaster

11/07/07 07:07

T-Rex 250

BellCobra

11/08/08 08:08

11/09/09 09:09

import from SD-CARD:

Note:

The export date posted at the right end of each model

name line is represented in the format "year/month/

day".

After another tap on the SET key of the right touch

pad, the "import from SD-CARD" window will appear.

Now the destination memory location can be selected

with the  selection keys of the left or right touch

card slot, see page 23.

In addition to model data, binding data is also •

imported by this process. This means that a

receiver system which was/is bound to the original

model memory can also be operated in the SAME

transmitter by its copy without establishing the

bond again.

Copy ﬂ ight phase

Select the »Copy ﬂ ight phase« sub-menu with the

 selection keys of the left or right touch pad then

tap on the SET key.

Copy flight phase

Erase model

Copy model –> model

Export to SD

Import from SD =>



In the "Copy ﬂ ight phase" sub-menu …

Copy from phase:

5=>

… the ﬂ ight phase to be copied (1 … 8 for ﬁ xed-wing

models or 1 … 7 for helicopter models) is selected

with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad

then conﬁ rmed with a brief tap on the SET key of the

right touch pad. In the next window to appear …

Detail program description - Copy / Erase

Copy to phase:

5=>

… a destination must be selected and it must be

conﬁ rmed too. Another conﬁ rmation request will follow:

Phase to:

to be copied?

NO YES

1 normal 2 Thermik

A NO response will cancel the process and return

the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES

response is selected and conﬁ

rmed with a tap on

the SET key then the selected source model will be

imported into the selected destination model memory.

Storing changes permanently

Undoing changes

These two sub-menus permit programming changes

to be backed up immediately or to be undone

(restored) to the state when the model was called up

or the state of the last backup.

Copy flight en kopieren

Export to SD

Import fromvon SD-Karte



Store changes ft speichern

Undo changesgig machen

OFFON

Please select

RF on/off?

If the message shown above should appear, the

transmitter's RF module is still active. Switch the RF

module off as described on page 80 then also, if a

receiver system is currently switched on, switch off that

receiver too. This is to be done for reasons of safety.

Data is only backed up by "Store change" or a

switch from one model to another in the »Model

select« menu. Switching the transmitter on or off

will not store the permanently. To store changes

permanently, select the appropriate line then brieﬂ y

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The

conﬁ rmation request shown below will appear:

Programming changes to be

NO YES

store permanently?

A NO response will cancel the process and return

the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES

response is selected and conﬁ

rmed with a tap on

the SET key then the changes made since the last

backup or model change will be stored permanently.

If, however, the changes made since the last

backup or model change are to be canceled, then

select the line "Undo change". Following a brief tap

on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the

conﬁ rmation request shown below will appear:

Programming changes to be

NO YES

reset to original?

A NO response will cancel the process and return

the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES

response is selected and conﬁ

rmed with a tap on

the SET key then the changes made since the last

backup or model change will be stored permanently.

Note:

When the transmitter is switched off, any changes

made will not be lose but they are not permanently

stored either. This means that a subsequent "cancel

changes" would reset memory to the state of the last

"permanent backup" (or model change).

74 Detail program description - Suppress menus

Suppress menus

Suppression of menus in the multifunction list

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to select the »Suppress codes« menu …

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup model Model type

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup model Helicopter type

… then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right

touch pad.

Copy / Erase

Model select

Servo adjustment

Stick mode Control adjust

Dual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curve

Suppress models Base setup model

Model type

Suppress : SET

Copy / Erase

Model select

Servo adjustment

Stick mode Control adjust

Dual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curve

Suppress models Base setup model

Helicopter type

Suppress : SET

In the menu which then appears, menu items which

are no longer needed or those which should not

be changed, can be blocked from appearing in th

multifunction list.

The option to be suppressed/displayed is selected

with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad

then its status is switched over with a tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad.

Copy / Erase

Model select

Servo adjustment

Stick mode Control adjust

Dual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curve

Suppress models Base setup model

Model type

Suppress : SET

Copy / Erase

Model select

Servo adjustment

Stick mode Control adjust

Dual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curve

Suppress models Base setup model

Helicopter type

Suppress : SET

This can reduce the multi-function list considerably, in

some cases to only a few menus, thus substantially

improving clarity of the multi-function list. Options are

not deactivated by being suppressed. They will simply

no longer appear in the list. This also blocks direct

access to these functions.

Tip:

If you wish to forgo access-blockage to the multi-

function list altogether, suppress the »Code lock«

menu in the multi-function list by way of this menu as

a precautionary measure. It is then not so easy for an

unauthorized person to lock up the transmitter.

Detail program description - Suppress models

Suppress models

Suppression of model memory locations

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to select the »Suppress models« menu …

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup model Model type

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress Models

Base setup model Helicopter type

… then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right

touch pad.

Model memories which are rarely needed or to

which access is to be blocked for other reasons can

be hidden from the model selection list. This also

clariﬁ es the overview layout for model selection.

The model to be suppressed/displayed is selected

with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad

then its status is switched over with a tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad.

 free 

01:23hR16

Ultimate

Graubele 1234g/080811

00:44hR12

Starlet

BELL47G

00:33hR08

00:22hR08

Test

trim needed

Suppress : SET

A model memory which is "stricken through" will no

longer appear in the »Model select« menu.

Starlet

BELL47G

00:33hR08

00:22hR08

trim needed



free



free



01 01:23hR16Graubele 1234g/080811

free

 

76 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

Base setup model

Model-speciﬁ c base settings for winged aircraft models

Before programming speciﬁ c parameters, there are

some basic settings to be made which effect the

currently active model memory.

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to

select the »Basic settings, model« menu …

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup model Model type

… then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS,MODEL

Info

n/a



Module bind

HoTT

Change to the next screen page with a brief tap on

the SET key of the right touch pad. This will open a

screen of characters for entry of the model's name.

A maximum of 13 characters can be used to specify

a model name.

!"#$%&’()

Model name Graub

@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_

?+,–./0123456789:;

¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ

`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~

Now the desired characters can be selected with the

selection keys of the left touch pad. Move to the next

position to select the next character with a tap on the

 selection key of the right touch pad or its center

SET key. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will place a space

character at the current position.

Positioning to any character position within the entry ﬁ eld

can be done with the  keys of the right touch pad.

A return to the previous menu screen is accomplished

with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch

pad.

A model name entered in this manner will appear in

the base screen of the »Model select« menu and in

the sub-menus of the »Copy / Erase« menu item.

Info

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS,MODEL

Info

n/a



Module bind

HoTT

Graubele

Every model can be given a supplementary note of

up to 12 characters (maximum) by following the same

procedure as already described for creating a "Model

name". This info note will appear as a supplement in

the »Model select« menu and in the sub-menus of

the »Copy / Erase« menu item.

Stick mode

“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)

elev. down

elev. up

left rudder

right rudder

full throttle

idle

left aileron

right aileron

full throttle

left rudder

right rudder

idle

elev. down

elev. up

left aileron

right aileron

elev. down

elev. up

left aileron

right aileron

Motor Vollgas

idle

left rudder

right rudder

full throttle

idle

left aileron

right aileron

elev. down

elev. up

left rudder

right rudder

There are four fundamental options for assigning

the four control functions (aileron, elevator, rudder

and throttle/brake ﬂ ap) for a winged aircraft model

to the two joysticks. Just which of these options is

chosen depends on the individual preferences of the

individual model pilot.

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to select the "Stick mode" line. The option ﬁ eld

will be framed.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

n/a

Module bind

HoTT

SEL

Graubele

1234g/111111

Tap on the SET key. The currently displayed stick

mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the

selection keys of the right touch pad to select from

among options 1 through 4.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to stick

mode "1".

Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

to the transmitter will fall into Fail-safe mode

during the transmitter-side "binding" period.

"Binding" multiple receivers per model

Multiple receivers per model can be bound if desired,

whereby respective mc-16 HoTT programs offer the

potential for managing up to four receivers directly

and for dividing up the transmitter's 16 control

channels (max) in any arrangement among these

receivers under menu control. Refer to additional

details further down in this section. First bind the

receivers individually as described below.

However, in subsequent operation only one of

these receivers will establish a telemetry bond to

the transmitter; the one which was activated in the

"TELEMETRY RCV" line of the »Telemetry« menu.

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1

Any telemetry sensors which may be built into the

model should therefore be connected to this receiver

because the transmitter only receives and evaluates

data from the return channel of the receiver activated on

this line. The second, and all other receivers, operate in

parallel but are fully independent in slave mode.

"Binding" transmitter and receiver

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to move into the "Module" line. The marker frame

will be positioned by default to the column for the next

free binding channel. In the example shown in the

figure below, the marker frame is positioned above the

column label "BD2" because the binding channel in the

column labeled "BD1" is already in use by default for

the receiver which was delivered with the set.

Another tap on the SET key will again deactivate

option selection so a change to another line can be

affected.

Module

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

n/a

Module bind

HoTT

Graubele

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

The mc-16 transmitter has a HoTT RF module as

standard equipment. In addition to the built-in module,

there is a connector for an external RF module

behind one of the two front cover ﬂ aps (see page 25)

and a switchover to an external module connected

there can be affected per software. To do this, use the

selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move

the marker frame left to the "Module" selection ﬁ eld

above the "SEL" column label.

HoTT

Graupner HoTT receivers must be "instructed"

to communicate exclusively with a certain model

(memory) in a Graupner HoTT transmitter. This

procedure is known as "binding" and must only be

done once for every new receiver/model-memory-

location combination (and can be repeated anytime).

Important notices:

During the binding procedure be sure the •

transmitter's antenna is always far enough

away from the receiver's antenna. To be on the

safe side, keep them at least one meter apart.

Otherwise there is a risk of a faulty connection to

the return channel and malfunctions will result.

When binding additional receivers, note that any •

other –switched on– receivers already bound

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

n/a

Module bind

HoTT

Graubele

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

If not already off, now switch the receiver on. The red

LED on the receiver will blink.

Press and hold the SET button on the receiver while

the LED continues to blink red for about 3 seconds

then, after about another 3 seconds, begins to blink

red/green. The SET button on the receiver can now

be released. As long as this LED blinks red/green, the

receiver is in bind mode.

Now, within this 3 second period, start the so-called

"receiver binding" process for the receiver to the

currently active model memory with a brief tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad. At this time,

the screen's display will blend in a message window

for the duration of the "binding" process.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

n/a

Module bind

HoTT

Graubele

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

FINDING...

If the receiver's LED, again blinking red, changes

within about 10 seconds to continuous illumination

in green, the binding process has been successfully

completed. Your model-memory to receiver

combination is now operationally ready. At this time

the screen will now display " bind " (bound) instead of

"n/a" (not attached).

78 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

Model name

Stick mode 1

bind

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

n/a

Module bind

HoTT

Graubele

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

On the other hand, should the LED on the receiver

blink red for longer than about 10 seconds, the

binding process has failed. In this case the screen

will continue to show the status as "n/a". If this should

happen, try changing the position of antennas then

repeat the entire procedure.

Binding other receivers

The binding channel you have chosen is already

bound (as indicated by the "bind" status). with

another binding channel. After initiating the RF

bind process, instead of displaying "BINDING", the

message shown below appears.

Model name

Stick mode 1

geb.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

n/a

Module geb.

HoTT

Graubele

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

off

is turned

Drop down two lines in the screen and switch off the

RF module as described on the page in section "RF

module". Afterward, return again to the "Module" line

and restart the binding process as described above.

Alternatively, the transmitter can be switched off

brieﬂ y then, after switching it back on again, respond

to the message window that appears …

OFFON

Please select

RF on/off?

… with "OFF" …

Please select

RF on/off?

OFF

… then conﬁ rm the selection with a brief tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad. From the

base screen jump again into the "Module" line of

the »Basic settings, model« menu and restart the

binding process.

Dissolving a bond

Proceed as described above to initiate the binding

process but WITHOUT ﬁ rst putting a receiver in

binding readiness.

EXT. PPM

Important notice:

With the activation of the value ﬁ eld in the context

of the following described changeover, any

existing bonds to HoTT receivers which may be

effective for the currently active model memory

will be lost.

Activate the ﬁ rst value ﬁ eld in the "Module" line with a

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then

use the selection keys to choose "EXT. PPM" instead

of "HoTT". In parallel with the selection of "EXT.

PPM", the other four value ﬁ elds will be replaced by

the type of modulation pre-selected in the line »DSC

Output«, see page 81.

Model name

Stick mode 1

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Module

Graubele

1234g/111111

SEL

PPM10

EXT. PPM

This change also suppresses the lines for the options

(described below): »HoTT«, »Rcv Ch Map«, »RF

module« and »RF range test« and, in the basic

display, "PPM" will be displayed instead of "HoTT".

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

RX VOLT:0.0v

00:00h

PPM

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Receiver channel mapping

As long as there is at least one "bound" receiver in

the "Module" line, the next line down will be the "Rcv

Ch map" line.

Model name

Stick mode 1

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Graubele

1234g/111111

SET SET SET SET

Rcv Ch map R16 R08 n/a

n/a

As mentioned in the introduction to the "Binding

receivers" section, this menu item of the mc-16 HoTT

offers both the opportunity to freely divide up the

transmitter's control channels within a receiver as well

as the opportunity to distribute the transmitter's 16

Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

control channels across as many as four receivers.

This redistribution is subsequently referred to as

"mapping" or "channel mapping" (channel correlation).

Select the receiver to be "mapped" with the selection

keys of the left or right touch pad then tap brieﬂ y on

the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Channel mapping within a receiver

Analogous to the channel correlation function in

the »Telemetry« menu on page 232, described as

"Channel Mapping", it is very simple to use this menu

item to freely assign the transmitter's control channels

present on the receiver's inputs to any speciﬁ c

receiver outputs (servo connections) for the bound

receiver designated by the column labeled BD1.

RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND1

Rx Input Ch 1

Rx Input Ch 2

Rx Input Ch 3

Rx Input Ch 4

Rx Output Ch 1

Rx Output Ch 2

Rx Output Ch 3

Rx Output Ch 4

After selection of the desired output with the selection

keys of the left or right touch pad, the appropriate

value ﬁ eld will be framed. Brieﬂ y tap on the center

SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting

will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the

selection keys of the right touch pad to select the

desired input channel's respective transmitter output,

see page 218.

Note:

The number of lines available in the list (outputs)

corresponds to the maximum number of servos which

can be attached to the given receiver.

BUT CAUTION: If, for example, "2AIL" has been

speciﬁ ed in the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line of the

»Model type« menu then the transmitter will have

allocated control function 2 (ailerons) to control

channels 2 & 5 for the left and right ailerons. The

corresponding receiver inputs to be assigned in this

case would be channels 2 & 5, refer to the example

below.

Examples:

You would like to control each aileron of a large •

model with two or more servos.

Assign each of the appropriate outputs (servo

connections) to one and the same input (control

channel). In this case, depending on left or right

wing, as the respective input to one of the two

default aileron control channels (2 or 5).

You would like to control the rudder of a large •

model with two or more servos.

Assign each of the appropriate outputs (servo

connections) to one and the same input (control

channel). In this case, the default rudder channel

(4), see ﬁ gure bottom right.

Important notice:

The mc-16 HoTT transmitter's »Tx. output swap«

option permits the transmitter's 16 control functions

to be freely swapped in a similar manner or even

permits multiple outputs to be assigned to the same

control function. To keep controls manageable,

however, we strongly recommend using only one of

the options at a time.

Channel assignment on other receivers

As already mentioned, the "Rcv Ch map" menu

option can be used to freely distribute the mc-16

HoTT transmitter's 16 control channels across up

to four receivers, whereby the numbering of outputs

(servo connections) as well as the maximum number

of available lines (outputs) will correspond to the

maximum number of servo connections available on

the given receiver.

RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND2

Rx Input Ch 16

Rx Output Ch 1

Rx Output Ch 2

Rx Output Ch 3

Rx Output Ch 4

After selection of the desired output with the selection

keys of the left or right touch pad, the respective input

ﬁ

eld will be framed. Tap the center SET key of the

right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed

in inverse video. Now select the desired input

channel with the selection keys of the right touch pad.

For example, suitable to the above rudder example.

RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND2

Rx Input Ch 4

Rx Output Ch 1

Rx Output Ch 2

Rx Output Ch 3

Rx Output Ch 4

Note:

The number of lines available in the list (outputs)

corresponds to the maximum number of servos which

can be attached to the given receiver.

RF transmit

This menu line provides an option for manually

switching the transmitter's RF transmission on and

off to speciﬁ c models while the transmitter is in

operation. For example, to save power while a model

is being programmed. If this line option was set to

OFF, it will be canceled (i.e. set to ON) the next

time the transmitter is switched on.

If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or

right touch pad to move into the " RF transmit " line

80 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

then activate the option with a brief tap on the center

SET button of the right touch pad.

Stick mode

Module

bind

bind n/a

n/a

HoTT

SET SET SEL SET

Rcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/a

n/a

RF transmit on

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

The right selection keys can now be used to choose

between OFF and ON. Another tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad will conclude the entry.

Range test

The built-in range test reduces transmission power

to an extent that a functional test can be carried out

even within a distance of less than 100 m.

Perform a range test on the Graupner HoTT system

according to the following instructions. If necessary,

have someone assist you in carrying out the range test.

Preferably, the receiver already bound to the 1.

transmitter should be installed into the model in its

intended position.

Switch remote control on and wait for the green 2.

LED to light up on the receiver/s. Now servo

movements can be observed.

Place the model on a level surface (pavement, 3.

low-cut grass or bare ground) such that receiver

antennas are at least 15 cm above ground level.

It may be necessary to put something under the

model to raise it up enough for this.

Hold the transmitter at hip level and at some 4.

distance from one's body. Do not point the

antenna directly at the model but rather turn and/

or kink the antenna's end so that it is oriented

vertically during the test.

If necessary, use the 5.  selection keys of the left

or right touch pad to reach the "RF range test" line

in the menu then start range test mode with a tap

on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Module bind

bind n/a

n/a

HoTT

SET SET SEL SET

Rcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/a

n/a

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

BASIC SETTING,MODELL

When the range test has been initiated,

the transmitter's transmission power will be

signiﬁ cantly reduced and the LED just to the right

of the main switch on the transmitter, marked RF,

will begin to blink; this will also be accompanied by

acoustic tones. At the same time, the timer in the

transmitter's display will start counting down and

every 5 seconds a two-frequency tone will sound.

Five seconds prior to the end of the range test

a three-frequency tone will sound once every

second. After expiration of the range test's 99th

second the transmitter will again be switched to

full output power and the LED just to the right

of the main switch on the transmitter will again

illuminate constantly.

Move away from the model while manipulating 6.

the joysticks during this timespan. If you notice an

interruption anytime while still within a distance of

about 50 m, try to reproduce this malfunction.

If there is a motor in the model, it may be necessary 7.

to switch it on to further check noise immunity.

Continue moving away from the model until 8.

perfect control is no longer possible.

Wait at this distance for the remainder of the test 9.

period with the still-operationally-ready model

to expire. After the range test is ended it should

again respond correctly to all RC controls. If this

is not 100 % the case, do not use the system.

Contact your area's Graupner GmbH & Co. KG

service partner.

Perform the range test before each ﬂ ight and, in 10.

doing so, simulate all servo movements which

also take place during ﬂ ight. The range must

always be at 50 m on the ground in order to

assure safe model operation.

Caution:

Never start the range test on the transmitter

during normal operation of the model.

DSC output

If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left

or right touch pad to switch to the "DSC Output" line

then, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the

right touch pad, activate the value window:

SET SET SEL SET

Rcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/a

n/a

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Now you can use the right selection keys to choose

between four types of modulation "PPM10", "PPM16",

"PPM18" and "PPM24". Touch the center SET key of

the right touch pad again to complete the entry.

This choice primarily inﬂ uences the maximum

number of control channels which can be attached to

the DSC (direct servo control) socket, and thus also

available to a ﬂ ight simulator or teacher/pupil system.

By selecting "PPM10" this will be control channels

1 … 5, for "PPM16" channels 1 … 8, for "PPM18"

channels 1 … 9 and for "PPM24" channels 1 … 12.

Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

Motor cutoff (Thr. CutOff)

Note:

This menu line is suppressed if "None" or "None/inv"

is selected for the "Motor on C1" line.

Depending on the "idle forward or back" choice

made in the "Motor on C1" line of the »Model type«

menu, this motor "cut off" option can be coupled to

a switch for throttling down a speed controller or to

move a servo on the carburetor of a motor to the OFF

position. This option not only replaces the"Cut-off

trim" function known from other Graupner mc and

mx transmitters but also serves as an Emergency-

OFF function at the same time, which was not

possible with the"Cut-off trim" function.

This motor OFF position (Thr. CutOff) is speciﬁ ed in

the left column ﬁ eld over the column label SEL and

its value is to be established through trial and error.

A speed controller or throttle servo will only take on

this preset position when a certain servo position

or threshold is underrun and a switch is activated.

This is done by setting the desired servo position

(threshold value) into the middle column ﬁ eld, directly

over the column label STO, then selecting the

appropriate

ON/OFF switch function in the right column.

If the percentage value speciﬁ ed for the middle •

column is greater than the current servo position,

i.e. the current servo position lies below the

threshold, the switchover will occur as soon as the

switch is put into its ON position.

If the percentage value speciﬁ ed for the middle •

column is less than the current servo position, i.e.

the current servo position is above the threshold,

the speed controller will initially reduce motor

speed or close the carburetor's throttle servo

only to the extent dictated by the value in the

left column as soon as the servo's position once

underruns the threshold (max. +150 %) after the

switch is changed over to its ON position.

The speed controller or throttle servo will remain in

this cut-off position only until the selected switch is

again changed over followed by a one-time throttle

servo or speed controller movement beyond the

preset threshold with the throttle/brake joystick

control.

The factory setting for the left column is -100 % for

the throttle servo "cut-off" position and a threshold of

+150 % servo position setting in the middle column.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SEL SET STO SET

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

–––

Thr. CutOff +150%–100%

Programming procedure

To change the throttle servo's preset "cut-off"

position, tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse

video. Now use the selection keys of the left or right

touch pad to set a value at which the motor is reliably

"off". If a combustion motor is involved, be sure the

throttle servo does not perform mechanical runout,

e.g. -125 %.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SEL SET STO SET

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

–––

Thr. CutOff +150%–125%

The – upper – preset value in the middle column

ensures the motor can be stopped, throughout the

maximum possible positioning range of the servo or

speed controller, alone by the switch to be assigned

in the right column.

However, if you wish to set a lower threshold, by

which an underrun will cause the throttle servo or

speed controller with closed switch to switch into

the cut-off position, reduce the preset servo travel

from +150 % by placing the throttle servo or speed

controller into the desired position with the throttle/

brake joystick then touch the center SET key of the

right touch pad.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SEL SET STO SET

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

–––

Thr. CutOff +150%–125%

Finally, use the column at the right to specify a

switch with which you can cut off the motor directly

(emergency) or which will be activated by the threshold.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SEL SET STO SET

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

Thr. CutOff +100%

–125% 8

Notes:

Be sure the throttle servo does not run out •

mechanically when the cut-off function is

activated.

A threshold over +100 % is reached by temporarily •

increasing the travel for servo 1 in the »Servo

adjustment« menu to over 100 % then, after

storing the threshold, change servo travel back to

82 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

the original value.

Power-on warning

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

Motor Stop +100%

–125% 8

Thr. CutOff –––

When a switch, a control switch or a logical switch

is assigned in this line as described in the section

"Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control

switches" on page 56, the respective switch or control

position will be polled and an appropriate warning

will be blended into the basic display under some

conditions. In combination with logical switches,

almost any switch setting can be called up for

transmitter switch on.

#01 0:00h

Stoppuhr

Flugzeit

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

00:00h

!Warning!

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Auto trim

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

DSC Output PPM10

Thr. CutOff +100%

–125% 8

Power on warning L1

Auto trim –––

The "Auto trim" option makes it possible to trim a

model quickly and without complications, e.g. in the

context of a ﬁ rst-ﬂ ight or even after (major) repairs, etc.

Typically such test ﬂ ights are initially ﬂ own with joysticks

counter operated until the desired state of ﬂ ight is

achieved. This generally involves working the trim

controls during the ﬂ ight to "unburden" the joysticks.

This is exactly what the "Auto trim" function is for.

After the desired ﬂ ight attitude has been achieved

via control functions 2 … 4 (aileron, elevator and

rudder), the switch assigned to "Auto trim" – ideally

one of the standard-equipment momentary switches

in the switch panels – is to be activated ONCE. At the

instant the switch is activated, the joystick offsets from

their neutral positions will be determined and adopted

as trim values. However, this does not take place

instantaneously but rather within about 1 second.

During this period after the switch has been activated,

the joysticks should be returned to their normal

positions.

Notes:

Due to the complex interaction inherent to multi-•

ﬂ ap models, the Auto trim function for ailerons

is deactivated if "2AIL 2FL" and "2AIL 4FL" or

"4AIL 2FL" and "4AIL 4FL" is selected in the

"Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line of the »Model type«

menu.

Be sure that during the switch assignment, the •

joysticks for aileron, elevator and rudder are in

their neutral positions as otherwise their offsets

from neutral will be adopted right away in trim

memory as the trim value.

Since EVERY activation of the Auto trim switch •

has a cumulative effect, after concluding an "auto

trim" ﬂ ight, the assigned auto trim switch should

be deactivated for reasons of safety. Otherwise

there is a residual danger that the "Auto trim"

function could be activated accidentally.

ext. PPM signal

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

Thr. CutOff +100%–125% 8

Power on warning L1

Auto trim –––

ext. PPM signal normal

SEL

Some RF modules which can be connected to the

external (page 25) or internal (page 26) connectors

for other RF modules require an inverted input signal.

Be sure to follow the respective module's installation

instructions for this.

The choice of "inverted" instead of the default preset

"normal" allows for appropriate adaptation of the

provided PPM signal.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to

"normal".

For your notes

Auto timer reset

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

Power on warning L1

Auto trim –––

ext. PPM signal normal

SEL

Auto timer reset yes

The "yes/no" setting made in this line determines

whether or not all of the transmitter's timers (except

for "Model time" and "Transmitter operating time") are

automatically reset to their given starting values when

the transmitter is switched on.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right

touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to "yes".

84 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

Before programming speciﬁ c parameters, there are

some basic settings to be made which effect the

currently active model memory.

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to

select the »Basic settings, model« menu …

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup model Helicopter type

… then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS,MODEL

Info

n/a



Module bind

HoTT

Change to the next screen page with a brief tap on

the SET key of the right touch pad. This will open a

screen of characters for entry of the model's name.

A maximum of 13 characters can be used to specify

a model name.

!"#$%&’()

Model name Starle

@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_

?+,–./0123456789:;

¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ

`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~

Now the desired characters can be selected with the

selection keys of the left touch pad. Move to the next

position to select the next character with a tap on

the  of the right touch pad or its center SET key. A

simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right

touch pad (CLEAR) will place a space character at

the current position.

Positioning to any character position within the entry

ﬁ eld can be done with the  keys of the right touch

pad.

A return to the previous menu screen is accomplished

with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch

pad.

A model name entered in this manner will appear in

the base screen of the »Model select« menu and in

the sub-menus of the »Copy / Erase« menu item.

Info

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS,MODEL

Info

n/a



Module bind

HoTT

Starlet

Every model can be given a supplementary note of

up to 12 characters (maximum) by following the same

procedure as already described for creating a "Model

name". This info note will appear as a supplement in

the »Model select« menu and in the sub-menus of

the »Copy / Erase« menu item.

Stick mode

“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)

pitch axis

tail rotor

pitch axis

tail rotor

throttle

roll

throttle

tail rotor

throttle throttle

pitch axis

roll

pitch axis

roll

Motor/Pitch

throttle

tail rotor

throttle

roll

pitch axis

tail rotor

Basically there are four different ways to assign the

four helicopter control functions, roll, nick, tail rotor

and throttle/pitch to the two joysticks. Just which of

these is used depends on the preferences of the

individual model pilot.

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to select the "Stick mode" line. The option ﬁ eld

will be framed.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

n/a

Module bind

HoTT

SEL

Starlet

1234g/111111

Tap on the SET key. The currently displayed stick

mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the

selection keys of the right touch pad to select from

among options 1 through 4.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to

stick mode "1".

Base setup model

Model-speciﬁ c base settings for helicopter models

Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

Another tap on the SET key will again deactivate

option selection so a change to another line can be

affected.

Module

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

n/a

Module bind

HoTT

Starlet

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

The mc-16 transmitter has a HoTT RF module as

standard equipment. In addition to the built-in module,

there is a connector for an external RF module

behind one of the two front cover ﬂ aps (see page 25)

and a switchover to an external module connected

there can be affected per software. To do this, use the

selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move

the marker frame left to the "Module" selection ﬁ eld

above the "SEL" column label.

HoTT system

Graupner HoTT receivers must be "instructed"

to communicate exclusively with a certain model

(memory) in a Graupner HoTT transmitter. This

procedure is known as "binding" and must only be

done once for every new receiver/model-memory-

location combination (and can be repeated anytime).

Important notices:

During the binding procedure be sure the •

transmitter's antenna is always far enough

away from the receiver's antenna. To be on the

safe side, keep them at least one meter apart.

Otherwise there is a risk of a faulty connection

to the return channel and malfunctions will

result.

When binding additional receivers, note that any •

other –switched on– receivers already bound

to the transmitter will fall into Fail-safe mode

during the transmitter-side "binding" period.

"Binding" multiple receivers per model

Multiple receivers per model can be bound if desired,

whereby respective mc-16 HoTT programs offer the

potential for managing up to four receivers directly

and for dividing up the transmitter's 16 control

channels (max) in any arrangement among these

receivers under menu control. Refer to additional

details further down in this section. First bind the

receivers individually as described below.

However, in subsequent operation only one of

these receivers will establish a telemetry bond to

the transmitter; the one which was activated in

the "TELEMETRY RCV" line of the »Telemetry«

menu, for example:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1

Any telemetry sensors which may be built into the

model should therefore be connected to this receiver

because the transmitter only receives and evaluates

data from the return channel of the receiver activated on

this line. The second, and all other receivers, operate in

parallel but are fully independent in slave mode.

"Binding" transmitter and receiver

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to move into the "Module" line. The marker frame

will be positioned by default to the column for the next

free binding channel. In the example shown in the

ﬁ gure below, the marker frame is positioned above the

column label "BD2" because the binding channel in the

column labeled "BD1" is already in use by default for

the receiver which was delivered with the set.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

n/a

Module bind

HoTT

Starlet

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

If not already off, now switch the receiver on. The red

LED on the receiver will blink.

Press and hold the SET button on the receiver while

the LED continues to blink red for about 3 seconds

then, after about another 3 seconds, begins to blink

red/green. The SET button on the receiver can now

be released. As long as this LED blinks red/green, the

receiver is in bind mode.

Now, within this 3 second period, start the so-called

"receiver binding" process for the receiver to the

currently active model memory with a brief tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad. At this time,

the screen's display will blend in a message window

for the duration of the "binding" process.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

n/a

Module bind

HoTT

Starlet

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

FINDING...

If the receiver's LED, again blinking red, changes

within about 10 seconds to continuous illumination

in green, the binding process has been successfully

86 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

completed. Your model-memory to receiver

combination is now operationally ready. At this time the

screen will now display " bind " (bound) instead of "n/a"

(not attached).

Model name

Stick mode 1

bind

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

n/a

Module bind

HoTT

Starlet

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

On the other hand, should the LED on the receiver

blink red for longer than about 10 seconds, the

binding process has failed. In this case the screen

will continue to show the status as "n/a". If this should

happen, try changing the position of antennas then

repeat the entire procedure.

Binding other receivers

The binding channel you have chosen is already

bound (as indicated by the "bind" status). with

another binding channel. If, after initiating the RF bind

process, the message shown below appears in the

screen instead of displaying "BINDING"

Model name

Stick mode 1

geb.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

n/a

Module geb.

HoTT

Starlet

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

off

is turned

Drop down two lines in the screen and switch off the

RF module, as described several columns further

below in the section "RF module". Afterward, return

again to the "Module" line and restart the binding

process as described on the previous page.

Alternatively you can brieﬂ y switch off the transmitter

then, after switching it back on again, respond to the

message window that appears …

OFFON

Please select

RF on/off?

… with "OFF" …

Please select

RF on/off?

OFF

… then conﬁ rm the selection with a brief tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad. From the

base screen jump again into the "Module" line of

the »Basic settings, model« menu and restart the

binding process.

Dissolving a bond

Proceed as described above to initiate the binding

process but WITHOUT ﬁ rst putting a receiver in

binding readiness.

EXT. PPM

Important notice:

With the activation of the value ﬁ eld in the context

of the following described changeover, any

existing bonds to HoTT receivers which may be

effective for the currently active model memory

will be lost.

Activate the ﬁ rst value ﬁ eld in the "Module" line with a

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then

use the selection keys to choose "EXT. PPM" instead

of "HoTT". In parallel with the selection of "EXT.

PPM", the other four value ﬁ elds will be replaced by

the type of modulation pre-selected in the line »DSC

Output«, see page 88.

Model name

Stick mode 1

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Module

Starlet

1234g/111111

SEL

PPM10

EXT. PPM

This change also suppresses the lines for the options

(described below): »HoTT«, »Rcv Ch Map«, »RF

module« and »RF range test« and, in the basic

display, "PPM" will be displayed instead of "HoTT".

#02 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

00:00h

Starlet

PPM

H-J Sandbrunner

Receiver channel mapping

Stick Mode

Module

bind

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

bind

Info

n/a

HoTT

SET SET SET SET

2345g/090911

Rcv Ch Mapgang R16 R08 n/a

n/a

As mentioned in the introduction to the "Binding

receivers" section, this menu item of the mc-16 HoTT

offers both the opportunity to freely divide up the

transmitter's control channels within a receiver as well

Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

as the opportunity to distribute the transmitter's 16

control channels across as many as four receivers.

This redistribution is subsequently referred to as

"mapping" or "channel mapping" (channel correlation).

Select the receiver to be "mapped" with the selection

keys of the left or right touch pad then tap brieﬂ y on

the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Channel mapping within a receiver

Analogous to the channel correlation function in

the »Telemetry« menu on page 232, described as

"Channel Mapping", it is very simple to use this menu

item to freely assign the transmitter's control channels

present on the receiver's inputs to any speciﬁ c

receiver outputs (servo connections) for the bound

receiver designated by the column labeled BD1.

RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND1

Rx Input Ch 1

Rx Input Ch 2

Rx Input Ch 3

Rx Input Ch 4

Rx Output Ch 1

Rx Output Ch 2

Rx Output Ch 3

Rx Output Ch 4

After selection of the desired output with the selection

keys of the left or right touch pad, the respective

input ﬁ

eld will be framed. Brieﬂ y tap the center SET

key of the right touch pad: The current setting will be

displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection

keys of the right touch pad to select the desired input

channel's respective transmitter output, see page 218.

Note:

The number of lines available in the list (outputs)

corresponds to the maximum number of servos which

can be attached to the given receiver.

BUT CAUTION: If you wish to operate two servos

with one control function, for example such as

transmitter control function 2 (roll) which is divided

up into control channels 1 & 2 for left and right roll

servos for the "3Sv(2Roll)" option in the »Heli type«

menu; then "map" the corresponding transmitter

outputs, in this case for channels 1 & 2 (= inputs to

the receiver) accordingly.

Important notice:

The mc-16 HoTT transmitter's »Tx. output swap«

option permits the transmitter's 16 control functions

to be freely swapped in a similar manner or even

permits multiple outputs to be assigned to the same

control function. To keep controls manageable,

however, we strongly recommend using only one of

the options at a time.

Channel assignment on other receivers

As already mentioned, the "Rcv Ch map" menu

option can be used to freely distribute the mc-16

HoTT transmitter's 16 control channels across up

to four receivers, whereby the numbering of outputs

(servo connections) as well as the maximum number

of available lines (outputs) will correspond to the

maximum number of servo connections available on

the given receiver.

RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND2

Rx Input Ch 16

Rx Output Ch 1

Rx Output Ch 2

Rx Output Ch 3

Rx Output Ch 4

After selection of the desired output with the selection

keys of the left or right touch pad, the respective input

ﬁ

eld will be framed. Tap the center SET key of the

right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed

in inverse video. Now select the desired input

channel with the selection keys of the right touch pad.

For example, appropriate for the above example with

roll servos:

RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND2

Rx Input Ch 1

Rx Input Ch 2

Rx Input Ch 16

Rx Output Ch 1

Rx Output Ch 2

Rx Output Ch 3

Rx Output Ch 4

Note:

The number of lines available in the list (outputs)

corresponds to the maximum number of servos which

can be attached to the given receiver.

RF transmit

This menu line provides an option for manually

switching the transmitter's RF transmission on and

off to speciﬁ c models while the transmitter is in

operation. For example, to save power while a model

is being programmed. If this line option was set to

OFF, it will be canceled (i.e. set to ON) the next

time the transmitter is switched on.

If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or

right touch pad to switch to the "RF module" line then,

with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad, activate the value window:

Stick mode

Module

bind

bind n/a

n/a

HoTT

SET SET SEL SET

Rcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/a

n/a

RF transmit on

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

The right selection keys can now be used to choose

between OFF and ON. Another tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad will conclude the entry.

88 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

of the main switch on the transmitter, marked RF,

will begin to blink; this will also be accompanied by

acoustic tones. At the same time, the timer in the

transmitter's display will start counting down and

every 5 seconds a two-frequency tone will sound.

Five seconds prior to the end of the range test

a three-frequency tone will sound once every

second. After expiration of the range test's 99th

second the transmitter will again be switched to

full output power and the LED just to the right

of the main switch on the transmitter will again

illuminate constantly.

Move away from the model while manipulating 6.

the joysticks during this timespan. If you notice an

interruption anytime while still within a distance of

about 50 m, try to reproduce this malfunction.

If there is a motor in the model, it may be 7.

necessary to switch it on to further check noise

immunity.

Continue moving away from the model until 8.

perfect control is no longer possible.

Wait at this distance for the remainder of the test 9.

period with the still-operationally-ready model

to expire. After the range test is ended it should

again respond correctly to all RC controls. If this

is not 100 % the case, do not use the system.

Contact your area's Graupner GmbH & Co. KG

service partner.

Perform the range test before each ﬂ ight and, in 10.

doing so, simulate all servo movements which

also take place during ﬂ ight. The range must

always be at 50 m on the ground in order to

assure safe model operation.

Caution:

Never start the range test on the transmitter

during normal operation of the model.

DSC output

If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left

or right touch pad to switch to the "DSC Output" line

then, with a tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad, activate the value window:

SET SET SEL SET

Rcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/a

n/a

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Now you can use the right selection keys to choose

between four types of modulation "PPM10", "PPM16",

"PPM18" and "PPM24". Touch the center SET key of

the right touch pad again to complete the entry.

This choice primarily inﬂ uences the maximum

number of control channels which can be attached to

the DSC (direct servo control) socket, and thus also

available to a ﬂ ight simulator or teacher/pupil system.

By selecting "PPM10" this will be control channels

1 … 5, for "PPM16" channels 1 … 8, for "PPM18"

channels 1 … 9 and for "PPM24" channels 1 … 12.

Autorotation

Autorotation is that state of descending ﬂ ight in

which the pitch of main rotor blades are set such that

the rotor's speed matches the natural forces of air

ﬂ owing through, like a windmill. This built-up energy

can be used for "recovery" lift to brake a descent by

appropriate blade pitch adjustment.

Autorotation is a means by which real and model

helicopters are able to land safely in emergency

situations, e.g. in the event of a motor failure. However,

the prerequisite for this is a well-trained pilot familiar

with the helicopter's characteristics. Quick reaction and

good perceptiveness are necessary because the rotor's

inertia can only be used once to generate recovery lift.

Range test

The built-in range test reduces transmission power

to an extent that a functional test can be carried out

even within a distance of less than 100 m.

Perform a range test on the Graupner HoTT system

according to the following instructions. If necessary,

have someone assist you in carrying out the range test.

Preferably, the receiver already bound to the 1.

transmitter should be installed into the model in its

intended position.

Switch remote control on and wait for the green 2.

LED to light up on the receiver/s. Now servo

movements can be observed.

Place the model on a level surface (pavement, 3.

low-cut grass or bare ground) such that receiver

antennas are at least 15 cm above ground level.

It may be necessary to put something under the

model to raise it up enough for this.

Hold the transmitter at hip level and at some 4.

distance from one's body. Do not point the

antenna directly at the model but rather turn and/

or kink the antenna's end so that it is oriented

vertically during the test.

If necessary, use the 5.  selection keys of the left

or right touch pad to reach the "RF range test" line

in the menu then start range test mode with a tap

on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Module bind

bind n/a

n/a

HoTT

SET SET SEL SET

Rcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/a

n/a

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

BASIC SETTING,MODELL

When the range test has been initiated,

the transmitter's transmission power will be

signiﬁ cantly reduced and the LED just to the right

Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

When this technique is evaluated during

competitions, the motor must be switched off for

autorotation. On the other hand, for training mode

it is advantageous to keep the motor at idle for

autorotation.

The Autorotation switch causes a switchover to the

autorotation ﬂ ight phase in which control of "throttle"

and "pitch" are separate and all mixers which have

an effect on the throttle servo are switched off.

Corresponding parameter settings are made in the

»Helicopter mixer« (see text beginning page 176);

refer also to the "Principle of the Auto. C1 Pos." topic

which follows.

The "Autorotation" name is permanently assigned to

phase 1 and it is included in the base screen of all

ﬂ ight phase dependent menus. This name can NOT be

changed. It is only possible to assign a switch to this

option at the right of this display, as described on page

56. If a switch is assigned, it will have absolute

priority over all other ﬂ ight-phase switches.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

–––

Autorotation

More about ﬂ ight-phase programming can be found

in the text beginning on page 176 in the»Helicopter

mixer« section.

Autorotation C1 position

The autorotation ﬂ ight-phase can alternatively be

activated by a threshold point for the C1 throttle/pitch

joystick. To do this, use the  selection keys of the left

or right touch pad to move into the "Autorot. C1-Pos."

line.

As soon as this display line has been selected, its

value ﬁ eld, located above the column label STO will

be framed.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

STO SET

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

–––

Autorotation

Autorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––

Move the C1 joystick into the desired threshold

switchover position then tap the center SET key of the

right touch pad. The current value will be displayed,

e.g.:

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

STO SET

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

–––

Autorotation

Autorot. C1-Pos. -55% –––

After this has been done, use the selection keys to

move into the column above the switch symbol then

assign a switch to this ﬁ eld, as described on page 56

in section "Switches, controls and control switches".

Preferably one of the two self-restoring switches

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

STO SET

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

–––

Autorotation

Autorot. C1-Pos. –55% 4I

Once this activation switch is closed, the ﬁ rst

occurrence of a threshold underrun will cause the

program to switch over to "Autorotation" and then

remain independent of C1 position in this ﬂ ight phase

until the activating switch, in this example switch 4, is

again "OFF".

"Autorot. C1-Pos." has precedence over all other

ﬂ ight-phase switches.

Corresponding parameter settings for …

pitch servos•

throttle servo•

tail rotor servo•

swashplate rotation, if available•

gyro setting•

… are made in the »Helicopter mixer« menu,

page 176.

Cut-off

Within the framework of autorotation settings for

the mc-16 HoTT transmitter's helicopter program,

there are parameters for an emergency "Thr. CutOff"

of the throttle servo or motor actuator, refer to the

programming proposal on page 314. However, this

option is not available if an idle position is speciﬁ ed

in the "Throttle position AR" line of the »Helicopter

mixer« menu instead of an (emergency) OFF

position; for example, to avoid restarting the motor

after every landing during autorotation practice.

This option not only replaces the"Cut-off trim" function

known from other Graupner mc and mx transmitters

but also serves as an Emergency-OFF function at the

same time, which was not possible with the"Cut-off

trim" function.

Depending on the "forw./rear" choice made for the

"Pitch min" line of the »Helicopter type« menu, this

"Thr. CutOff" option can be coupled to a switch for

throttling down a speed controller or a carburetor

servo to the motor OFF (or idle) position.

This cut-off (or idle) position is speciﬁ ed in the left

column's ﬁ eld, above the SEL column label, and its

value is to be established through trial and error.

90 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

A speed controller or throttle servo will only take on

this preset position when a certain servo position

or threshold is underrun and a switch is activated.

This is done by setting the desired servo position

(threshold value) into the middle column ﬁ eld,

directly over the column label STO, then selecting

the appropriate ON/OFF switch function in the right

column.

If the percentage value speciﬁ ed for the middle •

column is greater than the current servo position,

i.e. the current servo position lies below the

threshold, the switchover will occur as soon as the

switch is put into its ON position.

If the percentage value speciﬁ ed for the middle •

column is less than the current servo position, i.e.

the current servo position is above the threshold,

the speed controller will initially reduce motor

speed or close the carburetor's throttle servo

only to the extent dictated by the value in the

left column as soon as the servo's position once

underruns the threshold (max. +150 %) after the

switch is changed over to its ON position.

The speed controller or throttle servo will remain in

this cut-off position only until the selected switch is

again changed over followed by a one-time throttle

servo or speed controller movement beyond the

preset threshold with the throttle/brake joystick

control.

The factory setting for the left column is -100 % for

the throttle servo "cut-off" position and a threshold of

+150 % servo position setting in the middle column.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

DSC Output PPM10

–––

Autorotation

Autorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––

SEL STO

–––

Thr. CutOff +150%–100%

Programming procedure

To change the throttle servo's preset "cut-off" position,

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The

current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now

use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to

set a value at which the motor is reliably "off" without

a startup of the throttle servo. For example -125 %:

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

DSC Output PPM10

–––

Autorotation

Autorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––

SEL STO

–––

Thr. CutOff +150%–125%

The – upper – preset value in the middle column

ensures the motor can be stopped, throughout the

maximum possible positioning range of the servo or

speed controller, alone by the switch to be assigned

in the right column.

However, if a lower threshold is preferred, at which

an underrun will cause the throttle servo or speed

controller with closed switch to enter the throttle cut-

off position for a closed switch condition – by default

the right-side proportional rotary slider – put the

throttle/pitch joystick into the desired position then tap

on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

DSC Output PPM10

–––

Autorotation

Autorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––

SEL STO

–––

Thr. CutOff +150%–125%

Finally, use the column at the right to specify a

switch with which you can cut off the motor directly

(emergency) or which will be activated by the

threshold.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

DSC Output PPM10

–––

Autorotation

Autorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––

SEL STO

Thr. CutOff +100%

–125% 8

Notes:

Be sure the throttle servo does not run out •

mechanically when the cut-off function is

activated.

A threshold over +100 % is reached by •

temporarily increasing the travel for servo 1 in the

»Servo adjustment« menu to over 100 % then,

after storing the threshold, change servo travel

back to the original value.

Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

Marking

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

–––

Autorotation

Autorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––

SEL STO

Thr. CutOff +100%

–125% 8

Marker key –––

When activated, the "Marker key" will place a marker

in the "Pitch" curve, as well as in the "Channel 1 

Throttle" and "Channel 1  Tail rotor" mixer curves

of the »Helicopter mixer« menu, to mark the current

pitch joystick position of the pitch joystick and it takes

on the form of a vertical dashed line. This marker

is helpful for setting curve points at the right places

during ﬂ ight testing, e.g. the hovering point

One of the two standard momentary contact switches

mounted into the switch panels should be the

preferred choice of switch assignment.

Example:

The hovering point is to be placed at the midpoint of

the throttle/pitch joystick for the «Hover» ﬂ ight phase

but it is found to be still located above control middle

during ﬂ ight testing. Press the switch in this position

and, after the landing, examine, for example, the

Pitch curve in the »Helicopter mixer« menu, page

176.

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –30%

–30%

–

100

O U T P U T

The continuous vertical line shows the joystick's

current position. Its position in this example lies at

-30 % (= input) of control travel and, because of its

(still) linear control curve, produces an output signal

which is also -30 % (= output).

On the other hand, the dashed vertical line represents

the joystick position at which the marker switch was

pushed.

Move the joystick to this marker line to read the input

and output values for the found hovering point. The

marker points of the other two mixer curves are read

similarly. Now these three curves can be alternately

modiﬁ ed as necessary in order to correct the hovering

point. Curve point "1" in this simple example can be

raised at the curve's midpoint to the output value that

was determined to be the hovering point in the Pitch

graph.

Power-on warning

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

–––

Autorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––

SEL STO

Thr. CutOff +100%

–125% 8

Marker key –––

Power on warning

When a switch, a control switch or a logical switch is

assigned in this line, as described on page 56 in the

section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and

control switches", the respective switch or control

position will be polled when the transmitter is switched

on and an appropriate warning will be blended into the

basic display under some conditions. In combination

with logical switches, almost any switch setting can be

called up for transmitter switch on.

#02 0:00h

Stoppuhr

Flugzeit

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

00:00h

!Warning!

Starlet

H-J Sandbrunner

Auto trim

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

–––

SEL STO

Thr. CutOff +100%

–125% 8

Marker key

–––

Power on warning

Auto trim

The "Auto trim" option makes it possible to trim a

model quickly and without complications, e.g. in the

context of a ﬁ rst-ﬂ ight or even after (major) repairs, etc.

Typically such test ﬂ ights are initially ﬂ own with

joysticks counter operated until the desired state of

ﬂ ight is achieved. This generally involves working

the trim controls during the ﬂ ight to "unburden" the

joysticks.

This is exactly what the "Auto trim" function is for.

After the desired ﬂ ight attitude has been achieved via

control functions 2 … 4 (aileron, elevator and rudder),

the switch assigned to "Auto trim" – ideally one of

the standard-equipment momentary switches in the

switch panels – is to be activated ONCE. At the instant

the switch is activated, the joystick offsets from their

neutral positions will be determined and adopted

as trim values. However, this does not take place

instantaneously but rather within about 1 second.

During this period after the switch has been activated,

the joysticks should be returned to their normal

positions.

92 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

Notes:

Be sure that during the switch assignment, the •

joysticks for aileron, elevator and rudder are in

their neutral positions as otherwise their offsets

from neutral will be adopted right away in trim

memory as the trim value.

Since EVERY activation of the Auto trim switch •

has a cumulative effect, after concluding an "auto

trim" ﬂ ight, the assigned auto trim switch should

be deactivated for reasons of safety. Otherwise

there is a residual danger that the "Auto trim"

function could be activated accidentally.

ext. PPM signal

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

Power on warning –––

Auto trim –––

ext. PPM signal normal

SEL

Marker key –––

Some RF modules which can be connected to the

external (page 25) or internal (page 26) connectors

for other RF modules require an inverted input signal.

Be sure to follow the respective module's installation

instructions for this.

The choice of "inverted" instead of the default preset

"normal" allows for appropriate adaptation of the

provided PPM signal.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to

"normal".

Auto timer reset

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

Power on warning –––

Auto trim –––

ext. PPM signal normal

SEL

Auto timer reset yes

The "yes/no" setting made in this line determines

whether or not all of the transmitter's timers (except

for "Model time" and "Transmitter operating time")

are automatically reset to their given starting values

when the transmitter is switched on.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to

"yes".

For your notes

94 Detail program description - Model type | Winged models

This "Model type" menu is used to establish the type

of model to be programmed. This also activates

all characteristic mixers, coupling functions, etc.

in preparation for subsequent programming of the

speciﬁ ed model type.

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup modelModel type

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:

Motor at C1

After selecting the "Motor at C1" line with the 

selection keys of the left and right touch pad, the

corresponding entry ﬁ eld will be framed.

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L L T Y PE

Brake Offset Input 1+100%

SEL

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:

The current setting will be displayed in inverse video.

Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to

select from among the following four options:

"none" For operation of a model without a

propulsion.

The warning "Throttle too high",

see page 30, is deactivated and

the "Brake settings" sub-menu of

the »Wing mixers« (beginning

page 172) is available without any

restrictions.

"Thr. min. rear": The idle position for the throttle/

brake ﬂ aps joystick (C1) is to the

rear, i.e. toward the pilot.

The warning "Throttle too high", see

page 30, as well as the "Thr. CutOff"

option in the »Basic settings,

model« menu, see page 81, are

activated and the "Brake settings"

sub-menu of the »Wing mixers«

menu, beginning page 172, will be

available if the entry in the "Motor"

column of the »Phase settings«

menu, page 142, for the currently

active ﬂ ight phase is "none".

"Thr. min. fwd.": The idle position for the throttle/

brake ﬂ aps control stick (C1) is at

the front, i.e. away from the pilot.

The warning "Throttle too high", see

page 30, as well as the "Thr. CutOff"

option in the »Basic settings,

model« menu, see page 90, are

activated and the "Brake settings"

sub-menu of the »Wing mixers«

menu, beginning page 172, will be

available if the entry in the "Motor"

column of the »Phase settings«

menu, page 142, for the currently

active ﬂ ight phase is "none".

Notes:

Be sure to pay attention during the •

programming procedures that motors do not

start up unintentionally. Disconnect the fuel

supply or battery terminals to motors before

programming.

C1 trimming will operate according to the choice •

made between "normal" or only "back" or "fwd.",

that is, either over the control's entire travel path

or only in the respective idle direction.

Tail type

After selecting the »Tail type« line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the

corresponding entry ﬁ eld will be framed.

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L L T Y PE

Brake Offset Input 1+100%

SEL

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:

The current setting will be displayed in inverse video.

Now select the type appropriate for the model with

the selection keys of the right touch pad.

"normal": Elevators and rudder are each

operated by a single servo.

"V-tail": Elevator and rudder control is

affected by way of two separate,

articulated, V-shaped rudders. The

coupling function for rudder and

elevator control will be automatically

taken over by the program. The

relationship of rudder-to-elevator

proportion is set in the »Dual Rate /

Expo« menu, page 120, and servo

travel in the »Servo adjustment«

menu, page 102.

If, beyond this, there is a desire to

also make differentiation for rudder

throw then the V-tail should be

alternatively controlled via the »Dual

mixer« menu, page 206. In this case

however, the tail type entry speciﬁ ed

here must be "normal".

"ELEVON": Aileron and elevator control is

operated by one or two servos

Model type

Establishing winged aircraft model type

Detail program description - Model type | Winged models

per wing half. However, elevator

trimming is also affected by

selecting the "2AIL 2FL" option – see

below – but only on servos 2 & 3.

"2ELSv3+8": This option is intended for models

with two elevator servos. The servo

connected to output 8 will operate

in parallel with servo 3 to actuate

elevators. Elevator trim affects both

servos.

Note on "2ELSv3+8":

One control, which assigns input 8 by

way of the »Control adjust« menu, is

then disconnected from servo "8" by

software for reasons of safety i.e. it is

made ineffective.

Aileron/camber ﬂ aps

After selecting the »Aileron/camber ﬂ aps« line with

the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad,

the corresponding entry ﬁ eld will be framed.

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L L T Y PE

Brake Offset Input 1+100%

SEL

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:

The current setting will be displayed in inverse video.

Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to

select the number of wing servos to be programmed

for the model.

Available Control channel used

1AIL 2

1AIL 1FL 2 | 6

In the majority of cases the default setting for

"input 1" will remain as it is and the brake will be

operated by way of the non-neutralizing C1 joystick.

However, use of input 7, 8 or 9 makes it possible to

operate the brake in an alternative manner, even by

way of a supplementary control, if the C1 stick is to

be used for something else.

The neutral point (offset) can be set to any desired

position. This is done by placing the control for input 1,

7, 8 or 9 into the position at which the landing ﬂ aps are

to be retracted, i.e. closed, then setting this "Offset"

point in the column above the column label STO.

The selection of this offset point in this context

determines not only the control position at which the

brake system is to be retracted, i.e. closed, but also

also the activation direction of the C1 joystick for

extending the brake system.

Brake offset values with a "+" preﬁ x will cause •

ﬂ aps affected by the "Brake settings" option of

the »Wing mixers« menu to be extended when

the C1 joystick is moved from front to rear, in the

direction of the pilot.

Brake offset values with a "-" preﬁ x will cause •

ﬂ aps affected by the "Brake settings" option of

the »Wing mixers« menu to be extended when

the C1 joystick is moved from rear to front, in the

direction away from the pilot.

If the offset point is not set at the far end of control

element travel, the remainder of travel to the end

point will be "free travel", i.e. this "free travel" will

no longer inﬂ uence any mixer available for "Brake

settings" in the »Wing mixers« menu. This idle path

ensures that all brake settings remain at "neutral",

even with minor deviations from the limit of the brake

ﬂ ap control. At the same time, the effective control

path is automatically spread to 100 %.

2AIL 2 & 5

2AIL 1FL 2 & 5 | 6

2AIL 2FL 2 & 5 | 6 & 7

2AIL 4FL 2 & 5 | 6 & 7 / 9 & 10

4QR 2WK 2 & 5 / 11 & 12 | 6 & 7

4AIL 4FL 2 & 5 / 11 & 12 | 6 & 7 / 9 & 10

Depending on the option selected here, the given

mixers needed and their settings will be activated in

the »Wing mixers« menu, beginning page 172.

Tips:

Settings for all wing ﬂ ap pairs (Al and Al2, FL and •

FL2) can be trimmed on a ﬂ ight-phase basis in

both the »Phase trim« menu as well as in the

Wing mixers« menu, page 172.

The functionality of all wing ﬂ ap pairs (Al and Al2, •

FL and FL2) can also be operated by way of the

"Throttle/brake-ﬂ ap joystick" if this stick has not

been assigned to other use, e.g. for certain brake

settings, see »Wing mixers« menu, page 172.

To conﬁ gure this it is only necessary to assign

"Control 1" to input 6 in the »Control adjust«

menu, page 108. (If it is preferable to operate ﬂ aps

with switches, one of the transmitter's two or three

position switches are good for this purpose.)

Brake Offset

This function not only has potential for gliders and

electric models but also for models with combustion

motors and landing ﬂ aps.

The mixers described in the »Brake settings« line of

the »Wing mixers« menu can be operated by the C1

joystick ("input 1") or another transmitter operating

element which has been assigned to input 7, 8 or 9 in

the »Control adjust« menu. In this latter case, retain

the "GL" default setting for the "Type" column in the

»Control adjust« menu so the selected control can

operate independent of ﬂ ight phase.

96 Detail program description - Model type | Winged models

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L L T Y PE

Brake Offset Input 1+90%

SEL

Tip:

Preferably, the servo intended for operating any

airbrake ﬂ aps that may be on the model should be

connected to the receiver output operated by the

brake input channel, e.g. connect airbrake servo onto

(free) receiver output 8 if input 8 has been chosen

for the "brake", etc. A second airbrake servo is most

conveniently operated by way of a free mixer.

For your notes

98 Detail program description - Helicopter type

Helicopter type

Establishing helicopter model type

This "Model type" menu is used to establish the type

of model to be programmed. This also activates

all characteristic mixers, coupling functions, etc.

in preparation for subsequent programming of the

speciﬁ ed model type.

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup modelHelicopter type

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:

Swashplate type

Control of the swashplate will require an appropriate

program variant which corresponds to the number of

servos operating pitch control.

In the meantime this selection is also inﬂ uenced

by the type of control exercised on swashplate

servos. Since Flybar systems generally do not

require transmitter-side swashplate mixers, when

such a system is in use, "1 Servo" is generally to be

selected as the swashplate type, regardless of the

actual number of swashplate servos present. In this

context, be sure the Flybar system complies with

the included adjustment instructions as otherwise

there is a risk the helicopter will not ﬂ y.

After selecting the »Swashplate type« line with the

 selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the

entry ﬁ eld will be framed.

Linearis. swashpl.

Swashplate type

1 Servo

Rotor direction right

HELTYPE

Pitch min. rear

SEL

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.

The current setting for number of pitch servos will be

displayed in inverse video. Now choose the variant

needed with the selection keys of the right touch pad.

"1 Servo": A Flybar system is in use or the

swashplate is tipped with one servo

each for roll and pitch-axis. Pitch

control will be affected by one

separate servo.

(Since helicopter models, like Flybar

systems, which are operated with only

1 pitch servo, neither need any of the

three swashplate servos for pitch,

pitch-axis and roll NOR the transmitter's

mixer functions for pitch, pitch-axis and

roll, the »Swashplate mixer« menu

option will be suppressed in the Multi-

function menu.)

"2 Servo": Two roll servos will displace the

swashplate axially to affect pitch

control; nick control will be decoupled

by a mechanical compensation rocker.

"3Sv(2Roll)": Symmetric three-point control of

the swashplate with three, radially

offset articulation points, each offset

by 120 °, connected to one pitch-

axis servo (front or rear) and two

roll servos (left and right). All three

servos push the swashplate axially to

affect pitch control.

"3Sv (140°)": Asymmetrical three-point control of

the swashplate is affected at three

articulation points connected to one

nick servo (rear) and two roll servos

(front left and right). All three servos

push the swashplate axially to affect

pitch control.

"3Sv (2Nick)": Symmetric three-point control as

described above but radially offset

by 90°, one lateral roll servo and two

pitch-axis servos, front and rear.

"4Sv (90°)": Four-point swashplate control

affected by two roll servos and two

nick servos.

Simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the option back to

"1 Servo".

Swashplate type: 1 Servo

Swashplate type: 2 Servos

Detail program description - Helicopter type

Swashplate type: 3 Servos (2 Roll)

Swashplate type: 3 Servos (140°)

Swashplate type: 3 Servos (2 Nick)

Swashplate type: 4 Servos (90°) 2 Nick / 2 Roll

Note:

Except for the "1 Servo" choice, swashplate mixer

proportions must also be set in the»Swashplate

mixer« menu, page 208.

Swashplate linearizion

After selecting the »Linearis. swashpl.« line with the

 selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the

entry ﬁ eld will be framed.

Linearis. swashpl.

Swashplate type

1 Servo

Rotor direction right

HELTYPE

Pitch min. rear

SEL

The "yes" entry will prevent undesired side effects

such as pitch change due to a roll function or tension

between swashplate servo rods.

This type of tension can arise when effected servos

strain for different displacement positions due to

travel which deviates from one another.

Linearizing will require a bit of familiarization on the

part of the pilot because, in order to linearize the

entire rotation travel of the servo arm, servo travel

is reduced in small control movements – similar to a

pronounced exponential setting.

Rotor direction

After selecting the »Rotor direction« line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the entry

ﬁ eld will be framed.

Linearis. swashpl.

Swashplate type

1 Servo

Rotor direction right

HELTYPE

Pitch min. rear

SEL

After a tap on the center SET key, the main rotor's

direction of rotation is entered in the »Rotor direction«

line with the selection keys of the right touch pad:

"right": The main rotor turns clockwise when

viewed from above.

"left": The main rotor turns counter-clockwise

when viewed from above.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will set the option to "right".

right-

turning

left-

turning

This entry is necessary for the correct orientation of

torque and power compensation mixer settings made

in the »Helicopter mixer« menu:

Pitch,

Channel 1  Throttle,

Channel 1  Tail rot.,

Tail rotor  Throttle

Roll  Throttle

Roll  Tail rot.

Pitch  Throttle,

Pitch-axis  Throttle

Pitch-axis  Tail rotor

100 Detail program description - Helicopter type

Pitch min

After selecting the »Pitch min.« (pitch minimum) line

with the  selection keys of the left or right touch

pad, the entry ﬁ eld will be framed.

Linearis. swashpl.

Swashplate type

1 Servo

Rotor direction right

HELTYPE

Pitch min. rear

SEL

The »Pitch min.« line is used to adapt the actuation

direction of the throttle/pitch joystick to personal

control preferences. All other helicopter program

options which involve throttle and pitch functions, e.g.

throttle curve, idle trimming, tail rotor mixer, etc., are

dependent on this setting.

Tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The

operating direction of the throttle/pitch joystick will be

displayed in inverse video. Now choose the variant

needed with the selection keys of the right touch pad.

Pitch

These mean:

"fwd.": minimum pitch setting when the pitch

joystick (C1) is "forward", i.e. away from

the pilot.

"rear": minimum pitch setting when the pitch

joystick (C1) is "back", i.e. toward the pilot.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will set this option to "rear".

Notes:

C1 trimming affects only the throttle servo. •

The so-called "throttle limit" is set by default, see •

text beginning page 117, by way of input "GL16" in

the »Control adjust« menu with which the throttle

servo can be limited, independent of the pitch

servo, in the full throttle direction.

Since a given user's models will typically be •

operated with the same pitch-min direction, this

speciﬁ cation can be conveniently preselected

in the "transmitter-speciﬁ c" »General basic

settings« menu, page 259. This speciﬁ cation will

then be adopted automatically when a new model

memory is created in the »Helicopter type« menu

but, if desired, can be adapted on a model-speciﬁ c

basis as described.

Expo throttle limit

After selecting the »Expo throttle lim.« line with the

 selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the

entry ﬁ eld will be framed.

Linearis. swashpl. no

Rotor direction right

HELTYPE

Pitch min. rear

SEL

Expo throttle lim. 0%

The "Throttle limit" function described in the »Control

adjust« menu, see page 117, can be assigned an

exponential characteristic curve.

A pitch progression rate between -100 % and +100 %

can be set with the selection keys.

For example, it is practical to have the throttle

limit – by default, the right-side proportional rotary

slider – also regulate the idle setting. Further details

about the throttle limit can be found in the text for the

»Control adjust« menu beginning page 112.

An example of two exponential

throttle limit curve characteristics

for 100 % servo travel.

continuous line:

negative exponential values;

dashed line:

positive exponential values



" 

$ 

& 

  

 # 



       "    $   &      

Throttle limit warning

Rotor direction right

HELTYPE

Pitch min. rear

SEL

Expo throttle lim. 0%

Thr. limit warning –70%

If the carburetor is open too far when the transmitter

is switched on, an acoustic warning will be sounded

and a warning will be presented in the display.

Throttle

too

high!

The »Thr. limit warning« option permits the setting of

a variable for the critical position of the throttle servo

between 0 % and -100 %, above which the warning

will be issued. The reference point for this option is

the "fwd." or "rear" Pitch min. joystick position set in

this menu.

101

Detail program description - Helicopter type

A default value of -70 % control travel is provided.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

back to the default value.

102 Detail program description - Servo adjustment

normal

reverse

normal

reversed

Column 3 "cent."

The servo midpoint (center) setting is intended for

adapting a non-standard servo (a servo whose

midpoint position does not correspond to a pulse

length of 1.5 ms, i.e. 1500 µs), as well as for minor

adjustments, e.g. for the ﬁ ne tuning of the neutral

position of model rudders.

Independent of trim wheels and any mixer settings,

the neutral point can be shifted in a range of -125 bis

+125 % within a maximum servo travel of ± 150 %.

Independent of all other trim and mixer settings, this

setting is always based directly on the respective

servo.

Note that extreme offsets of

the neutral point can lead

to one-sided restrictions of

servo travel because overall

travel is limited by both

electronic and mechanical

aspects to a maximum of

±150 %.

A simultaneous tap on the

 or  keys of the right

touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry ﬁ eld value

displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".

Brieﬂ y tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch

pad. The corresponding input ﬁ eld is shown

highlighted.

Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to set 4.

the desired value.

Brieﬂ y tap the center 5. SET key of the right touch

pad to complete data entry.

A simultaneous tap on the 6.  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made

back to its respective default value.

Important:

Servo designation numerals are based on the

respective receiver outputs to which they are

connected, provided that no swapping of transmitter

and/or receiver outputs has been speciﬁ ed. This

means that even a change of stick mode will not

effect the numbering of servos.

Column 2 "rev"

The direction in which a servo turns is adapted to

the practical reality of the given model so that the

assembly of control rods and joints do not need to

accommodate a speciﬁ c servo rotation direction.

Rotation direction is symbolized by the "=>" and "<="

character combinations. Servo rotation direction must

be speciﬁ ed before making settings for the options

which follow below.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset rotation direction

back to "=>".

This menu is used to set the direction, neutralization,

travel and limit parameters for a given selected servo

exclusively.

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup modelModel type

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup modelHelicopter type

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:

0% 100%Servo 1

Servo 2

Servo 3

Servo 4

Servo 5

Rev cent.

100%

150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

Begin setting servo parameters in the left column.

Basic procedure:

Select the desired servo, 1 … 16, with the 1. 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad.

If necessary, use the 2.  selection keys of the

left or right touch pad to reach the desired column

then, if desired, move the respective control out of

its midpoint to make an asymmetric setting.

Servo adjustment

Servo direction, midpoint, travel and limit

103

Detail program description - Servo adjustment

Column 4, "–travel+"

0% 100%Servo 1

Servo 2

Servo 3

Servo 4

Servo 5

Rev cent.

100%

150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically

or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is

0 … 150

% of normal servo travel. The values set are

based on the settings that have been made for the

"midpoint" column.

To create a symmetric travel path, i.e. control-side

independent travel, the respective control (joystick,

proportional control or switch) is to be put into a

position which covers travel to both sides of the

marked frame.

Note:

It may be necessary to ﬁ rst assign a control attached

to one of the control channels 5 … 16. If necessary,

this is to be done in the »Control adjust« menu, see

page 108 or 112.

To set asymmetric travel, the respective control

(joystick, proportional control or switch) is to be

moved to the side on which the marked frame only

includes the value to be changed.

The value setting is activated with a brief tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad. The value ﬁ eld

is shown highlighted. Values can be changed with

the selection keys of the right touch pad. Complete

the entry with a tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed

parameter displayed in inverse video back to "100 %".

Important:

In contrast to settings made with the »Control

adjust« menu, all settings made in this menu affect

exclusively the respective servo, independent of

how the control signal for this servo is produced, i.e.

directly by a joystick or by way of any mixer functions.

The adjacent ﬁ gure shows

and example of a side-

dependent servo setting,

-50 % and +150 %. Transmitter control travel

Servo travel

Column 5 "–limit+"

The "– limit +" column is reached by moving the

marker frame, with the  selection keys of the left or

right touch pad, to the right beyond the "– travel +"

column.

0% 100%Servo 1

Servo 2

Servo 3

Servo 4

Servo 5

Rev cent.

100%

150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

To create a symmetric limit, i.e. control-side

independent limit, the respective control (joystick,

proportional control or switch) is to be put into a position

such that the marker frame covers both sides of the

travel setting.

To set asymmetric travel, the respective control

(joystick, proportional control or switch) is to be

moved to the side where it is to be set such that the

marker frame only includes the value to be changed.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry ﬁ eld

value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".

Example:

A servo is controlled separately by two controls over

a mixer and but, for model-speciﬁ c reasons, must

only be operated over a servo travel path of 100 %

because, for example, the rudder would mechanically

collide with the elevator if moved more than 100 %.

As long as only one control is used at a time, this is

no problem. But this does become a problem when

the signals are summed by the simultaneous use of

both controls (e.g. aileron and rudder) to total travel

in excess of 100 %. The linkage and servos could be

strained excessively …

To prevent this, the travel should certainly be limited

by way of an individual travel limit. In the case of the

rudder used in the example, this would be a value

slightly less than 100 % – because it is assumed the

rudder would collide at 100 %.

104 Detail program description - Joystick setting | Winged models

Both joysticks are equipped for digital trimming.

When turning trim wheels, every "click" will shift the

joystick's neutral position by a certain value.

The current position is shown on the screen and

the adjustment is also made "audible" with acoustic

tones. This makes ﬁ nding the mid-point during ﬂ ight

easy, without looking at the screen. If the mid-point is

overrun, a brief motion pause will be inserted.

Current trim values are automatically stored when a

model memory change is made.

Furthermore – except for global control

function trimming of the throttle/brake joystick,

commonly referred to as control function "C1"

(channel 1) – digital trimming is effective within a

model memory location selectively as either a global

parameter (i.e. consistent in all ﬂ ight phases) or as

a ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c parameter. This speciﬁ cation

as "global" or "phase" is made in the »Stick mode«

menu described here, whereas software-side C1

trimming is generally set to "global", i.e. independent

of ﬂ ight phases.

This setting is visualized in the base screen by a

"shadow" on trim bars:

shadow present = global,•

no shadow = ﬂ ight phase dependent.•

In two corresponding ﬁ gures below, elevator

trim – shown in the middle text column with its default

setting "global" – then in the right column set to ﬂ ight

"Phase" speciﬁ c.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0:00h

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

RX VOLT:4.9V

Joystick setting

Setting stick mode 1 through 4

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to scroll to the »Stick mode« option in the multi-

function menu:

Model select

Servo adjustmentStick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup modelModel type

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

global

Channel 1

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

0.0s

This menu, adapted for winged models, permits the

four digital trim wheels to be set and their trim effects

to be assigned, selectively, as a "deceleration" factor

to control functions 1 through 4.

The desired line can be reached by using the

selection keys of the left or right touch pad. Once the

appropriate function ﬁ eld has been selected and then

the center SET key of the right touch pad is touched

brieﬂ y, the ﬁ eld will appear in inverse video and the

desired setting can be made with the selection keys

of the right touch pad.

Trim

Except for "Channel 1", this column can be used to

switchover trim effect from "GL(obal)" to "PH(ase)"

and vice versa.

global

Channel 1

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

Phase 0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

"Global": The position of the respective trim wheel

is effective "globally" for all ﬂ ight-phases

programmed for the given model, page 140.

"Phase": The position of the respective trim wheel

is effective on a phase-speciﬁ c basis and

will be automatically stored upon change

of ﬂ ight phase so that the setting is again

available following a return to this ﬂ ight

phase.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the option back to

"Global".

Trim steps

The four digital trim wheels shift the neutral point of

the respective joystick in the given direction by one

adjustable increment, as set here, for each "click".

This is where the increment size (step) can be

adjusted for a given direction, whereby maximum trim

travel, independent of the selected number of trim

steps, is always about ±30 % of control travel.

After selecting the "Tr. step" column (trim steps) and

the desired trim control with the  selection keys

of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry

ﬁ eld will be framed.

105

Detail program description - Joystick setting | Winged models

global

Channel 1

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

Phase 0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.

The current setting will be displayed in inverse video.

Now select the desired value, between 1 and 10,

with the selection keys of the right touch pad. For

example:

global

Channel 1

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

Phase 0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made

to the active ﬁ eld back to "4".

Time

The rate of control signal change with respect to the

speed of joystick motion can be inﬂ uenced by the

entries made in the "– time +" column. Each joystick

movement direction, i.e. joystick control channels

1 through 4, can be set individually. This means

that respective servos will then follow rapid control

position changes only at an accordingly delayed

rate. This time delay has a direct effect on the control

function and therefore also any servos controlled by

this function.

The time can be programmed symmetrically for both

sides or separate for each control direction. This

setting has a programmable range of 0 s to 9.9 s. In

the case of side-separate settings, the joystick is to

be moved to the respective side so that the inverse

video ﬁ eld will switch between sides to the one for

which the change is to be made – for example, even

to ensure gentle rev-up of the propulsion motor

despite a (too) fast motion of the C1 stick.

global

Channel 1

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

Trim

1.1s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

Phase 0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

On the other hand, for reasons of safety, the motor

cut-off should always be "immediate".

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made

to the active ﬁ eld back to "0.0 s".

106 Detail program description - Joystick setting | Helicopters

Both joysticks are equipped for digital trimming.

When turning trim wheels, every "click" will shift the

joystick's neutral position by a certain value.

The current position is shown on the screen and

the adjustment is also made "audible" with acoustic

tones. This makes ﬁ nding the mid-point during ﬂ ight

easy, without looking at the screen. If the mid-point is

overrun, a brief motion pause will be inserted.

Current trim values are automatically stored when a

model memory change is made.

Furthermore – except for trimming the throttle/brake

joystick – digital trimming is effective selectively either

as a global parameter, i.e. consistent in all ﬂ ight

phases, or as a ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c parameter. This

speciﬁ cation as "Global" or "Phase" is made in the

»Stick mode« menu described here, whereas throttle

trimming is always made "global" by software, i.e.

independent of ﬂ ight phases.

This setting is visualized in the base screen by a

"shadow" on trim bars:

shadow present = global,•

no shadow = ﬂ ight phase dependent.•

In the following ﬁ gure, pitch-axis trimming is used as

an example of ﬂ ight-phase dependence – presented

at the left in its default Mode 1.

0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0:00h

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

#02

Starlet

RX VOLT:4.9V

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to scroll to the »Stick mode« option in the multi-

function menu:

Joystick setting

Setting stick mode 1 through 4

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup modelHelicopter type

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Thr trim

Pitch/thr

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot.

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

0.0s

This menu, adapted for helicopter models, permits

the four digital trim wheels to be set and their trim

effects to be assigned, selectively, as a "deceleration"

factor to control functions 1 through 4.

The desired line can be reached by using the

selection keys of the left or right touch pad. Once the

appropriate function ﬁ eld has been selected and then

the center SET key of the right touch pad is touched

brieﬂ y, the ﬁ eld will appear in inverse video and the

desired setting can be made with the selection keys

of the right touch pad.

Trim

These setting variations are conﬁ gured to

accommodate the needs of helicopter models, which

is why the following alternative options are available

for the "Thr." line:

Thr trim

Pitch/thr

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot.

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

0.0s

"Thr trim": (throttle limit)

C1 trimming operates as idle trimming

when the "throttle limit" function

regulates the motor for starting, see

»Control adjust« menu, page 117.

"Throttle AR": (Throttle Autorotation)

C1 trim operates as idle trim exclusively

in the «Autorot» ﬂ ight phase.

This makes it possible to assign a

principle (ﬁ xed) preset AR throttle

position in the »Helicopter mixer«

menu, page 176, e.g. during

autorotation practice with the trim

wheel "varied".

A simultaneous tap on the  or 

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR)

will reset the option back to "Thr trim".

"Pitch": Due to internal coupling, C1 trimming

acts equally on all pitch servos available

without inﬂ uencing the throttle servo.

On the other hand, the trim effects of respective

digital trim controls for the lines "Roll", "Pitch ax"

and "Tail rot." can be switched over from "Gobal" to

"Phase" and vice versa.

107

Detail program description - Joystick setting | Helicopters

Thr trim

Pitch/thr

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot.

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

Phase 0.0s

0.0s

"Global": The position of the respective trim

wheel is effective "globally" for all ﬂ ight-

phases programmed for the given model,

page 140.

"Phase": The position of the respective trim wheel

is effective on a phase-speciﬁ c basis and

will be automatically stored upon change

of ﬂ ight phase so that the setting is again

available following a return to this ﬂ ight

phase.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the option back to

"Global".

Trim steps

The four digital trim wheels shift the neutral point of

the respective joystick in the given direction by one

adjustable increment, as set here, for each "click".

This is where the increment size (step) can be

adjusted for a given direction, whereby maximum trim

travel, independent of the selected number of trim

steps, is always about ±30 % of control travel.

After selecting the "Tr. step" column and the desired

trim control with the  selection keys of the left or

right touch pad, the corresponding entry ﬁ eld will be

framed.

Thr trim

Pitch/thr

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot.

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

Phase 0.0s

0.0s

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.

The current setting will be displayed in inverse video.

Now select the desired value, between 0 and 10,

with the selection keys of the right touch pad. For

example:

Thr trim

Pitch/thr

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot.

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

Phase 0.0s

0.0s

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made

to the active ﬁ eld back to "4".

Time

The rate of control signal change with respect to the

speed of joystick motion can be inﬂ uenced by the

entries made in the "– time +" column. Each joystick

movement direction, i.e. joystick control channels

1 through 4, can be set individually. This means

that respective servos will then follow rapid control

position changes only at an accordingly delayed

rate. This time delay has a direct effect on the control

signal and therefore also commensurately on any

servos controlled by the effected controls.

The time can be programmed symmetrically for both

sides or separate for each control direction. This

setting has a programmable range of 0 s to 9.9 s. In

this latter case, the given stick control is to be moved

to the respective side so that the inverse video ﬁ eld

will switch between sides to the one for which the

change is to be made.

Example:

All three servos are to be actuated for swashplate

pitch control, e g. a "Pitch" control movement for a

"3Sv (2Roll)" swashplate. However, travel for the

middle servo is greater than that of the other two

servos on the shorter lever.

A rash "Pitch" control movement would not operate

the nick servo in the middle as quickly as it would

the two roll servos on the shorter lever. This would

cause a momentary control motion in the "nick"

direction. However, if response time for the "pitch"

control function were to be reduced by at least the

positioning time for the servo in the middle then all

three servos would reach their proper positions at

the same time. The necessary delay times typically

amount to only a few tenths of a second. For

example:

Thr trim

Pitch/thr

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot.

Trim

4.4s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

Phase 0.0s

0.0s

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made

to the active ﬁ eld back to "0.0 s".

108 Detail program description - Control adjust | Winged models

Control adjust

Basic procedure for transmitter control and switch assignment

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to scroll to the »Control adjust« option in the multi-

function menu:

Model select

Servo adjustmentStick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup modelModel type

Tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch

pad to open this menu option:

0% +100%I5

TYP SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

Offset

Normal

In addition to the two joysticks for control functions

1 to 4 and their trim wheels, the mc-16 HoTT

transmitter also has other controls as standard

equipment:

two 3-way switches•

two 2-way switches•

two unlockable 2-way switches•

two self-restoring 2-way switches•

three proportional sliders on the middle console, •

designated SR 1 … 3 in the menu

two side-mounted "rotary sliders", designated SD1 •

and 2 in the menu

two depressible "rotary controls", designated DG2 •

and 4 in the menu

three roller-shaped rotary controls, designated as •

DG1, DG3 and DG5 in the menu

In contrast to the two joysticks which, when initialized

for a new model memory as a "Winged aircraft"

model type will already be conﬁ gured to operate the

servos connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4, these

"other" operating elements initially remain inactive.

Thus, at least in the system's delivered state – as

already mentioned on page 68 – or even after

initialization of a new model memory with an "aircraft"

model type and its "binding" to the receiver intended

for installation, only those servos connected to

the two joysticks by way of receiver outputs 1 … 4

are able to be operated; any servos which may be

connected to receiver outputs 5 … 16 will initially

remain inactive in their middle positions.

While this may appear a bit awkward at ﬁ rst glance

… this is the only way to ensure a completely

free selection from among "additional" operating

elements while, at the same time, not requiring the

"deactivation" of unused operating elements. This is

because

the only way to ensure an unused operating

element can have no effect on the model, even if

operated by accident, is to make it inactive, i.e.

not assigned to any function.

All of the aforementioned operating elements can be

freely assigned in this »Control adjust« menu, see

page 54, to any function input just to accommodate

personal requirements. Equally, this also means

that each of these operating elements can also be

assigned to to multiple functions at the same time,

as needed. For example: the exact same toggle

switch assigned to an input in this menu can, at the

same time, also have an assignment in the »Timers

(general)« menu as an "On/Off" switch, etc.

Furthermore, all inputs can be selectively set to global

or ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c operation if they have been

deﬁ ned for ﬂ ight-phases in the »Phase settings«

menu, page 142, and »Phase assignment« menu,

page 148. The names assigned to given ﬂ ight phases

then appear in the second-from-the-bottom display

line, e.g. «Normal».

Basic procedure

Use the 1.  selection keys of the left or right

touch pad to select the desired input, "I5 … I16".

If necessary, use the 2.  selection keys of the

left or right touch pad to change to the desired

column.

Brieﬂ y tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch

pad. The corresponding input ﬁ eld is shown

highlighted.

Operate the chosen operating element or set the 4.

desired value with the selection keys of the right

touch pad.

Brieﬂ y tap the center 5. SET key of the right touch

pad to complete data entry.

A simultaneous tap on the 6.  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made

back to its respective default value.

Column 2, "TYP"

Similar to the previously described »Stick mode«

menu, this column can be used to deﬁ ne whether

further settings for the given input are to have a

"GL(obal)" or a "PH(ase-speciﬁ c)" effect. Do this by

using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad

to select the desired input 5 through 16 in the column

labeled "TYP".

0% +100%I5

TYP SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

Offset

Normal

109

Detail program description - Control adjust | Winged models

"GL": The settings for the input in question affect

all ﬂ ight phases programmed (if any) and

thus act "globally" on the model memory in

question.

"PH": The settings for this input take effect per

ﬂ ight phase and must therefore be conﬁ gured

separately for each ﬂ ight phase.

Note:

See page 140 for more information about ﬂ ight

phases.

Column 3, "Transmitter control/switch

assignment"

Select an input, 5 through 16, with the  selection

keys of the left or right touch pad.

Transmitter control assignment

Use the selection keys to move into the column

labeled SEL. After completing the activation of

transmitter control assignment by tapping the center

SET key of the right touch pad , the message shown

below will appear in the display:

0% +100%I5

TYP SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

Offset

Normal

Move desired

control adj.

Now actuate the desired transmitter control: The

notice window will disappear and the designation

of the selected transmitter control will appear in the

transmitter control assignment window.

0% +100%I5

TYP SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

S11 ---

---

Offset

Normal

Alternatively, the center SET key of the right touch

pad can be tapped for a second time while the notice

window, see above, is still on the display:

0% +100%I5

TYP SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

Offset

Normal

Now use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad

to select the desired input out of the list if the respective

plug-in location on the transmitter board is occupied or

switch the entry to "fr" if the input is to be decoupled

from a transmitter control. In this case, or even when a

non-existent transmitter control is assigned, the servo

corresponding to this input will be in its neutral position

and can only be controlled via mixers.

0% +100%I5

TYP SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

S11 ---

---

Offset

Normal

Switch assignment

If the input is to be actuated like a switch module, the

input can alternatively be assigned to a switch.

A simple switch can be used to switch back and forth

between two limit values, for example motor On/Off.

A 2-way momentary or toggle switch, see appendix,

achieves the same effect as a 2-channel switch

module, for example motor Off/Half/Full.

Use the selection keys to move into the column

above the switch symbol label. Brieﬂ y tap the

center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the

option for assigning a switch.

0% +100%I5

TYP SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

GL fr

Normal

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Actuate the desired toggle switch from its "OFF"

to its "ON" position or, for a 3-way switch,

beginning from its middle position, assign a switch

direction – preferably the "second" direction. This

means, if a function is to be switched on by moving

the switch forward two positions, i.e. away from the

pilot, then begin from the switch's middle position and

move the switch away from the pilot.

The display will then present the switch number

together with a symbol indicating the given switch

direction. At the same time, the column label in the

footer line will change from SEL into another switch

symbol.

110 Detail program description - Control adjust | Winged models

0% +100%I5

TYP

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

GL ---

Normal

Now put the 3-way switch back into its middle position.

Move the marker frame as necessary to the left into

the column labeled with the new switch symbol, brieﬂ y

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then

assign the switch's other switch direction by once

again starting from the middle position but this time

move the switch in the other direction.

The display will now present the given switch number

together with a symbol indicating the given switch

direction.

0% +100%I5

TYP

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

Erasing a transmitter control or switch

assignment

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of

the right touch pad (CLEAR) while on an input

line with an active transmitter control or switch

assignment – see above ﬁ gures – will reset the given

input back to "fr" and "---".

Tips:

When assigning switches, pay attention to the •

desired switching direction and also that all

unused inputs remain "free" or are again reset to

"free". This is necessary to ensure that inadvertent

actuations of these unused controls cannot cause

malfunctions.

The travel setting described below allows the •

appropriate end state to be established for an

assigned switch.

Column 4, "Offset"

The control center for the given control, i.e. its zero

point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment

range lies between -125 % and +125 %.

0% +100%I5

TYP

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry ﬁ eld

value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".

Column 5, "– travel +"

This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically

or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is

±125 % of normal servo travel.

Select an input, 5 through 16, with the  selection

keys of the left or right touch pad.

To set symmetric travel, i.e. control-side independent

travel, the respective operating element (transmitter

control or switch) is to be put into a position in which

the travel setting will be covered on both sides by the

marker frame.

0% +100%E5

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– Weg + –Zeit+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

To set asymmetric travel, the respective operating

element (transmitter control or switch) is to be moved

to the side to be set such that the marker frame only

includes the value to be changed.

0% +100%I5

TYP

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

The value setting is activated by brieﬂ y touching the

center SET key of the right touch pad. The value

ﬁ eld/s will be displayed in inverse video. Values can be

changed with the selection keys of the right touch pad.

0% +111%I5

TYP

+111%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

111

Detail program description - Control adjust | Winged models

0% +88%I5

TYP

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad will complete the entry.

Negative and positive parameter values are possible

in order to appropriately adapt the control's direction

or effect.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed

parameter displayed in inverse video back to

"+100 %".

Important:

In contrast to servo travel settings, changing the

control travel setting affects all "downstream" mixer

and coupling inputs, i.e. any and all servos actuated

by the given transmitter control.

Column 6, "–time+"

Each of the function inputs 5 … 16 can be assigned

a symmetrical or asymmetric time delay of between 0

and 9.9 s.

Move the marker frame to the right beyond the

column labeled "– travel +" with the  selection key

of the left or right touch pad.

To set a symmetric, i.e. control-side independent,

time delay, the respective operating element

(transmitter control or switch) is to be put into a

position in which the time setting is covered on both

sides by the marker frame.

0% +111%I5

TYP

+111%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

To set an asymmetric time delay, move the given

transmitter control (proportional control or switch)

as necessary to the side to be set such that only the

value to be changed is covered.

0% +111%I5

TYP

+111%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch

pad to activate value setting. The value ﬁ eld will be

displayed in inverse video. Use the selection keys of

the right touch pad to change the value in a range of

0.0 to 9.9 s.

Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad will complete the entry.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed

parameter displayed in inverse video back to 0.0.

112 Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters

Control adjust

Basic procedure for transmitter control and switch assignment

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to scroll to the »Control adjust« option in the multi-

function menu:

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup modelHelicopter type

Tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch

pad to open this menu option:

0% +100%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

Offset

I15 GL 0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

…

Tl16 GL 0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

Lv1 ---

In addition to the two joysticks for control functions

1 to 4 and their trim wheels, the mc-16 HoTT

transmitter also has other controls as standard

equipment:

two 3-way switches•

two 2-way switches•

two unlockable 2-way switches•

two self-restoring 2-way switches•

three proportional sliders on the middle console, •

designated SR 1 … 3 in the menu

two side-mounted "rotary sliders", designated SD1 •

and 2 in the menu

two depressible "rotary controls", designated DG2 •

and 4 in the menu

three roller-shaped rotary controls, designated as •

DG1, DG3 and DG5 in the menu

In contrast to the two joysticks which, even for

a newly initialized "Helicopter" model type will

automatically use the servos attached to receiver

outputs 1 … 4 and 6, the aforementioned "other"

operating elements – except for the standard

assignment of servo 6 to the right-side proportional

slider, designated in this menu as SD1 (throttle

limiter) – are initially inactive.

One of the effects of this is that (as already

mentioned on page 68) with a factory-fresh

system – as with a newly initialized model memory

for a "Helicopter" model type following its "binding" to

the intended receiver – only those servos connected

to receiver outputs 1 … 4 and – depending on the

position of the throttle limiter – servo 6 can be moved

by the two joysticks. Any servos connected to plug-in

locations 5 and 7 through 15, on the other hand, will

simply remain at their center positions.

While this may appear a bit awkward at ﬁ rst glance

… this is the only way to ensure a completely

free selection from among "additional" operating

elements while, at the same time, not requiring the

"deactivation" of unused operating elements. This is

because

the only way to ensure an unused operating

element can have no effect on the model, even if

operated by accident, is to make it inactive, i.e.

not assigned to any function.

All of the aforementioned operating elements can be

freely assigned in this »Control adjust« menu, see

page 54, to any function input just to accommodate

personal requirements. Equally, this also means

that each of these operating elements can also be

assigned to to multiple functions at the same time,

as needed. For example: the exact same toggle

switch assigned to an input in this menu can, at the

same time, also have an assignment in the »Timers

(general)« menu as an "On/Off" switch, etc.

Furthermore, all inputs can be selectively set to global

or ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c operation if they have been

deﬁ ned for ﬂ ight-phases in the »Phase settings«

menu, page 142, and »Phase assignment« menu,

page 148. The names assigned to given ﬂ ight phases

then appear in the second-from-the-bottom display

line, e.g. «Normal».

Note:

As a rule, input 6 must kept "free" for a helicopter

model. On this, see "Throttle" on the next double

page.

Basic procedure

Use the 1.  selection keys of the left or right

touch pad to select the desired input: I5, Thr6,

Gyr7, I8 … 15 or Tl16.

If necessary, use the 2.  selection keys of the left

or right touch pad to select the desired column.

Brieﬂ y tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch

pad. The corresponding input ﬁ eld is shown

highlighted.

Operate the chosen operating element or set the 4.

desired value with the selection keys of the right

touch pad.

Brieﬂ y tap the center 5. SET key of the right touch

pad to complete data entry.

A simultaneous tap on the 6.  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made

back to its respective default value.

113

Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters

in its neutral position and can only be controlled via

mixers.

0% +100%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

S11 ---

---

Offset

Normal

Switch assignment

If the input is to be actuated like a switch module, the

input can alternatively be assigned to a switch.

A simple switch can be used to switch back and forth

between two limit values, for example motor On/Off.

A 2-way momentary or toggle switch, see appendix,

achieves the same effect as a 2-channel switch

module, for example motor Off/Half/Full.

Use the selection keys to move into the column

above the switch symbol label. Brieﬂ y tap the

center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the

option for assigning a switch.

0% +100%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

GL fr

Normal

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Actuate the desired toggle switch from its "OFF"

to its "ON" position or, for a 3-way switch,

beginning from its middle position, assign a switch

direction – preferably the "second" direction. This

means, if a function is to be switched on by moving

the switch forward two positions, i.e. away from the

pilot, then begin from the switch's middle position and

move the switch away from the pilot.

Column 2, "typ"

Similar to the previously described »Stick mode«

menu, this column can be used to deﬁ ne whether

further settings for the given input are to have a

"GL(obal)" or a "PH(ase-speciﬁ c)" effect. Do this by

using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad

to select the desired input 5 through 16 in the column

labeled "TYP".

0% +100%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

Offset

Normal

"GL": The settings for the input in question affect

all ﬂ ight phases programmed (if any) and

thus act "globally" on the model memory in

question.

"PH": The settings for this input take effect per

ﬂ ight phase and must therefore be conﬁ gured

separately for each ﬂ ight phase.

Note:

See page 142 for more information about ﬂ ight

phases.

Column 3, "Transmitter control/switch

assignment"

Using the  selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to select an input: I5, Thr6, Gyr7, I8 … 15 or

Tl16.

Transmitter control assignment

Use the selection keys to move into the column

labeled SEL. After completing the activation of

transmitter control assignment by tapping the center

SET key of the right touch pad , the message shown

below will appear in the display:

0% +100%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

Offset

Normal

Move desired

control adj.

Now actuate the desired transmitter control: The

notice window will disappear and the designation

of the selected transmitter control will appear in the

transmitter control assignment window.

0% +100%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

S11 ---

---

Offset

Normal

Alternatively, the center SET key of the right touch

pad can be tapped for a second time while the notice

window, see above, is still on the display:

0% +100%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

Offset

Normal

Now use the selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to select the desired input out of the list if the

respective plug-in location on the transmitter board

is occupied or switch the entry to "fr" if the input is to

be decoupled from a transmitter control. In this case,

or even when a non-existent transmitter control is

assigned, the servo corresponding to this input will be

114 Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters

The display will then present the switch number

together with a symbol indicating the given switch

direction. At the same time, the column label in the

footer line will change from SEL into another switch

symbol.

0% +100%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

GL ---

Normal

Now put the 3-way switch back into its middle position.

Move the marker frame as necessary to the left into

the column labeled with the new switch symbol, brieﬂ y

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then

assign the switch's other switch direction by once

again starting from the middle position but this time

move the switch in the other direction.

The display will now present the given switch number

together with a symbol indicating the given switch

direction.

0% +100%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) while on an input line with

an active transmitter switch assignment – see above

ﬁ gure – will reset the input back to "fr" and "---".

Tips:

When assigning switches, pay attention to the •

desired switching direction and also that all

unused inputs remain "free" or are again reset to

"free". This is necessary to ensure that inadvertent

actuations of these unused controls cannot cause

malfunctions.

The travel setting described below allows the •

appropriate end state to be established for an

assigned switch.

Column 4, "offset"

The control center for the given control, i.e. its zero

point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment

range lies between -125 % and +125 %.

0% +100%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry ﬁ eld

value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".

Column 5, "–travel+"

This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically

or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is

±125 % of normal servo travel.

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to select an input: I5, Thr6, Gyr7, I8 … 15 or

Tl16.

To set symmetric travel, i.e. control-side independent,

put the respective operating element (proportional

control or switch) into a position where the marker

frame encloses both sides of the travel setting.

0% +88%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP

+111%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

To set asymmetric travel, the respective control

(proportional control or switch) is to be moved to

the side to be set such that the marker frame only

encloses the value to be changed.

0% +100%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP

+111%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad

to activate value setting. The value ﬁ eld is shown

highlighted. Values can be changed with the selection

keys of the right touch pad.

0% +111%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP

+111%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

115

Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters

Thr6

0% +88%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP

+111%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

In principle, the helicopter program also permits

the individual inputs to be assigned to any existing

transmitter control (proportional controls and

switches).

However, please note here that some of the inputs

available on this menu are already assigned to

helicopter-speciﬁ c functions, and therefore cannot be

re-assigned in this way.

Nevertheless, the receiver layout on page 65 indicates

that the throttle servo or the speed controller of an

electrically-powered helicopter must be connected

to receiver output "6", since control channel "6" is

reserved for motor power regulation.

Unlike a ﬁ xed-wing model aircraft, the throttle servo

or speed controller is not directly controlled by the

joystick or other transmitter control but rather by a

complex mixer system, see »Helicopter mixer« menu

beginning page 176. Furthermore, the "Throttle limit

function" described on the next page also inﬂ uences

this mixer system.

Assigning a transmitter control or switch on the

"Throttle" line, or to its supplementary control signal,

would unnecessarily "confuse" this complex mixer

system. For this reason the "Throttle" input MUST

be left "free".

0% +88%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad will complete the entry.

Negative and positive parameter values are possible

in order to appropriately adapt the control's direction

or effect.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed

parameter displayed in inverse video back to

"+100 %".

Important:

In contrast to altering servo travel, changing the

control travel setting affects all "downstream" mixer

and coupling inputs, i.e. any and all servos that could

be actuated by the transmitter controls concerned.

Column 6, "– time +"

Each of the function inputs, I5 … 16, can be assigned

a symmetric or asymmetric time delay of between 0

and 9.9 s.

Move the marker frame to the right beyond the

column labeled "– travel +" with the  selection key

of the left or right touch pad.

To set a symmetric time delay, i.e. control-side

independent, move the affected transmitter control

(proportional control or switch) as necessary to a

position such that the marker frame encloses both

sides of the time setting.

0% +111%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP

+111%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

To set an asymmetric time delay, move the affected

operating element (transmitter control or switch) as

necessary to a position such that the marker frame

encloses only the value to be changed.

0% +111%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP

+111%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad

to activate value setting. The value ﬁ eld is shown

highlighted. Values can be changed with the selection

keys of the right touch pad.

Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad will complete the entry.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed

parameter displayed in inverse video back to 0.0.

116 Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters

" Gyr7"

0% +88%I5

Thr6

Gyr7

TYP

+111%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

Normal

Most of the latest gyro systems not only feature

inﬁ nitely variable proportional gyro gain setting, but

also offer a choice of two separate types of gain

mode on the transmitter.

If the gyro in use also has this feature then this menu

option provides the opportunity to specify both a

"normal" gyro effect as well as a "heading-lock mode"

in the "Offset" column within a range of ±125 %.

Such a speciﬁ cation can include a certain effect to

ﬂ y normal, slow ﬂ ights with maximum stability or the

reduction of the gyro effect for fast circuit ﬂ ights and

aerobatics.

To proceed as described above, use ﬂ ight phase

switching to enter different settings on the "Gyro" line.

Important notice:

The value of this option is identical to the offset

value set in the "Gyro offset" option of the

»Helicopter mixer« menu, page 185. For this

reason, any changes made always affect the

other menu directly, and vice versa.

Beginning with these preset – static – ﬂ ight phase-

speciﬁ c settings, a transmitter control assigned to the

"Gyr7" line, for example one of the middle console

sliders, can be used to vary the gyro effect around

the respective "offset point". The center point of the

control corresponds to the setting speciﬁ ed by the

offset. If the transmitter control is moved from this

center point in the direction of full travel, gyro gain

increases proportionally; it diminishes when moved

in the opposite direction. This provides a fast and

straightforward method of adjusting gyro effect even

in ﬂ ight – e.g. to suit changing weather conditions – or

to test-ﬂ y optimal settings. Furthermore, the range

of the gyro's effect within transmitter control travel in

both directions can be restricted by software.

In this context, be sure to comply with the

instructions accompanying the gyro, otherwise

there is a risk the helicopter will be impossible to ﬂ y.

Adjusting the gyro sensor

To achieve the maximum possible level of

stabilization for the helicopter with the gyro along the

vertical axis, observe the following:

The controls should have as little friction and •

"play" as possible.

There should be no "spring" in the control linkage.•

Use a strong and – in particular – a fast servo. •

When the gyro sensor detects a model rotation, the

faster its response – a corresponding corrective

change to tail rotor thrust – takes effect, the further

the gyro gain adjuster can be moved without causing

the tail of the model to start oscillating, and the better

the model's stability about its vertical axis. If the

response is slower, there is a risk that the model's tail

will start to oscillate even at low gyro gain settings.

Here, further reductions to gyro gain will need to be

made – either by using the default value under "Gyro"

or the associated transmitter control – to eliminate the

oscillation.

If the model is ﬂ ying forward at high speed or

hovering in a powerful headwind, the net result of the

stabilizing effect of the vertical ﬁ n combined with the

gyro may also lead to an overreaction that once again

manifests itself through tail oscillation. To achieve

optimum gyro stabilization under all conditions, make

use of the option to adapt gyro effect with one of the

transmitter's proportional controls.

117

Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters

not only provides a convenient means to start and

stop the motor but may also prove to be more than

an insigniﬁ cant safety improvement! For example,

just imagine what could happen if, while carrying the

helicopter to the take-off site with the motor running,

the C1 joystick were to be inadvertently operated …

If the carburetor or speed controller is open too

far when the transmitter is switched on, an audible

warning will be sounded and the basic display will

show the message:

Throttle

too

high!

Tip:

Take advantage of the »Servo display« to observe

the inﬂ uence of the throttle limit control. The »Servo

display« screen can be reached from almost any

menu position with a simultaneous tap on the 

selection keys of the left touch pad, Bear in mind that

servo output 6 controls the throttle servo on the mc-

HoTT!

Basic idle setting

Put the throttle limit into its "full throttle" position by

pushing the throttle limit regulator – by default, the

right side proportional slider SD1 – all the way to its

forward position limit. Set the throttle/pitch joystick to

the maximum pitch position and also check the sub-

menu "Channel 1 CURVE" of the menu …

»Helicopter mixer« (page 176 … 191)

… to ensure that a standard throttle curve is active. If,

for example, the standard throttle curve has already

been changed following the initialization of a model

memory then this must be at least temporarily reset

to the values "Point L = -100 %", "Point 1 = 0 %" and

"Point H = +100 %":

"Tl16"

The proportional slider SD1, mounted on the right

side of the transmitter, is assigned by default to input

"Tl16".

I13 +100%

I14

I15

Tl16

TYP

+100%

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

Lv1

---

Offset

Normal

0.0 0.0

fr ---

SET

This pre-assignment makes it unnecessary to

program the two ﬂ ight phases as may be familiar from

use of other remote control systems

– one "with idle-

up" and one "without idle-up" – because the mc-16

HoTT program offers a much more ﬂ exible approach

to ﬁ ne-tuning and optimizing increases to system

rotational speed below the hover point than the so-

called "idle-up". If it is nevertheless preferable for

the helicopter to be programmed "with idle-up", then

deactivate the "throttle limit" function described below

by setting input "Tl16" to "fr".

Meaning and application of "throttle limit"

As already mentioned under "Throttle", and in

contrast to ﬁ xed-wing models, the power output of

a helicopter's drive system is not controlled directly

with the C1 joystick, but only indirectly via the throttle

curve settings in the »Helicopter mixer« menu

or – if the model features a speed controller – via that

mechanism.

Note:

Of course for different ﬂ ight phases, ﬂ ight phase

programming can be used to set individual throttle

curves.

Nevertheless, both methods of output control de facto

result in the helicopter carburetor never approaching

Throttle limit function

anything near its idle speed under "normal" ﬂ ight

conditions, and that the motor can therefore neither

be started or stopped cleanly without some other

means of intervention.

The "throttle limit" feature resolves this problem

elegantly by using a separate transmitter control – by

default the SD1 proportional slider mounted on the

right side of the transmitter – to limit the throttle servo

or the output level of a speed controller. In this way,

it is possible to "throttle back" with the throttle limit

control, even as far as the idle setting, at which point

the trim control for the throttle/pitch joystick takes

over or directly shuts off an electric drive. Conversely,

the throttle servo or speed controller can only open

up to its full-throttle position if the throttle limit control

has also released the full servo travel path.

The value set on the (right-hand) plus side of the

"travel" column must therefore always be set high

enough to ensure that the maximum setting of the

throttle limit control never restricts the full-throttle

position achievable with throttle curve settings – which

typically means setting a value in the range +100 % to

125 %.

I13 +100%

I14

I15

Tl16

TYP

+100%

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +125%

+100%

0.0 0.0

Lv1

---

Offset

Normal

0.0 0.0

fr ---

SET

The value on the (left-hand) minus side of the

"travel" column should be set so that the throttle limit

control can safely cut off an electric drive or close a

carburetor sufﬁ ciently to cut off a combustion motor

in conjunction with – digital – C1 trim. Because of this,

leave this value (initially) at +100 %.

Furthermore, this variable "limitation" of throttle travel

118 Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters

Channel 1 CURVE

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +100%

+100%

H+

–

100

O U T P U T

+100%

Note:

Since throttle trim has no effect if the throttle limiter is

open, its position here is meaningless.

Now – without starting the combustion motor – adjust

the throttle servo, preferably mechanically and,

if necessary, also by way of the servo 6 travel

adjustment option in the »Servo adjustment« menu,

so that the carburetor is completely open.

Now close the throttle limiter completely by moving

the side proportional slider all the way to its rear limit.

Use the trim wheel of the Throttle/Pitch joystick to

place the trim position marker into the motor OFF

position or actuate the "Thr. CutOff" option, see

page 90.

Note:

In contrast, when the throttle limiter is closed,

the position of the throttle/collective pitch stick is

meaningless. It can therefore remain at the maximum

collective pitch position so that, when adjusting

carburetor linkages, the throttle limiter alone can be

used to switch between full throttle (throttle limiter

open) and "Motor OFF" (throttle limiter closed).

Now, with the throttle limiter closed, adjust the

carburetor linkages so that the carburetor is (just)

completely closed. Take extreme care to ensure that

the throttle servo does not become mechanically

blocked in either of its end positions (full throttle/

motor OFF).

To complete this basic conﬁ guration, the idle trim

adjustment range must now be matched against point

"L" on the throttle curve. Do this by setting Point "L"

of the "Channel 1 CURVE" mixer, in the »Helicopter

mixer« menu, to about -65 to -70 %.

Channel 1 CURVE

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –100%

–66%

L+

–

100

O U T P U T

–66%

To conﬁ gure a smooth transition from the idle trim

to the throttle curve exactly, the collective pitch stick

should be moved to and fro slightly at its minimum

position with the throttle limiter closed and the idle

trim fully open. The throttle servo must not move as

well! Any further adjustments to the throttle curve

must of course be made later in ﬂ ight.

The motor is always started with the throttle limiter

fully closed, whereby idle is set exclusively by using

the trim wheel of the throttle/pitch joystick and the

motor is shut off by the "Thr. CutOff" option.

Notes:

Take advantage of the »• Servo display« to

observe the inﬂ uence of the throttle limit control.

The »Servo display« screen can be reached from

almost any menu position with a simultaneous

tap on the  selection keys of the left touch

pad, Bear in mind that servo output 6 controls the

throttle servo on the mc-16 HoTT!

A servo connected to output 16 can be used, •

independently of this, for other purposes by

means of mixers, provided that this servo is

decoupled from the operating element speciﬁ ed

by function input 16 via the »Mix only channel«

menu; see page 205.

The throttle restriction set by the throttle limiter •

is shown as a horizontal bar in the throttle curve

diagram on the second display page of the

"Channel 1 CURVE" option in the »Helicopter

mixer« menu (see page 180). The output signal

for the throttle servo cannot be higher than the

level set by the horizontal bar:

Channel 1 CURVE

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

–

100

O U T P U T

actual

position of the

Throttle limiter

The above diagram shows precisely this scenario:

in the above example, the throttle limit control

is set to about -60 % and thus restricts the

movement of the throttle servo to about -60 % of

full travel.

119

Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters

Time delay for the throttle limiter

To safely prevent the carburetor from opening too

rapidly, assign the throttle limiter input "Tl16" to a

time delay that takes effect only in the direction of full

throttle. This applies especially if the throttle limiter is

controlled by a switch rather than, as preset, with the

right-side proportional rotary slider.

To set a delay time, push the throttle limit control to

its forward limit or move the switch into its full-throttle

position then use the selection keys of the left or right

touch pad to select the "–time+" column.

I13 +100%

I14

I15

Tl16

TYP

+100%

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0

Lv1

---

Offset

Normal

0.0 0.0

fr ---

0.0

SET

After a brief tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad, the selection keys of the left or right touch

pad can be used to select the desired time delay, e.g.

5 seconds.

I13 +100%

I14

I15

Tl16

TYP

+100%

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0

Lv1

---

Offset

Normal

0.0 0.0

fr ---

5.0

SET

A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad or the ESC key of the left touch pad will complete

the entry.

As already explained on page 106, when "Thr AR" is

selected in the "Pitch/thr" line of the …

»Stick mode« (page 106)

Pitch/thr

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot.

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

0.0s

Thr AR

… menu then digital trim of the throttle/pitch joystick

is only active for the «Autorotation» ﬂ ight phase. As

a consequence, the motor's idle speed cannot be

regulated in the "normal" ﬂ ight phases with the C1

trim control. To ensure the availability of sufﬁ cient

setting options, use of the "Expo throttle limiter" is

recommended.

The exponential curve characteristic offered by the …

»Helicopter type« (page 98)

Linearis. swashpl. no

Rotor direction right

HELTYPE

Pitch min. rear

SEL

Expo throttle lim. 0%

… menu's sub-menu can be used to alter the control

behavior of the throttle limit control such that the latter

provides sufﬁ ciently sensitive regulation of the idle

setting and can also stop the motor.

In this case, with a completely closed throttle

limiter – in contrast to the previously described

setting – use the »Control adjust« menu set the "-"

side of the column labeled "- travel +" for the "Tl16"

Throttle limit in combination with "Thr AR" in the »Stick mode«

line such that the throttle limiter fully closes the

carburetor, i.e. the motor is safely switched off at this

control position.

Following this, move the throttle limit control to its

center point and change the % value of the "Expo

thro lim." line in the »Helicopter type« menu, page

98, until the carburetor is in a position suitable for

starting the motor. Now start the motor, and adjust the

value if necessary until the motor idles reliably in this

throttle limit control position.

The value for the plus side of the "- travel +" column

should be increased, as described before, to +125 %

so that the full-throttle position of the throttle servo is

also reliably released from the throttle limiter.

Finally, set an asymmetrical time delay of, say

4.0 seconds, so the motor also picks up speed

gradually even if the side proportional slider is pushed

forward too quickly. Select the time preset to correlate

to how far the carburetor opens up at the minimum

collective pitch position. The value set is to be

optimized by testing.

120 Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models

Dual Rate / Expo

Conﬁ gurable control characteristics for aileron, elevator and rudder

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to

scroll to the »Dual Rate / Expo« menu option in the

Multi-function menu:

Model select

Servo adjustmentStick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup modelModel type

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

––––––

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

The Dual-Rate-/Expo function permits ﬂ ight-phase

dependent switching and control over the deﬂ ection

and characteristics of the aileron (Ail), elevator (Ele)

and rudder (Rud) (control functions 2 … 4) by way of

switches.

The »Channel 1 curve« menu, see text beginning

page 128, can be used to set an individual curve

characteristic for control function 1 (throttle/brake)

with up to 8 separately programmable points.

Similar to control travel settings in the »Control

adjust« menu, Dual Rate operates directly on the

respective control function, independent of whether

it is an individual servo or multiple servos connected

via complex mixer and coupling functions.

The control travel for each switch position can be set

to between 0 and 125 % of normal full travel.

Expo, on the other hand, enables ﬁ ner-grained

control of the model for values larger than 0 % around

the center position of the primary control function

(aileron, elevator and rudder), without forfeiting full

movement at the end-points of joystick travel. For

values less than 0 %, the reverse is true: control

increases around the neutral position and diminishes

towards the end-points. The degree of "progression"

can therefore be set within a total range of -100 %

to +100 %, where 0 % equates to the normal, linear

control characteristics.

Rotary-output servos, now generally commonplace,

offer another application. This is because the actual

control surface movement is not linear: as the

rotational angle of the output disc or lever increases,

the control surface rate of travel over the control

linkage continually decreases – depending on the

position of the linkage point on the output disc. This

effect can be counteracted with Expo values greater

than 0 % such that rotational angle travel increases

over-proportionally with increasing joystick throw.

The Expo setting also affects the relevant control

function directly, whether this controls a single servo

or multiple servos – via any number of mixer and

coupling functions.

For both Dual Rate and Expo functions, switch

assignment can be set up in any way desired, which

therefore permits the triggering of multiple functions

using one and the same switch. This, in turn, offers

the opportunity to link the triggering of Dual Rate and

Expo functions to a single switch: this offers many

advantages – particularly for very high-speed models.

The graphic screen displays the curve characteristics

directly. After selecting the appropriate line, the dotted

vertical line will follow the movement of the respective

joystick so a better evaluation of the transmitter-

control-travel dependent curve value can be made.

Flight phase-dependent Dual Rate and Expo

settings

If ﬂ ight phases are set up in the »Phase settings«

and »Phase assignment« menus and each assigned

a name,e.g. "Normal", the name in question will

be displayed at the bottom left of the display. Just

actuate the respective switch to switch between ﬂ ight

phases.

Basic procedure

Switch to the desired ﬂ ight phase then use the 1.

 selection keys of the left or right touch pad

to select the desired line: "Aileron", "Elevator" or

"Rudder".

Use the 2.  selection keys of the left or right

touch pad to change into the column labeled

"EXPO".

Tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch pad. The

corresponding input ﬁ eld is shown highlighted.

Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to set 4.

the desired value.

Tap the center 5. SET key of the right touch pad to

complete the entry.

A simultaneous tap on the 6.  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made

back to its respective default value.

Dual Rate function

If a switchover between two variants is desired,

assign a switch in the column labeled with the

switch symbol (as described in the section "Assigning

transmitter controls, switches and control switches"

on page 56).

121

Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models

bottom edge of the display in order to separately

change the dual-rate values shown in inverse video

for each of the two switch positions.

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

111%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

88%

At the same time, the Dual-Rate curve will be

presented in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the

 or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will

reset a changed entry ﬁ eld value displayed in inverse

video back to "100 %".

Caution:

For safety reasons, Dual Rate value settings should

not be less than 20 %.

Some examples of Dual Rate values:

Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Dual Rate = 100% Dual Rate = 50% Dual Rate = 20%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

––––––

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Normal

If necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter

control switches C1 … C8 or C1i … C8i or one of the

logical switches L1 … L8 or L1i … L8i from the list of

"expanded switches".

The switch so assigned appears on the display,

together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's

switching direction.

In the case of "C" or "L" switches, the joystick or

another transmitter control or a certain switching

logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a

control switch must have been appropriately deﬁ ned

in the »Control switch« menu, see page 135, and a

logical switch must have been appropriately deﬁ ned

in the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138.

Whichever switch has been assigned … the

respective switch will appear in the display together

with a switch symbol indicating the switch's direction

if actuated, e.g. in the «Normal» ﬂ ight phase.

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

Once the value ﬁ eld has been activated with a brief

tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, use the

selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move

into the Dual-Rate value column labeled SEL at the

Exponential function

If a switchover between two variants is desired,

assign a switch in the column labeled with the

switch symbol (as described in the section "Assigning

transmitter controls, switches and control switches"

on page 56).

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Normal

If necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter

control switches C1 … C8 or C1i … C8i or one of the

logical switches L1 … L8 or L1i … L8i from the list of

"expanded switches".

The switch so assigned appears on the display,

together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's

switching direction.

In the case of "C" or "L" switches, the joystick or

another transmitter control or a certain switching

logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a

control switch must have been appropriately deﬁ ned

in the »Control switch« menu, see page 135, and a

logical switch must have been appropriately deﬁ ned

in the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138.

Whichever switch has been assigned … the

respective switch appears on the display together

with a switch icon that indicates the switch's

respective direction when moved.

122 Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

Select the right-hand column at the lower edge of the

display marked with SEL and activate the value ﬁ eld

with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad, the selection keys on the left or right touch

pad can now be used to alter the Expo value shown

in the highlighted ﬁ eld, separately for each of the two

switch positions.

Now, for example, there is an opportunity to ﬂ y with

a linear curve characteristic with the switch in one

direction, and to preset a value other than 0 % for the

other switch direction:

+50%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

At the same time, the Expo curve will be presented

in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the  or 

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a

changed entry ﬁ eld value displayed in inverse video

back to "0 %".

Some examples of Expo values:

Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Expo = +100% Expo = +50% Expo = –100%

In each of these examples, the Dual Rate value

equals 100 %.

Combining Dual Rate and Expo

If values have been entered for both the Dual Rate

and the Expo function, the effects of both functions

will overlap, for example, as follows:

Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Expo = +100%, DR = 125% Expo = +100%, DR = 50% Expo = –100%, DR = 50%

Asymmetric setting of Dual Rate and Expo

To make an asymmetric setting, i.e. a Dual Rate

or Expo setting dependent on the direction of

the respective joystick, ﬁ rst access the »Control

switch« menu and assign one of the C1 … C8

control switches – "C3", for example – to the desired

transmitter control, e.g. control 3 for the elevator

function. Do not change the switching point for

the joystick's neutral position (0 %). Now return

to the "Dual Rate / Expo" menu and select the

corresponding control function ("Elevator" in this

example).

Now, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the

right touch pad, activate the switch assignment

and change to the expanded switches then use the

selection keys to move on to the previously deﬁ ned

"C3" control switch.

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

––––––

–––

SEL

–––

–t–

100%

EXPO

SEL

Moewünschten Schalter

toe die EIN Position

(erw. Schalter: SET)

Normal

Control/Logic/fix switch

C2 C4 C5 C6

C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2

C1 C3

A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad will conﬁ rm the assignment of this switch.

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

Now use one of the selection keys to move into the

right column then move the elevator joystick into its

appropriate end-point to enter a separate Dual Rate

value for each direction, e.g. for "Up elevator" …

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

77%

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

… and "Down elevator":

123

Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

111%

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

The vertical dashed line shows the current elevator

joystick position.

Set the Expo values as necessary in the same

manner.

124 Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopters

Dual Rate / Expo

Conﬁ gurable control characteristics for roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to

scroll to the »Dual Rate / Expo« menu option in the

Multi-function menu:

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup modelHelicopter type

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

––––––

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

The Dual Rate / Expo function permits switching or

controlling of control travels and characteristics for

the control functions roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor, i.e.

control functions 2 … 4; it is switch-driven and ﬂ ight-

phase independent.

An individual curve characteristic for control function

1 (motor/collective pitch), featuring up to 8 separately

programmable points, can be set either in the

»Channel 1 curve« menu or separately for throttle

and pitch in the »Helicopter mixer« menu, see text

beginning page 176 and 312.

Similar to control travel settings in the »Control

adjust« menu, Dual Rate operates directly on the

respective control function, independent of whether

it is an individual servo or multiple servos connected

via complex mixer and coupling functions.

The control travel for each switch position can be set

to between 0 and 125 % of normal full travel.

Expo, on the other hand, enables ﬁ ner-grained

control of the model for values larger than 0 %

around the center position of the primary control

function (roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor), without forfeiting

full movement at the end-points of joystick travel.

For values less than 0 %, the reverse is true: control

increases around the neutral position and diminishes

towards the end-points. The degree of "progression"

can therefore be set within a total range of -100 %

to +100 %, where 0 % equates to the normal, linear

control characteristics.

Rotary-output servos, now generally commonplace,

offer another application. This is because the actual

control surface movement is not linear: as the

rotational angle of the output disc or lever increases,

the control surface rate of travel over the control

linkage continually decreases – depending on the

position of the linkage point on the output disc. This

effect can be counteracted with Expo values greater

than 0 % such that rotational angle travel increases

over-proportionally with increasing joystick throw.

The Expo setting also affects the relevant control

function directly, whether this controls a single servo

or multiple servos – via any number of mixer and

coupling functions.

For both Dual Rate and Expo functions, switch

assignment can be set up in any way desired, which

therefore permits the triggering of multiple functions

using one and the same switch. This, in turn, offers

the opportunity to link the triggering of Dual Rate and

Expo functions to a single switch: this offers many

advantages – particularly for very high-speed models.

The graphic screen displays the curve characteristics

directly. Once you select a menu line, the dotted

vertical line follows the movement of the respective

joystick, so you can clearly see the dependency of

the curve value on the transmitter control.

Flight phase-dependent Dual Rate and Expo

settings

If ﬂ ight phases are set up in the »Phase settings«

and »Phase assignment« menus and each assigned

a name,e.g. "Normal", the name in question will be

displayed at the bottom left of the display. In this

scenario, you can operate the corresponding switch

to switch between ﬂ ight phases.

Basic procedure

Switch to the desired ﬂ ight phase then use the 1.

 selection keys of the left or right touch pad

to select the desired line: "Roll", "Pitch ax" or

"Tail rot".

Use the 2.  selection keys of the left or right

touch pad to change into the column labeled

"EXPO".

Tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch pad. The

corresponding input ﬁ eld is shown highlighted.

Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to set 4.

the desired value.

Tap the center 5. SET key of the right touch pad to

complete the entry.

A simultaneous tap on the 6.  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made

back to its respective default value.

Dual Rate function

If a switchover between two variants is desired,

assign a switch in the column labeled with the

switch symbol (as described in the section "Assigning

transmitter controls, switches and control switches"

on page 56).

125

Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopters

Exponential function

If a switchover between two variants is desired,

assign a switch in the column labeled with the

switch symbol (as described in the section "Assigning

transmitter controls, switches and control switches"

on page 56).

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Normal

If necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter

control switches C1 … C8 or C1i … C8i or one of the

logical switches L1 … L8 or L1i … L8i from the list of

"expanded switches".

The switch so assigned appears on the display,

together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's

switching direction.

In the case of "C" or "L" switches, the joystick or

another transmitter control or a certain switching

logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a

control switch must have been appropriately deﬁ ned

in the »Control switch« menu, see page 119, and a

logical switch must have been appropriately deﬁ ned

in the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138.

Whichever switch has been assigned … the

respective switch appears on the display together

with a switch icon that indicates the switch's

respective direction when moved.

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

––––––

–––

SEL

–––

–

100%

EXPO

SEL

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Normal

If necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter

control switches C1 … C8 or C1i … C8i or one of the

logical switches L1 … L8 or L1i … L8i from the list of

"expanded switches".

The switch so assigned appears on the display,

together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's

switching direction.

In the case of "C" or "L" switches, the joystick or

another transmitter control or a certain switching

logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a

control switch must have been appropriately deﬁ ned

in the »Control switch« menu, see page 119, and a

logical switch must have been appropriately deﬁ ned

in the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138.

Whichever switch has been assigned … the

respective switch will appear in the display together

with a switch symbol indicating the switch's direction

if actuated, e.g. in the «Normal» ﬂ ight phase.

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

Once the value ﬁ eld has been activated with a brief

tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, use the

selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move

into the Dual-Rate value column labeled SEL at the

bottom edge of the display in order to separately

change the dual-rate values shown in inverse video

for each of the two switch positions.

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

111%

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

88%

At the same time, the Dual-Rate curve will be

presented in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the

 or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will

reset a changed entry ﬁ eld value displayed in inverse

video back to "100 %".

Caution:

For safety reasons, Dual Rate value settings should

not be less than 20 %.

Some examples of Dual Rate values:

Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Dual Rate = 100% Dual Rate = 50% Dual Rate = 20%

126 Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopters

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

Select the right-hand column at the lower edge of the

display marked with SEL and activate the value ﬁ eld

with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad, the selection keys on the left or right touch

pad can now be used to alter the Expo value shown

in the highlighted ﬁ eld, separately for each of the two

switch positions.

Now, for example, you have the opportunity to ﬂ y with

a linear curve characteristic with the switch in one

direction, and to pre-set a value other than 0 % in the

other switching direction:

+50%

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

At the same time, the Expo curve will be presented

in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the  or 

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a

changed entry ﬁ eld value displayed in inverse video

back to "0 %".

Some examples of Expo values:

Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Expo = +100% Expo = +50% Expo = –100%

In each of these examples, the Dual Rate value

equals 100 %.

Combining Dual Rate and Expo

If you have entered values for both the Dual Rate

and the Expo function, the effect from on function

is superimposed on the other, as shown in these

examples:

Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Expo = +100%, DR = 125% Expo = +100%, DR = 50% Expo = –100%, DR = 50%

Asymmetric setting of Dual Rate and Expo

To make an asymmetric setting, i.e. a Dual Rate

or Expo setting dependent on the direction of

the respective joystick, ﬁ rst access the »Control

switch« menu and assign one of the C1 … C4

control switches – "C3" for example – to the desired

transmitter control, e.g. control 3 for the pitch

function. Do not change the switching point for

the joystick's neutral position (0 %). Now return

to the "Dual Rate / Expo" menu and select the

corresponding control function ("Pitch ax" in this

example).

Now, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the

right touch pad, activate the switch assignment

and change to the expanded switches then use the

selection keys to move on to the previously deﬁ ned

"C3" control switch.

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

––––––

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Moünschten Schalter

to die EIN Position

(erw. Schalter: SET)

Normal

Control/Logic/fix switch

C2 C4 C5 C6

C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2

C1 C3

A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad will conﬁ rm the assignment of this switch.

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

Now use one of the selection keys to move into the

right column then move the pitch-axis joystick to the

appropriate end-point in order to enter a separate Dual

Rate value for each direction, e.g. for "Pitch-axis up" …

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

77%

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

and "Pitch-axis down":

127

Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopters

Roll

Nick

Tail

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

111%

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

The vertical dashed line shows the current pitch axis

joystick position.

Set the Expo values as necessary in the same

manner.

128 Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Winged models

Channel 1 curve

Control characteristics for throttle/spoiler joystick

Using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad,

scroll to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option in the

Multi-function menu:

Model select

Servo adjustmentStick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup modelModel type

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

–

100

O U T P U T

Since the carburetor response or the effect of the

airbrakes or spoilers is often non-linear, you can make

compensatory adjustments to these in this menu.

The menu therefore enables you to change the

control characteristics of the throttle / airbrake

joystick, regardless of whether this control function

affects the servo connected to control channel 1

directly or affects multiple servos via various mixers.

If ﬂ ight phases have been speciﬁ ed in the »Phase

settings« and »Phase assignment« menus (see

pages 142 and 148) this option can be adapted on

a ﬂ ight-phase basis. The given ﬂ ight phase name,

e.g. «normal», will be shown at the bottom left of

the screen.

The control curve can be deﬁ ned by up to 8 points

(termed "reference points" below) placed anywhere

along the path of joystick travel. While the on-screen

graph considerably simpliﬁ es the process of setting

and adjusting the reference points, we recommend

that you set fewer reference points to begin with.

In the basic software set-up, 2 reference

points – namely the end-points at the bottom end

of joystick travel ("L", low = -100 % travel) and

the top end of joystick travel ("H", high = +100 %

travel) – deﬁ ne a linear characteristic curve.

First, switch to your chosen ﬂ ight phase, if necessary.

Setting reference points

By moving the transmitter control (throttle/airbrake

joystick), you can reposition the vertical line in the

graph between the two end-points "L" and "H". The

current joystick position is also displayed in numerical

form on the "Input" line (-100 % to +100 %). The point

at which this line crosses the curve is termed the

"Output", and can be varied at the reference points

within the range -125 % to +125 %. The control signal

altered in this way will then affect all subsequent

mixer and coupling functions.

In the example above, the joystick is at 0 % of control

travel and also generates an output signal of 0 %,

since the characteristic curve is linear.

Up to 6 additional reference points can be set

between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the

distance between neighboring reference points must

not be less than approx. 25 %.

Move the joystick. If a question mark can be seen in

the "Point" frame, then the next reference point can be

set with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad. Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by a number

and the value ﬁ eld to the right of the reference point

number will be shown in inverse video.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

+50%

–

100

O U T P U T

+50%

Normal

The order in which you generate the (maximum) 6

reference points between the end-points "L" and

"H" is irrelevant, since the reference points are

continuously renumbered automatically from left to

right as they are entered.

Erasing reference points

To delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 6),

use the joystick to move the vertical line into the

vicinity of the reference point in question. As soon

as the reference point number and its corresponding

value on the "Point" line are displayed in inverse

video, see ﬁ gure above, these can be erased with a

simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right

touch pad (CLEAR). Complete the operation with a

brief tap on the center key ESC of the left touch pad.

Changing reference point values

Move the joystick into the range of the reference point

that is to be changed: "L" (low), 1 … 6 or "H" (high).

The number and current curve value of this point are

displayed. The reference point value displayed in

inverse video can be changed in a range of -125 % to

+125 % without inﬂ uencing the neighboring reference

points.

129

Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Winged models

Example:

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–75%

–

100

O U T P U T

–75%

Normal

In this sample screen image, reference point "2" has

been set to -75 %.

Note:

If the joystick does not coincide with the exact

reference point, please note that the percentage

value on the "Output" line always relates to the

current joystick position.

Trim point function

Alternatively, jumping through active reference points,

in ascending or descending order, can be done with

the  selection keys of the left touch pad. Note

that "active" reference points are those which have

already been set. When a jump is made from one to

another, the point value ﬁ eld for the jump's destination

reference point in the screen's Point line will be

displayed in inverse video and its position in the graph

will be marked with the point's number (L, 1 … max.

6 and H) in inverse video and a small triangle. The

selection keys on the right touch pad can then be used

to change the reference point jumped to as described

above, entirely independently of the control position.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–75%

–

100

O U T P U T

0% 2

Normal

Trim point

One touch on the center ESC key of the left touch

pad terminates this trim point function.

Trim offset function

When a value ﬁ eld is active, i.e. in inverse video, it is

not only possible, as previously described, to jump to

and change a reference point already set with the 

selection keys of the left touch pad but also an existing

curve can be vertically repositioned with the  keys

of the left touch pad within a range of ±25%.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–50%

–

100

O U T P U T

–50%

Normal

Trim offset

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–100%

–

100

O U T P U T

–100%

Normal

Trim offset

A tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will

also terminate this function.

Trim x-axis function

This function is activated by tapping the left () or

right () selection key of the right touch pad with

an active (i.e. inverse video) value ﬁ eld. You can

then use the selection keys on the right touch pad to

reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as

you wish.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–83%

–

100

O U T P U T

–100%

Normal

Trim X-axis

Notes:

If the point is repositioned horizontally further •

away from the current control position than

approx. ±25 %, a "?" sign will reappear in the line

Point. This question mark does not refer to the

repositioned point, however: instead, it signiﬁ es

that a further point can be set at the current

control position.

Please note that the percentage value on the •

"Output" line always relates to the current joystick

position and not to the position of the point.

Smoothing the Channel 1 curve

In the example below, sample reference points have

been set:

reference point 1 to 0 %,

reference point 2 to +25 % and

reference point 3 to -75 %

as described in the last section.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

–

100

O U T P U T

Normal

This "jagged" curve proﬁ le can be smoothed

automatically simply by pressing a button.

130 Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Winged models

Do this – from a situation as illustrated – with a brief

tap on the  selection key of the left touch pad. This

will cause a switchover from "(Curve) off" to "(Curve)

on" (or vice versa).

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

on Point

Output

Input –50%

–

100

O U T P U T

Normal

Note:

The curves shown here are for demonstration

purposes only and are not at all representative of

real throttle or airbrake curves. A speciﬁ c application

example can be found in the programming examples

on page 274.

131

Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Helicopters

Channel 1 curve

Control characteristics for throttle/collective pitch stick

Using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad,

scroll to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option in the

Multi-function menu:

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup modelHelicopter type

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

–

100

O U T P U T

Since the carburetor response or the effect of

collective pitch is often non-linear, you can make

compensatory adjustments to these in this menu.

The menu therefore enables modiﬁ cation of the

control characteristics of the motor/collective pitch

joystick, regardless of whether this control function

affects the servo connected to control channel 1

directly or affects multiple servos via various mixers.

If ﬂ ight phases have been speciﬁ ed in the »Phase

settings« and »Phase assignment« menus (see

pages 142 and 148) this option can be adapted on

a ﬂ ight-phase basis. The given ﬂ ight phase name,

e.g. «normal», will be shown at the bottom left of

the screen.

The control curve can be deﬁ ned by up to 8 points

(termed "reference points" below) placed anywhere

along the path of joystick travel. While the on-screen

graph considerably simpliﬁ es the process of setting

and adjusting the reference points, we recommend

that you set fewer reference points to begin with.

Please note that the curve characteristic you set

here acts as the input signal for speciﬁ c mixers in the

»Helicopter mixer« menu, page 176.

»Heli-Mixer«

C1 

C1  Tail rotor

C-1-

curve

Pitch

Thr

Pitch-

stick

In the basic software set-up, 2 reference points–

namely the end-points at the bottom end of joystick

travel ("L", low = -100 % travel) and the top end of

joystick travel ("H", high = +100 % travel)–deﬁ ne a

linear characteristic curve.

First, switch to your chosen ﬂ ight phase, if necessary.

Setting reference points

By moving the transmitter control (motor/collective

pitch stick), you can reposition the vertical line in the

graph between the two end-points "L" and "H". The

current joystick position is also displayed in numerical

form on the "Input" line (-100 % to +100 %). The point

at which this line crosses the curve is termed the

"Output", and can be varied at the reference points

within the range -125 % to +125 %. The control signal

altered in this way will then affect all subsequent

mixer and coupling functions.

In the example above, the joystick is at 0 % of control

travel and also generates an output signal of 0 %,

since the characteristic curve is linear.

Up to 6 additional reference points can be set

between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the

distance between neighboring reference points must

not be less than approx. 25 %.

Move the joystick. If a question mark can be seen in

the "Point" frame, then the next reference point can be

set with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad. Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by a number

and the value ﬁ eld to the right of the reference point

number will be shown in inverse video.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

+50%

–

100

O U T P U T

+50%

Normal

The order in which you generate the (maximum) 8

reference points between the end-points "L" and

"H" is irrelevant, since the reference points are

continuously renumbered automatically from left to

right as they are entered.

Erasing reference points

To delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 6), use

the joystick to move the vertical line into the vicinity

of the reference point in question. As soon as the

reference point number and its associated value is

shown on the "Point" line (see screen image above),

following activation of the value ﬁ eld on the "Point"

line now in inverse video with a simultaneous tap on

the or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) it

can be erased. Complete the operation with a brief tap

on the center key ESC of the left touch pad.

Changing reference point values

Move the joystick into the range of the reference point

that is to be changed: "L" (low), 1 … 6 or "H" (high).

The number and current curve value of this point are

displayed. Activate the value ﬁ eld with a brief tap on

the center SET key of the right touch pad. The point

value ﬁ eld is now highlighted and can be set within

132 Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Helicopters

the range -125 % to +125 %, and without inﬂ uencing

the neighboring reference points.

Example:

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–75%

–

100

O U T P U T

–75%

Normal

In this sample screen image, reference point "2" has

been set to -75 %.

Note:

If the joystick does not coincide with the exact

reference point, please note that the percentage

value on the "Output" line always relates to the

current joystick position.

Trim point function

Alternatively, jumping through set reference points can

be done with the  selection keys of the left touch

pad in either ascending or descending order, whereby

the number of the jump's destination reference point

in the graph will be marked with the point's number,

1 … max. 6, in inverse video. The selection keys on

the right touch pad can then be used to change the

reference point jumped to as described above, entirely

independently of the control position.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–75%

–

100

O U T P U T

0% 2

Normal

Trim point

One touch on the center ESC key of the left touch

pad terminates this trim point function.

Trim offset function

When a value ﬁ eld is active, i.e. in inverse video, it is

not only possible, as previously described, to jump to

and change a reference point already set with the 

selection keys of the left touch pad but also an existing

curve can be vertically repositioned with the  keys

of the left touch pad within a range of ±25%.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–50%

–

100

O U T P U T

–50%

Normal

Trim offset

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–100%

–

100

O U T P U T

–100%

Normal

Trim offset

A tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will

also terminate this function.

Trim x-axis function

This function is activated by tapping the left () or

right () selection key of the right touch pad with

an active (i.e. inverse video) value ﬁ eld. You can

then use the selection keys on the right touch pad to

reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as

you wish.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–83%

–

100

O U T P U T

–100%

Normal

Trim X-axis

Notes:

If the point is repositioned horizontally further •

away from the current control position than

approx. ±25 %, a "?" sign will reappear in the line

Point. This question mark does not refer to the

repositioned point, however: instead, it signiﬁ es

that a further point can be set at the current

control position.

Please note that the percentage value on the •

"Output" line always relates to the current joystick

position and not to the position of the point.

Smoothing the Channel 1 curve

In the example below, sample reference points have

been set:

reference point 1 to 0 %,

reference point 2 to +25 % and

reference point 3 to -75 %

as described in the last section.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

–

100

O U T P U T

Normal

This "jagged" curve proﬁ le can be smoothed

automatically simply by pressing a button.

133

Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Helicopters

Do this – from a situation as illustrated – with a brief

tap on the  selection key of the left touch pad. This

will cause a switchover from "(Curve) off" to "(Curve)

on" (or vice versa).

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

on Point

Output

Input –50%

–

100

O U T P U T

Normal

Note:

The curves shown here are for demonstration purposes

only and are not at all representative of real throttle

curves. For real-world application examples, see the

programming examples on pages 274 and 313.

134 Detail program description - Switch display

Switch display

Displaying switch positions

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to scroll to the »Switch display« option in the multi-

function menu:

Model select

Servo adjustmentStick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup modelModel type

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup modelHelicopter type

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Switch

Contrl

C1 C2 C3 C8

2345678910

11 12 13 14 15 16

switch

C4 C5 C6 C7

This feature is used to check the functions and

give an overview of switches 1 … 16 and the

programmable control switches C1… C8.

If a switch is pressed, the switch number is revealed

by one of the display items changing from an OFF

to an ON symbol (or vice versa). To improve the

legibility of this screen, a closed switch ﬁ eld is also

shown in inverse video (i.e. on a dark background).

For control switches C1 … C8, activation of the

corresponding transmitter control – which must have

been previously assigned on the »Control switch«

menu – will reveal the control switch number and

direction.

Note:

Switch numbering 1 to 16 as shown here corresponds

to the labeling of switch plug-in locations on the

transmitter's circuit board. The numbering of the

switches has no effect on the programming of the

transmitter, however.

135

Detail program description - Control switches

Control switches

Programming the control switches

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to scroll to the »Control switch« option in the multi-

function menu:

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup model Model type

Control switch Logical switch

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch Display

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup model Helicopter type

Control switch Logical switch

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

SEL

–––

CONTROL SWITCH

Geb. 1

STO

–––

SEL

free

With many functions, it makes sense not to trigger

their actuation by using one of the normal switches,

but to trigger them automatically by the speciﬁ

freely programmable position of a transmitter control

or joystick.

Typical applications:

On/Off switching of an on-board glow plug in •

conjunction with the carburetor setting and/or

motor speed. (The glow plug heater switch for this

will be controlled by a transmitter-side mixer.)

Switching a stopwatch on or off to measure the •

simple running time of electric motors

Automated switch-off of a combi "aileron •  rudder"

mixer when extending the airbrakes, e.g. so as to

match the bank attitude of the model to the ground

slope when landing on a ridge, without the direction

of ﬂ ight also being affected by the rudder (if the

mixer were active).

Lowering landing ﬂ aps, adjusting elevator trim •

and/or executing speciﬁ c Dual Rate, Exponential

and Differential switchings when coming in to land,

as soon as the throttle joystick is moved beyond

the switching point. If required, a control switch

can be overridden using a separately assigned

switch in the 5th column.

The mc-16 HoTT program is equipped with a total of

eight so-called control switches ("C1" to "C8").

Accordingly, anywhere where switches can be

assigned you have the option not only of using

the 16 possible transmitter switches, but also of

choosing and assigning one of the "C1" … "C8"

control switches from the list of expanded switches

– as described in the section "Assigning transmitter

controls, switches and control switches" on page 56.

Furthermore, combining a control switch with an

additional switch (as described later) also permits

more complex switching permutations.

Basic procedure:

If no transmitter control is assigned, the 1.

corresponding input ﬁ eld of the column labeled

SEL (second column from the left) will be empty.

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch 2.

pad to select the line for the desired control switch

(1 to 8).

Brieﬂ y tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch

pad.

Move your selected transmitter control.4.

The associated transmitter control number

appears in the input ﬁ eld of the column above the

left switch icon.

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 5.

to move to the right into the column labeled STO.

Move the transmitter control to the desired switching 6.

point then brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the

right touch pad to save the switching point.

Complete the remaining settings such as 7.

switching direction, etc.

Exit from the menu with a tap on the center 8. ESC

key of the left touch pad.

Assigning a transmitter control to a control switch

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch

pad, select your chosen line (1 to 8). Following a ﬁ nal

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to

activate the control assignment, the message shown

below will appear in the display:

SEL

–––

CONTROL SWITCH

Geb. 1

STO

–––

SEL

frei

free

frei Move desired

control adj.

For example, the right-side proportional slider is now

to be assigned to control switch "C1", the default

throttle limiter for a helicopter model memory. So just

move this control in any direction. As soon as this is

detected, the control name appears on the display:

136 Detail program description - Control switches

SEL

–––

CONTROL SWITCH

Lever1

free

STO

–––

SEL

free

Resetting a control switch back to "free"

To reset a control switch back to "free", make sure

the display is as below …

SEL

–––

CONTROL SWITCH

Lever1

free

STO

–––

SEL

free

Move desired

control adj.

… then, with a brief simultaneous tap on the  or

 keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the entry

for a control will be erased.

Deﬁ ning the switching point

Using the  selection key of the left or right touch

pad to move the marker frame into the column

labeled STO (store).

Move the selected transmitter control to the position

at which the switching point, i.e. the switch between

OFF/ON, should trigger and brieﬂ y tap the center

SET key of the right touch pad. The current position

is displayed, for example "+85 %":

SEL

–––

CONTROL SWITCH

Lever1

free

+85%

STO

–––

SEL

free

The switching point can be altered at any time with

another tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad.

Note:

Do not, however, set a switching point at a transmitter

control's travel end-point, since this makes reliable

switching impossible. If a 2-way or 3-way switch is

used to operate a control switch, the switch point

should be programmed in advance with one of the

transmitter's proportional controls.

First, assign the corresponding proportional control

in the 2nd column and set the switching point in such

a way that will ensure the subsequent conﬁ guration

for the 2-way or 3-way switch will reliably exceed

this value. If you do not, the switching function will

be unreliable, since the control switch triggers only

if a value unambiguously fails to meet or exceeds

the value set! To complete the procedure, cancel the

transmitter control assignment then assign the 2-way

or 3-way switch.

Setting the switching direction

The switching direction of the control switch is

changed as required in the 4th column. Use the 

selection key of the left or right touch pad to move the

marker frame into the column labeled SEL (select).

Following a brief tap on the center SET key of the

right touch pad, the switch direction can by changed

back-and-forth between "normal" and "reversed" with

the selection keys of the left or right touch pad.

SEL

–––

CONTROL SWITCH

Lever1

free

+85%

STO

–––

SEL

free

SEL

–––

CONTROL SWITCH

Lever1

free

+85%

STO

–––

SEL

free

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of

the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the switch

direction back to "=>".

The current switch position of the control switch is

displayed in the leftmost column by the switch icon

next to the number of the control switch.

Notes:

In this example control switch"C1" is open as long •

as transmitter control "Lever 1" (the throttle limiter

for a helicopter) is less than +85 % of control travel.

It closes once the switching point is exceeded, i.e.

by a value over +85 % and up to the upper limit.

In the above example with the switching direction •

reversed, control switch "C1" remains closed while

the transmitter control is at less than +85 % of full

travel. As soon as the switching point is exceeded,

in this example a value between +85 % and the

upper travel end-point , "C3" will open.

If a control switch – e.g. "C1" – has multiple •

assignments, you should bear in mind that the

switching direction set here applies to all C3

switches.

137

Detail program description - Control switches

The switch state can also be inverted by reversing •

the control in the »Control adjust« menu.

Combining a control switch with a switch

The control switch can be overridden by a further

switch, so that e.g. in certain ﬂ ight situations

the function to be triggered can be activated

independently of the control position and thus the

position of the control switch.

Change to the value ﬁ eld in the 5th column, the

column above the rightmost switch symbol. In the

simplest case, select one of the switches mounted

in the two switch panels, as described in the section

"Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control

switches" on page 56. The number of this switch,

e.g. "10", appears on the display in the next-to-the

last column at the right, together with a switch icon

indicating the switch's current state.

While this switch is open, the "C1" control switch

is active, i.e. it triggers at the switching point; if the

switch is closed, the control switch now remains

permanently closed as well, independently of the

control position and switching direction:

SEL

–––

CONTROL SWITCH

Lever1

free

+85%

STO

–––

SEL

free

Combining two control switches

For more complex applications, however, it can

prove necessary to override this control switch with a

second control switch.

Example:

Control switch "C1" will now be assigned to control

function 3 (= control 3) instead of its previous

assignment "Lever1". The switching point is at its

center point, i.e. at 0 %. The switch chosen in the

next-to-the-last right column is "C2" from the list of

expanded switches. This "C2" control switch will now

be allocated in its own line to the middle proportional

slider "Slide2", whose switch-point is +50 % liege:

SEL

+50%

–––

CONTROL SWITCH

Cnt. 1

Slide2

STO

–––

SEL

free

The switching directions indicated in the fourth column

from the left will now show control switch "C2" as being

closed as long as joystick (control 3) and/or "Slide 2"

are located on the other side of their switch-points.

This diversity of switching options certainly offers you

enough scope for specialized applications to suit any

type of model

138 Detail program description - Logical switches

Logical switches

Programming logical switches

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to scroll to the »Control switch« option in the multi-

function menu:

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup model Model type

Control switch Logical switch

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch Display

Suppress codes Suppress models

Base setup model Helicopter type

Control switch Logical switch

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

AND

–––

LOGICAL SWITCHES

AND

–––

SEL

–––

These functions permit two switches, control switches

and/or logical switches or any combination of these to

be combined with one another to create logical "AND"

and "OR" functionality. A total of 8 logical switches,

"L1 … L8" can be programmed.

The result of such a logical switch function – shown

in the display's rightmost column – can be used as

another switch function. Allocation of a switch to

a logical function is done in the familiar manner in

the columns labeled by the two switch symbols,

as described in the section "Assigning transmitter

controls, switches and control switches" on page56.

That is, by moving the respective switch from OFF to

ON or, after a tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad, by selecting one of the expanded switches

with the selection keys.

UND

AND

–––

LOGICAL SWITCHES

UND

–––

SEL

–––

–––Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

UND

–––

LOGICAL SWITCHES

UND

–––

SEL

–––

Mowünschten Schalter

to die EIN Position

(erw. Schalter: SET)

Control/Logic/fix switch

C2 C4 C5 C6

C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2

C1 C3

Potential applications for this:

Multiple functions, which are normally independent •

of one another, are to be put into a deﬁ

ned state

by way of an »Emergency switch«.

The establishment of dependencies for initiating a •

switch-on warning, see »Basic settings, model«

menu.

"AND" / "OR"

Once a given value ﬁ eld has been activated in the

column labeled SEL, the "AND" and "OR" logic

operator can be selected with the selection keys.

"AND" function: The logical switch is only closed

when both input switches are

closed.

"OR" function: The logical switch is closed

when at least one of the input

switches is closed.

Note:

The difference between AND and OR logic switches

is made clear by the settings and input states of the

display ﬁ gure below.

AND

–––

LOGICAL SWITCHES

AND

L2I

SEL

L2I

–––

"L3" is only closed when both the "L1" and "L2"

switches are closed. This means that both switches,

1 and 2, must be closed and, at the same time, either

3 or 4.

In order to make these logical switches usable, they

can be speciﬁ ed in those menus which use switches

by calling them up via the additional "expanded

switches" selection menu.

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad will afford access to the expanded switches.

M wünschten Schalter

to die EIN Position

(erw. Schalter: SET)

Control/Logic/fix switch

C2 C4 C5 C6

C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2

C3C1

Now use the selection keys to pick the desired control

switch "C1 … C8", ﬁ xed switch "FX" or logical switch

"L1 … L8" or the respected inverted switch "C1i …

C8i", "FXi" or "L1i … L8i", for example, "L3i":

139

Detail program description - Logical switches

Moewünschten Schalter

to die EIN Position

(erw. Schalter: SET)

Control/Logic/fix switch

C8i L2i L4i

L5i L6i L7i L1 L2

C7i L1i

L8i

L3i

A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad will adopt the selected switch into the menu.

Model time

Batt. time

Top :

Centr:

Stop watch

Flight time

Timer

–––12:34h

1:23h

0:00

L3I

Alarm

Timer

Remark about inverted switches:

Selection of an inverted switch for a switch

assignment, e.g "L1i" instead of "L1", simply speciﬁ es

the opposite switch direction (state), i.e. non-inverted

usage results in a certain switch activating a particular

function when it is in its switched-on state but

inverted usage results in a certain switch activating a

particular function when it is in its switched-off state.

Such applications arise when, for example, one and

the same switch is to switch one function on but, at

the same time, it is to switch a second function off,

and vice versa. Logical switches permit other, quite

complex, switching options to be created.

140 How is a ﬂ ight phase programmed?

How is a ﬂ ight phase programmed?

The concept of ﬂ ight phase programming

General information on ﬂ ight phase programming

During a ﬂ ight, you will often want to apply different

settings – e.g. ﬂ ap or trim settings for a ﬁ xed-wing

aircraft or collective pitch and throttle servo settings

for a helicopter – at particular times in the ﬂ ight (e.g.

take-off, approach, hover, auto-rotate, etc.). With mc-

16 HoTT, you can access such presets automatically

using switches or control switches.

Flight phases are also of great utility during ﬂ ight

testing. You can conﬁ gure various set-ups and then

switch between them during the ﬂ ight: this enables

you to identify the most appropriate program set-up

for your model quickly and easily.

The basic programming procedure is a three-

stage process

First, you have to set up the different ﬂ ight phases, 1.

i.e. you assign names to phases 1 … max. 8.

Each name is then shown in all phase-speciﬁ c

menus and also on the basic display. To avoid

abrupt transitions when switching between the

various phases, you can also program a period

of time during which a "soft" transition to the next

phase takes place.

For ﬁ xed-wing aircraft programs, these settings

are made in the »Phase settings« menu. The

programming of helicopters begins with either

the »Basic settings, model« menu, if you wish

to set up autorotation or, otherwise, with the

»Phase settings« menu.

In the second stage, you use the »2. Phase

assignment« menu to set up the required "phase

switches".

Once these are set, you can then move to the 3.

ﬂ ight phase-dependent menus (see the tables

below) to start programming the settings for the

individual ﬂ ight phases.

List of ﬂ ight phase-relevant menus for ﬁ xed-wing

programs:

Menu Page

»Control adjust« 108

»Dual Rate / Expo« 120

»Channel 1 curve« 128

»Phase settings« 142

»Phase assignment« 148

»Phase trim« 150

»Non-delayed channels« 151

»Flight phase timers« 156

»Wing mixers« 160

»MIX active/phase« 204

»Trim memory« 224

List of ﬂ ight phase-relevant menus for helicopter

programs:

Menu Page

»Control adjust« 112

»Dual Rate / Expo« 124

»Channel 1 curve« 131

»Phase settings« 146

»Phase assignment« 148

»Non-delayed channels« 151

»Flight phase timers« 156

»Helicopter mixer« 176

»MIX active/phase« 204

»Trim memory« 226

All other menus are model-speciﬁ c and thus cannot

be programmed separately for each ﬂ ight phase.

Accordingly, changes you make in all other menus

apply uniformly to all ﬂ ight phases for that speciﬁ c

model. In some cases it may be desirable to use the

»Suppress codes« menu (see page 74) to remove

non-alterable menus from the multi-function list

while programming ﬂ ight phases. Two examples of

ﬂ ight phase programming can be found in the text

beginning on page 288.

141

How is a ﬂ ight phase programmed?

142 Detail program description - Phase settings | Winged models

Phase settings

Setting up ﬂ ight phases

When you set up ﬂ ight phases for ﬁ xed-wing

aircraft models, you start with this menu. You

assign individual phases a name and also assign

a period of time for a (soft) transition into each

phase. Note that – depending on your model and

your settings – switch times much longer than the

default 0.1 s have proven useful. You can also set up

several phases with names and transition times even

if you don't currently have a use for them, since the

decision as to which of the "occupied" phases you

activate is made only on the »Phase assignment«

menu (page 148) when setting "phase switches".

Whether or not one of the phases 1 … 8 currently has

an assigned switch and the state of the switch can be

seen in the "status" column at the far right.

Symbol Meaning

– No switch assigned

+ Phase can be accessed via switch

Indicates the phase currently active

Note:

The "Copy ﬂ ight phase" option on the »Copy / Erase«

menu is a useful aid when programming the various

ﬂ ight phases. First, you need to determine the

parameters for a speciﬁ c ﬂ ight phase; these are then

copied to the next ﬂ ight phase, where they can then be

modiﬁ ed as appropriate.

"Name" column

Brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad then assign the needed phases (phase 1 up to

maximum of 8 phases) by picking their names from

the selection list with the selection keys of the left or

right touch pad. In addition to this standard pool of

names, the »General basic settings« menu, page

261, permits up to 10 names of personal preference

to be deﬁ ned.

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad

to scroll to the »Phase settings« menu option in the

multi-function menu:

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Base setup model Model type

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Within one model memory, the mc-16 HoTT lets

you program up to 8 discrete groups of settings for

various conditions met during the ﬂ ight. The grouped

settings are typically termed "ﬂ ight phases" and are

programmed in the corresponding menus.

Depending on the setting "Throttle min. forward/

back" or "None" in the "Motor on C1" line of the

»Model type« menu, calling up the »Phase settings«

menu option will cause the transmitter's display to look

like one of the two variants shown below …

Motor on C1 "none"•

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim Sw. time

–



Motor on C1 "Throttle min front/rear"•

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Name Timer Sw. time

Motor

yes 0.1s

–



The order in which phases 1 to max. 8 are assigned is

entirely irrelevant and you can leave gaps as you wish.

Nonetheless, you should always start with "Phase 1",

the "Normal phase", which is always active if …

… no phase switch is set in the »• Phase

assignment« menu or if

no phase has been assigned to speciﬁ c •

combinations of switches.

The deﬁ nition of the phase name "Normal" could

therefore be a useful one to adopt for "Phase 1".

The names themselves have absolutely no technical

signiﬁ cance for programming; their only purpose is to

help you to identify which phase is active at any time

and are thus displayed in all ﬂ ight phase-dependent

menus and also on the transmitter's basic display.

Column "Fl.ph.Tim" or "Timer"

In addition to the standard timers on the basic screen

display, other timers are also available whose settings

are conﬁ gured in the »Flight phase timers« menu,

page 156.

Clk 1, Clk 2, Clk 3, Lap, Time1, Time2

The ﬂ ight phase timers "Clk 1 … 3" plus "Time1"

and "Time2" run only in the ﬂ ight phase to which

they have been assigned in this menu. During other

ﬂ ight phases they are stopped (and hidden) and the

assigned stop/start switch then has no effect.

The lap counter, once started, continues to run

through changes of phase, however, although it can

be stopped during any ﬂ ight phase via the center

ESC key of the left touch pad.

While you can obviously record lap times using "Lap"

and a switch, the two timers "Time1" and "Time2"

have the following meaning:

Time 1

This timer will only measure time during which

the switch or control switch assigned in the "Lap

time/Tim tab" line of the »Flight phase timers«

menu, page 156, is "closed". The frequency at

which the switch is activated is shown on the

143

Detail program description - Phase settings | Winged models

basic display. This counter ﬁ eld is highlighted

as soon as the switch for the "Time1" timer is

"opened", i.e. the timer is stopped:

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0:00h

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

Lap 00 0.0s

RX VOLT:4.9V

When necessary, the selection keys can be

used to access and read the sequence of

switching times.

Application:

Measurement of e.g. motor switch-on times, if

the same switch also actuates the motor.

Time 2

This timer stores both the "off" and the "on"

periods for the associated switch, i.e. every

switch actuation in either direction will cause a

record to be written for the timer, the timer will

be reset then starts incrementing by "1" again

as time passes.

Each time count can be suspended with the

center ESC key of the right touch pad, without

actuating the switch itself. Activating the

switch, in turn, increments the counter by 1 and

restarts the "Time 2" timer.

In order to read out the time memory with the

selection keys, the "Time 2" timer must ﬁ rst be

suspended by using the ESC key of the right

touch pad.

Application:

In addition to the motor runtimes, for example,

the unpowered glide times between these

could also be recorded.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset suspended timers

shown in the basic display.

"Motor" column

Note:

This column is only available if "forward/back" is

present in the "Motor on C1" line of the »Model type«

menu.

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Name Timer Sw. time

Motor

0.1s

yes 0.1s

–



Normal

Launch

Dist.

yes

"yes" The motor connected to receiver output 1 will

be controlled by the C1 joystick (throttle/brake

stick).

The brake system to be set up on the »Wing

mixers« menu is deactivated:

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

off

The motor connected to receiver output 1 is

decoupled from the C1 joystick (throttle/brake

stick) and is held in its OFF position – as

speciﬁ ed by the setting "Throttle min. forward

/ back" – automatically.

The brake system to be set up in the »Wing

mixers« menu is activated and is actuated by

the C1 joystick.

Elevator curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

AILE

WK2

Diff.- reduct

Note:

The settings available depend on the number

of control surface servos selected on the

line "Ailerons/Camber-changing ﬂ aps in the

»Model type« menu.

"Sw. time" column

When you switch between ﬂ ight phases, it is

advisable to use this column to program a switch time

for a "soft" transition INTO (!) the respective phase.

Accordingly, there is also an option for specifying a

different time for the switchover from any phase to,

for example, Phase 3 than for a switchover to Phase

Use the  selection key of the left or right touch pad

to move the marker frame to the right beyond the

column labeled "Timer" and, if applicable, also the

column labeled "Motor".

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Name Timer Sw. time

Motor

0.1s

yes 0.1s

–



Normal

Launch

Dist.

yes

Following a brief tap on the center SET key of the

right touch pad, the switchover time value in the ﬁ eld

displayed in inverse video can be changed within a

range of 0 and 9.9 s.

144 Detail program description - Phase settings | Winged models

Example:

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Name Timer Sw. time

Motor

0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 1.1s

yes 0.1s

–



Normal

Launch

Dist.

yes

The switchover time from any other phase to Phase 1

«normal» will take 2.2 s.

The time for a switchover from, for example, Phase 1

to Phase 3, is set to 1.1 s and the time for a switchover

from Phase 1 or 3 to Phase 2 "Launch" is 1.5 s.

Such asymmetric transition times can be useful when,

e.g. switching between extremely different ﬂ ight

phases, such as between aerobatics and normal ﬂ ight.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the time in the

currently active value ﬁ eld back to 0.1.

Note:

The "switch time" set here applies uniformly to all

settings that are speciﬁ c to ﬂ ight phases, and thus

to all mixers activated in the »Wing mixers« menu,

see page 160. Accordingly, the transition between

ﬂ ight phase-speciﬁ c mixers does not occur abruptly.

However, if individual servos are to be switched

without a delay then these can be deﬁ ned accordingly

in the »Non-delayed chan« menu (see page 151).

145

For your notes

146 Detail program description - Phase settings | Helicopters

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad

to scroll to the »Phase settings« menu option in the

multi-function menu:

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Base setup model Helicopter type

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim. Sw.time

–



Autorot Autorot

Within one model memory, the mc-16 HoTT lets

you program up to 7 discrete groups of settings for

various conditions met during the ﬂ ight. These are in

addition to the auto-rotation ﬂ ight phase that can be

set up in the »Basic settings, model« menu. The

grouped settings are typically termed "ﬂ ight phases"

and are programmed in appropriate menus.

Setting up ﬂ ight phases

When you set up ﬂ ight phases for helicopter models,

you start with this menu. You assign individual phases

a name and also assign a period of time for a (soft)

transition into each phase. Note that – depending on

your model and your settings – switch times much

longer than the default 0.1 s have proven useful.

You can also set up several phases with names and

transition times even if you don't currently have a

use for them, since the decision as to which of the

Phase settings

Setting up ﬂ ight phases

"occupied" phases you activate is made only on the

»Phase assignment« menu (page 148) when setting

"phase switches".

The "Status" column, second from the left, shows which

one of the phases 1 … 7, including the autorotation

phase this is 8, has already been assigned to a switch,

plus the current status of that switch:

Symbol Meaning

– No switch assigned

+ Phase can be accessed via switch

Indicates the phase currently active

Note:

The "Copy ﬂ ight phase" option on the »Copy /

Erase« menu is a useful aid when programming the

various ﬂ ight phases. First, you need to determine the

parameters for a speciﬁ c ﬂ ight phase; these are then

copied to the next ﬂ ight phase, where they can then

be modiﬁ ed as appropriate.

"Name" column

The ﬁ rst line, and thus the ﬁ rst ﬂ ight phase, is

reserved for autorotation ﬂ ight, see »Basic settings,

model« menu. Accordingly, the predeﬁ ned name

cannot be changed.

Use the selection keys to move to the line "Phase 1".

Brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad then assign the needed phase (phase 1 up to

maximum of 7 phases) by picking the respective

name from the selection list with the selection keys of

the left or right touch pad. In addition to this standard

pool of names, the »General basic settings« menu,

page 261, permits up to 10 names of personal

preference to be deﬁ ned.

The order in which phases 1 to max. 7 are assigned is

entirely irrelevant and you can leave gaps as you wish.

Nonetheless, you should always start with "Phase 1",

the "Normal phase", which is always active if …

… no phase switch is set in the »• Phase

assignment« menu or if

no phase has been assigned to speciﬁ c •

combinations of switches.

The deﬁ nition of the phase name "Normal" could

therefore be a useful one to adopt for "Phase 1".

The names themselves have absolutely no technical

signiﬁ cance for programming; their only purpose is to

help you to identify which phase is active at any time

and are thus displayed in all ﬂ ight phase-dependent

menus and also on the transmitter's basic display.

"ph. Tim." column

In addition to the standard timers on the basic screen

display, other timers are also available whose settings

are conﬁ gured in the »Flight phase timers« menu,

page 156.

Clk 1, Clk 2, Clk 3, Lap, Time1, Time2

The ﬂ ight phase timers "Clk 1 … 3" plus "Time1"

and "Time2" run only in the ﬂ ight phase to which

they have been assigned in this menu. During other

ﬂ ight phases they are stopped (and hidden) and the

assigned stop/start switch then has no effect.

The lap counter, once started, continues to run

through changes of phase, however, although it can

be stopped during any ﬂ ight phase via the center

ESC key of the left touch pad.

While you can obviously record lap times using "Lap"

and a switch, the two timers "Time1" and "Time2"

have the following meaning:

Time1

This timer will only measure time during which

the switch or control switch assigned in the

"Lap time/Tim tab" line of the »Flight phase

timers« menu, page 156, is "closed". The

frequency at which the switch is activated

is shown on the basic display. This counter

ﬁ eld is highlighted as soon as the switch for

the "Time1" timer is "opened", i.e. the timer is

stopped:

147

Detail program description - Phase settings | Helicopters

#02 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0:00h

Starlet

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

Lap 00 0.0s

RX VOLT:4.9V

When necessary, the selection keys can be

used to access and read the sequence of

switching times.

Application:

Measurement of (e.g.) ﬂ ight phases with

increased motor speed, if the same switch is

used to actuate ﬂ ight phase switching.

Time2

This timer stores both the "off" and the "on"

periods for the associated switch, i.e. every

switch actuation in either direction will cause a

record to be written for the timer, the timer will

be reset then starts incrementing by "1" again

as time passes.

Each time count can be suspended with the

center ESC key of the right touch pad, without

actuating the switch itself. Activating the

switch, in turn, increments the counter by 1 and

restarts the "Time2" timer.

In order to read out the time memory with the

selection keys, the "Time2" timer must ﬁ rst be

suspended by using the ESC key of the right

touch pad.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset suspended timers

shown in the basic display.

"Sw. time" column

When you switch between ﬂ ight phases, it is

advisable to use this column to program a switch time

for a "soft" transition INTO (!) the respective phase.

Accordingly, there is also an option for specifying a

different time for the switchover from any phase to,

for example, Phase 3 than for a switchover to Phase

However, for reasons of safety, transition into the

autorotation ﬂ ight phase should ALWAYS be set

to switch without any time delay. The arrow "->"

in the column labeled "Sw.time" at the end of the

"Autorot" line indicates that a delay can be set when

transitioning FROM (!) autorotation INTO (!) another

phase.

Use the  selection key of the left or right touch pad

to move the marker frame to the right beyond the

"Sw.time" column.

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim. Sw.time

–



Autorot Autorot

Following a brief tap on the center SET key of the

right touch pad, the switchover time value in the ﬁ eld

displayed in inverse video can be changed within a

range of 0 and 9.9 s.

Example:

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

5.5s

3.0s

2.0s

4.0s

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim. Sw.time

–



Autorot Autorot

Normal

Hover

Speed

A delay of 5.5 s applies when switching FROM auto-

rotation into any other phase. A delay of 0.0 s always

applies when switching TO auto-rotation.

The switchover time from any other phase to Phase 1

«normal» will take 3.0 s.

When switching from e.g. Phase 1 to Phase 3, the

switch time is set to 4.0 s.

Such asymmetric transition times can be useful when,

e.g. switching between extremely different ﬂ ight

phases, such as between aerobatics and normal ﬂ ight.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the time in the

currently active value ﬁ eld back to 0.1.

Note:

The "switch time" set here applies uniformly to all

settings that are speciﬁ c to ﬂ ight phases, and thus

to all mixers activated in the »Wing mixers« menu,

see page 160. Accordingly, the transition between

ﬂ ight phase-speciﬁ c mixers does not occur abruptly.

If you want individual servos to be switched without

a delay, however, deﬁ ne these accordingly in the

»Non-delayed channels« menu (see page 151).

148 Detail program description - Phase assignment

Phase assignment

Setting up ﬂ ight phases

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to

scroll to the »Phase assignment« menu option in the

multi-function menu:

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Base setup model Model type

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Base setup model Helicopter type

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior

1 Normal

combi

ABDEF

Note:

A phase name appears to the right of the phase

number at the bottom right of the display only if you

have assigned the name beforehand on the »Phase

settings« menu.

In the »Phase settings« menu, described above

separately for ﬁ xed-wing and helicopter models, you

will have set up names for your phases. On this menu

– which is identical for both model types – you must

now specify the switches or switch combinations that

you want to use to trigger each phase. One exception

for helicopter menu: one of the two auto-rotation

switches must be set on the menu »Basic settings,

model«.

Please note the following priorities:

If • no ﬂ ight phase switches nor these names have

been assigned in this menu, the model is in ﬂ ight

phase "1". Accordingly, by the time you start

programming ﬂ ight phases, you should therefore

have already given this ﬂ ight phase the phase

name "Normal".

Independent of the phases with allocated switch •

settings made in this menu, the autorotation phase

(only present for the "Helicopter" model type and

to be assigned a switch in the »Basic settings,

model« menu) always (!) takes precedence.

Accordingly, as soon as the auto-rotation switch

in question is activated, the following warning

appears:

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior

1 Normal

Kombination

ABDEF

Autorot

Phase switch "A" is given priority over all •

subsequent switch positions, from "B" to "F"

Phase switch "B" is given priority over all •

subsequent switch positions, from "C" to "F"

3-way switches should • always be assigned from

the middle position.

Therefore use switch "A" and/or switch "B" only if you

wish to change from any other ﬂ ight phase – apart

from the helicopter's autorotation phase – directly into

the phase that is assigned to this switch.

Programming ﬂ ight phase switches

Once you have conﬁ gured your desired switch

position, "A" to "F", using the selection keys on the

left or right touch pad, a switch (whether a "normal"

switch or an expanded switch) is then assigned

as described in the section "Assigning transmitter

controls, switches and control switches" (page 56).

The order in which assignment is made is irrelevant:

you must ensure only that you assign what are,

for you, the "correct" switches. (In the helicopter

program, for example, you should also take care

to ensure you do not use this menu to re-assign

any auto-rotation switch already assigned on the

»Basic settings, model« menu.)

Example: 4 ﬂ ight phases with phase priority

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior

1 Normal

combi

ABDEF

267

Assigning ﬂ ight phases to switch positions

Now that names have been assigned to the ﬂ ight

phases (1 … max. 8) in the »Phase settings« menu

and also programmed switches in this menu, but …

at the bottom right of the display screen, you only

see <1 Normal > – regardless of the positions the

switches are in!?

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to

move the marker frame down and to the right and then

brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:

149

Detail program description - Phase assignment

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior

1Normal

combi

ABDEF

267

Now close one (or more, as required) of the switches

that you have assigned, and assign one of the ﬂ ight

phase names from the list you selected beforehand

on the »Phase settings« menu to this switch position

or combination.

Here, for example, we assign the "Launch" phase to

the closed ("I") priority switch "A" …

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior

2 Launch

combi

ABDEF

2I 6 7

… if, for example, we wish to switch to this phase

regardless of the "C" … "F" switch positions, because

the same switch activates an electric motor, etc.

Use the same approach to set the other switches or

combinations of switches.

Theoretically – for the situation where all three are

closed – you could use the three single switches

shown in the example to deﬁ ne an additional

ﬁ fth ﬂ ight phase on the »Phase settings« menu.

However, since this example assumes just four ﬂ ight

phases, you can leave the default phase name as «1

Normal» for this switch position.

Leave this menu in the familiar way, with a tap on the

center ESC key of the left touch pad.

Tips:

If you have named more phases than you •

currently have switches deﬁ ned for then this is not

really problematic. You can repeat and change

your switch assignment as you wish at any point in

time. And you can also name additional phases at

any time and then assign switches to them.

When assigning switches, check whether the •

switches are already otherwise assigned to ensure

that you avoid duplicate assignments.

Important notice:

Before a phase switch is assigned, the model

settings conﬁ gured are now to be found in the

ﬂ ight phase «1 Normal», i.e. all ﬂ ight phase-

dependent menus are reset to the standard

conﬁ gurations for all other ﬂ ight phases.

To avoid having to start from scratch in every

ﬂ ight phase, you can copy over these standard

settings by using the command "Copy ﬂ ight

phase" on the "Copy / Erase" menu to replace

them with ﬂ ight data obtained from the «Normal»

ﬂ ight phase. You then need only to make further

ﬂ ight phase-speciﬁ c changes to the settings.

150 Detail program description - Phase trim | Winged models

Phase trim

Flap settings speciﬁ c to ﬂ ight phases

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to

scroll to the »Phase trim« menu option in the multi-

function menu:

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Normal 0%

ELEV

Depending on the settings made on the "Aileron/

camber ﬂ aps" line of the »Model type« menu, page

94, and in the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, this

menu offers at least one control function for ELEV …

Normal 0%

ELEV

Normal

… and, with the maximum of 4 for ELEV, AI, Al2,

FL and FL2 a total of ﬁ ve control functions for ﬂ ight-

phase-speciﬁ

c trim settings. The setting of the ﬂ ight

phase switches, to be deﬁ ned beforehand in the

»Phase assignment« menu, determines the line

that is chosen. An asterisk marks the ﬂ ight phase

currently active. At the same time, the name of the

respective ﬂ ight phase is also shown at the bottom

left of the screen. You can enter settings only for the

currently active ﬂ ight phase, e.g.:

Normal 0%

ELEV

Normal

AI FL FL2

Launch

Thermal

Dist.

0% 0%

AI2

In the column labeled "ELEV" a phase-speciﬁ c

elevator trim setting can be stored.

Important notice:

Settings made in this column have an

immediate effect on elevator trim and,

accordingly, the trim setting display. In

turn, the elevator trim control affects the

values of this column either "globally"

or "phase-speciﬁ cally", depending on

the "global/phase" setting made on the

"Elev" line of the »Stick mode« menu.

Columns "Al", "Al2", "Fl", "Fl2"

The values in these columns (max. 4)

are identical to those in the "Fl.pos"

(ﬂ ap position) line on the "Multi-ﬂ ap menu"

within the »Wing mixers« menu. For this

reason, any changes made always affect

the other menu directly – and vice versa.

After selecting the appropriate column with the

selection keys of the left or right touch pad and a brief

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, these

values can be entered, independent of one another,

with the selection keys within a range of ±150 %.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

in the currently active value ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

151

Detail program description - Non-delayed channels

Non-delayed channels

Channel-dependent delays to switching

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to

scroll to the »Phase trim« menu option in the multi-

function menu:

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

NONDELAYED CHANNELS

non-delayed

normal

1234567 8 9 10111213141516

On the »Phase settings« menu, you will have set the

necessary switch times for ﬂ ight phase transitions.

In this menu, you can now deactivate the transition

delay set previously, per ﬂ ight phase and for

individual control channels – e.g. for the motor

channel for electric models or heading-lock systems

for helicopter gyros, etc.

Switch over to the corresponding ﬂ ight phase. This is

shown at the bottom left of the display.

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad

to move the "" onto the corresponding channel then

brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.

The switch icon changes from "normal" to "non-delay"

and vice versa.

NONDELAYED CHANNELS

non-delayed

normal

1234567 8 9 10111213141516

Normal

152 Detail program description - Timers (general)

Timers (general)

Timers on the basic display

The default transmitter display shows a total of three

timers. These are: the transmitter operating time on

the left of the display, plus a "Top" and a "Centr" timer

on the right of the display:

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0:00h

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

Runde 00

RX VOLT:4.9V

Another, ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c timer can also be

conﬁ gured with settings in the two menus »Flight

phase timers«, page 156, and »Phase settings«,

pages 142 and 146. This optional ﬂ ight phase timer –

such as the lap time timer – appears underneath the

"Centr" (ﬂ ight time) timer:

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0:00h

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

Lap 00 0.0s

RX VOLT:4.9V

To conﬁ gure the "Top" and/or "Centr" timer, use the

selection keys on the left or right touch pad to access

the menu option »Timers (general)« in the Multi-

function menu:

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Model time

Batt. time

Top :Stop watch

Centr:Flight tim

Timer

–––12:34h

1:23h

0:00

–––

CLR

" Model time"

This timer shows the currently registered total

access time to the currently active model memory

location. If necessary, this automatic time acquisition

can also be inﬂ uenced by assigning an on/off

switch to this "Model time" timer in the rightmost

column labeled with the switch symbol. This timer

can then be switched on and off as desired. This

switch is assigned (and erased again as required)

as described in the section "Assigning transmitter

controls, switches and control switches" on page 56.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the time back to

"0:00 h".

" Batt. time"

This operating hours timer records the transmitter's

total switch-on time since the last time the battery

was charged, thus monitoring the transmitter battery.

A switch cannot be assigned to this function.

This timer is automatically reset to "0:00 h" when the

transmitter detects that the voltage of the battery is

signiﬁ cantly higher than the last time it was switched

on, e.g. as a result of a charge process or the

installation of a replacement battery.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will also reset this time back

to "0:00 h".

"Top" and "Centr"

These two timers are located at the top right of the

basic display (see the screen image immediately to

the left) and can be assigned a different name; their

function and mode of operation varies according to

the name you give them. Independently of the name

each is given, the "Top" and "Centr" timer can be

programmed to run any length of time forwards or

backwards – see further below.

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to

select the line for the "Top" or "Centr" timer.

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

–––12:34h

1:23h

0:00

–––

Alarm

Timer

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

Now use the selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to select your desired timer and complete your

selection with another tap on the center SET key of

the right touch pad:

"Stop watch" or "Motor(run)time"

Both of these two timer variants can be started and

stopped using any of the available switches.

The timer deﬁ ned as "Stopwatch" or "Motor runtime"

sums the "ON" times continually, so that once your

aircraft has landed, you can read off the sum of all

switch "ON" times since the timer was last reset.

153

Detail program description - Timers (general)

"Flight tim"

This timer is especially for measuring ﬂ ight time: it

can be started with an assigned switch and stopped

(once the switch has been re-opened) on the basic

display with a tap on the center ESC key of the left

touch pad. Once in a stopped state, it can be reset to

its starting value with a simultaneous tap on the 

or  keys of the right touch pad at the same time

(CLEAR).

If you wish to assign a control switch, you must ﬁ rst

deﬁ ne the switch on the»Control switch« menu and

specify the switching point along the travel of the

transmitter control. As an example, the timer can then

be started by "opening the throttle" or by opening the

throttle limiter for helicopter models.

Note:

The combination of the ﬂ ight time timer and

stopwatch means that you can glance at the display

at any time and see how long you have been ﬂ ying

since the timers were started, plus the total motor

runtime within this particular period of ﬂ ight time.

"Time frame"

The time frame timer is intended primarily for use

by competition pilots, who are frequently given a

timeframe within which they must complete certain

tasks. The timer is started in precisely the same way

as the ﬂ ight time timer. To stop the timer, ﬁ rst ensure

the timer switch is at its OFF position. Then touch and

hold the  or  selection keys then touch the

center ESC key.

Switch assignment

Use the  selection key of the left or right touch

pad to move the marker frame next to the triangle

as shown in the screen image shown below to the

rightmost column of the relevant line:

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

–––12:34h

1:23h

0:00

–––

Alarm

Timer

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

Here, you assign a switch as described in the section

"Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control

switches" (page 56).

Typical application:

The "stop watch" and "ﬂ

ight timer" are both to be

started simultaneously using the C1 stick as soon as

a user-deﬁ ned switching point is exceeded.

For this purpose, deﬁ ne a control switch, e.g. "C1", in

the »Control switch« menu, page 135. To complete

the procedure, you select this from the expanded

switches (see the section "Assigning transmitter

controls, switches and control switches" on page 56)

and assign it to both these lines:

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

–––12:34h

1:23h

0:00

Alarm

Timer

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

The stopwatch will now stop when the stick is below

the switching point and resume running above the

switching point. The same is not true for the ﬂ ight

time timer, however, which also starts the ﬁ rst time

the switching point is exceeded. It can be stopped

(with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch

pad) only once the stopwatch is stopped; it can then

be reset to its starting value with a simultaneous

tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad

(CLEAR).

Switchover between "forward" and "backward"

Timer runs forwards (stopwatch function)

Following switch assignment, if the stopwatch shown

on the basic display is started with the initial value of

"0:00", then it will run forwards for max. 180 min and

59 s and then restart from 0:00.

Timer runs backwards (countdown function)

In the – left – minutes ﬁ eld, select a start time between

0 and 180 min …

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

–––12:34h

1:23h

180:00

0:00

–––

Alarm

Timer

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

… and in the – right – seconds ﬁ eld, select a start time

between 0 and 59 s (or any combination of these):

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

–––12:34h

1:23h

180:59

0:00

–––

Alarm

Timer

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

Procedure

Select the desired input ﬁ eld with the 1. 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad.

Now tap on 2. SET in the center of the right

touch pad.

Make a time selection in the inverse video minutes 3.

or seconds ﬁ

eld with the selection keys of the right

touch pad.

154 Detail program description - Timers (general)

Complete the entry with a tap on the center 4.

SET key.

A simultaneous tap on the 5.  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any setting

made back to "0" or "00".

Following a switch back to the basic display (by 6.

tapping the center ESC key of the left touch

pad as many times as required), make sure

the stopwatch is stopped then simultaneously

tap on the  or  keys of the right touch

pad (CLEAR) to switchover the stopwatch to

the "timer" function. Look at the top right in the

following ﬁ gure.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

10:01.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0:00h

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

Runde 00

RX VOLT:4.9V

After the assigned switch is activated, the stopwatch

starts at the initial value set and runs backward

("countdown clock function"). Once the timer reaches

zero it does not stop, but continues to run to enable

you to read off the time elapsed after it reached 0:00.

To make this absolutely clear, the timer is shown

highlighted.

"Alarm" timer

The "Alarm" column is accessed by moving the

marker frame to the right with the  selection key of

the left or right touch pad until it is over the column

labeled "Alarm". In the "Alarm" column a time

between 5 and 90 seconds (in 5-second increments)

can be deﬁ ned. This is the amount of time the timer is

to count down before issuing an acoustic signal. This

eliminates the need to repeatedly check the display

continually during the ﬂ ight.

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

–––12:34h

1:23h

180:59

0:00

90s

–––

Alarm

Timer

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any settings made

back to "0 s".

Audible signal sequence

30 s before zero: Triple beep

Single beep every two seconds

20 s before zero: Double beep

Single beep every two seconds

10 s before zero: Single beep

Single beep every second

5 s before zero: every second a single beep at a

higher frequency

zero: longer beep signal and

changeover of display presentation

to inverse video

Resetting suspended timers

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset timers which have

already been suspended.

Notes:

Timers that are running backwards are shown on •

the basic display with a ﬂ ashing colon (:) between

the minutes and the seconds ﬁ elds.

A typical application, "Timer activation via the C1 •

joystick", can be found on page 284.

An interim timer function change becomes •

active after timer/s have been suspended and

subsequently reset by a simultaneous tap on the

 or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR).

Remember that the timer switches also remain •

active during programming.

A simultaneous tap on the •  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the previously

stopped timer to its programmed initial value, refer

to sections "Alarm" and "Timer".

155

For your notes

156 Detail program description - Fl. phase timers

Fl. phase timers

Selecting and setting

A description of how timers are assigned to a ﬂ ight

phase has already been provided in the text for the

»Phase settings« menu, page 142 and 146. The

same section has also described the properties of

"Time1" and "Time2". This section now proceeds to

describe "Timer 1, 2 and 3" and the "lap counter/time

table" timer variants.

The additional, ﬂ ight phase-speciﬁ c timer selected

is displayed on the basic display underneath the

"center" timer, as shown below:

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0:00h

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

Timer 100 0:00.0

RX VOLT:4.9V

On this menu …

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

… you can now program "Clks 1 … 3" as stopwatches

(i.e. timers that run forward) or as countdown/alarm

timers (i.e. timers that run backwards). You can assign

any switch to these timers, and the same is true of the

"lap counter/timetable" timer:

Timer 1

Timer 2

Timer 3

Lap time/Tim tab

–––

0:00

Lap display

–––

AlarmTimer

The ﬂ ight phase timers "Timer 1 … 3" and the

"Time1"/"Time2" timers (described in the »Phase

settings« section, pp. 142 and 146) run only in the

ﬂ

ight phase to which they have been assigned. They

are also shown as appropriate on the basic display.

During other ﬂ ight phases they are stopped (and

hidden) and the assigned stop/start switch then has

no effect.

The lap counter, once started, continues to run

through changes of phase (as discussed further

below), however, although it can be stopped during

any ﬂ ight phase via the center ESC key of the left

touch pad.

Clks 1, 2 and 3

These timers are started and stopped via a switch or

control switch. To do so, ﬁ rst use the selection keys

to select the appropriate column via the switch icon

at the bottom right. Then set the switch that you want

by brieﬂ y tapping the center SET key of the right

touch pad, as described in the section "Assigning

transmitter controls, switches and control switches"

(p. 56). Here, too, a control switch offers you the

option of activating the timer via one of the joysticks

or proportional controls. The switching point along

the transmitter control travel is set on the »Control

switch« menu (page 135).

Remember that the timer switches also remain active

in programming mode.

Switching between "forwards" and "backwards"

Stopwatch mode (timer runs forwards)

In this mode, the timer starts at the initial value "0:00"

(min:sec) when you operate the assigned switch. If

it reaches the maximum time of 180 min. and 59 s, it

will re-start at "0:00".

"Countdown" (timer runs backwards)

Following the activation of the corresponding value

ﬁ elds (by tapping the center SET key of the right

touch pad), if a time in minutes (maximum 180 min)

and/or a time in seconds (maximum 59 s, right ﬁ eld)

is set, then the timers will run backwards from this

initial value following the activation of the assigned

switch (see section "Assigning transmitter controls,

switches and control switches" on page 56), i.e.

a "countdown" function will apply. Once the timer

reaches zero it does not stop, however, but continues

to run (highlighted) so you can read off the time

elapsed after reaching zero.

Note:

Timers that are running backwards are shown on the

basic display with a ﬂ ashing colon (:) between the

minutes and the seconds ﬁ elds.

A simultaneous tap on the or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset entry values in the

currently active ﬁ eld back to zero.

"Alarm" timer

Timer 1

Timer 2

Timer 3

Lap time/Tim tab

–––

0:00

Lap display

–––

AlarmTimer

157

Detail program description - Fl. phase timers

The input ﬁ eld in the "Alarm" column is activated with

a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

In this ﬁ eld, use the selection keys on the left or right

touch pad to deﬁ ne a time between 5 and 90 seconds

(in 5-second increments) before zero is reached: at

this point an audible signal will be emitted, which

eliminates the need for you to check the screen

continually during the ﬂ ight.

Audible signal sequence

30 s before zero: Triple beep

Single beep every two seconds

20 s before zero: Double beep

Single beep every two seconds

10 s before zero: Single beep

Single beep every second

5 s before zero: every second a single beep at a

higher frequency

zero: longer beep signal and changeover

of display presentation to inverse

video

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset entry values

entered in the currently active ﬁ eld to "0 s".

Note:

If timer functionality has been changed at any point,

then the new changes to settings are made active

only after the timer(s) have been stopped on the

basic display then making a simultaneous tap on the

 or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) to

reset them.

Like the two standard timers positioned above it, this

third, phase-speciﬁ c timer is reset to its starting value

with a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of

the right touch pad (CLEAR). It is stopped in all ﬂ ight

phases at the same time, even if it has not been

stopped separately in the other ﬂ ight phases.

Lap counter/timetable

Timer 1

Timer 2

Timer 3

Lap time/Tim tab

–––

0:00

Lap display

–––

AlarmTimer

On the "Lap time/tim tab" line, assign a switch only

as described in the section "Assigning transmitter

controls, switches and control switches" (page 56).

Preferably, make use of one of the two momentary

switches which are included as standard equipment

in the switch panels. The lap count is incremented

each time by one lap while simultaneously (and

automatically) the lap time elapsed during this lap

is stopped (and recorded). This momentary switch

simultaneously starts the stopwatch for the next lap.

As the timer is triggered, the lap or switch impulse

counter is shown highlighted.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0:00h

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

Lap 11 2:34.5

RX VOLT:4.9V

"Time1" and "Time2" operate in the same manner; for

more details please read the section on the »Phase

settings« menu option.

Up to 99 lap times can be recorded and accessed,

each with a maximum duration of 99 minutes and

59.9 seconds.

To stop the timer in question, tap the center ESC key

of the left touch pad on the basic display after the

ﬂ ight is over. The lap or switch impulse counter is now

shown in "normal" mode:

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0:00h

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

Lap 12 1:23.4

RX VOLT:4.9V

A simultaneously tap on the  or  keys of

the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) will

reset the counter to "00" and deletes the stored

times. However, the timers must have been stopped

before this.

Notes:

If you have selected a normal switch to operate •

the lap counter, take care to ensure that this

switch is set to "OFF" before touching the center

ESC key of the left touch pad.

If you should forget to switch off the lap counter in •

a phase which is now not currently active, simply

touch the center ESC key of the left touch pad.

To swap between the basic display and the

"Lap Display" …

SEL

01:23.4

02:34.5

03:45.6

05 SEL

04:56.7

05:67.8

00:00.0

06 06:78.9

00:00.0

00:00.0 1/6

… go to the line …

158 Detail program description - Fl. phase timers

Lap Display

Timer 1

Timer 2

Timer 3

Lap time/Tim tab

–––

0:00

Lap display

–––

AlarmTimer

… and use the switch assigned. You assign this

switch as described in the section "Assigning

transmitter controls, switches and control switches"

(page 56).

159

What is a mixer?

?rexim a si tahW

Basic functionality

With many models, a mix of the model's functions

is often desirable, i.e. coupling aileron to rudder or

coupling two servos together, in cases where rudder

control surfaces with the same functionality are to be

controlled together using a single servo. In all cases,

the signal ﬂ ow at the "output" of the control function

on the transmitter control-side "branches" – , this also

means: "downstream" of transmitter control options

such as e.g. »Dual Rate / Expo«, »Control adjust«,

»Channel 1 curve« etc. – in order for the signal to

have its predeﬁ ned effect on the "input" of another

control channel and thus on another receiver output.

Example: V-tail mixer

Servo 4,8 V

C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

Servo 4,8 V

C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

V-tail mixer

Control function inputs

Control channels

(receiver outputs)

Elevator stick

Rudder stick

Right rudder / elevator

Left rudder / elevator

Rudder

Elevator

Rudder

Elevator

The mc-16 HoTT transmitter software contains a

large number of pre-programmed coupling functions

as standard, which are designed to mix together two

(or more) control channels. Accordingly, the mixer

named in the example just above can be activated in

the "Tail" line of the »Model type« menu by selecting

"V-tail".

In addition, for each model memory in the ﬁ xed-

wing and helicopter programs , the software makes

available a total of eight freely programmable linear

mixers, four freely programmable curve mixers and

four dual mixers.

Also be sure to read the general remarks about "free

mixers" in this manual, beginning on page 192.

160 Detail program description - Wing mixers

»Mix only channel« (see page 205) and use it

for another purpose with the help of a "free mixer"

(see page 193).

If "2AIL" is set in the »• Model type« menu, page

94, then ﬂ ight-phase dependent ﬂ ap functionality

can be achieved with appropriate offset settings for

input 5 in the »Control adjust« menu, page 108.

For almost any menu option, you have the option •

of checking your settings by switching to the

servo display screen, which is accessed with a

simultaneous tap on the  selection keys of

the left touch pad.

Caution:

With aileron actuation the bars of the »Servo

display« move in the same manner and in the

opposite manner with camber changing ﬂ ap

actuation.

Note that if two ﬂ ap servos have been selected, •

any transmitter control assigned to input 7 will be

decoupled in the software in order to avoid errors

in operating the ﬂ aps. The same applies to input

10 and the selection "2AIL 4FL".

A range of options are available for positioning •

ﬂ aps. You can …

a) … simply accept one position per ﬂ ight phase,

by setting only the corresponding trim values.

b) … vary the ﬂ aps positioned by a) with a

transmitter control assigned to "Input 6" in

the »Control adjust« menu, (page 108),

and if desired by also selecting ﬂ ight-phase

dependency "PH" in the "Type" column.

The selected transmitter control directly controls

the two ﬂ ap servos located on receiver outputs 6

and 7 and, as required, also the two FL2 servos

connected to outputs 9 and 10 – assuming that

corresponding ﬂ aps have been speciﬁ ed on the

"Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line in the »Model type«

menu. This transmitter control indirectly

»Phase assignment«, page 148 menus, and these

ﬂ ight phases have been given names, the ﬂ ight

phase names will appear along the bottom display

edge, e.g. «Normal».

Aileron differential

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0%0%

–––

rudder



Normal

All options can then also be programmed speciﬁ c to a

ﬂ ight phase.

Comments:

In the »• Model type« menu, (page 94), control of

the brake ﬂ ap mixer can be reprogrammed from

control input 1 to 7, 8 or 9 and a corresponding

offset point can be set.

Braking with raised ailerons and, if present, •

lowered ﬂ aps (crow system) can be implemented

by making appropriate settings on the "Crow" line

of the "Brake settings" sub-menu.

If you would like to alternate between the C1 stick •

controlling an electric drive system and a butterﬂ y

system, then you can use the options in the

"Motor" column on the »Phase settings« menu –

refer to the example on page 279.

You can also use the opportunity to set switch •

times for a "soft" transition from ﬂ ight phase to

ﬂ ight phase on the »Phase settings« menu (see

page 142).

If your model features multiple wing ﬂ aps and a •

"crow / butterﬂ y system" (see below), but without

additional airbrakes, then you can separate output

1 (usually freed up by the above system) from

control function input 1 (throttle/brake stick) on the

Wing mixers

Calibrating the wing ﬂ ap system

Within the menu tree of the menu …

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

… the sub-menus and options available depend

entirely on the number of aileron and ﬂ ap servos set

up on the »Model type« menu, page 94 …

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 2AIL

M O D E L T Y PE

Brake Offset Input 1+100%

SEL

… which means that the only settings listed are the

ones that can actually be conﬁ gured. The resulting

menu structure gains not only in clarity but also

prevents potential programming errors.

For example, if "2AIL" has been preset, display of the

»Wing mixers« menu would appear (without camber

ﬂ aps) as shown below:

Aileron differential

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0%0%

–––

rudder



If various ﬂ ight phases are envisioned in the

settings of the »Phase settings«, page 142, and

161

Detail program description - Wing mixers

controls the ﬂ ap position of the ailerons via the

percentage value entered in the "Ail" (and "Ail2")

column on the "FLAP" line of the multi-ﬂ ap menu.

However, in order to improve control sensitivity

for ﬂ ap settings, travel should be reduced to

about 25 % in "Input 6" line of the »Control

adjust« menu.

c) … alternatively, you can also leave the default

entry of "0 %" in the "AILE" (and "AIL2") column

on the "FLAP" line of the multi-ﬂ ap menu, and

use the »Control adjust« menu to assign both

input 6 and input 5 to the same transmitter

control. You can then set the degree to which

both ﬂ ap pairs are affected, optionally making

this ﬂ ight phase-dependent by selecting "PH"

in the "Type" column, with the respective travel

adjustment.

Basic programming procedure

Select the desired line with the 1.  selection keys

of the left or right touch pad.

Depending on the line selected, the bottom line of

the display will either show the "Next page" icon

(



) or a switch icon.

Depending on the line selected, you will either 2.

switch to the next page – on which you carry out

the same procedure as below – or the desired

value ﬁ eld is activated by tapping the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Use the selection keys to set the mixer ratio or 3.

degree of differential.

To conﬁ gure symmetrical mixer values, move the

transmitter control or joystick to its center position,

so that the marker frame surrounds both value

ﬁ elds. To conﬁ gure asymmetric values, move the

transmitter control/joystick to the corresponding side.

Negative and positive parameter values are

possible, in order to be able to adjust the

respective function to the direction of servo

any mixers on the "Brake settings" sub-menu.

Otherwise, the mixer travel is expanded back to

100 % automatically.

All other mixers in the »Wing mixers« menu have

their neutral point with the control at its center, i.e.

they have no effect at this control position. The value

set is mixed in at full travel.

Mixer functions

The individual options in the »Wing mixers« menu

are discussed below, separately for single-, dual-

and multi-ﬂ ap models. Before we start, a number of

remarks on the differentials for ailerons and ﬂ aps:

Aileron differential

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0%0%

–––

rudder



Normal

Fl-Pos.

Diff.

Ail-tr

Normal AILE

+100%

WK2

FLAP

0% 0%

+100%

0%0%

+100% 0% 0%

FL +100%

0% +100%

For aerodynamic reasons, the drag generated on

an aileron oriented downwards is greater than that

generated by the same aileron when it is oriented

upwards by the same amount. One effect of this

unequal distribution of drag produces is a yawing

motion around the vertical axis and, accordingly, a

"turning away" from the intended direction of ﬂ ight,

which is why this undesirable side effect is also

rotation or ﬂ ap orientation.

A simultaneous tap on the 4.  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry value

in the given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to its

default value.

Complete the entry with a tap on the center 5. ESC

key of the left touch pad or the center SET key of

the right touch pad.

Assigning switches

Wing mixers "Aileron 2  4 rudder" and "Flaps 6 

3 elevator" can be made optionally on/off switchable

by way of a switch or expanded switch. Accordingly,

when the respective line is selected, the familiar

switch symbol ( ) will appear on the lower edge of

the screen.

Switching delays

The delay time or switch time conﬁ gured on

the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, for the

respective ﬂ ight phase also affects all wing mixers

and thus avoids abrupt changes to ﬂ ap conﬁ gurations

when switching between the ﬂ ight phases.

Mixer neutral points (Offset)

For all mixers on the "Brake settings" sub-menu, the

"brake offset" to be set on the »Model type« menu is

to be conﬁ gured to the transmitter control position at

which the airbrakes are retracted.

Accordingly, in the "Brake offset" line of the »Model

type« menu, see page 94, specify Input 1, 7, 8 or

9 and the offset to accommodate personal piloting

habits. When selecting "input 1", please note also

that you may need to specify your desired "Throttle

min" position "forward/back" before establishing the

offset point in the "Motor at C1" line.

Note:

If the offset is not set right at the end of the

transmitter travel, the rest of the travel is a "dead

zone", i.e. the transmitter control does not inﬂ uence

162 Detail program description - Wing mixers

used today offers considerable beneﬁ ts.

The degree of differential can be changed at any

time, for example, and, in extreme circumstances,

the downward deﬂ ection of an aileron, in what is

termed a "split" position, can be suppressed entirely.

This approach not only reduces or even suppresses

"adverse yaw", but can, in certain circumstances,

even generate a positive yaw: in such cases, an

aileron command will generate a yaw about the

vertical axis in the direction of the turn. For large

glider models in particular, this approach lets such

aircraft ﬂ y "clean" turns using just the ailerons, which

is not otherwise possible unaided.

The adjustment range of -100 % to +100 % makes it

possible to set a differential appropriate for each side,

regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron

servos. While "0 %" corresponds to a normal linkage,

i.e. no differential, "-100 %" or "+100 %" represents

the "split" function.

For aerobatic ﬂ ying, low absolute values are required

to ensure the model rotates exactly along its

longitudinal axis when an aileron command is given.

Values near to the center (-50 % or +50 %) are typical

for facilitating turns in thermals. The split setting

(-100 %, +100 %) is popular with slope ﬂ iers, where

ailerons alone are often used for turning the model.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

Note:

Negative values are not usually necessary if channels

are assigned properly.

Diff. (Differentiation)

WK-Pos.

Diff.

QR-Tr.

Normal QR

+100%

WK2

+100%

0% 0%

+100%

0%0%

+100% 0% 0%

WK +100%

0% +100%

The "AI" (topmost) line in the Multi-ﬂ ap menu can

be used to set the extent to which the ﬂ aps act as

ailerons and follow the aileron joystick.; this value is

entered as a percentage. The ﬂ aps differential – to

be set on the line "Diff." (two lines below) – works in

a similar way to the aileron differential, i.e. where an

aileron command acts on the ﬂ aps, the respective

deﬂ ection downwards can be reduced.

The adjustment range of -100 % to +100 % makes

it possible to set a differential appropriate for each

side, regardless of the direction of rotation of the

servos. A value of 0 % is equal to normal linkage, i.e.

the servo travel downwards is the same as the travel

upwards. A value of -100 % to +100 % means that

travel downwards will be reduced to zero for aileron

commands affecting the ﬂ aps ("split" mode).

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

Note:

Negative values are not usually necessary if channels

are assigned properly.

termed "adverse yaw". This effect is naturally greater

on the comparably long aerofoils possessed by model

gliders, compared to e.g. powered aircraft models,

which generally have relatively short moment arms.

For the former, it must normally be compensated for

by making a simultaneous rudder deﬂ ection in the

opposite direction. However, this rudder deﬂ ection

also generates drag and therefore further degrades

ﬂ ight characteristics.

If, on the other hand, a differential is applied to the

aileron orientations, by giving the aileron oriented

downwards a smaller deﬂ ection than the aileron

oriented upwards, the (undesirable) adverse yaw can

be reduced – and possibly entirely negated. However,

the basic precondition for this is that each aileron

must have its own servo present, which can therefore

also be embedded straight into the aerofoils. In

addition, the shorter linkage paths produce an

additional beneﬁ t: reproducible aileron conﬁ gurations

that also exhibit less "play".

0% (normal)

50% (differential)

100% (Split)

Unlike mechanical solutions, which not only

commonly need to be designed and built in when

constructing the model but also produce a slightly

increased "play" in the control system for strong

differentials, the transmitter-based differential typically

163

Detail program description - Wing mixers

Model type: "1AIL"

If you have entered "1AIL" for the "Aileron/camber

ﬂ aps" line on the »Model type« menu (page 94),

then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will

match the following screen image:

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

–––

rudder



Normal

From the ﬁ rst line on this display screen, you can

switch to the sub-menu with a brief tap on the center

SET key of the right touch pad …

Brake settings

Note:

The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor

on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu

(page 94)

AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase

settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the

currently active ﬂ ight phase. Switch the ﬂ ight phase if

required:

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS



Normal

Since you cannot set up a butterﬂ y or aileron

differential in a model with only a single aileron servo,

this menu offers no further conﬁ guration options with

the exception of a "pointer" to the "Elevat curve" sub-

menu. Therefore, move ahead from here with another

Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is

deﬂ ected to the same side as the upward-oriented

aileron, and you will ﬁ nd that setting a value of

around 50 % is usually highly appropriate.

Settings are always made symmetrically relative to

the neutral point of the aileron joystick.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad:

Brake

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –100%

L+

–

100

O U T P U T

Elevator

Normal

If required, i.e. if you have the feeling that you will need

to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are

extended, you can program an appropriate automatic

mixer affecting the elevator at this point.

For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer,

please refer to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option

text beginning page 128.

Aileron 2  4 rudder

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

–––

rudder

Normal

Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder

follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used

in particular in connection with aileron differential to

suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to ﬂ y

"clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate

commands to the rudder.

The adjustment range of ± 150 % lets you set the

direction of deﬂ ection as appropriate. Optionally, this

mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the

switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring

so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons

or rudder if desired.

164 Detail program description - Wing mixers

To conﬁ gure the setting, ﬁ rst position the brake control

in the brake position at full travel (i.e. its end-point).

Then, brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch

pad and enter a suitable value using the selection keys

on the left or right touch pad. To ensure a sufﬁ ciently

strong braking effect, note that you should try to lower

the ﬂ ap as low as is mechanically possible.

From the second line on this display screen, you

can switch to the sub-menu "Elevat curve" by brieﬂ y

tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad:

Brake

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –100%

L+

–

100

O U T P U T

Elevator

Normal

If required, i.e. if you have the feeling that you

will need to set pitch trim compensation when

the airbrakes are extended, you can program an

appropriate automatic mixer affecting the elevator at

this point.

For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer,

please refer to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option

text beginning page 128.

Aileron 2  4 rudder

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator flaps 0%0%

–––

rudder

Normal

Flaps elevator 0%0% –––

Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder

follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used

in particular in connection with aileron differential to

suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to ﬂ y

"clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate

commands to the rudder.

The adjustment range of ± 150 % lets you set the

direction of deﬂ ection as appropriate. Optionally, this

mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the

switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring

so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons

or rudder if desired.

Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is

deﬂ ected to the same side as the upward-oriented

aileron, and you will ﬁ nd that setting a value of

around 50 % is usually highly appropriate.

Settings are always made symmetrically relative to

the neutral point of the aileron joystick.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

Elevator 3  6 ﬂ aps

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator flaps 0%0%

–––

rudder

Normal

Flaps elevator 0%0% –––

To provide support for the elevator for tight turns

and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the

ﬂ ap function follow controls sent to the elevator. The

mixer direction chosen must ensure that the ﬂ aps are

deﬂ ected downwards when the elevator is oriented

upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented

elevator – i.e. in opposite directions. This mixer can

be made optionally on/off switchable with one of the

switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring.

To conﬁ gure symmetrical mixer values, move

Model type: "1AIL 1FL"

If you have entered "1AIL 1FL" for the "Aileron/

camber ﬂ aps" line on the »Model type« menu (page

94), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter

will match the following screen image:

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator flaps 0%0%

–––

rudder



Normal

Flaps elevator 0%0% –––

From the ﬁ rst line on this display screen, you can

switch to the sub-menu with a brief tap on the center

SET key of the right touch pad …

Brake settings

Note:

The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor

on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu

(page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase

settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the

currently active ﬂ ight phase. Switch the ﬂ ight phase if

required:

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

WK2

FLAP

Appropriate to the model type selected, you can now

enter a suitable value in the "Crow" line to lower the

ﬂ ap when you activate the brake control – which is

typically the C1 joystick.

165

Detail program description - Wing mixers

the elevator joystick to its center position, so that

the marker frame surrounds both value ﬁ elds. To

conﬁ gure asymmetric values, move the joystick to

the corresponding side.

Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are possible,

so as to adjust the function to the direction of servo

rotation or direction of ﬂ ap deﬂ ection.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

The "typical" values conﬁ gured for this mixer are

single-digit or low two-digit values.

Flaps 6  3 elevator

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator flaps 0%0%

–––

rudder

Normal

Flaps elevator 0%0% –––

This mixer is used to set elevator (pitch-trim)

compensation when a ﬂ ap command is given. This

typically enables you to adjust the model's airspeed

automatically when ﬂ aps are lowered.

If you have used the »Control adjust«, page 108, to

assign Input 6 to a transmitter control or switch then

this also affects this mixer.

Depending on the position of the ﬂ ap control, either

a symmetrical or asymmetric setting within the range

±150 % is possible.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

If required, the mixer can be switched on or off by

assigning a switch in the right column.

The values conﬁ gured for this mixer are typically in

the single-digit range.

Model type: "2AIL"

If you have entered "2AIL" for the "Aileron/camber

ﬂ aps" line on the »Model type« menu (page 94),

then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will

match the following screen image:

Aileron differential

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0%0%

–––

rudder



Normal

From the ﬁ rst line on this display screen, you can

switch to the sub-menu with a brief tap on the center

SET key of the right touch pad …

Brake settings

Note:

The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor

on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu

(page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase

settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the

currently active ﬂ ight phase. Switch the ﬂ ight phase if

required:

Elevator curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

AILE

WK2

Diff.- reduct

Depending on the model type selected, setting

options will now be available in the "Crow" and

"Diff(erential)reduct(ion)" lines for the column

labeled "AILE". These options should be utilized by

…

… putting the transmitter control for "Brake" •

(refer to the »Model type« menu description on

page 94) – typically the C1 joystick – in its limit

position in the brake direction. Switch to the "Crow"

line, brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad and use the selection keys on the left

or right touch pad to set a value that moves the

aileron upwards as far as possible to brake the

model or, if you are using airbrakes as the main

braking system, the aileron should be set to elevate

only minimally to provide an extra braking effect.

Note:

To reliably prevent the servos mechanically

striking their end-stops – which draws a heavy

current – you can set an appropriate limit value

in the column labeled "– limit +" in the »Servo

adjustment« menu, page 102.

… then ﬁ nally, moving to the "Diff. reduct" line, set a •

% value there which is greater than or equal to that

value set (or to be set) in the "Aileron differential"

line of the display screen "before" this one.

In this way, you can suppress the aileron

differential when braking, thus ensuring that you

can count on sufﬁ cient aileron response despite

your ailerons being deﬂ ected upwards.

From the lowest line, "Elevator curve", you can switch

to setting the "Elevator curve" mixer by brieﬂ y tapping

the center SET key of the right touch pad:

166 Detail program description - Wing mixers

Brake

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –100%

L+

–

100

O U T P U T

Elevator

Normal

If required, i.e. if you have the feeling that you will need

to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are

extended, you can program an appropriate automatic

mixer affecting the elevator at this point.

For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer,

please refer to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option

text beginning page 128.

Aileron differential

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0%0%

–––

rudder



Normal

The adjustment range of ±100 % makes it possible

to set the correct direction of differential, regardless

of the direction of rotation of the aileron servos.

While "0 %" corresponds to a normal linkage, i.e. no

transmitter-side differential, "-100 %" or "+100 %"

represents the "split" function.

For aerobatic ﬂ ying, low absolute values are required

to ensure the model rotates exactly along its

longitudinal axis when an aileron command is given.

Values near to the center (-50 % or +50 %) are typical

for facilitating turns in thermals. The split setting

(-100 %, +100 %) is popular with slope ﬂ iers, where

ailerons alone are often used for turning the model.

0% (normal)

50% (differential)

100% (Split)

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

in an active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

Note:

Negative values are not usually necessary if channels

are assigned properly.

Aileron 2  4 rudder

Aileron differential

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0%0%

–––

rudder

Normal

Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder

follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used

in particular in connection with aileron differential to

suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to ﬂ y

"clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate

commands to the rudder.

The adjustment range of ± 150 % lets you set the

direction of deﬂ ection as appropriate. Optionally, this

mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the

switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring

so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons

or rudder if desired.

Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is

deﬂ ected to the same side as the upward-oriented

aileron, and you will ﬁ nd that setting a value of

around 50 % is usually highly appropriate.

Settings are always made symmetrically relative to

the neutral point of the aileron joystick.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

Elevator 3  5 aileron

Aileron differential

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0%0%

–––

rudder

Normal

To provide support for the elevator for tight turns

and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the

aileron function follow controls sent to the elevator.

The mixer direction chosen must ensure that the

ﬂ aps are deﬂ ected downwards when the elevator is

oriented upwards and vice versa for a downward-

oriented elevator – i.e. in opposite directions. This

mixer can be made optionally on/off switchable with

one of the switches or a control switch that is not

self-restoring.

To conﬁ gure symmetrical mixer values, move

the elevator joystick to its center position, so that

the marker frame surrounds both value ﬁ elds. To

conﬁ gure asymmetric values, move the transmitter

control to the corresponding side.

167

Detail program description - Wing mixers

Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are possible,

so as to adjust the function to the direction of servo

rotation or direction of aileron deﬂ ection.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

The "usual" values for this mixer are in the low two-

digit range.

Model type: "2/4AIL 1/2/4FL"

If you have entered "2AIL 1FL" for the "Aileron/

camber ﬂ aps" line on the »Model type« menu

(page 94), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your

transmitter will match the following screen image:

Aileron differential

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Flaps elevator 0%0%

–––

rudder



Normal

Multi-flap menu

If, on the other hand, "2/4AIL 1/2/4FL" has been

entered for the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line of the

»Model type« menu, page 94, then the "Wing mixers

menu" on the transmitter should correspond to the

ﬁ gure below:

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Flaps elevator 0%0%

–––

rudder



Normal

Multi-flap menu

Regardless of the combination of aileron and ﬂ ap

servos you choose, all of the parameters available

can be adjusted separately for each ﬂ ight phase.

Note:

For almost any menu option, you have the option

of checking your settings by switching to the servo

display screen, which is accessed with a simultaneous

tap on the  selection keys of the left touch pad.

If you do, note however that the vertical lines on the

»Servo display« move in the same direction for

ailerons and in the opposite direction for ﬂ aps.

Before we address the details of this menu we would

like to provide a brief explanation of the different

display modes for the multi-ﬂap menu:

Model type: "2 AIL 1 FL"

If servos have been connected to the receiver as

described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the

»Model type« menu, page 94, then the abbreviations

"AILE" and "FLAP" refer to the following ﬂ aps:

left FL FL AI

right

Since the options available on the wing mixer menu

and its sub-menus vary according to the number of

ﬂ ap servos speciﬁ ed on the »Model type« menu,

page 94, the list contains only those set-up options

available for the given model.

Therefore, with a preset to "2AIL 1FL", the options for

setting aileron functions to ﬂ aps will be suppressed,

as will all setting options throughout the (right-side)

column labeled "FL2".

Fl.pos

AILE

Normal

HR WK

WK2

FLAP

+100%

0% 0%

+100%

0%0%

In addition, the settings for "Aile(ron) diff(erential)"

are not found on the "multi-ﬂ ap menu", as with "2AIL

2/4FL", but one level higher in the "Wing mixers"

menu, see the screenshot at top left.

168 Detail program description - Wing mixers

Model type: "2AIL 2FL"

If servos have been connected to the receiver as

described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the

»Model type« menu, page 94, then the abbreviations

"AILE" and "FLAP" refer to the following ﬂ aps:

left FL

right AI

right

Since the options available on the wing mixer menu

and its sub-menus vary according to the number of

ﬂ ap servos speciﬁ ed on the »Model type« menu,

page 94, the list contains only those set-up options

available for the given model.

Therefore, with a preset to "2AIL 2FL", all options

for setting options for a second set of ﬂ ap pairs will

be suppressed throughout the (right-side) column

labeled "FL2".

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Normal AILE

+100%

WK2

FLAP

0% 0%

+100%

0%0%

+100% 0% 0%

El Fl

+100%

0%0%

0%0% 0%

Model type: "2AIL 4FL"

If servos have been connected to the receiver as

described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the

»Model type« menu, page 94, then the abbreviations

"AILE", "FLAP" and "FL2" refer to the following ﬂ aps:

left

FL2

left

FL2

right

Since the options available on the wing mixer menu

and its sub-menus vary according to the number of

ﬂ ap servos speciﬁ ed on the »Model type« menu,

page 94, the list contains only those set-up options

available for the given model.

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Normal AILE

+100%

FL2

FLAP

0% 0%

+100%

0%0%

+100% 0% 0%

El Fl

+100%

0%0%

0%0% 0%

Model type: "4AIL 2FL"

If servos have been connected to the receiver as

described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the

»Model type« menu, page 94 , then the abbreviations

"AILE", "AILE2" and "FL" refer to the following ﬂ aps:

left

AI2

left

right

AI2

right

Since the options available on the wing mixer menu

and its sub-menus vary according to the number of

ﬂ ap servos speciﬁ ed on the »Model type« menu,

page 94, the list contains only those set-up options

available for the given model.

Therefore, with a preset to "4AIL 2FL", all options

for setting options for the ﬁ rst and second set of

aileron pairs as well as those for the ﬂ ap pair will be

displayed throughout.

FL.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr.

Normal AILE

+100%

AILE2

+100% 0%

+100%

0%0%

+100% +100% 0%

El Fl

+100%

0%0%

0%0% 0%

Model type: "4AIL 4FL"

If servos have been connected to the receiver as

described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the

»Model type« menu, page 94 , then the abbreviations

"AILE", "AILE2", "FLAP" and "FL2" refer to the

following ﬂ aps:

left

AI2

left

FL2

left

FL2

right

AI2

right

Since the "4AIL 4FL" selection represents the

maximum possible number of wing servos, in addition

to the columns labeled "AILE" and "AILE2" there will

now also be columns available labeled "FLAP" and

"FL2.

169

Detail program description - Wing mixers

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Normal AILE

+100%

FL2

0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%

0% 0%

0%0%

+100% 0% 0%

AILE2 FLAP

+100%

El Fl 0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%

Delta/ﬂ ying wing type models with more than two

wing ﬂ aps

If the "ELEVON" tail type (for a delta-wing or ﬂ ying

wing model) has been selected and number of wing

ﬂ aps in the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line of the »Model

type« menu conforms to that menu's description, then

activation of the elevator joystick will normally result in

as little movement for both ailerons as for the inside

ﬂ aps (FL) and, if present, (FL2). The reason for this is

the default mixer ratio of 0 % for all wing ﬂ aps set for

the "ELFL" mixer found in the "Multi-ﬂ ap" menu:

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Normal AILE

+100%

FLAP

0% 0%

+100%

0%0%

+100% 0% 0%

El Fl

+100%

0%0%

0%0% 0%

Accordingly, you must ﬁ rst specify your desired

elevator control on the "EL  FL" line. Take care to

ensure that up/down activation occurs in the right

sequence.

Note:

The "Brake settings" sub-menu (see next double

page) is also suitable for setting up the butterﬂ y

(crow) function with delta and ﬂ ying wing models. In

ﬁ ne-tuning the deﬂ ection of the ﬂ ap pairs AIL, FL and

(if present) FL2, however, ensure that the moments

created by one pair of ﬂ aps compensate the moments

created by the other pair of ﬂ aps in each case. For

example: the "up" effect of ailerons when deﬂ ected up

should be compensated by a "down" effect from ﬂ aps

when they are lowered.

Multi-ﬂ ap menu

AI (Aileron  camber ﬂ aps)

(suppressed by "2AIL 1FL")

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Normal AILE

+100%

FL2

FLAP

0% 0%

+100%

0%0%

+100% 0% 0%

FL +100%

+100%

0%0%

The "AI" line can be used to make ﬂ

ight-phase

dependent settings for the percentage of aileron

action to result for the camber ﬂ

ap pair "FLAP" and, if

present, also "FL2" when aileron control is exercised.

(In the "AILE" column it is also possible to adjust the

deﬂ ection of the aileron pair, if required.) Normally,

however, the ﬂ aps should follow the ailerons with less

of a deﬂ ection, i. e. the mixer ratio should be smaller

than 100 %.

The adjustment range of -150 % to +150 % means

the direction of deﬂ ection can be adjusted, depending

on the direction of rotation of the servos, to suit the

ailerons.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active

(inverse video) ﬁ eld to its default value shown in the

ﬁ gure.

170 Detail program description - Wing mixers

AiI-tr. (aileron trim)

(suppressed by "2AIL 1FL")

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Normal AILE

+100%

FL2

FLAP

0% 0%

+100%

0%0%

+100% 0% 0%

FL +100%

+100%

0%0%

In this line, you specify the percentage rate with

which aileron trim is to affect "AILE", "FLAP" and – if

present – "FLAP2".

The available range of values is -150 % to +150 %,

relative to the adjustment range of the trim wheel.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right

touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active (inverse

video) ﬁ eld to its default value shown in the ﬁ gure.

Diff. (Differential for aileron function)

(With "2AIL 1FL", at one level higher in the

»Wing mixers« menu, see ﬁ gure on the previous

double page.)

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Normal AILE

+100%

FL2

FLAP

0% 0%

+100%

+100% 0% 0%

FL +100%

+100%

0%0%

On this line, you set the aileron differential, plus the

differential for the FLAP and FLAP2 wing ﬂ

aps – if the

latter are being activated as ailerons.

0% (normal)

50% (differential)

100% (split)

AI FL FL2 FL2 FL AI

If you are unsure about the meaning of differential

travel, please read the appropriate explanation at the

start of this section on page 161.

The setting range of -100 % to +150 % permits correct

differentiation direction adjustment regardless of the

direction of rotation of aileron and ﬂ ap servos.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active

(inverse video) ﬁ eld to its default value shown in

the ﬁ gure.

Fl.pos (ﬂ ap position)

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Normal AILE

+100%

FL2

FLAP

0% 0%

+100%

+100% 0% 0%

FL +100%

+100%

0%0%

Here, you set the ﬂ ight phase-speciﬁ c wing ﬂ ap

positions for all of the ﬂ

aps present on the model

in question. In this way, you can specify the ﬂ ap

positions that apply to each ﬂ ight phase.

The adjustment range of -100 % to +100 % makes

it possible to set the correct direction of travel

regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron

and ﬂ ap servos.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active

(inverse video) ﬁ eld to its default value shown in the

ﬁ gures.

FL (effect of ﬂ aps)

This line speciﬁ es the percentage of effect produced

on aileron and ﬂ aps by the settings (if applicable, also

ﬂ ight-phase dependent settings) made for Input 6 in

the »Control adjust« menu, page 108.

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Normal AILE

+100%

FL2

FLAP

0% 0%

+100%

+100% 0% 0%

FL +100%

+100%

0%0%

For each ﬂ ap pair, you can deﬁ ne either a

symmetrical or an asymmetric effect. Position the

transmitter control accordingly – either centrally or to

the relevant side.

If each travel adjustment is left at +100 % on the

»Control adjust« menu, page 108, then values

between 5 % and 20 % should generally be sufﬁ cient

here.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active

(inverse video) ﬁ eld to its default value shown in the

ﬁ gures.

Note:

By default, NO transmitter control is assigned to input

6 on the »Control adjust« menu. However, you can

171

Detail program description - Wing mixers

assign a transmitter control or switch to this input

at any time – also in a ﬂ ight phase-dependent way

– thus enabling different ﬂ ap settings within a ﬂ ight

phase; see also example 2 on page 292.

El  Fl (elevator  ﬂ ap)

To provide support for the elevator for tight turns

and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the

ﬂ ap function follow controls sent to the elevator. The

mixer direction chosen must ensure that the ﬂ aps are

deﬂ ected downwards when the elevator is oriented

upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented

elevator – i.e. in opposite directions.

For each ﬂ ap pair, you can deﬁ ne either a

symmetrical or an asymmetric effect. Position the

transmitter control accordingly – either centrally or

to the relevant side. Values in the range -150 % to

+150 % are possible:

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Normal AILE FL2

FLAP

+100%

+100% 0% 0%

FL +100%

+100%

0%0%

El Fl +100%

+100%

0%0%

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active

(inverse video) ﬁ eld to its default value shown in the

ﬁ gures.

The "usual" values for this mixer are in the low two-

digit range.

If a switch is assigned in the next line, "El  FL"

then the effect produced on ﬂ aps can be switched on

and off with the elevator.

Important general notice:

Do not let control surfaces and servos strike their

mechanical end-stops when large deﬂ ections

are set! This is especially relevant in relation

to the functions "AI", "FL" and possibly

"FL2". Use the "- limit +" option (travel limit)

available in the "Servo adjustments" menu

(page 102), as required.

El  Fl offset (elevator)

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Normal AILE FL2

FLAP

+100%

+100% 0% 0%

FL +100%

+100%

0%0%

El Fl +100%

+100%

0%0%

A value entered into the "El"  Fl" line offers support

to the elevator during tight curves and aerobatics.

This "El"  Fl offset" line determines the offset

value introductory point where this percentage of

effect on ﬂ aps is to take place for elevator action.

• With an offset value of 0%, ﬂ aps will be affected

by elevator action beginning with the neutral

position of the elevator joystick by the percentage

set in the "El"  Fl".

• With an offset value other than 0 %, ﬂ aps will be

affected by movement of the elevator joystick,

in either the "up" or "down" direction, only after

reaching the preset offset point.

To set this offset point, put the elevator joystick at

the offset point to be set (in either of the two possible

directions). A brief tap on the center SET key of the

right touch pad will store this position.

Tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad with

the elevator joystick in its centered position to set the

offset value back to 0

% again. If a switch is assigned

in column "Switch", the effect produced on ﬂ aps can

be switched on and off with the elevator.

Brake settings

Notes:

The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: •

"Motor on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type«

menu (page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the

»Phase settings« menu, (page 142) are set to

"yes" for the currently active ﬂ ight phase. Switch

the ﬂ ight phase if required:

The "brake mixers" described below can also – •

and should also – be conﬁ gured to be speciﬁ c to

individual ﬂ ight phases.

Crow

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

AILE

WK2

FLAP

Diff. reduct

FL2

0% 0%

The "Crow" mixer function is actuated by control

function 1, 7, 8 or 9, depending on the input assigned

on the "Brake Offset" line in the »Model type« menu

(see page 94).

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 2AIL2FL

M O D E L T Y PE

Brake Offset +100%

SEL

Input 1

172 Detail program description - Wing mixers

Note:

The Offset, i.e. the activation direction, is also set in

the »Model type« menu, pager 94. This offset should

be set to about +90 % of stick travel (if the C1 joystick

is used, this is generally located at the forward

position of the stick). To extend the ﬂ aps, the stick

must therefore be moved back towards the pilot. The

remaining joystick travel of around 10 % then has no

effect, although it is not "lost", since the control travel

is automatically expanded back to 100 %.

Use the select ﬁ elds of the columns labeled "AILE",

"FLAP", "FL" and, if present, "FL2" to specify the

extent and the direction that corresponding ﬂ ap

pairs are to follow when the airbrake control (control

function 1, 7, 8 or 9) is operated. If the model has no

airbrakes, leave the corresponding receiver output

free or set it in the »Mix only channel« menu to

"MIXonly" to be able to use it elsewhere.

Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are possible.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active

(inverse video) ﬁ eld to its default value shown in the

ﬁ gure.

"AILE" column•

When braking the model as it comes in to land,

neither of the two aileron ﬂ aps should ever be

deﬂ ected more than half of the possible travel

upwards, to ensure that enough travel is available

to control the model along its longitudinal axis

(aileron function).

FL2

"FLAP" (and "FLAP2") column•

As the model is braked on the landing approach,

both pairs of ﬂ aps can be set to deﬂ ect by different

amounts, e.g.:

FL2

Combining AILE and FLAP for "Crow"•

FL2

Though the airbrake mixers are set as described

above, there is a special ﬂ ap constellation, called

"crow position" or "butterﬂ y", that can also be set. This

airbrake setting causes both ailerons move moderately

upward while the ﬂ aps move downward as far as

possible. Another mixer – see below, under the section

"Elevat. curve" – is then used to trim the elevator such

that the ﬂ ight speed does not change signiﬁ cantly in

comparison to the normal ﬂ ight position. Otherwise,

there is a danger that the model loses too much speed

and then, after the braking system is retracted (e.g.

to extend a landing approach that was too short, for

example), pancakes or even stalls.

A tip for "seeing" the effect of brakes:

lift the ﬂ aps and look over and under the surface from

the front. The larger the surface projected by the lifted

ﬂ ap, the greater the braking effect achieved.

Tips for activating airbrakes:

When, in addition to aileron and camber ﬂ ap •

servos, there is also a built-in servo for actuating

wing airbrakes, it can be most simply connected

to that receiver output – if free – whose input has

been selected for the brake function, i.e. either

on 1, 7, 8 or 9. If this is not possible then, as

an alternative, use a free mixer to connect the

selected brake control channel with the airbrake

servo.

To activate two airbrake servos, the best approach •

is to leave one servo on output 1 and to connect

the second servo to a free output of your choice

– for example, output 9. You then also assign this

output to transmitter control 1 (as standard) on the

»Control adjust« menu, page 108, see ﬁ gure.

0% +100%I9

I10

I11

I12

Typ SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

Cn1 ---

---

offset

Normal

As you do, leave the settings for offset, travel,

etc. at their default values. Also leave the default

"GL" value in the column labeled "TYP" so that

the second airbrake, like the ﬁ rst, operates in the

same way across all ﬂ ight phases.

173

Detail program description - Wing mixers

Servo 1

Servo 9

You can assure yourself that this works as

stated by accessing the »Servo display« menu,

accessible from almost any menu level with a brief

simultaneous tap on the  keys on the left touch

pad (see page 262):

+100

If this relatively simply variant should prove

impossible for whichever reasons, then the

alternative is a solution with two free mixers – and

potentially involving the »Mix only channel«

menu, page 205.

In either case, however, the airbrake travels must

then be ﬁ ne-tuned on the »Servo adjustment«

menu, page 102.

Diff. reduct

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

AILE

WK2

FLAP

Diff. reduct

FL2

0% 0%

Earlier, we discussed the problems with the butterﬂ y

(crow) conﬁ guration. Namely: that with the use of

aileron differential, the aileron effect can be strongly

(negatively) affected by the aileron elevation. This is

ﬁ rstly because further deﬂ ection of the one aileron

upwards is (almost) no longer possible and secondly

because the downward-deﬂ ected aileron – depending

on the elevation and degree of differential

conﬁ gured – is often unable to achieve even its

"normal" position.

To be able to restore the effect of the aileron altered

in this way as far as possible, you should ensure

that you make use of the automated "Differential

reduction" feature. This feature continuously reduces

the degree of aileron differential as the airbrake

system is extended. The feature is conﬁ gurable and

can even be set to suppress differential entirely.

A value of 0 % means that the "aileron differential" set

at the transmitter remains fully in force. An entry that

equals the % value set for aileron differential means

the differential is fully eliminated once the butterﬂ y

function is at maximum travel, i.e. with ﬂ aps fully

extended. Setting a reduction value greater than the

aileron differential conﬁ gured will eliminate the latter

even before the full travel of the airbrake joystick.

Values can be set in the range 0 to 150 %.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

Elevat. curve (Brake  Elevator)

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

AILE

WK2

FLAP

Diff. reduct

FL2

0% 0%

If the airbrake control – to be set to 1, 7, 8 or 9 on the

"Brake Offset" line of the »Model type« menu, page

95 – is used to extend the ﬂ aps as described previously

for the "Brake settings" menu, this will often have a

negative effect on the aircraft model's airspeed. This

mixer can be used to compensate this type of effect by

applying a corrective value to the elevator.

A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad will switch to the display screen shown below:

Brake

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –100%

L+

–

100

O U T P U T

Elevator

Normal

Setting notices for "Elevat. curve" (Brake 

Elevator)

The offset set in the »Model type« menu, page 94,

affects this mixer.

The vertical line on the display that indicates the

position of the airbrake control only moves from

the edge of the graph when the conﬁ gured offset

is exceeded. In doing so, airbrake control travel is

automatically expanded back to 100 %, as described

in the »Model type« menu.

Accordingly, the mixer's neutral point always lies on

the left edge, independently of the offset conﬁ gured.

Now adjust the elevator curve in the direction of the

opposite end-point in accordance with requirements.

Note that this method for setting the 5-point curve

mixer follows the same principles that are applicable

to the curve mixers, already described on page 128 in

the context of the »Channel 1 curve« menu.

174 Detail program description - Wing mixers

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

Aileron 2  4 rudder

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

–––

rudder

Normal

Multi-flap menu

Flaps elevator 0%0% –––

Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder

follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used

in particular in connection with aileron differential to

suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to ﬂ y

"clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate

commands to the rudder.

The mixer direction is typically chosen to ensure that

the rudder moves in the direction of the aileron that is

deﬂ ected upwards.

Settings are always made symmetrically relative to

the neutral point of the aileron joystick.

The adjustment range of ± 150 % lets you set the

direction of deﬂ ection as appropriate. Optionally, this

mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the

switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring

so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons

or rudder if desired.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

in an active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

A value of around 50 % is generally an excellent

starting point.

Flaps 6  3 elevator

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

–––

rudder

Normal

Multi-flap menu

Flaps elevator 0%0% –––

When setting camber-changing ﬂ aps, one side-effect

can be to generate moments causing movement

around the transverse axis. Equally, however, it may

also be desirable that e.g. your aircraft model opts for

a more pacey ﬂ ight style with the ﬂ aps slightly raised.

This mixer can be used to achieve both results.

With this mixer, the extension of the ﬂ aps – depending

on the value conﬁ gured – automatically ensures

the elevator position follows suit. Symmetrical or

asymmetrical settings relative to the neutral point of

the ﬂ ap control are possible.

If required, the mixer can be switched on or off by

assigning a switch in the right column.

Values can be set in the range 150 to 150 %. The

"typical" values conﬁ gured for this mixer are single-

digit or low two-digit values.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

Note:

If a transmitter control or switch has been assigned

in the »Control adjust« menu, as described under

"FL" on page 171, then that setting will also have

an effect on this mixer.

Brake

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +100%

–25%

H+

–

100

O U T P U T

–25%

Elevator

Normal

The selected setting should certainly be tried out in

sufﬁ cient altitude and, if necessary, readjusted. When

doing this, be sure to pay attention that the model

does not slow down too much while the brake system

is extended! Otherwise, you run the risk that, after the

braking system is retracted, e.g. to extend a landing

approach that was too short, for example, your model

pancakes or even stalls.

Aileron differential

(Only for "2AIL 1FL". For the "2AIL 2/4 FL" selection,

this is included on the Multi-ﬂ ap menu, see page170.)

Aileron differential

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

–––

rudder

Normal

Multi-flap menu

On this line you can set the aileron differential for the

two aileron servos.

If you are unsure about the meaning of differential

travel, please read the appropriate explanation at the

start of this section on page 161.

The setting range of -100 % to +150 % permits correct

differentiation direction adjustment regardless of the

direction of rotation of aileron and ﬂ ap servos.

175

For your notes

176 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

Helicopter mixer

Flight phase-speciﬁ c setting of collective pitch, throttle and tail rotor

In this menu …

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switches

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

… all of the ﬂ ight phase-speciﬁ c helicopter mixers are

described, with the exception of the mixers for auto-

rotation ﬂ ight (discussed from page 190 onward.)

These mixers are used for the basic set-up of a

model helicopter.

For ﬂ ight phase programming, see the menus:

»• Basic settings, model«, page 84

»• Phase settings«, page 146

»• Phase assignment«, page 148

When the switch for a speciﬁ c ﬂ ight phase is

actuated, then the name of the given ﬂ ight phase,

e.g. «Normal», will be displayed at the lower left edge

of the display screen:

Channel 1

Pitch

Gas

Heckrotor

Tail rot. 0%

Roll 0%

Gas

Roll

Gas

Heckrotor

Nick

Gas

Heckrotor

Swashplate rotation

Swashplate limiter

0°

Off

Gyro suppression 0%



Gyro offset 0%

Normal

In each of these ﬂ ight phases – with the exception

of the auto-rotation phase – the typical helicopter

mixing and coupling functions shown in the screen-

shot above are available for setting up the model

helicopter. These functions are described in the ﬁ rst

part of this comprehensive chapter.

General information on mixers,

(see also pages 159 and 192)

An arrow "" indicates a mixer. A mixer "branches

off" the signal ﬂ ow of a control function at a

particular point, in order to use this ﬂ ow to cause a

predetermined effect on a further control channel

and, ultimately, the receiver output. "Pitch ax  Tail

rot" mixer means, for example, that when the pitch-

axis joystick is actuated, the tail rotor servo must also

react within the scope of its setting.

Basic programming procedure:

Select the mixer by using the selection keys of the 1.

left or right touch pad.

Depending on the mixer involved, the bottom

display line will show either SEL or the  (indicating

a change to a second page is necessary).

A brief tap on the center 2. SET key of the right touch

pad will permit direct settings for linear mixer

ratios. Use the selection keys to set the mixer

ratio.

Otherwise you will need to switch to the second

screen page where you can set up the appropriate

curve mixer.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of

the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed

value in a given active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to

0 %.

Another tap on the center 3. SET key of the right

touch pad will complete the entry.

A tap on the center 4. ESC key of the left touch pad

will cause a return to the previous display page.

Description of helicopter mixers

To set collective pitch curves as well as the two

mixers, "Channel 1  Throttle" and "Channel 1 

Tail rotor", there are curve mixers available in all

ﬂ ight phases. Accordingly, these mixers also permit

the programming of non-linear mixing ratios along

the path of joystick travel, if required. Switch to the

display screen for curve settings with a brief tap

on the center SET key of the right touch pad, see

description below.

The curve is set up basically in the same way as the

Channel 1 curve for helicopters, but we will describe

it again here in detail using pitch conﬁ guration as

an example, to save you having to leaf through the

manual.

In the remaining lines, ﬁ rst activate the value ﬁ eld and

then use the selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to set a mixer value in the value ﬁ eld (inverse

video).

The settings available are rounded off with the

"Swashplate limiter" option: This option can be set to

restrict maximum deﬂ ection of the swashplate servo

in the sense of a limiter. Together, these settings

conﬁ gure the basic set-up of the helicopter model.

In the "Autorotation" ﬂ ight phase as described

on page 190, however, the mixers "Channel 1 

Throttle" and "Channel 1  Tail rot" are not needed

and therefore switched to a conﬁ gurable default

value.

Changed parameters can be reset to their respective

default values at any time with a simultaneous tap on

the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR).

Pitch (Pitch curve (Channel 1  Pitch))

If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or

right touch pad to move to the "Pitch" line then tap

brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

177

Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

–50%

–

100

O U T P U T

Normal

Unlike the »Channel 1 curve« menu, this display is

only associated with the control curve of pitch servos,

whereas the the "Channel 1 curve" affects all servos

controlled by the throttle/pitch joystick.

Note that the output signal of the "Channel 1

curve" option thus functions as an input signal for

the collective pitch curve programmed here: In the

graph, the vertical line is synchronized with the

throttle/collective pitch stick and therefore follows

the current Channel 1 curve characteristic.

The control curve can be deﬁ ned (separately per

ﬂ ight phase) by up to 8 points, termed "reference

points", placed at any point along the joystick travel.

Initially, however, fewer reference points are

adequate for setting up the collective pitch curve. We

recommend beginning with three reference points to

start with. These three points, namely the two end-

points "Pitch low (L)" (= -100 % control travel) and

"Pitch high (H)" (= +100 % control travel) plus a point

at the center of control travel still to be set, deﬁ ne an

initially linear proﬁ le for the pitch curve.

Programming details

First, switch to your chosen ﬂ ight phase, e.g. «Normal».

The throttle/collective pitch stick is used to move

the vertical line in the graph between the two end-

points "Point L" (minimum pitch at -100 %) and "Point

H" (maximum pitch at +100 % control travel): at the

same time, the current joystick position is shown

numerically on the "Input" line (-100 % to +100 %).

The point at which the vertical line crosses the

curve is termed the "Output", and can be varied at

the maximum of 8 reference points within the range

-125 % to +125 %. A control signal modiﬁ ed in this

way affects only the collective pitch servos.

In the example to the left, the joystick is at exactly 0 %

of control travel and also generates an output signal

of 0 %, since the characteristic curve is linear.

Up to six additional reference points can be set

between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the

distance between neighboring reference points must

not be less than approx. 25 %.

Setting reference points

Move the joystick. If the display shows a framed

question mark, then you can set the next reference

point with a tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad. Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by

its number and the value ﬁ

eld to the right of the

reference point number is highlighted:

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

–

100

O U T P U T

Normal

The order in which up to six reference points

are generated between the end-points "L" and

"H" is irrelevant since these reference points are

continuously renumbered automatically from left to

right as they are entered.

Conﬁ guring reference points

To conﬁ gure a point, use the joystick to move the

vertical line onto the point you wish to change.

The number and current curve value of this point

are displayed on the left side of the display, on the

"Point" line. Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the

right touch pad. Use the selection keys on the right

touch pad to change the current curve value shown

in the highlighted ﬁ eld. The possible range is -125 %

to +125 % and changes do not affect neighboring

reference points.

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

+75%

–

100

O U T P U T

+75%

Normal

In this sample screen image, reference point "1" has

been set to +75 %.

If you wish, however, other points can also be set. At

-50 %, for example …

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

–12%

–

100

O U T P U T

–12%

Normal

… and/or a further point at +50 %:

178 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

+88%

–

100

O U T P U T

+88%

Normal

To do so, use the joystick to move to the

corresponding area. As soon as a "?" appears in the

marker frame on the "Point" line, the respective point

can be set by touching the selection keys of the right

touch pad. Just as with other points, this can be set

…

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–

100

O U T P U T

Normal

… or, reset again with a simultaneous tap on the 

or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR).

The "L" and "H" points, on the other hand, CANNOT

be deleted.

Trim point function

Alternatively, a jump up or down to reference

points already set, L, 1 … max. 6 and H, can be

accomplished by using the  selection keys on the

left touch pad. The selection keys on the right touch

pad can then be used to change the reference point

jumped to as described above, entirely independently

of the control position.

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

–25%

–

100

O U T P U T

+50%

Normal

Trim point 1

In this simple example, the pitch joystick – represented

by the vertical line – is halfway between "Pitch minimum"

and the midpoint of control travel (input = -50 %).

However, "Point 1" will be relocated to control center at

a point value of +50 %, resulting in a momentary output

value of -25 %.

One touch on the center ESC key of the left touch

pad terminates this trim point function.

Trim offset function

When a value ﬁ eld is active, i.e. in inverse video, it is

not only possible, as previously described, to jump

up or down to reference points already set with the

 selection keys of the left touch pad and to make

a change with the selection keys of the right touch

pad, but also an existing curve can be vertically

repositioned within a range of ±25 % through use of the

 keys on the left touch pad. Starting with a point

value for "Point 1" at 0 %, the control curves in both of

the following ﬁ gures have been vertically shifted within

the ±25 % range by the trim offset function:

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

–25%

–

100

O U T P U T

–25%

Normal

Trim offset

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Outputg

Input 0%

+25%

–

100

O U T P U T

+25%

Normal

Trim offset

A tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will

also terminate this function.

Trim x-axis function

This function is activated by tapping the left () or

right () selection key of the right touch pad with

an active (i.e. inverse video) value ﬁ eld. You can

then use the selection keys on the right touch pad to

reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as

you wish. In the ﬁ gure below, "Point 1" which was just

shifted to +50 % with the trim point function, will now

be shifted to the left:

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

+67%

–

100

O U T P U T

+50%

Normal

Trim X-axis 1

Notes:

If the point is repositioned horizontally further •

away from the current control position than

approx. ±25 %, a "?" sign will reappear in the line

Point. This question mark does not refer to the

repositioned point, however: instead, it signiﬁ es

that a further point can be set at the current

control position.

179

Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

Please note that the percentage value on the •

"Output" line always relates to the current joystick

position and not to the position of the point.

Smoothing the collective pitch curve

In the example below, sample reference points have

been set …

reference point 1 to +50 %,

reference point 2 to +75 % and

reference point 3 to -50 %

… as described in the last section.

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–50%

–

100

O U T P U T

–50%

Normal

This "jagged" curve proﬁ le can be smoothed

automatically simply by pressing a button.

Do this – from a situation as illustrated – with a brief

tap on the  selection key of the left touch pad. This

will cause a switchover from "(Curve) off" to "(Curve)

on" (or vice versa).

Pitch

Curve

on Point

Output

Input +50%

–50%

–

100

O U T P U T

–50%

Normal

Notes:

If the joystick does not coincide with the exact •

reference point, please note that the percentage

value on the "Output" line always relates to the

current joystick position.

The ﬁ gures on these pages show control curves •

created only for the purpose of illustration. Please

note, therefore, that the curve characteristics

displayed do not in any way represent real-life

collective pitch curves. A speciﬁ c application

example can be found in the programming

examples on page 312.

The following three graphs show typical 3-point pitch

curves for various ﬂ ight phases, such as hovering,

aerobatics and 3D ﬂ ight.

The vertical bar depicts the current joystick position.

Please note that trim values greater than +100 % and

less than -100 % cannot be presented in the display.

Sample collective pitch curves for various ﬂ ight

phases:

Output

Control travel Control travel Control travel

Aerobatics 3DHover

Notice about marker keys:

If marker keys have been set in the »Basic settings,

model« menu, page 91, touching a key while in

this graph will set a dashed vertical line to show the

position of the C1 joystick at the time the key was

pressed.

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

–

100

O U T P U T

Normal

Move the C1 joystick (continuous line) to the marker

line in order to read out the input and output values.

If the marker line, for example, indicates momentary

hovering ﬂ ight and this is to be put exactly in control

center then it is only necessary to transfer the

"output" value of the marker line, in this example, shift

control center to reference point "1".

Erasing reference points

To delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 6), use

the joystick to move the vertical line into the vicinity

of the reference point in question. As soon as the

reference point number and its associated value is

shown on the "Point" line (see screen image above),

following activation of the value ﬁ eld on the "Point"

line now in inverse video with a simultaneous tap on

the or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) it

can be erased. Complete the operation with a brief tap

on the center key ESC of the left touch pad.

Channel 1  Throttle (Throttle curve)

Channel 1

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +25%

+25%

–

100

O U T P U T

+50%

Throttle

Normal

Unlike the »Channel 1 curve« menu, this display is

only associated with the control curve of the throttle

servo, whereas the the "Channel 1 curve" affects all

servos controlled by the throttle/pitch joystick.

Note that the output signal of the "Channel 1

curve" menu thus functions as an input signal for

the throttle curve programmed here: In the graph,

the vertical line is synchronized with the throttle/

collective pitch stick and therefore follows the

current Channel 1 curve characteristic.

The throttle curve can also be deﬁ ned (separately

180 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

per ﬂ ight phase) by up to 8 points, termed "reference

points", placed at any point along the joystick travel.

The reference points are deﬁ ned, adjusted and

erased in the usual way, as explained in the previous

section on the collective pitch curve. Start by deﬁ ning

the throttle curve with three points, namely the points

"L" and "H" at the extremes, plus the Point "1" still

to be set in the control center in order to match the

motor power curve to the collective pitch curve.

Helicopter with carburetor or electric drive

system with speed CONTROLLER

This setting relates only to the control curve of the

throttle servo or the speed controller.

Setting the throttle curve to suit a helicopter equipped

with a speed controller is discussed in the following

section.

As with the conﬁ guration of the collective pitch curve

(see previous page), the throttle curve can also be

deﬁ ned by up to 8 points.

In each case, set the control curve so that •

when the throttle/collective pitch stick is in its

end position, the carburetor is fully open or the

controller of an electrically-powered helicopter is

set to maximum (except for auto-rotation ﬂ ight,

see page 190).

For the hover point, which is normally at the •

control center, the carburetor setting or power

control for the speed controller must be matched

to the collective pitch curve so that the correct

system rotational speed is obtained.

At the minimum position of the throttle/collective •

pitch stick, the throttle curve must ﬁ rst be

conﬁ gured so that a glow motor runs at a speed

considerably higher than idle speed and the clutch

is ﬁ rmly engaged.

Starting and stopping of the motor – whether

combustion or electric drive – always takes place

within the given ﬂ ight phase as a consequence

of the throttle limiter and the "Thr. CutOff" option

(see below).

This makes it unnecessary to program the two ﬂ ight

phases that may be familiar to you from using other

remote control systems – namely "with idle-up" and

"without idle-up", and with the associated "waste" of a

ﬂ ight phase for this purpose – since the mc-16 HoTT

program offers a much more ﬂ exible approach to ﬁ ne-

tuning and optimizing increases to system rotational

speed below the hover point than the "idle-up"

approach taken by older mc remote control systems.

Ensure that the throttle limiter is closed before

starting a motor with carburetor, i.e. so that the

carburetor can be adjusted within the idle range

only with trim. Ensure that you follow the safety

instructions on page 189 at all times. If the throttle is

set too high when switching on the transmitter, you

will receive audible and visible warnings!

#02 0:00h

Stoppuhr

Flugzeit

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

00:00h

Starlet Thr too

high!

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

The following three graphs show (typical) 3-point

throttle curves for various ﬂ ight phases, such as

hovering aerobatics and 3D ﬂ ight.

Sample throttle curves for various ﬂ ight phases:

+100% +100% +100%

-100%

Output

234 51234 51234 51

Control travel Control travel Control travel

Hover Aerobatics 3D

Notes on using the "throttle limit" function:

The throttle limit function should be used in any •

case (»Control adjust« menu, page 117). At the

rear limit of the default transmitter control, the

right-side throttle limit proportional rotary slider,

the throttle servo is completely decoupled from the

throttle curve, the motor is at idle and will respond

only to C1 trim. This option permits the motor

to be started in any ﬂ ight phase and to shut the

motor off with the "Thr. CutOff" option.

181

Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

Once the motor has started, push the throttle

limiter s l o wly in the direction of the opposite

end-point to put actuation of the throttle servo fully

under the control of the throttle/collective pitch

joystick once again. In order to prevent the throttle

servo from being restricted by the throttle limiter in

the full throttle direction, set control travel on the

plus-side of the column labeled "travel" to +125 %

in the "Tl16" line of the »Control adjust« menu.

Leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type"

column alone, however, to conﬁ gure this setting

globally for all ﬂ ight phases.

For a more ﬁ nely-tuned control travel curve for

the throttle limit control, you can also use the

"Expo throttle limiter" (page 100). This gives

you the option of deﬁ ning the idle setting at the

throttle limit control's center position, as readily

determined both visually and audibly.

Set the throttle limiter to its center position and

adjust the "EXPO thro lim." value as far as is

needed until the motor is idling smoothly with

the throttle limit control set at its center point. In

this position, the motor will then start without any

problems. To switch off, turn or push the throttle

limit control – that is, without C1 cutoff trim – to its

rearmost end-point. As you do, ensure that the

affected servo cannot hit an end-stop mechanically.

The throttle restriction set by the throttle limiter is

made visible as a horizontal bar in the diagram:

Channel 1

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

+50%

–

100

O U T P U T

+50%

Throttle

Normal

The output signal for the throttle servo can never

be higher than that set by the horizontal bar. In

this example, about a maximum of +25 %.

Since electric drive systems have no need for an •

idle setting, the basic conﬁ guration of settings

for an electrically-powered helicopter merely

involves making sure that the control range of the

throttle limiter is both higher and lower than the

adjustment range of the speed controller (usually

-100 % to +100 %) by a safe margin. If necessary,

therefore, adjust the "travel" setting of the throttle

limiter as appropriate on the "Tl16" line of the

»Control adjust« menu. Leave the default value

of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to

conﬁ gure this setting globally for all ﬂ ight phases.

Fine-tuning of the throttle curve itself, however,

must take place in ﬂ ight – as with a glow-powered

helicopter.

If you wish to record the ﬂ ight time of a (glow-•

powered) helicopter, you can assign a control

switch to the throttle limit slider, and then use this

to switch a timer on and off; see page 135.

For auto-rotation ﬂ ight, an automatic switch-over

is made from this mixer to a conﬁ gurable default

value; see page 190.

Helicopter with speed CONTROLLER

Unlike speed controllers, which merely adjust output

level in a manner similar to a carburetor, a speed

regulator keeps speed in the system it monitors

constant by regulating its output autonomously. In

the case of combustion motor powered helicopters,

the regulator therefore controls the throttle servo

itself as appropriate or, for an electric helicopter, the

motor's speed controller. Therefore, speed regulators

do not need a traditional throttle curve but rather only

a speed setting. A deviation from the preset speed

will therefore only take place if the level of output

required exceeds the maximum level available.

Usually, receiver output 8 is reserved for connecting a

speed regulator; refer to the receiver layout on page

65. However, if this connection is used there will be no

throttle limit function because the throttle limit function

can only be implemented via the "Channel 1 

Throttle" mixer which is on the – then unused – output 6.

To make the comfort and safety features of a throttle

limiter available, a speed regulator should be

connected to receiver output 6 (contrary to the general

connection notices) and only requires appropriate

adaptation to the throttle curve so it can take over the

task of the "conventional" transmitter control.

Since in this case the "throttle curve" only regulates

the target speed of the motor controller and this

target motor speed should typically remain constant

over the entire collective pitch adjustment range, the

"Channel 1 Throttle" mixer must be used to set a

horizontal line – i.e. every (pitch) input value will result

in the same ("throttle") output value – whose "height"

is deﬁ ned by the target motor speed.

First, therefore, the reference points "1" to "6" – if

present and set – are erased. Following this, the

reference points "L" (input = -100 %) and "H"

(input = +100 %) are then each set to the same

value, for example:

182 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

Channel 1

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

+66%

L+

–

100

O U T P U T

+66%

Throttle

Normal

The value to be set depends both on the speed

controller used and on the target motor speed that is

desired, and can, of course, be varied according to

the ﬂ ight phase.

For auto-rotation ﬂ ight, an automatic switch-over

is made from this mixer to a conﬁ gurable default

value; see page 190.

Channel 1

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +100%

+30%

H+

–

100

O U T P U T

+30%

Tail rot.

Normal

Starting with values of -30 % for point "L" and +30 %

for point "H", the mixer is to be conﬁ gured in such

a way that the helicopter, even during prolonged

vertically ascending or descending ﬂ ights, does not

deviate from the yaw axis as a result of the main

rotor's altered torque while hovering. For hovered

ﬂ ight, trim should only be affected by way of the

(digital) tail rotor trim wheel.

For a reliable torque compensation setting, it is

essential that the collective pitch and throttle curves

have been set up correctly, i.e. that the rotor speed

remains constant over the collective pitch's full

adjustment range.

This third curve mixer applies only to the control

curve of the tail rotor servo when the throttle/

collective pitch stick is moved, whereas the "Channel

1 curve" (see page 131) acts on all servos that are

affected by the throttle/collective pitch stick. Note that

the output signal of the "Channel 1 curve" option also

functions as an input signal for the tail rotor curve

programmed here: In the graph, the vertical line is

synchronized with the throttle/collective pitch stick

and follows the current Channel 1 curve characteristic

from the »Channel 1 curve« menu.

In the auto-rotation ﬂ ight phase this mixer is

automatically switched off.

Channel 1  Tail rot. (static torque compensation)

Channel 1

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

–

100

O U T P U T

Tail rot.

Normal

The default approach here is to preset a torque

compensation curve with a linear mixer ratio of a

uniform 0 %, as is required for a gyro sensor working in

"heading lock mode" – see the screen image above.

Important notice:

In this context, ensure that you comply with

the instructions on adjusting your gyro: if not,

you risk making adjustments that render your

helicopter impossible to ﬂ y.

If, on the other hand, you use your gyro sensor in

the "normal" operating mode, or if it only has what is

termed "normal mode", then conﬁ gure the mixer as

follows:

As with the conﬁ guration of the collective pitch curve

(see page 176), the control curve of the tail rotor

can also be deﬁ ned by up to 6 points. If required,

therefore, you can modify the mixer at any time

and preset both symmetrical and asymmetric mixer

ratios both above and below the hover point. Before

you do, however, ensure you have entered the

correct direction of rotation for the main rotor on the

»Helicopter type« menu.

183

Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

Tail rotor  throttle

Channel 1

Pitch

Throttle

Tail rot.

Tail rot. 0%

Roll 0%

Throttle

SEL

Normal

While the tail rotor normally compensates for the

effect of main rotor torque on the fuselage, it is also

used to control the helicopter around the vertical axis.

Increasing tail rotor thrust requires a corresponding

adjustment to motor power, however, to avoid a fall-

off in system rotational speed.

This mixer sets the extent to which the throttle

follows the tail rotor. The throttle will follow on one

side only, to the side on which the tail rotor thrust is

increased. The setting range is therefore 0 to +100 %.

The direction depends on the main rotor's direction

of rotation (left or right), and this must ﬁ rst be set

correctly on the »Helicopter type« menu. For left-

hand rotation systems, the throttle follows the tail

rotor when the tail rotor joystick is moved to the left,

and vice versa for right-hand rotation systems.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

in an active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

In the auto-rotation ﬂ ight phase this mixer is

automatically switched off.

Set-up notes:

To set the mixer value accurately you should either ﬁ rst

ﬂ y several high-speed pirouettes against the direction

of main rotor rotation or, if a strong wind is blowing,

hover at right angles to the wind with a sufﬁ ciently

large tail rotor deﬂ ection. Set the mixer value so that

there is no fall-off in system rotational speed.

Increasing pitch is not the only change that requires a

corresponding torque compensation via the tail rotor:

major cyclic control movements also require this, e.g.

if the swashplate is tilted in any direction. Here, too,

the mc-16 HoTT program lets you conﬁ gure settings

for both types of tilt movement (roll and pitch-axis)

separately.

For advanced aerobatics in particular, which involve

very large control deﬂ ections in the pitch-axis

controls, e.g. the "Bo-turn" (vertical pull-up followed

by tipping over around the pitch-axis) and tight loops,

the uncompensated torque present in these ﬂ ights

causes the model to turn to a greater or lesser degree

around the yaw axis. This spoils the appearance of

the maneuver.

These two mixers permit static torque compensation

to be activated by the swashplate tilting in any

direction. The mixers work by always increasing tail

rotor thrust, starting from the center point of the roll

and pitch-axis sticks, i.e. they always generate a tail

rotor deﬂ ection in the same direction regardless of

the direction of the command.

The mixer value can be varied within the range 0 to

+100 %.

The mixer direction is determined automatically by

your deﬁ nition of the direction of main rotor rotation

on the »Helicopter type« menu, page 98.

In the auto-rotation ﬂ ight phase this mixer is

automatically switched off.

Gyro suppression

Roll 0%

Throttle

SEL

Roll Tail rot.

Nick Throttle

Nick Tail rot. 0%

Gyro suppression 0%

Normal

Roll  Throttle and Pitch axis  Throttle

Channel 1 Tail rot.

Tail rot. 0%

Roll 0%

Throttle

SEL

Roll Tail rot.

Nick Throttle

Normal

Increasing collective pitch is not the only change that

requires the throttle to follow suit: major cyclic control

movements also require this, i.e. if the swashplate is

tilted in any direction. The mc-16 HoTT program lets

you adjust the degree of throttle follow separately for

roll and pitch-axis controls.

This offers particular advantages in aerobatic ﬂ ying,

e.g. when ﬂ ying a roll: here, with moderate collective

pitch values and the carburetor only about half-open,

cyclic control travels are nonetheless executed that

require much higher performance from the motor.

The mixer value can be varied within the range 0 to

+100 %. The correct mixer direction is automatically

taken into account.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value

in an active (inverse video) ﬁ eld back to 0 %.

In the auto-rotation ﬂ ight phase this mixer is

automatically switched off.

Roll  Tail rot. and Pitch axis  Tail rot.

Tail rot. 0%

Roll 0%

Throttle

SEL

Roll Tail rot.

Nick Throttle

Nick Tail rot. 0%

Normal

184 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

Important: in normal situations, this function

should not be used if your model is ﬁ tted with a

modern gyro system. In this context, ensure that

you comply with the instructions on adjusting your

gyro: if not, you risk making adjustments that render

your helicopter impossible to ﬂ y. This menu has

nonetheless been retained in order to cater to a full

range of requirements and ﬂ ying habits.

With this option, the effect of the gyro sensor

("gyro") can be varied according to the tail rotor

joystick position; this assumes the use of a gyro

system whose gyro gain can be controlled from the

transmitter via an auxiliary channel. This channel will

be channel 7 for Graupner remote control systems.

The gyro suppression function reduces gyro gain in a

linear progression as the pilot increases the tail rotor

deﬂ ection. Without gyro suppression – i.e. when set

to 0 % – the gyro effect is constant, regardless of the

joystick position.

With a transmitter control assigned on the "Gyr7"

line on the »Control adjust« menu (page 116),

e.g. one of the proportional sliders mounted in the

middle console; as applicable, also made ﬂ ight-phase

dependent and/or with inﬁ nitely variable gyro effect

between minimum and maximum. In this case, gyro

gain is maximum at full deﬂ ection of the slider, and

zero at the opposite end-point.

Of course, the software lets you limit the gyro gain

range on both sides by altering the transmitter

control travel.

Depending on the transmitter control's position, the

gyro gain at full travel on the tail rotor joystick is:

"current control position

minus

gyro suppression value".

Accordingly, if the transmitter control is at the

neutral point, and gyro suppression is set to 100 %,

the gyro gain is reduced to zero as the tail rotor

if the assigned transmitter control is moved to the

+50 % position (as shown here); and only at >150 %

suppression is gain reduced to zero with the slider

at this position, well before full tail rotor deﬂ ection.

Exemple:

+50 %

Í Gyro gain Î

left

Stick deflection tail rotor

centre right

Range of

transmitter

control 7

Linear gyro suppression with reduced control •

travel, e.g. -50 % to +80 % of full travel.

Gyro gain is inﬁ nitely variable within these transmitter

control limits. Here too, for purposes of illustration,

we plot gyro gain values in relation to tail rotor

deﬂ ection for various parameter values of gyro

suppression.

Exemple:

+80 %

Í Gyro gain Î

left

Stick deflection tail rotor

centre right

Range of

transmitter

control 7

Adjusting the gyro sensor

To achieve the maximum possible level of

stabilization for the helicopter with the gyro along the

deﬂ ection increases. For values between 100 % and

the maximum value of 199 %, the gyro can be fully

suppressed – depending on the transmitter control

position – well before full deﬂ ection of the tail rotor;

see the diagram on the next page.

For the Graupner/JR gyro NEJ-120 BB, order no.

3277, both the upper and the lower values are set via

rotary controls: control 1 sets the minimum gyro gain

at the bottom position of the slider; control 2 sets the

maximum gain at the top end-point of the slider; the

transition between these two values occurs roughly in

the middle of the slider travel.

In contrast, the PIEZO 900, PIEZO 2000 and

PIEZO 3000 gyro systems feature proportional,

inﬁ nitely variable adjustment of gyro gain; see below

for typical diagrams.

As an example, the option to conﬁ gure ﬂ ight

phase-speciﬁ c – and static – gyro gain gives you

the opportunity to exploit maximum stabilization for

normal, slow ﬂ ying, but to reduce gyro gain for fast

circuits and aerobatics.

Samples of various gyro settings and conﬁ guration

notes

Linear gyro suppression: 0 % to 199 %. •

With the tail rotor joystick in the center position,

the resulting gyro effect is set using the selected

transmitter control. Using a proportional rotary

control or slider, the effect is inﬁ nitely variable

between zero ("min") and maximum ("max"),

provided transmitter control travel is not restricted.

With full tail rotor deﬂ ection, the effective gyro gain

is as follows:

"current control position

minus

gyro suppression value".

This means that at 0 % gyro suppression, gyro

gain is constant for tail rotor joystick movement;

at 50 % suppression, gyro gain is reduced to half

185

Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

vertical axis, observe the following:

The controls should have as little friction and •

"play" as possible.

There should be no "spring" in the control linkage.•

Use a strong and comparably fast servo. •

When the gyro sensor detects a model rotation, the

faster its response – a corresponding corrective

change to tail rotor thrust – takes effect, the further

the gyro gain adjuster can be moved without causing

the tail of the model to start oscillating, and the better

the model's stability about its vertical axis. If the

response is slower, there is a risk that the model's tail

will start to oscillate even at low gyro gain settings.

Here, further reductions to gyro gain will need to be

made to eliminate the oscillation.

If the model is ﬂ ying forward at high speed or

hovering in a powerful headwind, the net result of the

stabilizing effect of the vertical ﬁ n combined with the

gyro may also lead to an overreaction that once again

manifests itself through tail oscillation. To achieve

optimum gyro stabilization under all conditions, you

can make use of the option to adjust gyro gain from

the transmitter using a transmitter control assigned to

input "7", in connection with gyro suppression and/or

the two settings on the Gyro NEJ-120 BB.

Further notes on gyros with conﬁ gurable multilevel

gyro gain (e.g. NEJ-120 BB)

Since you cannot specify the gyro gain from the

transmitter proportionally via the transmitter control,

the gyro's own control 1 must be used to set the

(weaker) gyro gain (e.g. for aerobatics) and control

2 the stronger gyro gain (e.g. for hovered ﬂ ight).

Even though a proportional control is used for control

function 7, only a switch-over between these two

values takes place and the setting is therefore not

proportional.

You should therefore advance control 2 to the point

where the model is on the brink of oscillating when

hovering in calm conditions, and advance control 1 to

SEL

Roll Tail rot.

Nick Throttle

Nick Tail rot. 0%

Gyro suppression 0%

Gyro offset 0%

Normal

Based on these ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c (offset) settings,

gyro gain can also be inﬁ nitely varied by a transmitter

control assigned in the "Gyr7" line of the »Control

adjust« menu, page 116.

Swashplate rotation

SEL

Nick Throttle 0%

Nick Tail rot.

Gyro suppression

Swashplate rotation 0°

Gyro offset

Normal

Some rotor head control systems make it necessary

to incline the swashplate in a different direction from

the intended inclination of the rotor plane when

a cyclic control command is given. If your model

features a four-bladed main rotor, for example, you

may need to use this menu to set up a software-

driven 45° rotation of the control linkage to the right,

so that the pushrods from the swashplate to the

rotor head can be set exactly vertical, ensuring that

the blade control system works correctly, without

unwanted differential effects. This eliminates the need

to make mechanical changes to the control linkages.

Negative angles equate to a virtual rotation of the

rotor head to the left; positive angles a virtual rotation

to the right.

the point where the model does not oscillate with its

tail even when ﬂ ying at maximum speed into a strong

headwind. Depending on the state of the weather

and the ﬂ ight program planned, you can also switch

over the gyro gain from the transmitter – also with

gyro suppression dependent on tail rotor deﬂ ection if

required.

Gyro offset

Important notice:

The value of this option is identical to the offset

value set in the "Gyr7" line of the »Control

adjust« menu, page 116. For this reason, any

changes made always affect the other menu

directly – and vice versa.

Most of the latest gyro systems not only feature

inﬁ nitely variable proportional gyro gain setting, but

also offer a choice of two separate types of gain

mode on the transmitter.

If the gyro in use has at least one of these features

then this alternative offset setting provides an

opportunity to preset both "normal" gyro gain as well

as, as appropriate, to specify a "heading-lock mode"

whereby, even within this pre-selection, gyro gain can

be reduced by a particular gain type for normal, slow

ﬂ ight with maximum ﬂ ight stabilization, fast circuit

ﬂ ights and aerobatics.

To proceed as described above, use ﬂ ight phase

switching to enter different settings on the "Gyro

offset" line. Values between -125 % and +125 % are

possible:

186 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

Swashplate limiter

SEL

Nick Tail rot.

Gyro suppression

Swashplate rotation 0°

Swashplate limiter off

Gyro offset

Normal

This function works like a circular mechanical

surround acting upon the stick which controls the

swashplate, restricting the normally square stick

travel to a circular range. In fact, if the helicopter is

set up in such a way that the deﬂ ections for roll and/

or pitch-axis exploit the maximum travel mechanically

possible, e.g. for 3D helicopters, then the total tilt

applied to the swashplate if full roll and pitch-axis

commands are applied simultaneously will be

considerably greater (141 % in numerical terms). The

swashplate mechanism may then strike its end-stops

and, in the worst case, the ball-links could even be

disengaged.

The mc-16 HoTT

transmitter contains a

conﬁ gurable software

function for limiting the

total swashplate travel,

i.e. it restricts the tilt angle

of the swashplate from

100 % (the travel is limited

to the value obtainable

either with roll or pitch-

axis alone) to 149 % (no effective limit). In addition,

the function can be set to "Off" and hence completely

deactivated. The swash limiter can also be conﬁ gured

per model and per ﬂ ight phase.

This software solution is therefore much more ﬂ exible

than a physical circular surround attached to the stick

unit: the latter can, in any case, only be used if the roll

and pitch-axis functions are controlled by a common

stick unit.

The adjacent sketch illustrates the effect for a 100 %

setting. the cross-hatched area of travel is curtailed

and appears as a "dead zone".

If this function is used, "Dual Rate" should be set to

100 % and Dual Rate values above 100 % should also

not be used. If not, and you set a swashplate limit of

100 %, for example, then swashplate movement will

be restricted even if roll and pitch-axis commands are

given separately.

Setting range: 100 … 149 % and "off".

187

Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

Fine-tuning the throttle and collective pitch curve

Practical approach

Although the throttle and collective pitch control

systems are based on separate servos, they are

always operated together by the throttle/pitch joystick

(except during autorotation ﬂ ight). This coupling is

performed by the helicopter program automatically.

In the mc-16 HoTT program, the trim wheel of control

function 1 acts principally only on the throttle servo.

However, in the »Stick mode« menu (see page 106)

a decision can be made if this should be used for idle

trimming as part of the throttle limit function, or for

idle trimming during the auto-rotation phase ("throttle

AR").

The process of ﬁ ne-tuning throttle and collective

pitch, i.e. setting the motor power curve to match

the collective blade pitch setting, is the most

important aspect of setting up a model helicopter.

The mc-16 HoTT software provides for independent

conﬁ guration of the throttle, collective pitch and torque

compensation curves, in addition to the C1 control

curve (»Channel 1 curve« menu, page 131).

While these curves can be modeled using up to

six points, fewer points are generally sufﬁ cient. We

recommend starting with three-point curves to begin

with. This involves setting individual values for the

center point and other (optional) reference points,

and for the two end-points ("L", "low", and "H", "high")

of the throttle/collective pitch stick: together, these

deﬁ ne the control curves.

Before setting the throttle and collective pitch

function, the rods of all servos should be

mechanically pre-adjusted correctly according to the

set-up instructions for the given helicopter.

Note:

The hover point should normally be set to the

center position of the throttle / collective pitch

stick. In special cases, e.g. for "3D" ﬂ ight,

deviating hover points can also be programmed.

For example, one point for normal ﬂ ight attitude

above the center and one point for inverted ﬂ ight

attitude below the center.

Idle setting and throttle curve

Note:

Since electric drive systems have no need for

an idle setting, motor idling does not need to be

calibrated. Fine-tuning of the throttle and collective

pitch curve(s), however, must take place as for glow-

powered helicopters.

The idle setting, whose detailed description begins

on page 117, always takes place with the throttle

limiter closed – normally with the trim wheel of the

C1 function and only in special cases is the throttle

limiter itself also utilized (as standard, the CTRL 6

proportional rotary control).

The programming of a corresponding value for the "L"

point of the throttle curve acts to set the descent speed

of the motor, without inﬂ uencing the hover conﬁ guration.

Here, for example, ﬂ ight phase programming can be

used to set different throttle curves. This increased

system rotational speed below the hover point proves

to be useful in certain circumstances, e. g. for fast,

steep landing approaches with greatly reduced

collective pitch, and for aerobatics.

The ﬁ gure depicts a curve with a

slightly changeable throttle setting

below the hover point at the control

center.

+100%

-100%

OUTPUT

234 51Control travel

Different throttle curves are programmed to be

ﬂ ight-phase dependent in order to achieve the given

optimal adaptation to hovering ﬂ ight as well as

aerobatics:

Low system rotational speed with smooth, gentle •

control response and low noise when hovering

Higher rotor speed for aerobatics with motor power •

set close to the maximum. In this case, the throttle

curve must also be adjusted in the hover range.

Basic set-up procedure

Even though pitch and throttle curves can be set

electronically over a wide range with the mc-16 HoTT

transmitter, all linkage in the model should already

be mechanically pre-adjusted correctly according to

the instructions for the given helicopter. Experienced

helicopter pilots will be glad to help with this basic

set-up.

The carburetor linkage must be set so that the throttle

is just past the fully open setting with collective pitch

set to maximum or, for electric helicopters, with the

speed controller set to full. When the throttle limiter is

closed, however, it must be possible to just close off

the carburetor using the C1 trim wheel (rapid throttle

setting of the "digital trim", see page 58 ), without the

servo mechanically striking its end-stop. For electric

helicopters, it must be possible to cut the electric

motor's speed controller safely with the throttle limiter

closed.

Take great care when conﬁ guring these settings,

by adjusting the control linkage as required and/or

altering the linkage point on the servo or carburetor

lever. Only then should the throttle servo's ﬁ ne-tuning

be electronically optimized.

Caution:

Inform yourself thoroughly about the dangers and

safety precautions applicable to handling motors

and helicopters before starting the motor for the

ﬁ rst time!

With this basic set-up complete, the motor should

be started in accordance with the motor operating

instructions: idling can then be conﬁ gured using

the trim wheel of the throttle/collective pitch stick.

The preset idle position will be displayed on the

transmitter's basic display by a horizontal bar next

to the C1 trim wheel position indicator. Refer to the

description of digital trim on page 58 of this manual.

188 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

the collective pitch stick to its end-point. Compared to

the hover conﬁ guration, motor speed should remain

unchanged.

If motor speed falls off in the climb, even with the

drive system working at full power and therefore

no further power increase is possible, then reduce

maximum blade pitch angle at full deﬂ ection of the

collective pitch stick, i.e. the value of point "H".

Conversely, the attack angle should be increased if

motor speed is to increase while climbing. Therefore,

on the "Pitch" graph page, put the vertical line on

Point "H" by moving the pitch joystick then change

this point's value appropriately with the  selection

keys of the right touch pad.

This diagram shows only the

changes when setting the maximum

collective pitch value.

+100%

-100%

OUTPUT

234 51Control travel

Hover

point

Then bring the model back to hover, which should,

in turn, be achieved with the C1 stick at its center

point. If the hover ﬂ ight point is now achieved only by

moving the pitch joystick away from its center point

toward "higher" values then this deviation should

be compensated by increasing the hover-ﬂ ight pitch

value – i.e. for point "1" – a little until the model once

again hovers with the joystick at its center point.

Conversely, if the model hovers below the mid-

point, correct this by reducing the angle of attack

appropriately.

It may also be necessary to correct the carburetor

opening for the hover point (point "1") with "C1 

throttle".

The model should lift off the ground with the collective

pitch stick roughly at its center point and hover

roughly at the expected rotational speed. If this is not

the case, proceed as follows:

1. The model does not lift off until the collective

pitch stick is above the center point.

a) Rotational speed is too low

Remedy: On the graph page

for "Channel 1  Throttle"

increase the value for

point "1".

+100%

-100%

OUTPUT

234 51Control travel

Hover

point

b) Rotational speed is too high

Remedy: Increase the blade

angle of attack pitch by

increasing the value of point

"1" on the "Pitch" graph page.

+100%

-100%

OUTPUT

234 51Control travel

Hover

point

2. The model lifts off before the center point is

reached.

a) Rotational speed is too high

Remedy: Decrease the

carburetor opening by

reducing the value of point

"1" on the graph page for

"Channel 1  Throttle".

+100%

-100%

OUTPUT

234 51Control travel

Hover

point

b) Rotational speed is too low

Remedy: Decrease the blade

angle of attack pitch by

reducing the value of point "1"

on the graph page for "Pitch".

+100%

-100%

OUTPUT

234 51Control travel

Hover

point

Important:

These settings must be reconﬁ gured until the model

hovers at the correct rotational speed with the

throttle/collective pitch stick at its center point. The

conﬁ guration of all other model parameters depends

on these settings being made correctly!

Standard set-up

Standard set-up is completed on the basis of the

basic set-up described above, whereby the model

hovers in normal ﬂ ight at the correct rotational speed

with the throttle/collective pitch stick set to its center

point: This means a set-up with which the model

is capable of both hovering and ﬂ ying circuits in all

phases while maintaining a constant rotational speed.

Climb settings

The combination of throttle hover setting, collective

pitch setting for the hover and the maximum collective

pitch setting (point "H") now permits, in a simple

manner, a means of attaining a constant rotational

speed from hovering right through to maximum climb.

First, perform a prolonged, vertical climb by moving

189

Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

Therefore, after the motor is started, system rotational

speed should be increased s l o wly by

way of the

throttle limiter. If a switch has been assigned to the

throttle limiter, always ensure the »Control adjust«"

menu (page 112) is used to program a time constant

of about 5 seconds to run up system rotational

speed (opening the throttle limiter). Do not, however,

program a delay for closing the throttle limiter. Leave

the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone,

however, to conﬁ gure this setting globally for all ﬂ ight

phases.

be a visual and an acoustic warning if the carburetor

is open too wide when the transmitter is switched

on. Otherwise, if the carburetor or speed controller is

open too far when the motor starts, there is a danger

that the motor will run up to speed immediately

after starting, and the centrifugal clutch will engage

immediately.

Accordingly,

always hold the rotor head

ﬁ rmly when starting.

Nevertheless, if the motor is accidentally started with

the carburetor too wide open, the golden rule is this:

Don't panic!

Hold the rotor head securely!

Don't let go!

Instead, close the throttle limiter immediately, even

if this risks damaging the drive system (in the worst

case scenario).

YOU must ensure

the helicopter never moves

in an uncontrolled manner.

The costs of repairing a clutch, a gearbox or even the

motor itself are negligible in comparison to the injuries

and damage that an uncontrolled model helicopter

can cause if it is allowed to thrash about with spinning

rotor blades.

Always make sure no other person

is present in the

helicopter's hazard area.

The switchover from idle to a ﬂ ight setting with

increased system rotational speed must not take

place abruptly. This will cause the rotor to accelerate

very quickly, resulting in premature wear to the clutch

and gear train. Since the main rotor blades are

generally mounted on a freewheeling unit, they will

be unable to keep pace with such rapid acceleration;

they will respond by swinging far out of their normal

position and may even cause a boom strike.

This diagram shows only the

change to the hover point, i. e.

collective pitch minimum and

maximum are both left at -100 %

or +100 %.

+100%

-100%

OUTPUT

234 51Control travel

Modify these settings until they really result in a

constant rotational speed over the full control range

between hovering and climbing ﬂ ight.

Descent setting

The descent setting should now be conﬁ gured by

placing the model in a steady descent from forward

ﬂ ight at a considerable altitude by fully reducing

collective pitch; adjust the collective pitch minimum

value (point "L") so that the model descends at an angle

of 60° … 70 °. Therefore, on the "Pitch" graph page, put

the vertical line on Point "L" by moving the pitch joystick

then change this point's value appropriately with the

selection keys of the right touch pad.

This diagram shows only the

changes when setting the minimum

collective pitch value.

+100%

-100%

OUTPUT

234 51Control travel

Hover

point

Once the model can ﬂ y this maneuver properly, set

the value for "Throttle min" – the value for point "L"

on the graph page for "C1  throttle" – so that the

rotational speed neither increases nor decreases.

This completes the set-up procedure for throttle and

collective pitch.

Some important closing remarks

Before starting the motor, ensure that the throttle

limiter is fully closed: this ensures that the carburetor

now responds only to the C1 trim wheel. There will

190 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer / Auto-rotation settings

Helicopter mixers

Auto-rotation setting

Auto-rotation permits both full-size and model

helicopters to land safely in a crisis, e. g. if the motor

should fail. Moreover, if the tail rotor should fail,

cutting the motor and landing using auto-rotation is

also the only possible way to avoid a high-speed,

uncontrollable rotation around the vertical axis

and a resulting catastrophic crash – which is why a

switchover TO the auto-rotation phase takes place

immediately.

When the switchover to the auto-rotation phase is

made, the Helicopter mixer menu screen changes as

follows:

Pitch

–90%

Tail rot. offset AR 0%

Thr. position AR

Gyro suppression

Swashplate rotation

Swashplate limiter

0°

AUS



Gyro offset 0%

Autorot

During auto-rotation ﬂ ight, the main rotor is no longer

driven by the motor but only by its own momentum and

the the airﬂ ow through the rotor plane during descent.

Since the energy stored by a rotor kept spinning in this

way is rapidly consumed if the helicopter ﬂ ares, pilots

must not only have experience in handling helicopter

models but must also consider carefully how the

relevant functions should be conﬁ gured.

The advanced pilot should therefore practice auto-

rotation landings at regular intervals. Not only to be

able to demonstrate mastery of the maneuver at

competitions, but also to ensure the pilot can can

land the helicopter undamaged from a great height if

the motor should fail. For this purpose, the program

provides a range of adjustment options designed to

help the pilot ﬂ y a motorized model in its unpowered

state. Note that the auto-rotation settings comprise a

complete seventh ﬂ ight phase, which provides access

to all the ﬂ ight phase- speciﬁ c conﬁ guration options,

and to trims, collective pitch curve settings, etc.,

in particular. The following functions have special

features not present in the powered ﬂ ight phases:

Pitch (Collective pitch curve (C1  Pitch))

In powered ﬂ ight, the maximum blade pitch angle is

limited by available motor power. In auto-rotation,

however, it is limited only by the point at which airﬂ ow

ceases over the main rotor blades. Greater maximum

collective pitch must therefore be set to ensure

sufﬁ cient thrust when ﬂ aring the helicopter even as

rotational speed is falling off. To do so, brieﬂ y tap

the center SET key of the right touch pad to switch

to the "Pitch" graph page and then use the joystick

to move the vertical line to point "H". Start by setting

a value that is about 10 to 20 % greater than your

"normal" maximum value for collective pitch. Initially,

however, do NOT set a value that is considerably

greater than for normal ﬂ ight, since, if this is done,

the behavior of the collective pitch controls may then

be very unfamiliar following the switchover. Indeed,

there is a danger that the pilot will oversteer during

the ﬂ are and the model will balloon: this will case the

rotor speed to collapse at a considerable altitude and

the model will then crash to the ground. The value

can always be readjusted later after ﬂ ying some test

auto-rotations.

The minimum value for collective pitch can differ

from that set for normal ﬂ ight. This depends on the

pilot's usual style for normal ﬂ ight. For auto-rotation,

however, always set a sufﬁ ciently generous minimum

value for collective pitch at point "L" to ensure

the model can be brought out of forward ﬂ ight at

moderate speed into a descent at an angle of around

60 … 70 degrees when collective pitch is reduced to

a minimum. If, like most helicopter pilots, you have

used this kind of setting for normal ﬂ ight anyway, then

this value can simply be transferred.

If, however, you normally let your model "fall" at a

shallower angle, then you should increase the value

at point "L", and vice versa.

Approach angle for

various wind conditions

Approach angle

in moderate

wind

no wind

45°

60°

75°

in strong

wind

As a rule, the collective pitch stick itself is not

positioned right at the bottom of its travel for auto-

rotation. Instead, it is typically between the hover

position and the bottom end-point. This offers the

pilot an option for further adjustment, e. g. via pitch

inclination through pitch-axis controls.

The approach can be shortened by pulling back

slightly on the pitch-axis joystick and gently reducing

pitch or by extending the approach by pushing

forward on the pitch-axis joystick and carefully

increasing pitch.

Throttle setting AR

Although pilots will be expected to cut the glow

motor completely during competitions, This is rather

inconvenient during training sessions because the

motor must be restarted after every practice auto-

rotation landing.

Therefore, for training sessions, set this line's value

such that a combustion motor is held at a safe idle

without the clutch engaging during the auto-rotation

phase; electric drive systems should be set safely to

"Off".

Note:

The "Motor Stop" option in the »Base setup model«

menu offers an alternative "Emergency STOP"

191

Detail program description - Helicopter mixer / Auto-rotation settings

function.

Tail rotor AR

In normal ﬂ ight, the tail rotor is set so that it

compensates for motor torque while the model is

hovering. It therefore generates some a certain

amount of thrust even in its normal position. The

level of thrust is then varied by the tail rotor control

system, and also by the various mixers which provide

all manner of torque compensation, while the tail rotor

trim is also used to compensate for varying weather

conditions, ﬂ uctuations in system rotational speed

and other inﬂ uences.

For auto-rotation, however, the main rotor is not

driven by the motor, but by the "windmill" principle.

Since this, in turn, does not generate any torque

for which the tail rotor must compensate, all

corresponding mixers are switched off automatically.

Since the absence of torque in auto-rotation also

means the above-mentioned thrust is superﬂ uous,

however, a different tail rotor conﬁ guration is also

required:

Cut the motor and place the helicopter on the ground

in a level attitude. With the transmitter and receiving

system switched on, select the ﬂ ight phase "Auto-

rotation" and then fold the tail rotor blades down. Now

change the value on the "Tail rotor" line until the tail

rotor blade angle of attack is zero degrees. Viewed

from the tail, the tail rotor blades should be parallel to

one another.

Depending on the friction and running resistance

of the gearbox, the fuselage may still yaw slightly,

however. This relatively slight torque must then be

corrected if necessary by adjusting the tail rotor

blade pitch angle. This value will always be a ﬁ gure

between zero degrees and a pitch angle opposed to

the pitch angle in normal ﬂ ight.

192 General notes on freely programmable mixers

The previous pages have described a wealth of

ready-to-use built-in coupling functions, in the context

of the two menus »Wing mixers« and »Helicopter

mixers«. The fundamental signiﬁ cance of mixers and

the principle by which they work are described on

page 159. The following section provides information

about the so-called "free mixers".

In addition to the pre-programmed mixers mentioned

above, the mc-16 HoTT also offers a number of

freely programmable mixers in every model memory

location, whose inputs, outputs and mixer ratios can

be deﬁ ned to meet one's own requirements. These

include:

8 linear mixers, numbered 1 through 8•

4 curve mixers, numbered 9 through 12•

These 12 mixers are certainly adequate for most

applications and are certainly sufﬁ cient when the

potential of the pre-programmed coupling functions

are utilized. In the »Mix active/phase« menu (see

page 204), each of these 12 mixers can be activated

or deactivated separately for each ﬂ ight phase.

For the "free mixers", the signal present at any control

function (1 to 16) can be assigned as the input signal

or,for a so-called "switch channel" (see further below),

the signal from any switch can be utilized. The signal

that is present at the control channel and passed

to the mixer input is always inﬂ uenced by its own

transmitter control and by any control characteristic

that may have been set, e. g. those speciﬁ ed by

the »Dual Rate / Expo«, »Channel 1 curve« and

»Control adjust« menus.

The mixer output acts on a control channel (1

to – depending on receiver type – a maximum of 16)

that can also be assigned freely. Before this channel

routes the signal to the servo, it can only still be

inﬂ uenced by the »Servo adjustments« menu, i.e.

by the the servo reverse, neutral point offset, servo

travel and servo travel limit functions, and possibly by

»Tx. output swap«.

One control function can be used for any number of

mix inputs simultaneously: if, for example, several

mixers are to be switched to act in parallel.

Conversely, it is possible for any number of mixers to

affect one and the same control channel. Particularly

in the latter case, however, it is very important to

ensure that the servo concerned does not strike its

mechanical end-stops when several mixer signals

accumulate excessively. For safety's sake, it may

therefore be necessary to set an appropriate travel

limit in the »Servo adjustments« menu.

For more complex applications, mixers can be switched

in sequence. In this case, it is not the (transmitter)

signal at the "output" of a control function which forms

the input signal of the "series-wired" mixer, but the

(mixed) signal "further back" at the "input" of a control

channel. The following description of the free mixers

includes several examples of this type.

In the software, one "free mixer" is always initially

activated. Optionally the mixer can also be assigned to

an ON/OFF switch. Since there are so many functions

to which switches can be assigned, be careful to avoid

(undesired) multiple assignments to a single switch.

The two key mixer parameters are:

… the • mixer ratio, which deﬁ nes the extent to

which the input signal acts on the output of the

control channel connected to the mixer output.

The mixer ratio for linear mixers can be set as

symmetrical or asymmetric. Curve mixers can also

be conﬁ gured with up to 8 points to suit one's own

application and even implement extremely non-

linear curves.

… • the neutral point of a mixer, which is also

referred to as the "offset".

The offset is that speciﬁ c point along the

movement of a transmitter control (joystick,

proportional control or switch) at which the

mixer no longer inﬂ uences the control channel

connected to its output. Normally, the neutral

point is the center point of the transmitter control.

However, the offset can also be set at any other

point along the control travel. Since there are no

restrictions on the design of the curve mixers,

setting a mixer neutral point only makes sense for

the 8 linear mixers.

Switch channel "S" as a mixer input

Occasionally, however, only a constant control signal

is required at the mixer output, e.g. for a slightly

increased "up-elevator" trim when the aero-tow

release is closed – fully independently of its normal

trim setting.

In this case a switch is assigned both to the aero-

tow release and the mixer; it is then used not only

to open and close the release, but also to pass the

desired trim signal to the elevator via the mixer ratio.

To identify this special arrangement, this mixer input

control function in the program is designated "S" for

"Switch channel".

In addition, if the corresponding "target channel"

should now no longer be inﬂ uenced by its "normal"

transmitter control, isolate the latter from the function

input of the affected control channel by way of the

»MIX-only channel« menu (page 205). Here too, for

clariﬁ cation of this there is an example of the function

provided in the following menu description.

General notes on freely programmable mixers

193

Detail program description - Free mixers

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad,

page to the menu option …

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixers MIX aktiv / Phase

… on the multi-function menu. Brieﬂ y tap the center

SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu

option.

Regardless of the model type selected, each of the

80 model memory locations offers eight linear mixers

(LinearMIX 1 …8) …

LinearMIX 1

Mitte

––––

from – Begr. +

––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

… and 4 curve mixers (CurveMIX 9 … 12), which

also offer non-linear control characteristics:

LinearMIX 8

Mitte

––––

from – Begr. +

––––

CurveMIX 9

CurveMIX10

CurveMIX11

CurveMIX12

In addition, the »MIX active/phase« menu (page 204)

permits the independent activation and deactivation

of only particular mixers for speciﬁ c ﬂ ight phases.

On the "Free mixers" menu, the blocked mixers

are then suppressed in the corresponding ﬂ ight

phase. If you are hunting for a mixer that is

not shown, you should therefore switch to the

appropriate ﬂ ight phase!

In this ﬁ rst section, however, we will concentrate on

how to program the ﬁ rst screen page of the "free

mixers". We will then move on to the method of

programming mixer ratios, both for linear mixers and

curve mixers, as found on the second screen page of

this menu.

Basic programming procedure

Select the mixer you want by using the 1. 

selection keys on the left or right touch pad.

Tap the center 2. SET key of the right touch pad. The

input ﬁ eld on the line marked "fr" at the lower edge

of the screen is now shown highlighted.

Use the selection keys on the right touch pad to 3.

select the "fr" mixer input.

Tap the center 4. SET key of the right touch pad;

using the  selection key of the left or right touch

pad, switch to the column marked "to" at the lower

edge of the screen then tap the center SET key of

the right touch pad once again.

The input ﬁ eld "to" is shown highlighted.

Use the selection keys on the right touch pad to 5.

select the "to" mixer output.

Tap the center 6. SET key of the right touch pad.

Optionally use the selection key of the left or

right touch pad to switch to the column marked

"ty" at the lower edge of the screen in order to

include the trim of the respective joystick in the

mixer input signal ("Tr" for trim or "P" for phase)

and/or to add series switching for mixers …

… and/or use the  selection key of the left or

right touch pad to change the column marked

with the switch icon on the lower edge of the

screen. To do this, tap the center SET key of the

right touch pad once again and assign a switch

as described in the section "Assigning transmitter

controls, switches and control switches" (page 56).

Using the 7.  selection key of the left or right touch

pad, switch to the column "Settings" then tap the

center SET key of the right touch pad.

Deﬁ ne the mixer ratios on the second screen 8.

page.

Return to the ﬁ rst page by using the center 9. ESC

key of the left touch pad.

fr"

After selecting a mixer line and a subsequent tap on

the center SET key of the right touch pad, select one

of the control functions, 1 … 16 or S, for the value

ﬁ eld now in inverse video with the selection keys of

the right touch.

For the sake of clarity, control functions 1 … 4 are

marked as follows when setting wing mixers:

C1 Throttle/airbrake stick

AI Aileron stick

EL Elevator stick

RU Rudder stick

… and, for the helicopter program:

Free mixers

Freely-programmable linear and curve mixers

194 Detail program description - Free mixers

Mixer switches

In the sample screen image shown above, switches

"4" and "2" have been assigned to linear mixers 1 and

4 and to mixer 2 of the control switch "G4".

The switch symbol to the right of the switch number

shows the current switch state.

Any mixers not assigned to a switch, as indicated

by an empty cell for the column marked by the

switch icon on the screen's bottom line, are

fundamentally active!

A switch must be assigned to LinearMIX 4 if you

wish to switch between two ﬁ xed mixer values (still

to be set) that correspond to the two end-points of

a (proportional) transmitter control. Accordingly, the

"switch channel" mixer cannot also be switched "on"

or "off" as with the other mixers.

If you intend to assign a control switch (G1 … G4)

as a switch, then please note that you must deﬁ ne

this appropriately BEFOREHAND in the »Control

switch« menu. If you do not, you will assign an

undeﬁ ned control switch and therefore one that

functions as a ﬁ xed switch.

" Ty"

Including the trim

For control functions 1 … 4, you can also allow

trimming of the digital trim wheel for the given joystick

effect the mixer's input. In this case, brieﬂ y tap the

center SET key of the right touch pad then use the

selection keys to select "Tr" in the inverse video ﬁ eld:

LinearMIX 1

type

from – Begr. +

––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

off

1 Throttle/collective pitch stick

2 Roll stick

3 Pitch-axis stick

4 Tail rotor stick

Note:

If you select any of the control functions 5 … 16 for

ﬁ xed-wing models or 5, 7 … 16 for helicopter models,

do not forget to assign a transmitter control for each

of these in the »Control adjust« menu!

"S" as switch channel

Selecting "S" (switch channel) in the fr column has

the effect of passing a constant input signal to the

mixer input, e.g. in order to add a little more "up-

elevator" trim when the aero-tow release is closed, as

mentioned on the previous page.

After assigning a control function or the "S" switch

channel in the "fr" column, the following is also

displayed …

" to "

… on the lower edge of the screen.

Use this column's input ﬁ eld to specify the destination

of the mixer, i.e. assign mixer output, to one of the

control channels. At the same time, additional ﬁ elds

will appear in the bottom line of the screen:

LinearMIX 1

type

from – Begr. +

––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

off

In this example, four mixers have already been

deﬁ ned. The second mixer is already familiar in

principle as "Elevat curve" from the "Brake settings"

sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu and the third

is familiar from the line "Tail" ("2ELSv3+8") of the

»Model type« menu. As a general rule, however, you

should ﬁ rst make use of the pre-programmed mixers.

However, if you need asymmetric mixer ratios, want

to program non-linear curves or need to offset the

mixer neutral point, then you should set or leave the

pre-programmed mixers at "0 %" and replace these

with free mixers.

Erasing mixers

To erase a previously-deﬁ ned mixer, select the

appropriate line with the  selection keys on the

left or right touch pad , switch to the "fr" column, if

necessary, with the  selection keys then brieﬂ y

tap the center SET button on the right touch pad:

LinearMIX 1

type

from – Begr. +

––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

off

The ﬁ eld in the " fr " column for the mixer you want to

delete will now be shown in inverse video: tap both

 selection keys or  on the right touch pad at

the same time (CLEAR):

LinearMIX 1

type

from – Begr. +

––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

off

––––

195

Detail program description - Free mixers

Example:

Two mixers (MIX 6  7 and 7  8):

a) WITHOUT series switching:

6 6

Servo 4,8 V

C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

Servo 4,8 V

C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

Servo 4,8 V

C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

MIX 1

MIX 2

b) The same mixers WITH series switching:

6 6

Servo 4,8 V

C 577

Best.-Nr. 41 01

Servo 4,8 V

C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

Servo 4,8 V

C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

MIX 1

MIX 2

In this highly simpliﬁ ed example, if mixer 2 is

switched in series, then it does not "take over" solely

the transmitter signal of control function 7 – as shown

under a) – but, instead, the entire (mixed) signal

present at the servo side of control channel 7, as

shown under b). It then directs this in accordance

with its conﬁ gured mixer ratio forwards to control

channel 8. In this case, the effect of transmitter

control "6" extends as far as output "8". This kind of

serial linkage can be extended as far as you wish.

For example, another mixer "8  12" can be used

to route the control signal from "6" as far as output

"12", taking into consideration the associated mixer

ratios. Of course, even with an active serial link,

each separate mixer can still be controlled via the

transmitter control assigned to the mixer input. Fixed-

wing and helicopter mixers also work in the same

way, when set up to switch "in sequence".

Including phase trim

If you wish to apply the FLAP channel ("6") or FLAP2

channel ("9") trim values stored in the »Phase trim«"

menu – ﬂ ight phase dependent – then ﬁ rst tap the

center SET key of the right touch pad and use its

selection keys to select "P":

LinearMIX 1

type

from – Begr. +

––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

––––

Depending on the mixer value conﬁ gured, a mixer

can, as shown in the example above, route the signal

from a ﬂ ap control present (e.g.) on input 6 to control

channel 11, while also applying the FLAP trim value

set on the »Phase trim« menu (page 150) for the

respective ﬂ ight phase.

Other special features of free mixers

Mixer input = mixer output

If you set up a mixer whose input is the same as

its output, e.g. "C1  C1", you can achieve some

very special effects in conjunction with the option of

switching a free mixer on and off in any way you like.

A typical application of this can be found at the end of

this section, as Example 2 on page 202.

Tip:

If you separate a control function, e.g. "9", from

control channel 9" using the »MIX-only channel«

menu (see page 205), then servo response is

deﬁ ned only by the mixer ratio (yet to be speciﬁ ed)

The effect of the C1 trim wheel on mixer output will

depend on the function assigned in the »Model type«

menu (page 94), in the "Motor on C1" column for

ﬁ xed-wing models …

Trim Effect on mixer output

None linear over full trim wheel travel

Forward Only effective if C1 stick is forward

Back Only effective if C1 stick is back

… or on the "Pitch" line of the »Stick mode« menu

for helicopter models:

Trim Effect on mixer output

(Thr-AR)

linear over full trim wheel travel

(throttle

limit)

only effective at minimum position of

the assigned throttle limit control (the

right side proportional rotary control as

standard)

Switching mixers in series

As already explained on page 192, you can also

switch mixers in series: Where mixers are switched

in "sequence", the "input signal" of a control channel

already on its way to the servo "branches off" and

is directed to a further channel. In the "ty" column,

select the right angle bracket " " or "Tr ", if the trim

should also act simultaneously on the mixer input:

LinearMIX 1

type

from – Begr. +

––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

––––

196 Detail program description - Free mixers

N.N.*  7 servo pair 6 + 7 responds with an

aileron function

N.N.*  9 servo pair 9 + 10 responds with a

ﬂ ap function

N.N.*  10 servo pair 9 + 10 responds with an

aileron function

N.N.*  11 servo pair 11 + 12 responds with a

ﬂ ap function

N.N.*  12 servo pair 11 + 12 responds with

an aileron function

Model helicopters:•

With helicopter mixers, collective pitch control

may be provided by up to 4 servos connected

to receiver outputs 1, 2, 3 and 5, depending on

helicopter type. The software links these together

to control collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis.

Other than within the »Helicopter mixers«

menu, it is not advisable to mix a free mixer into

these channels because this can lead to very

complex interactions. One of the few exceptions is

"Collective pitch trim using a separate transmitter

control" – see example 3 on page202.

Important notices:

With serial links in particular, remember that •

that the travels of the individual mixers are

cumulative if multiple stick commands are

made simultaneously: there is a risk that the

servo(s) may strike a mechanical end-stop. If

necessary, reduce "servo travel" to avoid this;

alternatively, set "Travel limit" on the "Servo

adjustments" menu and/or reduce mixer values.

Take advantage of the ever-present option •

to switch over to the transmitter's »Servo

display«" menu (see page 262). This menu

is reached from almost any menu with a

of the mixer programmed on the same channel.

Thus, with linear mixers LinearMIX 1 … 8 or curve

mixers CurveMIX 9 … 12, 8-point control curves can

be deﬁ ned for any transmitter control in a manner

analogous to that described in the »Channel 1

curve« menu and these can also be used in ﬂ ight

phase switching if needed. This method of "linking" is

not only also switchable but can even be subject to a

delay by assigning an appropriate delay in the "– time

+" column of the »Control adjust« menu.

Mixer output affecting default software coupling

of aileron, camber-changing ﬂ ap or collective

pitch servos

Before we start specifying the mixer ratio, we must

ﬁ rst give some thought to what happens if we permit

a mixer to affect the default software coupling of

aileron, camber-changing ﬂ ap or collective pitch

servos:

Fixed-wing models:•

Depending on the number of wing servos available

on the "Aile/ﬂ aps" line of the »Model type« menu,

control channels 2 and 5 are connected via special

mixers for the "aileron" function, 6 and 7 for the

"ﬂ ap" function, outputs 9 and 10 (if present) for the

FLAP2 servos and 11 and 12 for AI2 servos.

If mixer outputs are programmed to affect these

kinds of couplings, then their effect on the

respective ﬂ ap pair derived from the "receiving"

control channel must be accounted for:

Mixer Effect

N.N.*  2 servo pair 2 + 5 responds with an

aileron function

N.N.*  5 servo pair 2 + 5 responds with a

ﬂ ap function

N.N.*  6 servo pair 6 + 7 responds with a

ﬂ ap function

brief, simultaneous tap on the  keys of

the left touch pad. This menu gives you the

opportunity to check the effects of all of your

settings on a single screen.

Mixer ratios and mixer neutral point

Now that we have explained the wide-ranging nature

of the mixer functions, the following section describes

how to program linear and non-linear mixer curves.

For each of the 12 available mixers, the mixer curves

are programmed on a second page of the screen

display. Use the selection keys  on the left or

right touch pad to select the desired mixer line. If

necessary, use the touch pad's selection keys to

move to the right column (= ) then brieﬂ y tap the

center SET key of the right touch pad to access the

graph page.

LinearMIX 1 … 8: Setting linear mixer values

As a practical example, we will now deﬁ ne a linear

mixer curve to resolve the following problem:

For a motorized aircraft model, the two servos

connected to receiver outputs 6 and 7 – deﬁ ned on

the "Aile/ﬂ aps" line of the »Model type« menu as "…

2FL" – are to be used for actuating landing ﬂ aps. That

is; when a transmitter control is moved, they must

deﬂ ect downwards only. This requires a simultaneous

elevator trim, however.

First allocate, for example, input 6 to the leftmost

slider control SR1 located in the middle of the console

by making settings in the »Control adjust« menu.

A transmitter control on input 6, – as shown in the

above table – will control the two servos connected

to receiver outputs 6 and 7 by default as ﬂ aps. Leave

the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone,

however, to conﬁ gure this setting globally for all ﬂ ight

phases – as is the case for the free mixer.

* N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (the name to be stated)

197

Detail program description - Free mixers

»Control adjust« menu

0% +100%I5

Typ SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

S11 ---

---

offset

Normal

Note:

Note that if two ﬂ ap servos have been selected,

any transmitter control assigned to input 7 will be

decoupled in the software in order to avoid errors

in operating the ﬂ aps. However, in the interests of

safety, you should make a habit of leaving all inputs

not currently required to "free", or of resetting these

back to "free"!

Start by moving this transmitter control to its forward

limit and adjust the landing ﬂ aps so that they are

retracted or closed in this position. If you now move

the dial to the rear, the ﬂ aps should move downward;

if not the direction of servo rotation must be adapted.

We now turn our attention to the ﬁ rst mixer shown in

the screen image on page 194 ("6  EL"), to which

switch 4 was assigned:

LinearMIX 1

type

from – Begr. +

––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

off

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad

to open the second screen page:

Linear MIX 1 EL

off

If this screen appears, the mixer has not yet been

activated in combination with the assigned toggle

switch – "4", in this example. If so, operate the switch:

Mix input

Offset

Linear MIX 1

SYM ASY SET

STO

The continuous vertical line represents the current

position of the transmitter control linked to input

6. (However, it is not visible in the above graphic

because it is at the left edge since slider control SR1,

in this example assigned to input 6 (see previous

page), is at its forward limit.) The dotted vertical line

in the middle of the diagram indicates the position of

the mixer neutral point – see under "Offset", below.

The solid horizontal line shows the mixer ratio, which

currently has the value zero over the entire stick

travel; accordingly, the elevator will not yet follow the

movement of the ﬂ aps.

First, the …

Offset (mixer neutral point)

… should be deﬁ ned. Switch over to STO for this by

using the  selection key of the left or right touch pad:

Mix input

Offset

Linear MIX 1

SYM ASY SET

STO

The dotted vertical line in the middle of the diagram

indicates the position of the mixer neutral point

("Offset"), i.e. the speciﬁ c point along the control

travel at which the mixer does NOT inﬂ uence the

control channel connected to its output. The default

position for this point is at the control center.

However, since in our example the ﬂ aps should be

closed or retracted with the slider control at its forward

limit and therefore the elevator should not be further

inﬂ uenced in this position, the mixer neutral point must

be relocated to precisely this point. To do so, push the

slider control used (in this example, slider control SR1)

to its forward limit if you have not already done so,

then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch

pad. The dotted vertical line moves across to this point,

the new mixer neutral point, which by deﬁ nition always

retains the "initial" value of zero.

However, to better illustrate our example, we now

wish to set this "Offset" value to only -75 %.

Mix input

Offset

–75%

Linear MIX 1

SYM ASY SET

STO

198 Detail program description - Free mixers

Notes:

By selecting • SET with the  selection key of the

left or right touch pad followed by a tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad …

Mix input

Offset

Linear MIX 1

SYM ASY SET

STO

–75%

… the offset value can be set manually or

adjusted in 1 % increments with the selection keys

on the left or right touch pad.

By selecting • SET …

Mix input

Offset

Linear MIX 1

SYM ASY STO

–75%

SET

… – see previous ﬁ gure – set the mixer's neutral •

point automatically back to control center with a

simultaneous tap on both the  or  selection

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR).

Symmetrical mixer ratios

The next task is to deﬁ ne the mixer values above and

below the mixer neutral point – starting from its current

position.

If necessary, use selection keys  on the left or

right touch pad to select the SYM ﬁ eld in order to

establish a mixer value which is symmetric to the

offset point just set. Following a brief tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad, set both SYM

ﬁ elds (now in inverse video) via the selection keys

of the right touch pad to values between -150 % and

+150 %. Note that the mixer value set always refers

to the input signal of the respective transmitter control

(control signal)! Negative mixer values reverse the

direction of the mixer.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will erase the mixer

ratio in the inverse video ﬁ eld.

The "optimum" value in our example will certainly

need ﬂ ight-testing.

Mix input Offset

Linear MIX 1

SYM ASY STO

–75%

SET

–20% –20%

Earlier, we set the mixer neutral point at -75 % of

control travel: as a result, the elevator ("EL") will

exhibit a (slight) down-elevator effect even at the

neutral point of the landing ﬂ aps and this is naturally

undesirable. Accordingly, you should reposition the

mixer neutral point to -100 % of control travel, as

described earlier.

Mix input

+20%

Offset

Linear MIX 1

+20%

SYM ASY SET

STO

–100%

If the offset, now -100 %, is reset to 0 % of control

travel by using selection key  on the left or right

touch pad to select the SET ﬁ eld then tapping either

the selection key combination  or  on the right

touch pad (CLEAR), the following screen will appear:

Mix input

+20%

Offset

Linear MIX 1

+20%

SYM ASY STO

SET

Asymmetric mixer ratios

In many cases, however, we require different mixer

values on each side of the mixer neutral point.

Do this by ﬁ rst resetting the offset of the mixer used

in the example, "6  EL" again to 0 %,if necessary,

refer to the ﬁ gure above. Now select the ASY ﬁ eld

with the selection key  on the left or right touch

pad then tap the center SET key of the right touch

pad. If slider control SR1, assigned to input 6 in

this example, is now moved in each corresponding

direction, the mixer ratios for each of the two control

directions, i.e. left and right of the established offset

point, can be adjusted with the selection keys of the

right touch pad:

199

Detail program description - Free mixers

Mix input Offset

Linear MIX 1

SYM ASY STO

SET

–55% –20%

Note:

If you are using a type "S  N.N.*" switch channel

mixer you will need to actuate the assigned switch.

The vertical line then jumps between the left and

right side.

Setting curve mixers 9 … 12

These four curve mixers allow the deﬁ nition of

extremely non-linear mixer curves by placing up to six

freely positionable points between the two endpoints

"L" (low = -100 % control travel) and "H" (high =

+100 % control travel) along the control travel.

If you have already read the »Channel 1 curve« menu

description or about programming 8-point curves in the

»Helicopter mixers« menu, you can safely skip the

following description.

Programming details

The control curve is deﬁ ned by up to 8 points,

known as "reference points". In the default software

conﬁ guration, 2 reference points are already deﬁ ned,

namely only the two end-points, "L" and "H"; see the

next screen image.

The following section applies to "any" mixer to which

we wish to assign a non-linear curve characteristic.

The examples shown in the following section

are merely illustrative, however, and they do not

represent real-life mixer curves.

Setting reference points

When you move the transmitter control assigned to

the mixer input – here control function 8 – a vertical

line in the graph follows the movement between the

two end-points. The current control position is also

shown numerically on the "Input" line. The point at

which this line intersects with the curve in question

is named the "Output" and can be varied between

-125 % and +125 % by setting reference points; see

further below. This control signal acts on the mixer

output.

In the above example, the transmitter control is on

input 8 at -50 % of control travel. The output signal

continue to show 0 %, however, since no value has

yet been entered.

Up to six additional reference points can be set

between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the

distance between neighboring reference points must

not be less than approx. 25 %.

Curve MIX 9

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

–

100

O U T P U T

810

When you now brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the

right touch pad, the "?" is replaced by a point number

and the value ﬁ eld to the right is activated, i.e.

presented in inverse video:

Curve MIX 9

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

–

100

O U T P U T

810

Using the selection keys on the right touch pad you

can now change the point value within a range of

±125 %, e.g.::

Curve MIX 9

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

+50%

–

100

O U T P U T

+50%

810

Note:

If the joystick does not coincide with the exact

reference point, please note that the percentage

value on the "Output" line always relates to the

current joystick position.

Continue in this way to set other reference points.

Note that the order in which you generate the

(maximum) four reference points between end-points

"L" and "H" is irrelevant, since the reference points

are continuously renumbered automatically from left

to right as they are entered.

Erasing reference points

To erase one of the reference points between "L"

and "H", use the transmitter control in question

to move the vertical line onto or into the vicinity

of the reference point in question. The reference

point number and associated reference point value

* N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (the name to be stated)

200 Detail program description - Free mixers

are shown on the "Point" line. The value ﬁ eld is

highlighted, see screen image above.

Now tap the two selection keys  or  on the

right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR).

The selected reference point is erased, and the

numbering of the remaining reference points is

updated as required. Brieﬂ y tap the center ESC key

of the left touch pad to complete the procedure.

Note that the reference points "L" and "H" cannot be

erased.

Changing reference point values

To change reference point values, use the associated

transmitter control to move the vertical line onto

the point you wish to change: "L", 1 … 6 or "H".

The number and current curve value of this point

are displayed. After activating the value ﬁ eld on the

"Point" line by brieﬂ y tapping the center SET key, use

the selection keys on the right touch pad to change

the current curve value shown in the highlighted ﬁ eld.

The possible range is -125 % to +125 % and changes

do not affect neighboring reference points. Brieﬂ y tap

the center ESC key of the left touch pad to complete

the procedure.

Note:

If the joystick does not coincide with the exact

reference point, please note that the percentage

value on the "Output" line always relates to the

current joystick position.

Trim point function

Alternatively, a jump up or down to reference

points already set, L, 1 … max. 6 and H, can be

accomplished by using the  selection keys on the

left touch pad. The selection keys on the right touch

pad can then be used to change the reference point

jumped to as described above, entirely independently

of the control position.

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

–25%

–

100

O U T P U T

+50%

Normal

Trim point

Curve MIX 9810

In this simple example, slider control

SD1 – represented by the vertical line – is halfway

between the forward limit and the midpoint of control

travel (input = -50 %). However, "Point 1" will be

relocated to control center at a point value of +50 %,

resulting in a momentary output value of -25 %.

One touch on the center ESC key of the left touch

pad will terminate this trim point function.

Trim offset function

When a value ﬁ

eld is active, i.e. in inverse video, it is

not only possible, as previously described, to jump

up or down to reference points already set with the

 selection keys of the left touch pad and to make

a change with the selection keys of the right touch

pad, but also an existing curve can be vertically

repositioned within a range of ±25 % through use of

the  keys on the left touch pad. Starting with a

point value for "Point 1" at 0 %, the control curves

in both of the following ﬁ gures have been vertically

shifted within the ±25 % range by the trim offset

function:

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

–25%

–

100

O U T P U T

–25%

Normal

Trim offset

Curve MIX 9810

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

+25%

–

100

O U T P U T

+25%

Normal

Trim offset

Curve MIX 9810

You can also exit this function by tapping the center

ESC key of the left touch pad.

Trim x-axis function

This function is activated by tapping the left () or

right () selection key of the right touch pad with

an active (i.e. inverse video) value ﬁ eld. You can

then use the selection keys on the right touch pad to

reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as

you wish. In the ﬁ gure below, "Point 1" which was just

shifted to +50 % with the trim point function, will now

be shifted to the left:

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

+67%

–

100

O U T P U T

+50%

Normal

Trim X-axis

Curve MIX 9810

Notes:

If the point is repositioned horizontally further •

away from the current control position than

approx. ±25 %, a "?" sign will reappear in the line

Point. This question mark does not refer to the

repositioned point, however: instead, it signiﬁ es

that a further point can be set at the current

control position.

201

Detail program description - Free mixers

Please note that the percentage value on the •

"Output" line always relates to the current joystick

position and not to the position of the point.

Smoothing the curve

Curve MIX 9

Curve

Point

Output

Input +50%

–75%

–

100

O U T P U T

–75%

810

off 3

This "angular" curve proﬁ le created in the example

can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a

button. Do this – from a situation as illustrated – with a

brief tap on the  selection key of the left touch pad.

This will result in a switchover from "(Curve) off" to

"(Curve) on" (or vice versa):

Curve MIX 9

Curve

Point

Output

Input +50%

–75%

–

100

O U T P U T

–75%

810

Note:

The curves shown here are for demonstration

purposes only and are not at all representative of real

mixer curves. For real-world application examples, see

the programming examples on pages 274 and 313.

Examples:

To open and close an aero-tow, a switch, e.g. SW 1.

2, has already been assigned to control channel 8

in the »Control adjust« menu:

0% +100%I5

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Offset

---

Normal

Subsequent aero-tow ﬂ ying has proven that you

always have to ﬂ y with the up-elevator held slightly

in during the tow. The solution will be to set up a

mixer that applies slight up-elevator trim to the

elevator servo connected to receiver output 3 when

the aero-tow release is closed. The screen-shot will

be familiar from page 194: here, the fourth linear

mixer has been set up for this function, with the

switch channel "S" as mixer input: Move the selected

switch to the OFF position and then switch …

LinearMIX 1

type

from – Begr. +

––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

off

… to the mixer conﬁ guration page.

Here select STO under "Offset" then tap the

center SET key of the right touch pad brieﬂ y …

depending on the selected travel setting in the

»Control adjust« menu and the switch setting,

the offset value will jump to +X % or -X %, for

example:

Mix input

Offset

Linear MIX 4

SYM ASY STO

–100%

SET

Now change left to SYM under "Mixer ratio" then

tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch

pad. The value ﬁ elds are now highlighted. After

you have moved the selected switch to the mixer

ON position, use the selection keys on the right

touch pad to set the required symmetrical mixer

ratio, for example:

Mix input Offset

Linear MIX 4

SYM ASY STO

–100%

SET

+10% +10%

2. If a multi- ﬂ ap wing featuring a "crow or butterﬂ y

system" with (additional) airbrakes is intended,

and this brake system is to be tested with and

without airbrakes, then simply set channel 1 to

"MIX-only" …

MIX ONLY CHANNEL

MIXonly

normal

12345678910111213141516

… and follow this by programming a free mixer

"C1  C1" to restore control over the airbrakes

202 Detail program description - Free mixers

via servo 1. If you also assign a switch to this

mixer, then you will be able to switch this mixer on

and off as you please.

3. The ﬁ nal example applies to model helicopters:

In the helicopter program, if you wish affect pitch

trim with a proportional control, e.g. one of the

slider controls in the middle of the console, then

assign one of these controls to this function in

the »Control adjust« menu; for example the

"I9" input. (However, leave the default value

of "GL" in the "Type" column as it is so this

conﬁ guration, analogous to the free mixer yet to

be programmed, will be applicable globally for all

ﬂ ight phases.) Finally, simply deﬁ ne a LinearMIX

"9  1" with a symmetric mixer ratio of, for

example, 25 %. Due to the internal coupling, this

transmitter control then acts equally on all of the

model's collective pitch servos without affecting

the throttle servo.

Mix input Offset

Linear MIX 5

SYM ASY STO

SET

+25% +25%

Decouple the assigned transmitter control from

control channel 9 in the »MIX-only channel«

menu to ensure that any servo connected to

receiver output 9 can no longer be operated by

this transmitter control; see also page 205.

203

For your notes

204 Detail program description - MIX active/phase

MIX active/phase

Selecting mixers for ﬂ ight phases

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad,

page to the menu option …

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX only channel

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixers MIX active/phase

… on the multi-function menu. Brieﬂ y tap the center

SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu

option.

LinearMIX 1

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

6EL

C1 EL

LinearMIX 4

3 8

SEL

yes

SEL

yes

MIX ACTIVE IN PHASE

The "free mixers" on the previous menu can be

enabled and disabled for speciﬁ c ﬂ ight phases.

You therefore have complete freedom in assigning

speciﬁ c mixers only to speciﬁ c ﬂ ight phases.

Switch to your chosen ﬂ ight phase and use the

selection keys to page through this menu. The mixers

on the »Free mixers« menu are displayed in the

center column.

Following the activation of the value ﬁ eld by brieﬂ y

tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad,

if the respective mixer is set to "no" by using the

selection keys on the left or right touch pad, then this

mixer is deactivated in the ﬂ ight phase shown at the

bottom of the display and, simultaneously, removed

from the »Free mixers« menu list:

LinearMIX 1

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

6EL

C1 EL

LinearMIX 4

3 8

SEL

yes

SEL

yes

MIX ACTIVE IN PHASE

If a mixer is "lost" in the »Free mixers« menu …

LinearMIX 1

type

from – Begr. +

––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

LinearMIX 6

to Adjust

off

––––

… then you should either switch through the ﬂ ight

phases until it appears again … or, alternatively,

switch to this menu and temporarily reactivate the

mixer you are looking for:

LinearMIX 1

type

from – Begr. +

––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

off

205

Detail program description - MIX-only channel

MIX-only channel

Separating control functions from control channels for all ﬂ ight phases

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad,

page to the menu option …

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX only channel

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

… on the multi-function menu. Brieﬂ y tap the center

SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu

option.

MIX ONLY CHANNEL

MIXonly

normal

1234567 8 9 10111213141516

This menu can be used to interrupt the normal signal

ﬂ ow between the input side control function and the

output side control channel, therefore the "classic"

control-to-servo connection is actually separated.

Use the potential offered by this ﬂ ight phase

independent menu, particularly to keep one of the

control channels "free" in all ﬂ ight phases from

assignment to a transmitter control or switch for

speciﬁ c ﬂ ight phases in the »Control adjust« menu.

Conversely of course, such a joystick, transmitter

control or switch "robbed" of its servo can still be

used freely as a control in other way – indeed even in

ﬂ ight phase dependence – , refer to the programming

examples at the end of this section.

A joystick, transmitter control or switch robbed of its

servo by setting the channel to "MIX only" will then

namely affect mixer inputs only …

… and the servo connected to a channel set to

"MIX only" is then also only accessible from the

mixers programmed to its control channel, i.e. "(with)

MIX(ers) only".

Accordingly, for any channel set to "MIX only", you

can utilize both its control function and its control

channel entirely independently of one another for any

special functions you need; see the examples at the

end of this section.

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to select the desired channel from 1 to 16 () then

brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad,

to switch at will between "normal" ( ) and "MIX only"

() modes:

MIX ONLY CHANNEL

MIXonly

normal

1234567 8 9 10111213141516

Examples:

For model glider aircraft without airbrakes, the •

butterﬂ

y function (page 172) is generally used as a

landing aid. Just as with "normal" airbrakes, this is

generally controlled using the C1 stick. While the

(airbrakes) servo typically connected to channel 1

is then generally absent as a rule, receiver output

1 is still not "free", since the control signal of the

brake stick is still present at this location.

Its control signal – which in this speciﬁ c case is not

desired – can be decoupled from control channel

"1" to thus "free up" this channel from the C1

joystick signal by setting channel 1 to "MIX only"

in the »MIX-only channel« menu. This makes

it possible to use control channel "1", together

with receiver connection "1", at any time for other

purposes, via freely-programmable mixers – e.g.

to connect up a speed controller.

If your model has built-in airbrakes, however, and •

you would like to perhaps test the performance

of a butterﬂ y system with and without airbrakes,

simply set channel 1 to "MIX only" and program a

free mixer "C1  C1", so as to restore your ability

to control the airbrakes via servo 1. If you also

assign a switch to this mixer, then you will be able

to switch this mixer on and off as you please.

206 Detail program description - Dual mixers

Dual mixers

Same-sense/opposite-sense mixing of two control channels

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad,

page to the menu option …

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

… on the multi-function menu. Brieﬂ y tap the center

SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu

option.

Diff.

DUAL MIXER

Mixer 1

Mixer 2

?? ??

Mixer 3

Mixer 4

?? ??

The four ﬂ ight phase independent dual mixers couple

a V-tail mixer in a similar manner …

Servo 4,8 V

C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

Servo 4,8 V

C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

V-tail mixer

Control function inputs

Control channels

(receiver outputs)

Elevator stick

Rudder stick

Right rudder / elevator

Left rudder / elevator

Rudder

Elevator

Rudder

Elevator

… a same-sense " " and an opposite-sense

" " control function, although they permit any

channel to be used and offer differential travel for the

opposing function.

Important notice:

Since the same and opposite sense inﬂ uences

of the given input on the two servos or rudder

ﬂ aps – coupled to one another by the dual mixer – are

determined by, among other things, their installation

situation and the direction of rotation speciﬁ ed in

the »Servo adjustment« menu, the symbols " "

and " " are to be perceived more as synonyms

rather than as consistently appropriate deﬁ nitions!

Accordingly, if wing ﬂ aps are deﬂ ected in the wrong

direction, simply swap the two inputs or use the

"servo reverse" option in the »Servo adjustment«

menu; see page 102.

In the software, the V-tail mixer already mentioned is

supplemented by other "dual mixers" for realization

of the two aileron servos on receiver outputs 2 and

5 and for the ﬂ ap pairs on outputs 6 and 7, possibly

also 9 and 10. These are activated via the aileron

stick and the transmitter control that has been

assigned to input "6" on the »Control adjust« menu.

In the same way, the four freely-programmable

dual mixers on this menu can be used to couple

two further control functions, a feature that would

otherwise only be possible with time-consuming

programming of free mixers.

Here, we will use a "V-tail with rudder differential" as

our example to explain the programming of a dual

mixer (see also the examples on page 286):

Diff.

DUAL MIXER

Mixer 1

Mixer 2

EL RU

Mixer 3

Mixer 4

?? ??

+25%

Depending on activation, both servos move in the

sense of elevators or rudder ﬂ aps. The differentiation,

according to dual mixer conﬁ guration, is only effective

for rudder activation. In this case, both corresponding

trim wheels are effective. No additional free mixers

are required for this arrangement. When using this

mixer, however, the tail type MUST be entered as

"normal" on the "Model type" menu.

Tip:

All settings can be checked directly in the »Servo

display« menu, which can be accessed from almost

any other menu by simultaneously tapping the 

keys on the left touch pad.

Example:

Model with two rudders, with differential travel and

outward movement (e.g. swept-back ﬂ ying wing):

207

Detail program description - Dual mixers

Diff.

DUAL MIXER

Mixer 1

Mixer 2

8 RU

Mixer 3

Mixer 4

?? ??

+75%

When a rudder command is given, the second servo

connected to output 8 follows suit. (With this type of

programming, differential travel can be conﬁ gured

for the rudders.) In this case, too, trim from the

rudder stick affects both servos. If the rudders are

also required to deﬂ ect outwards when the airbrakes

are activated, then you should assign the C1 stick

(transmitter control 1) to input 8 on the »Control

adjust«" menu. Afterwards, change to the "Offset"

column then modify the offset value until both

rudders are again in their neutral positions. It may

be necessary to "play" a bit with the offset and travel

adjustments.

208 Detail program description - Swashplate mixer and Fail-safe

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad,

page to the menu option …

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free Mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

… on the multi-function menu. Brieﬂ y tap the center

SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu

option:

SWASH MIXER

Pitch

Roll

Pitch ax.

+61%

SEL

Note:

If "1 servo" is selected on the "Swashplate" line of the

»Helicopter type«" menu, this option is not shown on

the multi-function menu.

The number of servos installed in your helicopter for

pitch control was established in the Swashplate line

of the »Helicopter type« menu, see page 98. This

information is used to automatically couple together

the functions for roll, pitch-axis and collective pitch,

so that you do not need to deﬁ ne any other mixers

yourself.

For helicopter models with only a single collective

pitch servo, this "Swashplate mixer" menu option is of

course superﬂ uous because the software controls a

total of three swashplate servos for pitch, nick and roll

independently of one another, i.e. without a mixer. In

Swashplate mixer

Collective pitch, roll, pitch-axis mixer

this scenario, this menu option is therefore no longer

available to you from the multi-function menu. With

all other swashplate linkages employing 2 … 4 pitch

servos, mixer ratios and mixer directions are set up

by default as shown above. The default is +61 % in

each case but the value can be varied from -100 % to

+100 % if required by brieﬂ y tapping the center SET

key of the right touch pad and its selection keys.

Simultaneously tapping both  or  selection

keys on the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the

mixer ration in inverse video again to the +61 %

default value.

If the swashplate control system (collective pitch,

roll and pitch-axis) does not respond to the joysticks

properly, you should alter the mixer directions

("+" or "-") before trying to correct the directions

of servo rotation.

Note:

Ensure that changed mixer values do not result in the

servos mechanically striking their end-stops.

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad,

page to the menu option …

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free Mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

… on the multi-function menu. Brieﬂ y tap the center

SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu

option:

FAIL SAFE

Pos

hold

1234567 8 9 10111213141516

DELAY : 0.25s STO

The higher level of operating safety exhibited by

the HoTT system when compared to traditional

PPM technology results from the fact that the

microprocessor built into the HoTT receiver not only

exclusively processes the signals of "its" transmitter,

but can also clean up "dirty" control signals that it

receives. Only when these signals become too error-

prone or garbled due to outside interference does the

processor automatically replace the disrupted signals

Fail-safe

Fault condition setpoints

209

Detail program description - Swashplate mixer and Fail-safe

with the last received correct signal, temporarily

stored in the receiver. This feature is conﬁ gured by

the settings as described below. This feature also

suppresses brief interference caused by e.g. local

drops in ﬁ eld strength, which otherwise result in the

familiar "glitches". In this case, the red LED lights up

on the receiver.

If you have selected a PCM transmission mode for

the active model memory but have not yet carried

out the fail-safe programming, you will see a warning

message on the screen when you switch on the

transmitter:

Fail Safe

setup

t.b.d.

Programming procedure

The "Fail Safe" function determines the behavior of

the receiver if communication between the transmitter

and the receiver is disrupted. Receiver outputs 1 …

16 can optionally …

preserve the current position ("hold"):1.

if communication is disrupted, all servos

programmed to "hold" mode remain at the

positions judged to be the last valid positions by

the receiver until the receiver picks up another

valid control signal, or

move to a freely selectable position ("Pos") if 2.

interference should occur, following the expiry of

the "time delay".

Use selection keys  on the left or right touch pad

to select the desired servo connection 1 bis 16 ()

then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch

pad to freely switch between "hold" ( ) and "Pos"

mode ( ):

FAIL SAFE

Pos

hold

12345678910111213141516

DELAY : 0.25s STO

Following this, use the selection keys  on the left

or right touch pad to select the "DELAY" option shown

at the bottom of the display …

FAIL SAFE

Pos

hold

1234567 8 9 10111213141516

DELAY : 0.25s STO

… and then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right

touch pad. Now use the touch pad's selection keys to

make your choice from the four possible time delays

(0.25 s, 0.5 s, 0.75 s and 1 s) offered.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse

video ﬁ eld to its default value 0.25 s.

Afterwards, select the STO ﬁ eld at the bottom right

of the display with the  selection keys on the left

or right touch pad. Now put the servos which have

been switched into position mode into their desired

positions SIMULTANEOUSLY with the respective

operating elements.

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch

pad to store these positions as the fail-safe setting

for the receiver, so that it can revert back to them if

interference is experienced.

Successful storage of the positions is conﬁ rmed

brieﬂ y on the screen:

FAIL SAFE

Pos

hold

1234567 8 9 10111213141516

DELAY : 0.25s STO

Position stored

Attention:

Please note that decisive fail-safe settings are •

stored in the receiver! Therefore, following a

change of receivers, these fail-safe settings

should be renewed and in the previous

receiver they should be erased, if necessary

per Reset, see page 46.

Ensure you make use of this safety net by •

at least programming the following for a fail-

safe incident: for glow-powered models, set

the motor throttle position to idle; for electric

models, set the motor function to stop, or

"Hold" for helicopter models. If interference

should occur, the model is then less likely

to ﬂ y off on its own and cause damage to

property or even personal injury. Consider

asking an experienced pilot for advice.

210 Detail program description - Teacher/pupil

Teacher/pupil

Connecting two transmitters for trainer mode with a trainer lead

The mc-16 HoTT transmitter is equipped

standard – as viewed from the front, under the left

front ﬂ ap – with a DSC socket. This is not only usable

for connecting ﬂ ight simulators – as described on

page 22 – but also to integrate the transmitter into a

cable-coupled teacher/pupil system.

To accommodate the settings necessary for this,

scroll with the selection keys on the left or right touch

pad to the »Teacher/pupil« menu option in the

Multifunction menu:

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad

to open this menu option:

TRAINER /student

2345

BIND:

SW: –––

n/a

678910 11 12

Note:

The screen image shown above shows the menu

in its initial state: No transmitter controls have been

released by the pupil ( ) and no switch is assigned

("SW: ---" bottom left in the screen image).

When assigning control functions, the usual

conventions must be observed:

Channel Function

1 Motor throttle/collective pitch

2 Aileron/roll

3 Elevator/pitch-axis

4 Rudder/tail rotor

Teacher-pupil settings

Up to twelve function inputs (see "Term deﬁ nitions"

on page 54) of the teacher transmitter "T" can be

individually or in any combination transferred to the

pupil transmitter "P".

The lower display line, designated with "T", therefore

indicates the function inputs with which control

functions 1 … 4 (joystick functions for ﬁ xed-wing and

helicopter models) are permanently connected as

well as inputs 5 … 12, which can be freely assigned

in the »Control adjust« menu.

Note:

Just which controls are assigned to any inputs turned

over to the pupil is basically of no consequence.

However, their assignment in the »Control adjust«

menu is possible only when the trainer mode

connection is inactive.

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to select the function inputs 1 through 12 for

transfer to the pupil() then brieﬂ y tap center SET

key of the right touch pad for each switch to be

switched between "T(eacher)"( ) and "P(upil)" ( ):

TRAINER /student

2345

BIND:

SW: –––

n/a

678910 11 12

To be able to carry out the transfer, you must then

assign a trainer mode switch on the left of the display.

Do this by placing the marker just to the right of

the "P"at the bottom left of the screen display by

using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad

then assign a switch as described in the section

"Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control

switches" on page 56.

Preferably you should utilize one of the two standard

momentary switches on the switchboard to allow

a return of control to the teacher transmitter at any

time.

TRAINER /Teacher

2345

BIND:

SW: –––

n/a

678910 11 12

–

pupil

signal

Since at this early stage of programming a trainer

system it is unlikely that an operational pupil

transmitter is connected to the teacher transmitter,

the transmitter responds immediately to the switches

closed during the switch assignment process with

appropriate visual and audible warning notices. You

should therefore re-open the switch you have just

assigned:

211

Detail program description - Teacher/pupil

TRAINER /Teacher

2345

BIND:

SW:

n/a

678910 11 12



Note:

The switch assignment just described also

determines the transmitter used to issue the teacher

and pupil functions, respectively. For this reason, a

pupil transmitter must NEVER be assigned a switch

on this menu. The header line therefore also

switches from "Teacher / Pupil" to "Teacher /

Teach" once a switch has been assigned.

The model to be controlled by the pupil must be

programmed completely – i.e. with all its functions

including trims and any mixer functions – in one of

the model memories of the mc-16 HoTT teacher

transmitter. The HoTT receiver of the model in

question must also be "bound" to the teacher

transmitter, since the latter ultimately controls the

model, even in pupil mode.

ALWAYS ENSURE YOU SWITCH ON THE mc-16

HoTT teacher transmitter FIRST BEFORE

PLUGGING THE CONNECTION CABLE INTO

THIS UNIT. Otherwise the RF module will not be

activated.

The mc-16 HoTT teacher transmitter can be

connected to any suitable pupil transmitter, even

transmitters using the "traditional" 35/40 MHz range.

This means, for example, that a mc-16 HoTT

teacher transmitter can indeed also be connected to

a mc-24 pupil transmitter.

However, if the pupil-side connection is NOT made

via a two-pole DSC socket but rather via a three-

pole trainer socket (for example, out of the Graupner

product line), then the basic prerequisite for a

correct connection to a pupil transmitter which is

completely independent of the type of modulation

used in the teacher transmitter must ALWAYS be

set to modulation type PPM (10, 16, 18 or 24) in

the pupil transmitter.

Pupil transmitter set-up

The model to be controlled by the pupil must be

programmed completely, i.e. with all its functions

including trims and any mixer functions, in one

of the model memories of the teacher transmitter

and, if applicable, the HoTT receiver of the model

in question must also be "bound" to the teacher

transmitter. In principle, a mc-16 HoTT pupil

transmitter can also be connected to a teacher

transmitter operating on the "traditional" 35/40 MHz

bands. This is possible because the PPM signal

required by the teacher transmitter is available in the

(pupil) transmitter's DSC socket.

Almost any transmitter with at least four control

functions from previous and current Graupner series

can be used as a pupil transmitter. More detailed

information can be found in the RC main catalog and

on the www.graupner.de website.

If required, the pupil transmitter should be ﬁ tted

with the connection module for pupil transmitters.

This is to be connected to the transmitter board in

accordance with the supplied installation instructions.

Information on the pupil modules required in each

case can be found in the Graupner RC main catalog

and on the www.graupner.de website.

The connection to the teacher transmitter is made

using the appropriate lead; see the following

double page.

The control functions of the pupil transmitter

MUST act directly on the control channels, i.e. the

receiver outputs, without intermediary mixers.

If you are using an "mc" or "mx" series transmitter,

it is best to activate a free model memory with the

required model type ("Fixed-wing" or "Heli"). Assign

the model name "Pupil" and set up the stick mode

(mode 1 … 4) and "Throttle min. forward/back" to suit

the pupil's preferences. All other settings are left at

their default values, however. If you have selected

the "Helicopter" model type, you must also set the

throttle/ collective pitch direction and idle trim on the

pupil transmitter. All other settings, including mixer

and coupling functions, are conﬁ gured exclusively on

the teacher transmitter, which in turn transmits them

to the model.

If the pupil transmitter is a mx-16 HoTT or mc-16

HoTT series model then it may also be necessary

to adapt the type of modulation in the "DSC output"

line of the »Base setup model« menu in order to

accommodate the number of control channels to

be transmitted. For example, the signal packet for

modulation type "PPM10" contains only control

channels 1 … 5 but not channel 6. However, if this

channel is to be used by the pupil then a modulation

type must be selected in which it is included.

For transmitters of type "D" and "FM" it is necessary

to check servo operating directions and their control

correlations. It may be necessary to reconnect cables

appropriately. All mixers must also be switched off or

set to "zero".

When assigning control functions, the usual

conventions must be observed:

Channel Function

1 Motor throttle/collective pitch

2 Aileron/roll

3 Elevator/pitch-axis

4 Rudder/tail rotor

If other control functions are to be transferred to the

pupil transmitter in addition to the functions of the two

212 Detail program description - Teacher/pupil

dual axis sticks (1 … 4), access the »Control adjust«

menu in the pupil transmitter and assign those inputs

which correspond to enabled function inputs 5 …

12 as shown in the »Teacher/pupil« menu of the

teacher transmitter. Afterwards, assign the operating

elements appropriately.

Important:

If you should forget to assign a transmitter •

control on the pupil side, then the affected

servo or servos will remain in the center

position when the transfer is made to the pupil

transmitter.

The pupil transmitter must always be operated •

in PPM mode, regardless of the RF connection

type used between the teacher transmitter and

the model.

If the transmitter is connected using a DSC •

socket on the pupil side, ALWAYS leave the

pupil transmitter's On/Off switch in the "OFF"

position: this is the only way to guarantee

that no RF signal is sent from the pupil

transmitter's transmitter module, even after the

DSC lead has been plugged in.

Trainer mode operations

Both transmitters are connected to one another

using a suitable lead (see summary on next page):

The plug marked "M" (master) must be inserted

into the socket on the teacher transmitter, and the

plug marked "S" (student) into the pupil transmitter's

socket. (Note that not all leads may have such "M"

and "S" labeling.)

Important notices:

Check that the model aircraft is operational •

and check that all functions issue the correct

commands BEFORE setting up trainer mode.

The ends of the trainer lead, usually marked •

as either "S" or "M", terminate in a three-pole

TRS jack. Do not insert these jacks into a DSC

system socket, as it is not suitable for this

application. The DSC socket is exclusively

designed for cables with 2-pole TRS jacks.

Checking functionality

Activate the assigned trainer mode switch:

The trainer mode system is working properly if the •

display now changes from " L" to " S".

However, if the • WARNING LED at the right, next

to the transmitter's On/Off switch, blinks and

an acoustic signal sounds off at the same time,

then the connection between pupil and teacher

transmitters is faulty.

The basic display also displays the following

warning notice …

pupil

signal

… and the left side of the screen display for the

»Teacher/pupil« menu will change to show

"-Pupil". In this case, all control functions are

retained by the teacher transmitter automatically,

regardless of switch position: this ensures the

model is always under control.

Possible faults:

Pupil transmitter not ready•

Interface in pupil transmitter not correctly •

connected in place of the RF module

Cables connected wrongly: see right for cable •

connections

Pupil transmitter not switched over to PPM (10, •

16, 18, 24) mode

Other possible faults:

Teacher transmitter not properly "bound" to HoTT •

receiver in training model

Trainer cables

4179.1 for trainer operation between any two

Graupner transmitters equipped with DSC

sockets – distinguished by a two-pole TRS

jack at both ends.

3290.7 trainer cable for connecting a teacher

transmitter with DSC socket (e.g. mc-16

HoTT) or a transmitter retroﬁ tted with an

optional DSC module, order no. 3290.24) to

a Graupner pupil transmitter with an opto-

electronic system pupil socket – identiﬁ able

by the mark "S" on the side of the three-

pole TRS jack.

3290.8 trainer cable for connecting a pupil

transmitter with DSC socket (e.g. mc-16

HoTT) or a transmitter retroﬁ tted with an

optional DSC module, order no. 3290.24)

to a Graupner teacher transmitter with an

opto-electronic system teacher socket –

identiﬁ able by the mark "M" on the side of

the three-pole TRS jack.

Further details about the cables and modules

mentioned in this section for teacher and pupil

transmitters can be found in the respective transmitter

handbook, in the Graupner RC main catalog or in

Internet at www.graupner.de.

213Detail program description - Teacher/pupil

Trainer mode with the mc-16 HoTT transmitter

Due to the continuous improvements made to the product range, please consult our website at www.graupner.de for the latest information

Teacher transmitter

with DSC socket

Teacher transmitter with

teacher module, order

no. 3290.2, 3290.19, 3290.22

Teacher/pupil cable,

order no. 3290.8

Pupil transmitter mc-16 HoTT

mx-12 HoTT,

mx-16 HoTT,

mx-20 HoTT and

mc-16 HoTT

mc-19 through mc-24,

mx-22(iFS), mx-24s

Pupil transmitter

with DSC socket

Pupil transmitter with pupil

module, order no. 3290.3,

3290.10, 3290.33

D 14, FM 414, FM 4014,

FM 6014, mc-10 … mc-24,

mx-22(iFS), mx-24s

Teacher transmitter mc-16 HoTT

mx-12 HoTT,

mx-16 HoTT,

mx-20 HoTT and

mc-16 HoTT

Note:

The lists present the possible transmitters/transmitter

combinations at the time of going to press.

Teacher/pupil cable,

order no. 4179.1

Teacher/pupil cable,

order no. 3290.7

Teacher/pupil cable,

order no. 4179.1

214 Detail program description - Teacher/pupil

Wireless HoTT system

Wireless operation of the mc-16 HoTT trainer

mode system is also possible. To do so, the teacher

transmitter must be "connected" to a pupil transmitter

as described below. Prior to this, however, the

training model's receiver must be bound to the PUPIL

transmitter. This conﬁ guration is possible between

transmitters which have the "BIND:" option in the

»Teacher/pupil« menu.

Preparing for training mode

Teacher transmitter

The training model must be programmed completely,

i.e. with all of its functions including trims and any

mixer functions, in one model memory of the HoTT

teacher transmitter. The model to be used for

training must therefore be under the complete

control of the teacher transmitter. The ﬁ nal step

in preparation, however, is to bind the training

model to the pupil transmitter. For a detailed

description of the binding process, please

consult pages 77 and 85.

Pupil transmitter

If you are using an "mc" or "mx" series transmitter,

it is best to activate a free model memory with the

required model type ("Fixed-wing" or "Heli"). Assign

the model name "Pupil" and set up the stick mode

(mode 1 … 4) and "Throttle (or collective pitch) min.

forward/back" to suit the pupil's preferences. All

other options are left at their default values. All other

settings, including all mixer and coupling functions,

are conﬁ gured exclusively on the teacher transmitter,

which in turn transmits them to the model.

When assigning control functions, the usual

conventions must be observed:

Channel Function

1 Motor throttle/collective pitch

2 Aileron/roll

3 Elevator/pitch-axis

4 Rudder/tail rotor

If other control functions are to be transferred to the

pupil transmitter in addition to the functions of the two

dual axis sticks (1 … 4), access the »Control adjust«

menu in the pupil transmitter and assign those inputs

which correspond to enabled function or transmitter

control inputs 5 … 12 as shown in the »Teacher/

pupil« menu of the teacher transmitter. Afterwards,

assign the operating elements appropriately.

Important:

If you should forget to assign a transmitter

control on the pupil side, then the affected servo

or servos will remain in the center position when

the transfer is made to the pupil transmitter.

Preparing the teacher and pupil transmitters

Once you have bound the training model to the pupil

transmitter, now switch on the teacher transmitter. On

both transmitters, use the selection keys on the left or

right touch pad, page to the »Teacher/pupil« menu

option on the multi-function menu:

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad

to open this menu option:

TRAINER /student

2345

BIND:

SW: –––

n/a

678910 11 12

Note:

The screen image shown above shows the menu

in its initial state: No transmitter controls have been

released to the pupil ( ) and no switch has been

assigned

("SW: ---" bottom left in the screen image).

Pupil transmitter

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to move the marker frame to the "BIND" input ﬁ eld. If

there is a switch shown at the right of "S:" then this

must ﬁ rst be erased, see screen image:

TRAINER /student

2345

BIND:

SW:

n/a

678910 11 12



–––

215

Detail program description - Teacher/pupil

Teacher transmitter

Up to twelve function inputs (see "Term deﬁ nitions"

on page 54) of the teacher transmitter "T" can be

individually or in any combination transferred to the

pupil transmitter "P".

The lower display line, designated with "T", therefore

indicates the function inputs with which control

functions 1 … 4 (joystick functions for ﬁ xed-wing and

helicopter models) are permanently connected as

well as inputs 5 … 12, which can be freely assigned

in the »Control adjust« menu.

Note:

Just which controls are assigned to any inputs turned

over to the pupil is basically of no consequence.

However, their assignment in the »Control adjust«

menu is possible only when the trainer mode

connection is inactive.

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to select the function inputs 1 through 12 for

transfer to the pupil () then brieﬂ y tap center SET

key of the right touch pad for each switch to be

switched between "T(eacher)"( ) and "P(upil)" ( ):

TRAINER /student

2345

BIND:

SW: –––

n/a

678910 11 12

To be able to carry out the transfer, you must now

assign a trainer mode switch. Do this by placing the

marker frame just to the right of the "P" at the bottom

left of the screen display by using the selection keys

of the left or right touch pad then assign a switch

as described in the section "Assigning transmitter

controls, switches and control switches" on page 56.

Preferably you should utilize one of the two standard

momentary switches on the switchboard to allow

a return of control to the teacher transmitter at any

time:

TRAINER /Teacher

2345

BIND:

SW: –––

n/a

678910 11 12

–

pupil

signal

Since at this stage of programming the wireless

trainer system no connection yet exists to a pupil

transmitter, the transmitter responds immediately to

the switches closed during the switch assignment

process with appropriate visual and audible warning

notices. You should therefore re-open the switch you

have just assigned:

TRAINER /Teacher

2345

BIND:

SW:

n/a

678910 11 12



Note:

The switch assignment just described also

determines the transmitter used to issue the teacher

and pupil functions, respectively. For this reason, a

pupil transmitter must NEVER be assigned a switch

on this menu. The header line therefore also

switches from "Teacher / Pupil" to "Teacher /

Teach" once a switch has been assigned.

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad,

now move the marker frame to the right, to "BIND:

n/a":

TRAINER /Teacher

2345

BIND:

SW:

n/a

678910 11 12



Binding the pupil transmitter to the teacher

transmitter

Note:

The distance between the two transmitters should not

be too great during the binding process. If necessary,

change the positions of the transmitters and initiate

the binding process again.

Initiate the "BINDING" process from the pupil

transmitter by tapping the center SET key of the right

touch pad …

TRAINER /student

2345

BIND:

SW:

Binding

678910 11 12



–––

… and repeat this immediately on the teacher

transmitter:

TRAINER /Teacher

2345

BIND:

SW:

Binding

678910 11 12



216 Detail program description - Teacher/pupil

As soon as this process is complete, both screens

will show "ON" instead of the ﬂ ashing "BINDING":

TRAINER /student

2345

BIND:

SW:

678910 11 12



–––

TRAINER /Teacher

2345

BIND:

SW:

678910 11 12



You can return to the basic display on both screens

and start the training session after carefully checking

all of the relevant functions.

If neither transmitter or only one transmitter displays

"ON", this means the binding process has failed: try

changing the positions of both transmitters and then

repeat the entire procedure.

Important notice:

Check that the model aircraft is operational

and check that all functions issue the correct

commands BEFORE setting up trainer mode.

During the …

Training session

… the teacher and pupil can maintain a variable

distance from one another. The "reach of signal"

(max. 50 m) should not be exceeded under any

circumstances, however, no one else should be

standing between the teacher and the pupil since

these persons could reduce the connection range of

the return channel used by the two transmitters.

In this operating mode, the basic display of the

teacher transmitter is as shown below …

#01 0:24h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

3.9V

0:00.0

1:23h

RFC–Teacher

Graubele

… and the pupil transmitter's display will look

something like this:

#01 0:24h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

3.7V

0:00.0

4:32h

RFC–student

Schüler

If, however, the connection between the teacher

and pupil transmitters should be lost during the

training session, then the teacher transmitter will

automatically assume control of the model.

If the trainer mode switch is in the "Pupil" position

when connectivity is lost, the Warning LED on the

teacher transmitter will blink and audible warning

signals will also be sounded for as long as the signal

is lost. The basic display also displays the following

warning notice:

pupil

signal

However, if only the character string "HF –" blinks on

the transmitter's basic display accompanied by the

audible warning signals, the pupil signal has been

lost but the trainer mode switch is set to the "Teacher"

position.

In both cases, your ﬁ rst step should be to reduce

the distance between the two transmitters. If this

does not help, then you should land immediately and

establish the cause.

If both transmitters are operational and the receiver

system is switched off, then the teacher transmitter's

basic display will show the icons instead of the

"familiar" . The antenna icon will also ﬂ ash and an

audible warning signal will sound twice per second.

Resuming trainer mode

If you switch off one or both transmitters during the

session – for whatever reason – then the basic display

of the transmitter(s) shows the following question

after being switched back on:

ACT

TRAINER

Wireless Link

INH

If "INH" (set) is conﬁ rmed by tapping the center SET

key of the right touch pad or, alternatively, by waiting

for approx. two seconds until the message disappears.

then you will reset the transmitter in question back to

its "normal" operating mode. You will then have to re-

establish a connection between the teacher and pupil

transmitters.

If, on the other hand, the selection keys on the left or

right touch pad are used to select "ACT" …

217

Detail program description - Teacher/pupil

Please select

Trainer link?

INHACT

… and this selection is conﬁ rmed by tapping the

center SET key of the right touch pad, then the

existing teacher connection is restored. The same

approach is used if the transmitter is conﬁ gured as a

pupil transmitter.

218 Detail program description - Tx. output swap

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch

pad, page to the menu option »Tx. output swap« Tx.

output swap on the multi-function menu:

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad

to open this menu option.

Tx. output swap

To achieve maximum ﬂ exibility regarding receiver

socket assignment, the mc-16 HoTT program offers

you the option of swapping servo outputs 1 to 16 as

you please.

This option lets you distribute the transmitter's 16

"control channels" to any of the transmitter outputs

1 … 16. If you do, you must remember that the

»Servo display« screen – accessible from almost any

menu option by simultaneously tapping the  and 

keys on the left touch pad – refers exclusively to the

"control channels" as preset by the receiver socket

assignment: it therefore does NOT take any output

swaps into account.

Tx. output swap

Swapping the outputs on the transmitter

Servo

Output

TRANSFER OUTPUT

SEL

Use the  selection keys on the left or right touch

pad to select the channel/output combination to be

changed then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the

right touch pad. You can now use the right selection

keys to assign your selected (control) channel to the

desired output, conﬁ rming this with the SET key …

Servo

Output

TRANSFER OUTPUT

SEL

… or, by tapping the  or  selection keys on

the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR), you

can restore the original assignment.

Any subsequent changes, such as servo travel

adjustments, Dual Rate / Expo, mixers etc., must

always be performed in accordance with the

original receiver socket assignment!

Example:

In the mc-16 HoTT helicopter program, the outputs

for a collective pitch servo and the throttle servo

are swapped around, compared to some older

GRAUPNER/JR mc units. The throttle servo now

occupies transmitter output "6" and the collective

pitch servo output "1". Perhaps, however, you wish

to retain the previous conﬁ guration? In this case, you

will swap over channels 1 and 6 as appropriate, so

that (control) channel 6 is located on output 1 and

vice versa – as shown above:

Note:

"Channel Mapping" (channel assignment) is the

receiver-side channel correlation function integrated

into the mc-16 HoTT transmitter's telemetry menu.

With channel mapping, the transmitter's control

channels (16 maximum) can be freely distributed

to multiple receivers or receiver outputs having the

same control function, for example to operate two

servo controls per aileron surface instead of just

being able to control one servo, etc. To keep controls

manageable, however, we strongly recommend using

only one of the options at a time.

219

For your notes

220 Detail program description - Proﬁ -trim | Winged models

Proﬁ -trim

Flaps and aileron trimming

The mc-16 HoTT transmitter has an integrated

software function for direct trimming of all ﬂ aps and

ailerons.

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad,

page to the »Proﬁ -trim« menu option in the multi-

function menu …

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free Mixer

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

… then open this menu option with a brief tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad.

PRO TRIM

AI FL

Trim off off off off

ctl sw free

on/off –––

SET SET SET SET

free free free

To set the desired option, move the marker frame

onto the desired line or column with the selection

keys of the left or right touch pad then brieﬂ y tap the

center SET key of the right touch pad. Select the

desired entry in the ﬁ eld now displayed in inverse

video with the selection keys on the left or right touch

pad or move the desired transmitter control. Conclude

the procedure with a tap on the ESC key.

Programming is done in three steps.

First of all, in the "Trim" line it will be established just

which ﬂ ap pair is to be trimmed as "AI" and/or "FL". The

"Control" line speciﬁ es the control channel over which

the given trim function is to be performed and, ﬁ nally,

a switch is deﬁ ned in the "ON/OFF" line by which this

proﬁ -trim function can be switched on or off globally.

Trim

Notes:

Please note that, depending on the number of •

aileron and ﬂ ap servos speciﬁ ed in the »Model

type« menu (page 95), some settings cannot

be used. For example, with only 1 aileron and/

or 1 ﬂ ap servo there is no aileron ﬂ ap activation

possible, and the opposite is also true. Since

this is the case, a number of settings in various

columns remain ineffective.

Pay attention to potential double-assignments •

when making trim control choices.

The trim functions which can be activated (ON) or

deactivated (OFF) on the ﬁ rst line of this menu,

either individually or in any combination, make pre-

ﬂ ight corrections to aileron and ﬂ ap settings quick

and easy, without the complexity of having to call up

individual setting options.

Individually, these are functions for …

Trim of the • aileron function for aileron ("AI")

Trim of the • ﬂ ap function for aileron ("AI")

Trim of the • aileron function for ﬂ aps ("FL")

Trim of the • ﬂ ap function for ﬂ aps ("FL")

Tap on the  or  selection keys of the right

touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) to reset the

value of the ﬁ eld displayed in inverse video back to

"OFF".

Note:

Regardless of a switch's ON/OFF setting (see further

below), the reset of a value ﬁ eld in the "Trim" line has

the effect an immediate return of the affected trim

function to its original reference point.

221

Detail program description - Proﬁ -trim | Winged models

Control

PRO TRIM

AI FL

Trim act act off off

ctl sw free

on/off –––

SET SET SET SET

free free free

The second line of this menu is for selecting

transmitter control assignments which appear

advantageous from the many controls available on

the transmitter.

To assign a transmitter control, use the selection keys

to navigate to the desired column then tap brieﬂ y on

the center SET key of the right touch pad …:

PRO TRIM

AI FL

Trim actN AUS AUS off

ctl sw Lever1

on/off –––

SET SET SET SET

free free free

Move desired

control adj.

… and move the desired transmitter control:

PRO TRIM

AI FL

Trim act act off off

ctl sw Tvr1

on/off –––

SET SET SET SET

Tvr2 free free

The mid-point position of enabled proportional

controls corresponds to the programmed ﬂ ap setting.

The trim range for a given transmitter control is

about ±25 %. However, these "trim" controls are

only effective when, as described in section "ON/

OFF" further below, has been assigned to a proﬁ -trim

switch and switched on.

With trims switched on, make a test ﬂ ight to

determine the optimal setting then open the ON/

OFF switch to secure the setting against inadvertent

maladjustment. Now as long as the ON/OFF switch

remains open or is erased, the located trim values will

retain their settings.

An active transmitter control assignment can be

erased with a simultaneous tap on the  or 

selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR).

Note:

Trim values retain their settings until the next closure

of the ON/OFF switch, even then when the trim

functions in the "Control" line have been temporally

reset to "free".

ON/OFF

The "ON/OFF" line is used to assign a switch which

permits the proﬁ -trim function to be switched on/

off globally. This assignment is done in the manner

described in the section "Assigning transmitter

controls, switches and control switches" on page 56.

In this context, pay attention to the following

dependencies:

Only when the ON/OFF switch in the "Trim" line is •

set to "ON" will the trim functions assigned to trim

controls in the "Transm. controls" line be able to

affect trim within a range of ±25 %.

As soon as the ON/OFF switch is opened or •

erased, the current trim positions will be stored

and the selected trim controls become ineffective.

A tap, at the same time, on the  or  selection

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) when a switch

assignment is active will reset a ﬁ eld's value back to

"---":

PRO TRIM

AI FL

Trim act act off off

ctl sw Tvr1

on/off –––

SET SET SET SET

Tvr2 free free

222 Detail program description - Proﬁ -trim | Helicopters

Proﬁ trim

Pitch, throttle, tail-rotor, and C1 curve trimming

The mc-16 HoTT transmitter's software has an

integrated function for additional trimming of 8-point

curves; in Heli programs »Channel 1 curve« page

131, and »Helicopter mixer« page 176. These are

intended for "Pitch" curves "Channel 1  Throttle"

and "Channel 1  Tail. rot.".

This feature, named »Proﬁ trimm« because of its

functional similarity to the Proﬁ -Trim module for the

mc-24 but only available on that transmitter as a

retroﬁ t option. Select this feature from the multi-

function menu with the selection keys of the left or

right touch pad …

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixer MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

… then open this menu option with a brief tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad.

Mixer Point Phase

free

None

"Trim control" column

Note:

Pay attention to potential double-assignments when

making trim control choices.

This menu's ﬁ rst line is for assigning those transmitter

controls (from the many available on the transmitter)

which appear most advantageous for this purpose.

To assign a transmitter control, use the selection keys

to navigate to the desired line then tap brieﬂ y on the

center SET key of the right touch pad …

Mixer Point Phase

free

None

keiner

None

Move desired

control adj.

… then move the desired transmitter control:

Mixer Point Phase

Slide1

free

None

Erase trim control

Select the transmitter control assignment in the

appropriate line as already described, e.g.:

Mixer Point Phase

Slide1

free

None

keiner

None

Move desired

control adj.

A tap, at the same time, on the  or  selection

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will now reset

the ﬁ

eld's value back to "free".

"Mixer" column

There are a total of four value ﬁ elds in this column. For

each of these ﬁ elds a helicopter mixer can be selected,

individually or in any combination, from a list.

To do this, use the selection keys on the left or right

touch pad to change to the desired value ﬁ eld. Then

brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad …

Mixer Point Phase

Slide1

free

None

… and select the desired mixer with the selection

keys of the left or right touch pad:

Mixer Point Phase

Slide1

free

None

Pitch

Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad or the ESC key of the left touch pad will conclude

the entry. This procedure is the same for the other

menus.

A tap, at the same time, on the  or  selection

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a ﬁ eld

displayed in inverse video back to "None".

223

Detail program description - Proﬁ -trim | Helicopters

"Point" column

The lines of the column "Mixer" were used to select

one or mixers. Now, in the "Point" column, the

reference points to be trimmed will be set.

To do this, use the selection keys on the left or right

touch pad to move to the desired value ﬁ eld. Then

brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad …

Mixer Point Phase

Slide1

free

None

Pitch

If a undeﬁ ned point is selected – in the basic version,

only points "L" and "H" are set – the respective

regulator will remain ineffective.

The point offset (in a maximum range of about

±12 %) for the selected mixer will simultaneously be

displayed in the curve diagrams of the »Helicopter

mixer« menu so that the offset can also be checked

visually.

Phase

The rightmost column is used, if desired, to determine

which programmed ﬂ ight phase the given regulator

is to be active. The number preceding ﬂ ight phase

names, in the example "1" (Normal)", are based

on the phase numbers as found in the »Phase

assignment« menu on page 148:

Mixer Point Phase

Slide1

free

None

Pitch

However, the current position of the regulator

will be – contrary to the corresponding ﬁ xed-wing

program – set to a new zero point when …

by a change of ﬂ ight phase, individual or all trim •

controls become active or

the given trim control is erased or•

meanwhile the function assigned in the "Mixer" •

column is to be changed.

In all of these cases, the current regulator position will

be stored and automatically overridden, i.e. adopted

into the curve characteristic, by the pre-programmed

curve points speciﬁ ed by the »Channel 1 curve«

and »Helicopter mixer« menus. In this manner it

is possible to simultaneously optimize up to four

arbitrary curve points during the ﬂ ight.

The memory storage option described here is, for

example, useful during the ﬁ rst test ﬂ ights of a new

model as this permits the "ﬂ own" ﬂ ight corrections to

be immediately recorded in the program.

However, in order to have a clearly deﬁ ned reference

point prior to the ﬁ rst time a store is done, it is important

to put all regulators into their middle positions.

But always be careful that, after repeated stores,

servo travel is not too severely restricted on one side.

Check and correct the control linkage if necessary.

Sometimes, despite an optimal basic setting for the

model, it becomes necessary to temporarily change

reference points, for example, when the weather

has changed and the motor requires a short-term

correction or even when the mufﬂ er gets a leak

unexpectedly, etc. Of course, in all of these cases,

the corrected settings should not be stored via

the Proﬁ trim option. Storage can be prevented by

ensuring that the regulator is in its middle position

before activation or deactivation.

Note:

Yet another point, independent of this, can be

regulated via the "Trim function" through use of

the selection keys. This is described in detail along

with the programming of 8-point curves in section

»Channel 1 curve« on page 131.

224 Detail program description - Trim memory | Winged models

Trim memory

Storing the current trim position

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to scroll to the menu option »Trim memory« menu

option in the multi-function menu:

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free Mixer

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad

to open this menu option:

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

SET

This menu permits selective storage of the given

current position for the four digital trim controls in

order to return them afterward to their visual middle

points. This makes the last stored trim positions in the

respective middle positions of trim wheels for control

functions 1 … 4 available again following a model

memory location change or after long ﬂ ight pauses.

This memory store process is effective on a ﬂ ight-

phase speciﬁ c basis for the currently active model

memory location and is not to be stored globally.

Therefore, as soon as ﬂ ight phases have been

deﬁ ned in the »Phase settings« and »Phase

assignment menus, the given active ﬂ ight phase

will be displayed on the screen's bottom line. For

example:

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

SET

Normal

Storing trim positions

The model has been ﬂ ight tested and trimmed

during the test ﬂ ights. Current trim positions are

now displayed in the column "Trim Pos." located

approximately in the middle of the display. (The trim

range is about ±30 % of total control travel.) The right

column displays trim memory content, currently ﬁ lled

uniformly with 0 % because values have not yet been

stored. Therefore, the display appears as follows:

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

+5%

+3%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

-7%

SET

Normal

Now use the selection keys on the left or right touch

pad to move to the line where a trim value is to be

written into trim memory, e.g. the elevator trim value:

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

+5%

+3%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

-7%

SET

Normal

Now, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the

right touch pad, activate the SET column's selected

value ﬁ eld. The message "Please press trim"

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

+5%

+3%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

–7%

SET

Normal

Please

press trim

will then appear brieﬂ y in the display.

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

+5%

+3%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

–7%

SET

Normal

Now brieﬂ y press the trim wheel for the elevator's

joystick to accept the trim value.

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

+5%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

–7%

SET

Normal

+3%

Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad or the center ESC key of the left touch pad

will ﬁ nish the procedure.

Now, if desired, change the ﬂ ight phase and repeat

the procedure. Perform the same procedure for the

other control functions, as necessary.

225

Detail program description - Trim memory | Winged models

Erasing stored trim positions

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to move to the line where a trim value is to be erased

from trim memory, e.g.:

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

+5%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

–7%

SET

Normal

+3%

Now brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad to activate the value ﬁ eld.

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

+5%

+3%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

–7%

SET

Normal

+3%

Please

press trim

As previously described, the message "Please

press trim" will appear brieﬂ y. After his message has

disappeared, simultaneously tap on the  or 

selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) to

reset the value ﬁ eld again back to "0 %".

However, if you do not erase a trim memory before

storing a new value, the new value will be added to

the stored value. Although this an "elegant" way to

effectively offset servo throw beyond the normal trim

range of about ±30 %, do keep in mind that excessive

offsets for servo travel can lead to anomalies including

one-sided restriction. It is then prudent to check control

linkages and make corrections as necessary.

226 Detail program description - Trim memory | Helicopters

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to scroll to the menu option »Trim memory« menu

option in the multi-function menu:

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixer MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad

to open this menu option:

TRIM MEMORY

Roll

Pitch ax.

Pitch/thr 0%

Tail rot.

Trim Pos.

SET

This menu permits selective storage of the given

current position for the four digital trim controls in

order to return them afterward to their visual middle

points. This makes the last stored trim positions in the

respective middle positions of trim wheels for control

functions 1 … 4 available again following a model

memory location change or after long ﬂ ight pauses.

This memory store process is effective on a ﬂ ight-

phase speciﬁ c basis for the currently active model

memory location and is not to be stored globally.

Therefore, as soon as ﬂ ight phases have been

deﬁ ned in the »Phase settings« and »Phase

assignment menus, the given active ﬂ ight phase

will be displayed on the screen's bottom line. For

example:

TRIM MEMORY

Roll

Roll ax.

Pitch/thr 0%

Tail rot.

Trim Pos.

SET

Normal

Storing trim positions

The model has been ﬂ ight tested and trimmed

during the test ﬂ ights. Current trim positions are

now displayed in the column "Trim Pos." located

approximately in the middle of the display. (The trim

range is about ±30 % of total control travel.) The right

column displays trim memory content, currently ﬁ lled

uniformly with 0 % because values have not yet been

stored. Therefore, the display appears as follows:

TRIM MEMORY

Roll

Roll ax.

+5%

+3%

Pitch/thr 0%

Tail rot.

Trim Pos.

-7%

SET

Normal

Now use the selection keys on the left or right touch

pad to move to the line whose trim value is to be

written into trim memory, e.g. the pitch-axis trim

value:

TRIM MEMORY

Roll

Roll ax.

+5%

+3%

Pitch/thr 0%

Tail rot.

Trim Pos.

-7%

SET

Normal

Now, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the

right touch pad, activate the SET column's selected

value ﬁ eld. The message "Please press trim"

TRIM MEMORY

+5%

+3%

Trim Pos.

–7%

SET

Normal

Please

press trim

Roll

Roll ax.

Pitch/thr

Tail rot.

will then appear brieﬂ y in the display.

TRIM MEMORY

Roll

Roll ax.

+5%

+3%

Pitch/thr 0%

Tail rot.

Trim Pos.

-7%

SET

Normal

Now brieﬂ y press the trim wheel for the elevator's

joystick to accept the trim value.

Trim memory

Storing the current trim position

227

Detail program description - Trim memory | Helicopters

TRIM MEMORY

Roll

Roll ax.

+5%

Pitch/thr 0%

Tail rot.

Trim Pos.

-7%

+3%

SET

Normal

Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad or the center ESC key of the left touch pad

will ﬁ nish the procedure.

Now, if desired, change the ﬂ ight phase and repeat

the procedure. Perform the same procedure for the

other control functions, as necessary.

Erasing stored trim positions

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to move to the line where a trim value is to be erased

from trim memory, e.g.:

TRIM MEMORY

Roll

Roll ax.

+5%

Pitch/thr 0%

Tail rot.

Trim Pos.

-7%

+3%

SET

Normal

Now brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad to activate the value ﬁ

eld.

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

+5%

+3%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

–7%

SET

Normal

+3%

Please

press trim

As previously described, the message "Please

press trim" will appear brieﬂ y. After his message has

disappeared, simultaneously tap on the  or 

selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) to

reset the value ﬁ eld again back to "0 %".

However, if you do not erase a trim memory before

storing a new value, the new value will be added to

the stored value. Although this an "elegant" way to

effectively offset servo throw beyond the normal trim

range of about ±30 %, do keep in mind that excessive

offsets for servo travel can lead to anomalies including

one-sided restriction. It is then prudent to check control

linkages and make corrections as necessary.

228 Detail program description - Telemetry

Telemetry

Read-in and settings for telemetry data

The receiver's settings, as well as optional telemetry

sensor settings, can be called up and programmed

in real-time by way of the »Telemetry« menu.

Communication with the transmitter is accomplished

over the return channel built into the HoTT receiver.

As many as four sensors can be attached, if

necessary via V or Y adapter cables, to receivers

with current ﬁ rmware of types: GR-12S HoTT

(order no. 33505), GR-12 HoTT (order no. 33506),

GR-16 (order no. 33508), GR-24 HoTT (order

no. 33512) and GR-32 DUAL (order no. 33516).

The update capability of these and future receivers,

which can be performed by the user, will keep the

respective »Telemetry« menu up to date with the

latest version and ensure enhancement with future

functions or languages.

Note:

After registering your product at https://www.

graupner.de/de/service/produktregistrierung you are

automatically informed of new updates.

Important notices:

This manual is based on the functions available at •

the time of printing.

As already indicated in the section "Binding •

multiple receivers" on page 77 and 85, multiple

receivers per model can be bound into the system

as necessary. However, only the receiver

selected in the line "TELEMETRY RCV" of

the "Telemetry" menu is able to establish

a telemetry connection to the transmitter!

However, that also means the inverse, that only this

receiver can be addressed through the Telemetry

menu! If necessary, therefore, the selection must

be changed before settings can be made on a

speciﬁ c receiver:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1

When adjusting the settings of the remote •

control, make absolutely sure that the

transmitter antenna is always far enough

away from the receiver antennae! To be on the

safe side, keep them at least one meter apart.

Otherwise there is a risk of a faulty connection

to the return channel and malfunctions will

result.

Since the telemetric data between transmitter •

and receiver is only exchanged after the fourth

data package, the data transmission requires a

certain amount of time for technical reasons, so

the reaction to the operating keys and changes

to settings take place with a delay. Therefore, the

delay is not due to an error.

Programming on the model or on sensors may •

only take place if the model is on the ground. Only

carry out the settings with the motor switched

off and the battery disconnected! Otherwise,

undesired programming cannot be ruled out.

For example, a servo test initiated accidentally

could cause the model to crash and cause

personal injury and/or property damage. Observe

the safety instructions on pages 4 … 7 of this

manual and the respective separate manuals.

All settings (such as fail-safe, servo direction •

reversal, servo travel, mixer and curve settings,

etc.) made through the »Telemetry« menu are

stored only in the receiver and therefore are

adopted along with it if it is implemented as a

receiver in another model. Therefore, to be on the

safe side, re-initialize your HoTT receiver if you

want to use the receiver in a different model; see

"Reset" on page 46.

Only program the servo direction reversal, •

servo travel, mixer and curve settings through

the mc-16-speciﬁ c standard menus »Servo

adjustment« page 102, »Dual Rate / Expo«

page 120 or page 124, »Channel 1 curve«

page 128 or 131, and so on. Otherwise, the

settings superimpose one another, which can

lead to complexity or even problems in the later

operation.

The channel assignment function, called "Channel •

mapping", integrated into the »Telemetry« menu

of the mc-16 HoTT transmitter can also freely

distribute control functions over multiple receivers

or even distribute a single control function over

multiple receiver outputs, such as two servos per

aileron instead of only one individual servo, etc.

We also recommend exercising extreme during

the programming.

229

Detail program description - Telemetry

Telemetry

The menus gathered under the heading »Telemetry«

can be called up from the mc-16 HoTT transmitter's

basic display with a tap of about one second duration

on the center ESC key of the left touch pad. The

same menus can, like other transmitter menus, also

be opened in the multifunction menu with a tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad:

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Free mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Basic operation

Operating the »Telemetry« menu is essentially the

same as for the remaining mc-16 HoTT transmitter

menus. The few differences are described in the

following:

The  selection keys of the left or right touch pad

can be used to switch between individual pages

of the Telemetry menu. Corresponding directional

indicators can be found at top right of each display

page in the form of angled brackets ( ), refer to the

ﬁ gures below. If only one angled bracket is visible,

you are on either the ﬁ rst or last respective page.

In this case, changing pages is only possible in the

indicated direction.

Menu lines in which parameters can be changed are

identiﬁ ed with the aforementioned angled bracket ( ).

The " " pointer will jump a line forward or back with

a tap on the  selection keys of the left or right

touch pad. Lines to which a jump cannot be made

are unalterable.

In order to change a parameter, brieﬂ y touch the

center SET key of the right touch pad (the parameter

will be displayed in inverse video), change the value

within the permissible adjustment range via the

selection keys of the right touch pad and adopt the

value with another tap on the SET key. A brief tap on

the center ESC key of the left 4-way pad will cause a

return to the starting position again.

Now use the  selection keys of the left or right

touch pad to pick the desired sub-menu. However, if

the message …

CAN NOT

RECEIVE

DATA

… appears instead of the desired sub-menu after

touching the center SET key of the right touch pad

then no connection has been established with a

receiver. Therefore, switch on your receiver system

or, if applicable reconnect the addressed receiver as

described on page 77 or 85 or activate it as described

under "Important Notices" on the previous page.

On the ﬁ rst display page of the sub-menu overwritten

with …

RX DATAVIEW

…

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1

… no settings can be made. This page is only

provided for information:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1

RX DATAVIEW

S–STR100% R–TEM.+28°C

L PACK TIME 00010msec

R-VOLT :05.0V

L.R-VOLT:04.5V

S–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBM

SENSOR1 :00.0V 00°C

SENSOR2 :00.0V 00°C

Value Explanation

S-QUA signal quality in %

S-dBm Reception power in dBm

S-STR signal strength in %

R-TEM. Receiver temperature in °C

L PACK

TIME

Indicates the time in ms in which the

longest data package is lost during the

transmission from the transmitter to the

receiver

R-VOLT Current operating voltage of the

receiver in volts

SETTINGS/DISPLAYS

230 Detail program description - Telemetry

L.R-VOLT Lowest operating voltage of the

receiver since it was last turned on, in

volts

SENSOR1 Indicates values of optional telemetric

sensor 1, in volts and °C

SENSOR2 Indicates values of optional telemetric

sensor 2, in volts and °C

Signal quality (S-QUA)

The signal quality (S-QUA) is sent "live" over the

receiver's return channel to the transmitter and

indicates the signal strength in %.

Reception power (S-dbm)

Reception power (S-dbm) is indicated with negative

values, which means a value of zero is the maximum

value (= best reception) and the lower the values are,

the poorer the reception power! The range test before

operation, among other things, is important for this.

Note:

With negative numbers the evaluation of a number is

reversed: The higher the number following the minus

symbol, the lower the value is. Therefore, a reception

power of -80 dBm, for example , is poorer than one of

-70 dBm.

Perform the range test as described on page 80 and

88 before each ﬂ ight and, in doing so, simulate all

servo movements which also take place during the

ﬂ ight. The range must be at least 50 m on the ground

with the range test activated. At this distance, the

value shown under "S-dBm" in the "RX DATAVIEW"

display may not be greater than -80 dBm in order to

guarantee safe operation. The model should never

be operated with a lower value (e.g. -85 dBm). Check

the installation of the receiver system and the position

of the antenna.

The reception power should not drop below -90 dBm

during operation. Otherwise, reduce the distance of the

model. Normally, however, the acoustic range warning

(peep tone interval 1 s) is triggered before this value is

reached in order to guarantee safe operation.

Signal strength (S-STR)

The signal strength (S-STR) is displayed in %. In

general, an acoustic range warning (peep tone

interval 1 s) is issued as soon as the receiver signal

becomes too week in the return channel. However,

since the transmitter has a signiﬁ cantly higher

transmission power than the receiver, the model can

still be safely operated. For the sake of safety, the

distance to the model should be reduced until the

warning tone goes silent again.

Receiver temperature (R-TEM.)

Make sure the receiver remains within the permissible

temperature range during all ﬂ ight conditions (ideally

between -10 and 55 °C).

The receiver temperature limit, at which a warning

is issued, can be adjusted in the sub-menu »RX

SERVO TEST« under "ALARM TEMP+" (50 … 80 °C

and "ALARM TEMP-" (-20 … +10 °C). When the

value is under-run or over-run, an acoustic signal

sounds (continuous peep tone) and "TEMP.E" will

appear at the top right of all "RX" receiver sub-menus.

Additionally, the parameter "R-TEM" will be displayed

in inverse video on the »RX DATAVIEW« display

page.

Data packages (L PACK TIME)

Indicates the longest time span in ms in which data

packages are lost in the transmission from the

transmitter to the receiver. In practice, that is the

longest time span in which the remove control system

has entered into fail-safe mode.

Receiver operating voltage (R-VOLT)

Always check the operating voltage of the receiver.

Never operate or even start your model if the

operating voltage is too low.

The receiver low voltage warning can be adjusted

between 3.0 and 6.0 volts in "ALARM VOLT" of the

»RX SERVO TEST« sub-menu. If this range is under-

run, an acoustic signal is sounded (repetitive double

peep tone (long/short)) and "VOLT.E" will appear at

the top right of all »RX …« receiver sub-menus.| In

addition, the parameter "R-VOLT" will be displayed in

inverse video in the »RX DATAVIEW« sub-menu.

The current receiver battery voltage is also displayed

in the default display, see page 28.

Minimum receiver operating voltage (L.R-VOLT)

"L.R-VOLT" indicates the minimum operating voltage

of the receiver since the last time it was switched on.

If this voltage should deviate signiﬁ cantly from the

current "R-VOLT" operating voltage, the receiver

battery may be too heavily encumbered by the

servos. The consequence is voltage drops. In this

case, use a more powerful voltage supply in order to

achieve maximum operational safety.

Sensor 1 + 2

Indicates the values of optional telemetric sensors

1and 2, if present, in volts and °C. A description of

these sensors can be found in the appendix.

RX SERVO

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO

REVERSE : OFF

CENTER : 1500μsec

TRIM : –000μsec

LIMIT– : 150%

OUTPUT CH: 01

LIMIT+ : 150%

PERIOD : 20msec

It is very important that you read the notices on page

228 before doing any programming on this display

231

Detail program description - Telemetry

page.

Value Explanation Possible

settings

OUTPUT

Channel selection 1 … depending

on receiver

REVERSE Servo reversal OFF / ON

CENTER Servo center in µs if active

(inverse),

dependent on

control position

TRIM Trim position in µs

deviating from the

CENTER position

-120 … +120 µs

LIMIT– Travel limit on the "–"

side of servo travel

in % servo travel

30 … 150 %

LIMIT+ Travel limit on the "+"

side of servo travel

in % servo travel

30 … 150 %

PERIOD Cycle time in ms 10 or 20 ms

OUTPUT CH (channel selection)

If applicable, select the line "OUTPUT CH" with the

selection keys. Touch the SET key of the right touch

pad. The value ﬁ eld is shown highlighted. Now set

the desired channel (e.g. 01) with the selection keys

on the right touch pad. The following parameters

are always based on the channel set here.

Reverse (servo reversal)

Set the rotational direction of the servo connected to

the selected servo channel: ON / OFF

CENTER (servo center)

The active value ﬁ eld (inverse video) in the "CENTER"

line shows the current impulse time in µs for the

control channel selected in the "OUTPUT CH" line.

The displayed value depends on the current position

of the control inﬂ uencing this control channel and, if

applicable, the position of its trimming.

A channel impulse time of 1500 µs corresponds to the

standard center position and thus the conventional

servo center.

In order to change this value, select the "CENTER"

line then touch the SET key. Now move the

respective transmitter control, joystick and/or trim

wheel to the desired position and store the current

control's position with another tap on the SET key.

This position is saved as the new neutral position.

TRIM (trim position)

In the "TRIM" line" you can carry out the ﬁ ne

adjustment of the neutral position of a servo

connected to the control channel selected in the

"OUTPUT CH" line using the selection keys of the

right touch pad in 1 µs increments. The value in the

"CENTER" line can be adjusted by the TRIM value

set here in a range of ± 120 µs.

Factory setting: 0 µs.

LIMIT–/+ (side dependent travel limit -/+)

This option is provided for the adjustment of a side-

dependent limit (limiting) of the servo travel (rudder

throw) of the servo connected to the control channel

selected in the "OUTPUT CH" line.

The settings for both directions are separate but both

are in a range of 30 … 150 %.

Factory setting: 150 % each.

PERIOD (cycle time)

In this line you determine the time interval of the

individual channel impulse. This setting is adopted for

all control channels.

With the use of only digital servos, a cycle time of

10 ms can be set..

In mixed operation or with use of only analog servos,

20 ms should absolutely be set, because the latter

can otherwise be "over-strained" and react with

"shaking" or "quivering" as a result.

RX FAIL SAFE

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01

MODE : HOLD

F.S.POS. : 1500μsec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 01

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

POSITION : 1500μsec

The description of this menus necessitates a few

words of warning in advance:

"Do nothing" is the absolute worst thing to be done in

this regard. "HOLD" is prescribed in the base setup

model of the HoTT receiver.

In the event of a failure, in the best case scenario the

model ﬂ ies straight ahead for an indeﬁ nite amount of

time and then hopefully "lands" somewhere without

causing signiﬁ cant damage! However, if something

like this happens in the wrong place at the wrong

time, the model may become uncontrollable and

"tear" across the ﬂ ight ﬁ eld completely out of control,

putting the pilot and spectators at risk.

Therefore, it would obviously be beneﬁ cial to program

the the function "Motor off" at the very least, in order

to prevent such risks. If necessary, seek the advice of

an experienced pilot in order to ﬁ ne a "logical" setting

for your model.

And then another brief notice regarding the three

possible versions of the mc-16 HoTT transmitter for

the setting of Fail Safe:

The easiest, and recommended, way to fail-safe

settings is the use of the »Fail Safe« menu, which

can be reached from the multifunction menu, see

page 208.

Similarly, in order to achieve the same result

somewhat more laboriously, the "FAIL SAFE ALL"

option described on the following pages is also

available.

232 Detail program description - Telemetry

In addition, there are the relatively elaborate methods

of the of the individual adjustment using the options

"MODE", "F.S.Pos." and "DELAY". The description of

these variants begins with the "MODE" option further

below.

Value Explanation Possible

settings

OUTPUT

Output channel

(servo connection

of the receiver)

1 … depending

on receiver

INPUT CH Input channel

(channel

coming from the

transmitter)

1 … 16 %

MODE Fail-Safe mode HOLD

FAIL SAFE

OFF

F.S.POS. Fail-safe position 1000 … 2000 µs

DELAY Reaction time

(delay)

0.25, 0.50, 0.75

and 1.00 s

FAIL

SAFE ALL

Save of the Fail-

safe

Positions of all

control channels

NO / SAVE

POSITION Display of the

saved Fail-safe

position

Between approx

1000 and 2000 µs

OUTPUT CH (servo connection)

In this line you select the respective OUTPUT CH

(servo connection of the receiver) to be set.

INPUT CH (selection of the input channel)

As already mentioned on page 228, the 16 control

functions of the mc-16 HoTT transmitter can

be arbitrarily distributed to multiple receivers, if

necessary, or even assigned to multiple receiver

outputs with the same control function. For example,

this might be used in order to be able to control two

servers for each aileron ﬂ ap or an oversize rudder

with linked servos instead of an individual servo.

Distribution to multiple HoTT receivers, in turn, offers

the advantage of not having to use a long servo

cable, e.g. for large models. In this case, bear in

mind that only the receiver selected in the line "TEL.

EMPF." through the »Telemetry« menu can be

addressed!

The 16 control channels (INPUT CH) of the mc-16

HoTT can be appropriately managed through so-

called " Channel Mapping" (channel assignment)

whereby a different control channel is assigned to the

servo connection selected in the OUTPUT CH line for

the receiver in the INPUT CH line. BUT CAUTION: If,

for example, "2AIL" is speciﬁ ed in the transmitter on

the "Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line of the »Base setup,

model« menu then control function 2 (Aileron) will

already be assigned in the transmitter to control

channels 2 and 5 for distribution to the left and right

ailerons. The receiver's corresponding INPUT CH,

which must also be mapped, would be the channels

02 and 05 in this case; see the following example.

Examples:

You would like to control each aileron of a large •

model with two or more servos.

You would like to control each aileron of a large •

model with two or more servos.

Assign one of the two standard aileron

control channels 2 or 5 as INPUT CH to the

corresponding OUTPUT CH (servo connections)

depending on the left or right bearing surface.

You would like to control the rudder of a large •

model with two or more servos.

Assign the same INPUT CH (control channel)

to the corresponding OUTPUT CH (servo

connections). In this case, this is the standard

rudder channel 4.

MODE

The settings of the options "MODE", "F.S.Pos." and

"DELAY" determine the behavior of the receiver in the

event of a failure in the transmission from transmitter

to receiver.

The setting programmed under "MODE" is always

based on the channel set in the OUTPUT CH line.

The factory setting for all servos is "HOLD".

For each selected OUTPUT CH (servo connection of

the receiver) you can choose between:

FAI(L) SAFE•

With this selection, in the event of a failure the

corresponding servo moves to the position shown

in the "POSITION" line for the remainder of the

failure until the "Delay time" set in the "DELAY"

line has lapsed.

HOLD•

With a setting of "HOLD", in the event of a failure

the servo maintains the last correctly received

servo position for the duration of the failure.

OFF•

With a setting of "OFF", in the event of a failure

the receiver discontinues the retransmission

of (temporarily stored) control impulses for the

respective servo output for the duration of the

failure. In other words, the receiver switches the

impulse line "off".

BUT CAUTION: Analog servos and even some

digital servos no longer put up any resistance

against the previous control pressure during the

failure of the control impulse and are more or less

pushed out of their position as a result.

F.S.POS. (Fail-safe position)

For each OUTPUT CH (receiver servo connection),

set the position the given servo should assume in

"FAI(L) SAFE" mode, i.e. in the event of a failure, via

233

Detail program description - Telemetry

the "F.S.POS." line. This is done by ﬁ rst activating

the value ﬁ eld (inverse representation) with a tap on

the SET key of the right touch pad then using the

selection keys of the right touch pad to choose the

servo position. The adjustment takes place in 10-µs

increments.

Factory setting: 1500 µs (servo center).

Important notice:

The function "F.S.POS." has an additional meaning in

all three modes, "OFF", "HOLD" and "FAI(L) SAFE"

in the event that the receiver is switched on, but (still)

does not receive a valid signal.

The servo immediately travels to the fail-safe position

predeﬁ ned in the "Position" line. In doing so, the

landing gear, for example, is is prevented from

retracting of the receiver is accidentally switched on

while the transmitter is switched off. In normal model

mode, on the other hand, the corresponding servo

behaves in accordance with the set "MODE" in the

event of a failure.

DELAY

(fail-safe reaction time or delay)

Here you adjust the delay time after which the servos

should move to their predetermined positions in the

event of a signal interruption. This setting is adopted

for all channels and only pertains to the servos

programmed to the "FAIL SAFE" mode.

Factory setting: 0.75 s.

FAIL SAFE ALL (global fail-safe setting)

This sub-menu allows servo fail-safe positions to

be established at the "push of a button" in a similar

manner to that described on page 208 for the »Fail

Safe« menu.

Switch to the "FAIL SAFE ALL" line and activate the

value ﬁ eld by touching the center SET key of the right

touch pad. "NO" will be displayed in inverse video.

Then adjust the parameter to "SAVE" with one of the

selection keys of the right touch pad. Now, using the

operating elements of the transmitter, move all servos

to the desired fail-safe position you assigned or want

to assign in the line "MODE" "FAI(L) SAFE". The

current position of the control for the channel which

was just set is shown in the bottom "Position" line:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.POS. : 1670μsec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 01

POSITION : 1670μsec

FAIL SAFE ALL: SAVE

After a tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad, the display will change again, from "SAVE" to

"NO". The saved the positions of all servos affected

by this measure and adopted them in parallel to the

line "F.S.Pos." and the display then immediately

shows the following for the current OUTPUT CH

(servo connection):

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.POS. : 1670μsec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 01

POSITION : 1670μsec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

Switch off the transmitter and check the fail-safe

positions based on the servo throws.

"Fail Safe" in combination with "Channel Mapping"

In order to ensure that the mapped servos – that is

to say servos which are controlled from a common

control channel (INPUT CH) – react the same way

even in the event of a failure, the corresponding

settings of the INPUT CH determine the behavior of

the mapped servos!!!

Therefore, the servo connections 6, 7 and 8 of a

receiver are mapped with one another, whereby the

OUTPUT CH (servo connections) 06, 07 and 08

are assigned as INPUT CH of the same respective

control channel "04" …

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.POS. : 1670μsec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 06

POSITION : 1670μsec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.POS. : 1230μsec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 07

POSITION : 1670μsec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.POS. : 1770μsec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 08

POSITION : 1670μsec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

… the INPUT CH 04 determines the fail-safe behavior

of these three servos connected to the control

channel 4 completely independently of the individual

settings of the respective OUTPUT CH:

234 Detail program description - Telemetry

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.POS. : 1500μsec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 04

POSITION : 1670μsec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

This is also the case, for example, if this is mapped

with INPUT CH 01:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.POS. : 1420μsec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 04

POSITION : 1670μsec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

In this case, the servo connection 04 would, in turn,

react according to the fail-safe settings of CH 01.

The reaction or delay time set in the "DELAY" line,

on the other hand, always applies uniformly for all

channels set to "FAI(L) SAFE".

RX FREE MIXER

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FREE MIXER

MASTER CH: 00

SLAVE CH : 00

S–TRAVEL–: 100

S–TRAVEL+: 100

MIXER : 1

RX WING MIXER

TAIL TYPE: NORMAL

Value Explanation Possible settings

MIXER Mixer selection 1 … 5

MASTER

Signal source or

source channel

0, 1 … depending

on receiver

Value Explanation Possible settings

SLAVE CH Target channel 0, 1 … depending

on receiver

S-TRAVEL– Admix negative 0 … 100 %

S-TRAVEL+ Admix positive 0 … 100 %

RX WING

MIXER

TAIL TYPE

tail type NORMAL,

V-TAIL (V-LW)

ELEVON

(vertical/horizontal

mixer for delta and

ﬂ ying wing)

MIXER

Up to three mixers can be programmed

simultaneously. Use "MIXER" to switch between

mixers 1 … 5.

The following settings in this display always for just

the mixer selected in the "MIXER" line.

Important notice:

If you have already programmed mixer functions

in the »Wing mixer« or »Free mixer«" Free mixer

" menus, make absolutely sure that these mixers

do not overlap with those in the menu "RX FREE

MIXER"!

MASTER CH ("from")

According to the same principles described in the

section "Free mixer" on page 192, the signal applied

at the MASTER CH (signal source or source channel)

is mixed to a variable extent to the SLAVE CH (target

channel).

Select "00" if no mixer should be set.

SLAVE CH ("to")

The signal of the MASTER CH (source channel)

is mixed proportionally to the SLAVE CH (target

channel). The mix ratio will be determined by the

percentages entered in the lines "TRAVEL–" and

"TRAVEL +".

Select "00" if no mixer should be set.

TRAVEL–/+ (proportion of the admix in %)

With the settings of these two lines the percentage

of the admix is speciﬁ ed in relation to the MASTER

signal separately for each direction.

RX WING MIXER TAIL TYPE (tail unit type)

The following model types are also available in the

"Tail" line of the »Model type« menu, on page 94 and

should, preferentially, be preset there. In this case,

always leave the TAIL TYPE set to NORMAL.

However, if you would prefer to use the mixer

integrated in the receiver, you can select the already

pre-adjusted mixer functions for the corresponding

model type:

NORMAL•

This setting corresponds to the classic aircraft

type with rear tail unit and separate rudder and

elevator. No mixer function is necessary for this

model type.

V-TAIL (V-tail unit)•

With this model type the elevator and rudder

control functions are connected, so that each

of the two tail unit ﬂ aps – each controlled with a

separate servo – assume both the elevator and

rudder function.

The servos are normally connected to the receiver

as follows:

OUTPUT CH 3: Left V-tail servo

OUTPUT CH 4: Right V-tail servo

If the servo's direction of rotation is incorrect,

please observe the notices on page 62.

ELEVON (delta/ﬂ ying wing models)•

The servos connect at the outputs 2 and 3 assume

the aileron and elevator function. The servos are

normally connected to the receiver as follows:

OUTPUT CH 2: Left horizontal/vertical

235

Detail program description - Telemetry

OUTPUT CH 3: Right horizontal/vertical

If the servo's direction of rotation is incorrect,

please observe the notices on page 62.

RX CURVE (EXPO)

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX CURVE

TYPE : B

CURVE1 CH : 02

TYPE : B

CURVE2 CH : 03

TYPE : B

CURVE3 CH : 04

Value Explanation Possible settings

CURVE1,

2 or 3 CH

Channel

assignment of the

respective curve

setting

1 … depending on

receiver

TYPE Curve type A, B, C

see ﬁ gure

Expo = +100%

–100% +100%

Expo = –100%

TYPE A

–100% +100%

linear

–100% +100%

TYPE B

TYPE C

DR = 125% DR = 70%

Servo travel

Control travel

Servo travel

Control travel

Servo travel

Control travel

Normally a non-linear control function, if applicable, is

used for the aileron (channel 2), elevator (channel 3)

and rudder (channel 4). These channel defaults also

correspond to the factory settings. BUT CAUTION:

This assignment only applies when, on the transmitter

side, neither "2HRSv3+8" is speciﬁ ed in the "Tail

type" line nor is "2AIL" or 2AIL 2FL" speciﬁ ed in the

"Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line of the »Base settings«

menu. Otherwise, assignments will have already

been made in the transmitter for control function 3

(elevator), which will then be split between control

channels 3 & 8, or control function 2 (aileron), which

will then be split between control channels 2 & 5 for

the left and right ailerons. The corresponding control

channels (INPUT CH) in the receiver would in both

cases be channels 03 & 08 or 02 & 05.

Therefore if, for example, "2AIL" has been speciﬁ ed

on the transmitter side and the intent here is to utilize

the RX CURVE option instead of the mc-16 HoTT

transmitter's individually adjustable »Dual Rate /

Expo« menu (see page 120 or 124), then two curves

must be set:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX CURVE

TYPE : B

CURVE1 CH : 02

TYPE : B

CURVE2 CH : 05

TYPE : B

CURVE3 CH : 04

Otherwise, the left and right ailerons have different

control characteristics.

With the RX CURVE function you can manage the

control characteristics for up to three servos:

CURVE 1, 2 or 3 CH•

Select the desired control channel (INPUT CH) of

the ﬁ rst servo.

The following setting in TYPE only pertains to the

channel selected here.

TYPE

Select the servo curve:

A: EXPO = -100 % and DUAL RATE = 125 %

The servo reacts strongly to movements of the

joystick around the neutral position. As the rudder

throw increases, the curve becomes ﬂ atter.

B: Linear setting.

The servo follows the joystick movement linearly.

C: EXPO = +100 % and DUAL RATE = 70 %

The servo reacts weakly to the joystick

movements around the neutral position. As the

rudder throw increases, the curve becomes

steeper.

Note:

The control characteristics programmed here also

affect the mapped receiver outputs.

5CH FUNCTION: "SERVO" or "SENSOR"

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX CURVE

TYPE : A

CURVE1 CH : 02

TYPE : A

CURVE2 CH : 03

TYPE : B

CURVE3 CH : 04

5CH FUNCTION:SERVO

Some receivers have a speciﬁ c servo connection

which has been made switchable rather than an

independent telemetry connection. Thus, for example,

on the GR-12 receiver included with the mx-12 HoTT

set, order no. 33112, , servo connector 5 has an extra

"T" mark and can be alternatively connected …

Servo

Sensor OR

… not only via an order no. 7168.6Aadaper cable

to upgrade the receiver but also connected to a

telemetry sensor.

However, in order for the receiver to correctly

recognize the given connected device correctly, servo

connection 5 (in this case) MUST be appropriately set

236 Detail program description - Telemetry

for either "SERVO" or "SENSOR".

This switchover is accomplished by moving the 

with the selection key of the left or right touch pad

until the " " symbol is at the left margin of the bottom

line then tapping on the center SET key of the right

touch pad.

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX CURVE

TYPE : A

CURVE1 CH : 02

TYPE : A

CURVE2 CH : 03

TYPE : B

CURVE3 CH : 04

5CH FUNCTION:SERVO

Now use one of the  selection keys on the right

touch pad to select the alternative setting "SENSOR".

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX CURVE

TYPE : A

CURVE1 CH : 02

TYPE : A

CURVE2 CH : 03

TYPE : B

CURVE3 CH : 04

5CH FUNCTION:SENSOR

Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad will close the selection and, with appropriate

repetitive taps on the center ESC key of the left touch

pad, a return to the transmitter's basic display is

accomplished.

RX SERVO TEST

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

TEST : STOP

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE

Value Explanation Possible

settings

ALL-MAX Servo travel on the

"+" side for all servo

outputs for the

servo test

1500 … 2000 µs

ALL-MIN Servo travel on the

"-" side for all servo

outputs for the

servo test

1500 … 1000 µs

TEST Test procedure START / STOP

ALARM

VOLT

Alarm threshold

of the receiver

undervoltage

warning

3.0 … 6.0 V

factory setting:

3.8 V

ALARM

TEMP+

Alarm threshold for

excessively high

temperature of the

receiver

50 … 80 °C

Factory setting:

70 °C

ALARM

TEMP–

Alarm threshold

for excessively low

temperature of the

receiver

-20 … +10 °C

Factory setting:

-10 °C

OUTPUT

TYPE

Channel sequence ONCE, SAME,

SUMI, SUMO

ALL-MAX (servo travel on the "+" side)

In this line you set the maximum servo travel on the

plus side of the control travel for the servo test.

2000 µs corresponds to the full throw; 1500 µs

corresponds to the neutral position.

Make sure that the servos do not overrun

mechanically during the test routine.

ALL-MIN (servo travel on the "-" side)

You adjust the maximum servo travel on the minus

side of the control path for the servo test in this line.

1000 µs corresponds to the full throw; 1500 µs

corresponds to the neutral position.

TEST

You start and stop the servo test integrated in the

receivers in this line.

A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad will open the entry ﬁ eld:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE

TEST : STOP

Now, with one of the selection keys of the right touch

pad, select START:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE

TEST : START

A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad will now start the test run. The input ﬁ eld is

237

Detail program description - Telemetry

shown as "normal" again:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE

TEST : START

To stop the servo test, reactivate the entry ﬁ eld as

described above, select STOP and conﬁ rm this

selection with the SET key of the right touch pad.

ALARM VOLT (receiver undervoltage warning)

The receiver voltage is monitored through ALARM

VOLT. The interval can be adjusted between 3.0 and

6.0 Volt. If the set alarm threshold is undercut, an

acoustic signal is issued (interval peep tone long/

short) and "VOLT.E" blinks in the top right of all »RX

…« displays:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO

REVERSE : OFF

CENTER : 1500μsec

TRIM : –000μsec

TRAVEL– : 150%

OUTPUT CH: 01

TRAVEL+ : 150%

PERIOD : 20msec

VOLT.E

The parameter "R-VOLT" is also represented

inversely in the »RX DATAVIEW« display:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

VOLT.E

S–STR100% R–TEM.+28°C

L PACK TIME 00010msec

L.R-VOLT:03.5V

S–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBM

SENSOR1 :00.0V 00°C

SENSOR2 :00.0V 00°C

R-VOLT :03.7V

RX DATAVIEW VOLT.E

ALARM TEMP +/- (recommended temperature

monitoring)

These two options monitor the receiver temperature.

A lower threshold "ALARM TEMP-" (-20 … +10 °C) and

an upper threshold "ALARM TEMP+" (50 … 80 °C)

can be programmed. When these speciﬁ cations are

exceeded or undercut, an acoustic signal (continuous

peep tone) sounds and "TEMP.E" appears in the top

right of all receiver displays. In addition, the parameter

"R-TEM" is shown inversely on the "»RX DATAVIEW«"

display page.

Make sure that your receiver remains within the

permissible temperature range during all ﬂ ight

conditions (ideally between -10 and 55 °C).

CH OUTPUT TYPE (connection type)

Here you select how the receiver outputs are

controlled.

• ONCE

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

VOLT.E

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE

The servo connections of the receiver are

controlled successively. This is recommended for

analog servos.

This setting automatically operates servos in a

20 ms cycle – or in a 30 ms cycle for a 12 channel

receiver (order no. 33512) – , regardless of what is

set or displayed in the "PERIOD" line of the »RX

SERVO« screen!

• SAME

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

VOLT.E

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE:SAME

The servo connections of the receiver are

controlled in parallel in blocks of four. This

means channels 1 through 4, 5 through 8 and

9 through 12 each receive the control signals

simultaneously.

This is recommended for digital servos when

multiple servos are used for one function (e.g.

aileron), so that the servos can run absolutely

synchronized.

When only using digital servos, we recommend

setting the "PERIOD" line of the »RX SERVO« to

10 ms in order to be able to utilize the fast reaction

of digital servos. With the use of analog servos or

in mixer mode, "20 ms" must be selected!

With this setting, pay particular attention to the

sufﬁ cient dimensioning of the receiver current

supply. Since up to four servos can always

operate simultaneously, the requirement is higher.

• SUMO (sum signal OUT)

A HoTT receiver conﬁ gured as SUMO permanently

generates a so-called sum signal from the control

signals of all of its control channels and provides

this by default to the accompanying GR-32 DUAL

receiver on servo connection 8.

On receivers whose display shows "SUMO" at the

top right, an additional two-digit number appears …

238 Detail program description - Telemetry

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

VOLT.E

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE:SUMO 12

… after conﬁ rmation of "SUMO" with a brief tap

on the center SET key of the right touch pad,

the active ﬁ eld changes to the right for channel

selection. With this selection you specify the

highest of the transmitter channels contained in

the SUMO signal:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

VOLT.E

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE:SUMO 12

Either conﬁ rm the default with another tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad or use the

selection keys to pick another channel between

04 and 16 and conﬁ rm that with SET.

Receiver outputs will be controlled successively

in a 20 ms cycle (30 ms with the GR-32 DUAL

receiver, order no. 33516), even if 10 ms is set in

the "PERIOD" line of the the »RX SERVO« screen.

Primarily intended for the "Satellite mode" of

two HoTT receivers, as described below, the

sum signal generated by the SUMO-designated

receiver can also be used, for example, to

control of Flybar systems (provided they have an

appropriate input) or to control ﬂ

ight simulators via

an adapter cable, order no. 33310

In …

Satellite mode

… two HoTT receivers are connected to one

another through a three-wire connecting cable

(order no. 33700.1 (300 mm) or 33700.2 (100 mm))

at receiver-type-speciﬁ c servo connections. Type

GR-16 and GR-32 DUAL receivers, for example,

are to be connected with one another at servo

output 8. More detailed information can be found

on the Internet at www.graupner.de.

This connection transmits all channels of the

HoTT receiver conﬁ gured as SUMO as well as

those of the receivers designated as satellites

continuously to the second HoTT receiver, which

is to be programmed as …

• SUMI (sum signal IN)

… the designation for the main receiver.

Therefore, the signal always goes toward SUMI:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

VOLT.E

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE:SUMI

The receiver deﬁ ned as SUMI, however, only uses

the sum signal coming from SUMO in the event of

a failure of receipt if at least one channel in SUMI

is programmed to fail-safe.

If the receiver programmed as the SUMO satellite

receiver has a reception outage, the servos

connected to this receiver assume the fail-safe

positions which were programmed into the satellite

receiver, completely independent of the main

receiver.

On the other hand, if two receivers have a

reception outage simultaneously, the fail-safe

settings in the current receiver software at the

time this manual went to print (in principle, the

SUMO's fail-safe settings) become effective. In the

individual case, however, interactions cannot be

ruled out, which is why we urgently recommend

performing an appropriate test BEFORE

commissioning a model.

This receiver combination is recommended if, for

example, one of the two receivers is installed in

the model at an unfavorable position for receiving

or as a result of nozzles, carbon ﬁ ber material

or the like, there is the danger that the receipt

signal is weakened due to the ﬂ ight position, so

that interruptions of the range must be taken into

account.

Therefore, make sure to connect the most

important control functions to the main receiver

programmed as SUMI, so that, in the event of

a failure, the model remains controllable when

the SUMO satellite receiver no longer receives a

signal.

Telemetry data, such as the voltage of the on-

board electricity supply, on the other hand, is only

sent to the transmitter by the satellite receiver

conﬁ gured as SUMO. Therefore, telemetry

sensors are to be connected to the satellite

receiver (SUMO).

Each receiver should be connected with its own

supply line from the common voltage supply. With

receivers with a high current load, it may even be

beneﬁ cial to connect them with two supply lines to

the same current supply.

On the other hand, if each of the two receivers

should be supplied from

its own voltage source,

the center cable must be

removed from one of the

two plugs of the satellite

cable; see ﬁ gure.

rot

If you would like to carry out additional

239

Detail program description - Telemetry

programming, such as fail-safe settings,

disconnect the three-pole satellite connection

between the two receivers and switch on only

the relevant receiver. It may be necessary to also

change the connection sequence.

Setting/displaying sensors

If, in addition to a "receiver", at least one sensor

is selected in the »Telemetry« menu's »SENSOR

SELECT« sub-menu (described below) then

its settings can be read in and changed on the

previously described receiver screens.

However, to actually gain access to this data, the

selected sensor/s must be connected to the receiver

system and this receiver system must have an active

telemetry connection.

If, as described in the next section, there is at least

one sensor activated which has the support of current

ﬁ rmware, then it is possible to directly switch between

individual modules. However, if sensors with older

ﬁ rmware are in use, it may be necessary to select

"etc." instead of the direct sensor selection.

In either case, tap the  or  selection key of the left

touch pad …

RECEIVER

VARIO

etc.

… then use the same keys to select up or down for

the desired module, for example:

VARIO

GPS

Receiver

If the selected module, in this case a Vario module,

is active then on the last receiver screen ("RX

SERVO TEST"), at the top right there will also be

an additional " " symbol pointing to the right. This

symbol is located just to the right of the left-pointing "

" symbol and is the visible indicator that additional

display screens can be accessed.

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

VOLT.E

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE

Now use one of the  selection keys on the left or

right touch pad to switch to the selected sensor's

displays and check or change its settings as

described in the manual delivered with the sensor.

240 Detail program description - Telemetry

SENSOR SELECT

Selecting sensors

After selection of the desired menu line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad …

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1

VOLT.E

… and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of

the right touch pad, the selected sub-menu will open.

SENSOR SELECT

RECEIVER

GENERAL MODULE

VARIO MODULE

ELECTRIC AIR.MOD

GPS

This menu option can be used to determine which

of the graphic displays described on page 36, as

well as those described previously for sub-menu

»SETTINGS/DISPLAYS«, can be selected and which

remain hidden.

Activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the display of

respective sensors by selecting the desired lines with

the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad

then tapping on the center SET key of the right touch

pad, e.g.:

SENSOR SELECT

RECEIVER

GENERAL MODULE

VARIO MODULE

ELECTRIC AIR.MOD

GPS

241

Detail program description - Telemetry

After selection of the desired menu line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad …

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1

VOLT.E

… and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of

the right touch pad will open the selected sub-menu.

This provides a visualization of the quality of the

connection of transmitter and receiver:

E100%

SL 22

P 10

RL 41

4.8RS

S 95%

4.8RM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E

Top row: Reception power of the channels

1 … 75 of the 2.4 GHz band in dBm

coming from the receiver to the

transmitter.

Bottom row: Reception power of the channels

1 … 75 of the 2.4 GHz band in dBm

coming from the transmitter to the

receiver.

Comments:

Since reception power is measured and presented •

in dBm, reception power is increasingly worse

the higher the bar is and vice versa; refer also to

"Reception power (S-dBm)" on page 230 about

RF STATUS VIEW

this.

The points above the bars mark the poorest •

reception since switching on the transmitter or

the last reset of the display with a simultaneous

tap on the or  keys of the right touch pad

(CLEAR).

Additional ﬁ gures are shown to the left of the graphic

representation of the reception power. These mean:

Value Explanation

E Signal quality in % of the signal received

from the receiver

S Signal quality in % of the signal received

by the receiver

SL Reception power in dBm

P Number of lost data packages of the

receiver

RL Reception power in dBM of the signal

received by the receiver

RS Current operating voltage of the receiver

in volts

RM Lowest receiver operating voltage since

last startup, in volts

242 Detail program description - Telemetry

After selection of the desired menu line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad …

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1

VOLT.E

and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the

right touch pad will open the selected sub-menu.

REPEAT

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT

TRIG

TRANSMIT

–––

VARIO –––

1sec

In order to be able to start the voice output through

the headphone connection, at the very least the

"REPEAT" line must be assigned to a switch. The

takes place as described in the section "Switch and

control switch assignments" on page 56:

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT

TRIG

TRANSMIT

–––

VARIO –––

1SEC

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT

TRIG

TRANSMIT

–––

VARIO –––

1sec 3

With this switch you can have the last respective

voice trigger repeated for the duration of the time

set to the left of the switch, as long as the assigned

switch is closed:

TRIG

With a switch assigned to this line, preferably

one of the two pushbuttons, switch the selected

voice messages in rotation on to the next voice

message for the below-described "TRANSMITTER",

"RECEIVER" and "SENSOR" options, as described

below.

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT

TRIG

TRANSMIT

VARIO –––

1sec 3

VARIO

If the "VARIO MODULE" line is activated ( ) in the

»SENSOR SELECT« sub-menu, as described on

page 240, a switch assigned to one of these lines

can be used to call up vario-speciﬁ c voice messages

for the headset connection which are completely

independent of other voice messages, i.e. voice

messages triggered by altitude changes, such as the

message "slowly ascend/descend".

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT

TRIG

TRANSMIT

VARIO

1sec 3

TRANSMITTER

After selection of the desired menu line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad …

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT

TRIG

TRANSMIT

VARIO

1sec 3

and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the

right touch pad will open the selected sub-menu.

VOLT:

MODELTIME:

BATTERYTIME:

TIMER(GE.)CENTER:

TIMER(GE.)TOP:

TIME:

PHASE TIMER:

Here, after selection of the desired line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad and a

subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad, the selected voice message can be

activated ( ) or deactivated ( ).

VOICE TRIGGER

243

Detail program description - Telemetry

VOLT:

MODELTIME:

BATTERYTIME:

TIMER(GE.)CENTER:

TIMER(GE.)TOP:

TIME:

PHASE TIMER:

RECEIVER

After selection of the desired menu line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad …

VOICE TRIGGER

TRIG

TRANSMIT

VARIO

RECEIVER

… and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of

the right touch pad will open the selected sub-menu:

TEMP:

STRENGHT:

VOLT:

FLUGZEITUHR:

LOWVOLT:

UHRZEIT:

Here, after selection of the desired line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad and a

subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad, the selected voice message can be

activated ( ) or deactivated ( ).

SENSOR

This line only appears if a sensor was ﬁ rst activated

in the »SENSOR SELECT« sub-menu. For example,

if the »VARIO« sensor is selected then the selections

for the "VARIO" line will be opened …

VOICE TRIGGER

TRANSMIT

VARIO 8

RECEIVER

VARIO

when a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the

right touch pad calls up the sub-menu.

ALT:

MAXALT:

MINALT:

FLUGZEITUHR:

VOLT MINIMUM:

UHRZEIT:

As described in the column at the left, these menus

also allow every offered voice message to be

activated ( ) or deactivated ( ) by selecting the

desired line followed by a tap on the center SET key

of the right touch pad.

Note:

The selection made here is completely independent

of the "VARIO" voice triggers.

244 Detail program description - Channel sequencer

Channel sequencer

Programming the motion sequences of up to 3 servos

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to scroll to the »Channel sequence« menu option in

the multi-function menu:

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Free mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch

pad to open this menu option:

CHANNEL SEQUENCER

Channel

INACT

SET

Channel

channel

INACT



The »Channel sequence« menu option can be used

to execute up to 9 exactly coordinated steps for up

to three servos over a period of up to 30 seconds.

Such a sequence can be triggered by a single switch

and begin at an initial servo position which is freely

adjustable. For example, this makes the opening

of undercarriage doors, complete with subsequent

extension of the retractable gear, just as simple to

program as opening a wheel well with renewed closing

of one undercarriage door once the landing gear has

been lowered or to program the raising of a cockpit

canopy with subsequent head turns and waving

performed by the pilot. However, the prerequisite for

all these actions is the "parsing" of the desired motion

sequence into practical, individual steps.

Programming procedure

On this menu option's ﬁ rst display page, see ﬁ gure

below left, either accept the three preset channels,

14 … 16, or select an available channel, 5 … 16, for

each line to form any other desired combination, e.g.:

CHANNEL SEQUENCER

Channel

INACT

SET

Channel

channel

INACT



With a simultaneous tap on the  or  selection

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the given

channel is reset back to 5, 6 or 7.

The next step makes the control channels needed

for the channel sequence available. This is done

in the "SET" column by changing settings from

"INACT" to "ACT" and thus making the individual

channels "available" to the program for sequencing.

Conversely, this also means that channels deﬁ ned as

"active" in the »Channel sequence« menu are not

available for other purposes.

CHANNEL SEQUENCER

Channel

ACT

SET

Channel

channel

ACT



With a simultaneous tap on the  or  selection

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the given

channel is reset back to "INACT".

Once control channels and their activity statuses

have been set, switch to the right column then tap on

the center SET key of the right touch pad to reach

the second page, the »Channel sequence« menu's

choreography page. Since the call-up of the second

page in this example was issued from the "Servo 12"

line, this servo remains the object of focus after the

page change.

Channel sequencer

TIME

STEP

POS

–––

The previous display page permitted the selection

of participating servos and their incorporation into

the sequence. This display page will now be used

to establish the sequence of steps for participating

servos, beginning with initial positions yet to be

deﬁ ned. The step number, from "0" to a maximum

of "9", will be shown in the column labeled "STEP"

near the bottom left of the display.

Step 0: Setting initial position

Keep the focus of attention on "Servo 12" or change

to any other of the three servos by using the 

keys of the left touch pad, e.g. upward to "Servo 10".

245

Detail program description - Channel sequencer

Channel sequencer

TIME

STEP

POS

–––

Use one of the  selection keys of the right touch

pad, as necessary, to shift the marker frame to the

right from the column "TIME" to the value ﬁ eld above

the column labeled "POS" then, after a tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad, alter this value

within a range of ±100 % until the servo is in the

desired initial position. For example:

Channell sequencer

TIME

STEP

POS

–––

+90%

Repeat this procedure as necessary for the other two

servos.

With a simultaneous tap on the  or  selection

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the given

position value will be reset back to"0 %".

Step 1: ﬁ rst event

Now that initial positions have been established, the

ﬁ rst step can be set. This is a matter of deﬁ ning what

is to be done, or not done, ﬁ rst, following a certain

span of time.

Do this by ﬁ rst using the  selection keys of the left

touch pad to select one of the servos. Now tap the

 key of the left touch pad. The step number, which

was previously indicated by a "0" is now replaced

by a "1" and the value "0.0s" will appear in the ﬁ eld

above "TIME".

Channel sequencer

TIME

STEP

POS

–––

+90%

0.0s

Use the selection keys of the right touch pad as

necessary to shift the marker frame to the "TIME"

column.

Now brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad to set the activation time into the value

ﬁ eld for the "TIME" column, e.g. 1.5 s. The current

position in time is represented in the graphic by the

dotted vertical line. It will move to the right according

to the time setting and, at the same time, the course

of servo positions will be presented as dotted lines

between time-point "0" and time-point "1".

Channel sequencer

TIME

STEP

POS

–––

+90%

1.5s

Now set the desired servo positions for the end of the

ﬁ rst time span (with the same procedure as already

described for "Step 0") or leave one or more of these

servos in the same position they were in for the

previous step.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right

touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse video value

displayed if the TIME ﬁ eld back to "blank" and erase

the current sequence, in this example only Step "1".

Channel sequencer

TIME

STEP

POS

–––

+90%

0.0s

Step 2 …

Repeat the previously described procedure for

every other step to be deﬁ

ned until the servos have

reached their terminal positions.

Switch assignment

In conclusion, assign the sequence of events created

to a switch (as described on page 56 in the section

"Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control

switches") with which the servos can be switched

between their initial and terminal positions.

Channel sequencer

TIME

STEP

POS

0.0s 2

As soon as this switch is closed, the servos'

sequence of movements can be followed in the

graphic. The servo curves will be shown in inverse

video according to the preset time windows. All

movements will sequence in reverse when the switch

is opened again.

Important notices:

The sequence shown is only for demonstration •

purposes and is not at all representative of a real

sequence of servo movements.

246 Detail program description - Channel sequencer

The settings made in the "POS" value ﬁ eld •

replace the otherwise "conventional" transmitter

control signal. Therefore it is necessary, before

programming such a sequence, to check in the

»Servo display« menu to make sure none of the

channels planned for the sequence are actuated

by any other transmitter operating element. If this

were to be the case, it could lead to unpredictable

excursions in the motion sequence.

The settings made in the »• Servo adjustment«

and »Tx. output swap« menus are not affected

by settings in this menu.

When preparing and creating a sequence, •

be absolutely sure the servos do not collide

mechanically. If necessary, use the "Travel limit"

option in the »Servo adjustment« menu.

Multi-channel

Channel multiplier for special functions

The mc-16 HoTT transmitter has an integrated multi-

function channel built into the transmitter's software.

This facility permits up to two control channels to be

used for up to four or eight special functions Every

available switch (including the so-called expansion

switches, see page 56) or transmitter control can be

assigned on the transmitter side.

On the receiver side, the following modules are

available as accessories, whereby at one time a

maximum of two modules can be operated via the

»Multi-channel« menu.

NAUTIC-Expert, switching module, order no. 4159

The NAUTIC-Expert switching module expands a

servo's functionality to 16 switched functions. By

appropriately wiring the connecting cable, loads can

either be operated from a common power supply or

also separately by multiple power sources.

NAUTIC-Multi-Prop mini-decoder order no. 4142.N

The 1/4 C-NAUTIC-Multi-Prop mini-decoder expands

a proportional function to four proportional functions.

Light module order no. 2381

A module for switching the light signals of rail, road

and airborne vehicles with true authenticity.

Sound switch for vehicle models order no. 2382.F

start, stop and supplementary sounds as well as

typical vehicle signals

Sound switch for ship models order no. 2382.S

start, stop and supplementary sounds as well as

typical ship signals

Further information can be found in Internet at

www.graupner.de. Use the search mask by entering

the respective order no. Alternatively, contact or visit

your local dealer.

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to scroll to the menu option »Multichannel« menu

option in the multi-function menu:

247

Detail program description - Multi-channel

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

… then open this menu option with a brief tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad.

Here, in the second column from the left, each of the

two multi-channel functions can be activated ("ACT")

or deactivated ("INACT") as desired and in the third

column the given function can be assigned to one of

the transmitter channels, C5 through C8, in a list.

MULTICHANNEL

MULTIC1

MULTIC2

INACT

SET SEL 

MULTIC 4CH

SEL

Note:

When a changeover is made to the »Servo display«

or if »Servo adjustment« is used to select the

"-travel+" or "-lim +" columns for these previously set

channels, their respective cells will ﬂ ash to indicate

that these channels have been activated in the

»Multichannel« menu. The preset values of 100 % or

150 % should not be changed.

Prior to channel selection, please observe the

following notices:

Switch to the 1. "SETTINGS/DISPLAYS" line of the

»Telemetry« menu and tap on the center SET key

of the right touch pad:

on the "RX SERVO" page, select the "20 msec" •

setting in the last line "PERIOD", see page

231.

On the "RX SERVO TEST" display page, •

select the "SAME" option for the last line "CH

OUT TYPE", see page 238.

The control channel used may not be used as an 2.

input nor as an output channel for any mixer! For

example, if C5 is selected, be sure that the "Aile/

ﬂ aps" line of the »Model type« menu is preset

to "1AIL" or that the "Swashplate type" line of the

»Helicopter type« menu is preset to "1 servo".

The channel settings intended for NAUTIC control 3.

channel purposes in the »Control adjust« and

»Servo adjustment« menus are to be left as

they are or reset back to their original settings.

Do not assign any transmitter control or switch to

the respective input either. Also be sure that the

servo's direction of rotation is not reversed. Leave

the servo middle at 0%.

MULTICHANNEL

MULTIC1

MULTIC2

ACT

SET SEL 

MULTIC 4CH

SEL

In the next column to the right, make a separate

channel count speciﬁ cation for each of the two multi-

channels; "MULTIC 4C." for the NAUTIC-Multi-Prop

mini decoder, order no. 4142.N or "MULTIC 8C."

for the NAUTIC-Expert switching module, order no.

4159.

MULTICHANNEL

MULTIC1

MULTIC2

ACT

SET SEL 

MULTIC 4CH

SEL

MULTIC 8CH

Afterward, use the right arrow symbol at the bottom

line's right end to switch over to the second page of

settings for the »Multichannel« menu:

MULTICH 2

–––

SEL Offset

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Input 5

Input 6

Input 7

Input 8

–––

+100%

– travel +

This menu page is now used for making individual

settings for "MULTICH 1" and "MULTICH 2".

Column 2, "Control"

–––

SEL Offset

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

–––

+100%

– travel+

MULTICH 2

Use the arrow keys to move to the column over SEL.

248 Detail program description - Multi-channel

and then connected as necessary.)

If a Nautic-Expert switching module (order no. 4159) is

present, the assigned proportional control will function

like a switch when it is put near its limit position.

Column 3, "Switch"

–––

SEL Offset

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

–––

+100%

– travel +

MULTICH 2

This column is used to assign each of the inputs

used, 1 through 8 (maximum), to any switch available

on the transmitter. These assignments are done

as described in the section "Assigning transmitter

controls, switches and control switches" on page 56:

Any controls which were previously assigned in the

second column will be erased. In this case, instead

of SEL, the switch symbol will be displayed at the

bottom of the 2nd column such that now a second

"normal" switch, or even a transmitter control switch,

logical switch, … can be assigned as needed from

the group of "expanded switches". In general it is

sufﬁ cient to assign a simple switch or transmitter

control.

–––

Offset

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

–––

+100%

– travel +

MULTICH 2

Column 3, "Offset"

–––

Offset

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

–––

+100%

– travel +

MULTICH 2

The control center for the given control, i.e. its zero

point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment

range lies between -100 % and +100 %.

Simultaneously tapping on the  or  keys of

the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the value

displayed in inverse video back to its "0 %" value.

Leave the offset setting at 0 % while making switch

assignments.

Column 3, "–travel+"

–––

offset

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

INPUT 3

INPUT 4

–––

+100%

– travel +

MULTICH 2

Finally, transmitter control travel is set for both sides

in the rightmost column "-travel+". The range for this

lies between -100 % and +100 %. To accomplish this,

push or turn the respective transmitter control in the

given direction. This will set the "travel" for each given

direction individually.

If the assignment is for a switch, leave the setting at

the default value of 100 %.

After completing the activation of transmitter control

assignment by tapping the center SET key of the right

touch pad , the message shown below will appear in

the display:

–––

SEL Offset

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

–––

+100%

– travel +

MULTICH 2

Move desired

control adj.

Alternatively, the center SET key of the right touch

pad can be tapped for a second time while this

message is on display:

–––

SEL Offset

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

–––

+100%

– travel +

MULTICH 2

Now the desired transmitter control can be selected

with the selection keys on the left or right touch pad.

If the selected control has an assignment, it can be

disconnected from a transmitter control switching its

ﬁ eld to "fr".:

transmitter control 1 … 4 (CH 1 …4)•

slider control 1 … 3 in the middle of the console •

(SR1 … 3)

depressible, roller-shaped proportional speed •

control (DG1 … 5)

side proportional control control (SD1 and SD2)•

(Function inputs "UV1" through "UV8", which are also

in the selection list, can be selected at a later time

249

Detail program description - Multi-channel

Note:

Due to technical reasons, servos connected to a 1/4

C NAUTIC Multi-Prop mini decoder may operate

somewhat hesitatingly. This is not a fault.

Connection notes for the

Nautic-Expert switching module, order no. 4159

As many as 16 switched functions can be controlled

per switching module.

Eight loads, like lamps, LEDs, etc. – but not electric

motors – , with a load current of up to 0.7 A each can

be connected directly.

Two switch functions per connector socket are

possible via the three conductor cable, order no.

3941.6 , see bottom right ﬁ gure.

Electric motors and loads drawing substantial current

should be connected by other means, e.g. via

switching modules. Ask your dealer about this.

6 (output: 5 ... 8)

5 (output 5 ... 8)

(Receiver power supply to the „B + -“

marked terminals)

Best.-Nr. 4159

Max. 8 x 0,7 A

Batt. 3...30V

NAUTIC - Expert

Schaltbaustein

2 - 16 K

Empfänger

1- H -2

1- G -2

1- F -2

1- E -2

1- D -2

1- C -2

1- A -2

1- B -2

Best.-Nr. 4142.N

1/4 K

NAUTIC

Multi-Prop-

Mini-Decoder

S 4

S 3

S 2

S 1

external power-

supply 3 ... 30 V

- +

Current consumption of directly

connected consumer units

(but no electric motors)

max. 0,7 A (total max. 8 x 0,7 A).

Wiring for direct connection of two consumer units at one output

3-pole cable with flat connector Order No. 3941.6

red

brown

orange

consumer

unit

max. 0,7 A

consumer

unit

max. 0,7 A

additional modules e.g....

Switching module high voltage SXH Order No. 3970

Switching module multi function SXM Order No. 3971

Switching module

high voltage

SXH Order No. 3970

Switching

module

SXH

Switching

module

SXM

Switching module

multi function

SXM Order No. 3971

Soundswitch

Order No. 2382

Light module

Order No. 2381

7 (output: 5 ... 8)

8 (output: 5 ... 8)

additional servos, speed controller,

sail winch, ... also on this side

The figure shows an example of the connectivity of the ' 2-16 C NAUTIC

Expert Switch building block "," 1/4 K NAUTIC Multi-Prop Mini-Decoder ",

" light module "and" sound switch ". Two of these modules in parallel can

be operated using the menu »Multi channel« on output 5 ... 8.

Before first time operation of the NAUTIC modules make the above described settings.

Connection example with the Graupner HoTT GR-16 receiver

250 Detail program description - Ring limiter

Ring Limiter

Control of Voith Schneider propellers in model ships

Scroll with the selection keys on the left or right touch

pad to the menu option »Ring limiter« in the multi-

function menu:

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch

pad to open this menu option:

RING LIMIT

SET

Input

Output

OFF



This »Ring limiter« is primarily intended for the

control of up to three so-called Voith Schneider

propellers in ship models. These are positioned

beneath the ship where they are exposed to a free

ﬂ ow of water in all directions. The control of these

drives and turning their vertically oriented propeller

blades is done with two servos per Voith Schneider

propulsion unit whereby, for mechanical reasons,

the propellers of this type offered by Graupner under

order nos. 2358 and 2358.BL have a maximum

control travel limitation of 4 mm each.

As long as the joysticks for forward/reverse and left/

right are operated individually (see section "Column

Input") this is no problem because travel for the

two servos can be appropriately adjusted, both

mechanically as well as in the »Servo adjustment«

menu. However, this becomes problematic when, for

example, one joystick is 100 % forward and, at the

same time, the other joystick is pushed completely

to the right to arithmetically produce a 141 % sum for

the two servo travel vectors. The mechanical controls

of the Voith Schneider propellers will collide with their

limits; in best case only drawing an unnecessary

amount of electric current, in worst case causing

damage or even bursting the linkage..

In order to avoid this problem, the mc-16 HoTT

transmitter has a maximum of three "ring limiters"

available in the "SET" column of this option's ﬁ rst

display page (see ﬁ gure at left) that can be switched

"ON" or "OFF" individually. In the ﬁ rst line on the

setting page for a given "ring limiter", its maximum

travel can then be set for a range of between 25 and

125 %. The second line provides a setting for the size

of limitation of overall deﬂ ection between:

0 % circular limit ()

100 % no limit ()

(limitation is strictly a matter of the given

joystick's mechanical stop)

Important notice:

When this function is used, leave the respective

setting values in the »Dual Rate / Expo« and

»Servo adjustment» menus at 0 and 100 % or

reset them back to their default values.

The adjacent sketch illustrates the

effect for a 0 % setting. The cross-

hatched area of travel is curtailed

and appears as a "dead zone".

Column, "Input"

With the standard preset control mode 1, all three

ring limiters are pre-assigned to inputs 3 (forward/

reverse) and 4 (left/right) which are actuated by the

left joystick. However, this pre-assignment can be

replaced anytime by any other transmitter control

combination. Use the selection keys on the left or

right touch pad to move the marker frame to the

desired value ﬁ eld then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key

of the right touch pad:

RING LIMIT

SET

Input

Output

OFF



Select the desired control channel (1 … 12) for the

value ﬁ eld now displayed in inverse video by using

the  or  selection keys. However, do not

forget that if a control channel in the range of 5 … 12

is selected, it must also be assigned to a control in

the »Control adjust« menu, see page 108. Brieﬂ y

tap the center ESC of the left touch pad or the center

SET key of the right touch pad to conclude your entry.

In principle, the other inputs are to be handled in the

same manner.

A tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad

at the same time (CLEAR) will reset the active value

ﬁ eld back to its given default value.

251

Detail program description - Ring limiter

Column, "Output"

The three ring limiters are pre-assigned to receiver

outputs 3/4, 9/10 and 11/12 by default, whereby the

outputs in column "X" are for the forward/reverse

function and the outputs in column "Y" are for the left/

right function. However, this preset combination of

receiver outputs can be replaced as necessary by

any other combination at any time. This is essentially

done in the same manner as described previously

under "Input", for example:

RING LIMIT

SET

Input

Output

OFF



Note:

Watch out for undesirable overlaps if you use one of

the outputs within a mixer.

Column, "SET"

The SET column is used to determine just which of

the ring limiters is to be "OFF" and which are to be

"ON", i.e. active. Use the selection keys on the left

or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the

desired value ﬁ eld in the SET column then brieﬂ y tap

the center SET key of the right touch pad:

RING LIMIT

SET

Input

Output

OFF



7OFF

In the value ﬁ eld now displayed in inverse video,

make a choice between the two options, "ON" and

"OFF", with the  or  selection keys then

conclude the entry with a brief tap on the center ESC

key of the left touch pad or on the center SET key of

the right touch pad.

A tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad

at the same time (CLEAR) will reset the active value

ﬁ eld back to its "OFF" default value.

Column



RING LIMIT

SET

Input

Output



7ON

Following a selection of one of the three lines with

the selection keys, switch to the settings page for the

selected ring limiter (1 … 3) with a brief tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad.

Ring Limit 1

max-X

100% 100%

CH 4

VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y

0% 0%

CH 3

If, however, the small diamond at the center of the

circle in the ﬁ gure above (which represents the

current joystick position) is not visible …

Ring Limit 1

max-X

100% 100%

CH 4

VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y

0% 0%

CH 3

… then the respective ring limiter is still switched

"OFF". In this case, switch back to the previous page

with a brief tap on the center ESC key of the left

touch pad then switch the respective ring limiter "ON"

as previously described.

Programming procedure

The two upper value ﬁ elds – labeled at the bottom

left of the display as "max-X" or "max-Y", depending

on the position of the marker frame – are used to

specify separate settings for each of the two control

functions, "left/right" and "forward/reverse" within a

range of 25 …

Ring Limit 1

max-X

100%

CH 4

VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y

0% 0%

25%

CH 3

… and 125 %:

Ring Limit 1

max-X

100%

CH 4

VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y

0% 0%

125%

CH 3

252 Detail program description - Ring limiter

In practice, the setting is made by changing the given

value until the respective servos in the model just

reach the point where they no longer move.

A tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad at

the same time (CLEAR) will reset the changed value in

the active value ﬁ eld back to its "100 %" default value.

In the next line down – labeled at the bottom left of

the display as "<=>-X" or "<=>-Y", depending

on the position of the marker frame – the setting

values, in a range from 0 % and a maximum of 125 %,

affect the form of limitation between "circular" and

"rectangular", whereby a setting value here may

never be greater than the value of the ﬁ eld above it.

Ring Limit 1

100%

CH 4

VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y

0% 0%

100%

–X

CH 3

Ring Limit 1

100%

CH 4

VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y

0% 0%

100%

–X

100%

CH 3

A tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad at

the same time (CLEAR) will reset the changed value

in the active value ﬁ eld back to its "0 %" default value.

When ﬁ nished with these settings, switch back to

the ﬁ rst display page for this option then repeat this

procedure, as applicable, for the lines of ring limiter

2 or 3.

Final note:

This option can, of course, also be used as necessary

and applicable for ﬁ xed-wing models.

253

For your notes

254 Detail program description - MP3 player

MP3 player

Replay program for MP3 ﬁ les, such as music ﬁ les

Scroll with the selection keys on the left or right touch

pad to the menu option »Ring limiter« in the multi-

function menu:

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Mp3 player Basic settings

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swapg

Profi trim Trim memeory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Mp3 player Basic settings

Tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch

pad to open this menu option:

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM

00/00

TRACK

00/00

No files 0kbps

ESC

If the message "No ﬁ les" appears near the middle of

the display when this menu option is called then the

transmitter has been unable to ﬁ nd any suitable MP3

ﬁ les on the SD card. If this should happen, use a PC

or laptop to check the content of the "MP3" directory

on the SD card and copy suitable MP3 ﬁ les into this

directory if it is empty.

Therefore, insert a SD card containing MP3 ﬁ les in

a directory named "MP3" and, after switching the

transmitter on, open the »MP3-Player« menu option.

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM

00/00

TRACK

00/00

0kbps

ESC

Brieﬂ y tap the  key of the left touch pad to start

replay of the ﬁ rst MP3 ﬁ le of album 1. The replay will

start immediately, however, the display of data about

the number of albums and titles as well as playing

time for the current MP3 ﬁ le – depending on the size

of the MP3 ﬁ le – will only appear after some delay.

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM

01/04

TRACK

01/02

0kbps

ESC

The automatic replay of album 1 will continue to run

until it is stopped with a tap on the  key of the left

touch pad …

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM

01/04

TRACK

01/02

6:54/12:21 128kbps

ESC

sing, sing.mp3

… or the the transmitter is switched off.

During ongoing replay, the menu can be exited at

any time and the transmitter can be used without

restriction. The ongoing MP3 replay is visualized in

the transmitter's basic display by virtue of a "MP3"

display label shown at the left of the SD card symbol

and an animated triangle beneath that display label.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0:00h

VRX VOLT:4.8V

MP3

Note:

If voice output is activated it will be blended in with

the playing MP3 ﬁ le.

Volume

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM

01/04

TRACK

01/02

6:54/12:21 128kbps

ESC

ASing, sing, sing.mp3

After a tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad to activate the value ﬁ eld, the volume of replay

can be regulated within a range of "0" (= mute) to

"30" (very loud).

Album

Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to move

to the value ﬁ eld above "ALBUM" and brieﬂ y tap the

center SET key of the right touch pad:

255

Detail program description - MP3 player

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM TRACK

01/02

6:54/12:21 128kbps

ESC

sing, sing.mp3

02/04

Use the  selection keys of the right touch pad to

select the desired album number (from 1 to a maximum

of 10) in this value ﬁ eld. Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key

of the right touch pad to conﬁ rm the selection.

Note:

The number of albums is a consequence of the

number of ﬁ les present in subdirectories of the "MP3"

directory on the SD card, not the sum of album

names which may be stored in identically named

meta-data ﬁ elds of the MP3 ﬁ le.

Title

Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to move

to the value ﬁ eld above "TRACK" and brieﬂ y tap the

center SET key of the right touch pad:

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM TRACK

0:00/2:34 128kbps

ESC

Track01.mp3

02/04 01/02

Now select the desire title by using the  selection

keys on the right touch pad. Brieﬂ y tap the center

SET key of the right touch pad to start this selection.

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM TRACK

0:00/3:45 128kbps

ESC

Track01.mp3

01/23 02/23

Notes:

The title displayed will be the ﬁ lename of the MP3 •

ﬁ le, not any identically named title which may be

stored in the MP3 ﬁ le as a meta-data ﬁ eld.

The number of the title per album is a consequence •

of the number of MP3 ﬁ les per directory.

MP3 player operator ﬁ eld

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM TRACK

0:00/3:45 128kbps

ESC

Track01.mp3

01/23 02/23

•

Analogous to corresponding keys on a MP3 and

other players, jump one title forward or back for

each tap on one of the  selection keys of the

left touch pad.

• /

Analogous to corresponding keys on a MP3 and

other players, start and stop the MP3 player with a

tap on the  selection keys of the left touch pad.

• / 1 / 1

Switch between these three options with the 

selection keys of the left touch pad.

A Replay of the selected album will repeat in

an endless loop until it is either stopped or

the transmitter is switched off.

1 Replay of the current title will repeat in an

endless loop until it is either stopped or the

transmitter is switched off.

1 Replay will stop automatically at the end of

play for the current title.

ESC

A tap on the center ESC key of the left

touch pad will exit the menu option without

stopping any replay that may be running.

256 Detail program description - Basic settings

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to scroll to the »Basic settings« menu option in the

multi-function menu:

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Mp3 player Basic settings

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swapg

Profi trim Trim memeory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Mp3 player Basic settings

Tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch

pad to open this menu option:

Battery type

Battery warning

Touch Sense

Top LCD Contrast

Li-Io

Display light

Region

3.60V

EURO

unlim.

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name H-J Sandbrunner

Pre-set stick mode 1

Pre-set DSC Output PPM10

Pre-set Pitch min rear

Stick warning: unlim.

Pre-set modulation

Own phase name

HoTT

Bottom LCD Contrast 0

Own phase name 1

Voice volume

Vario volume

Touch-beeps vol.

7fr –––

SEL SEL

7fr –––

Power-on/off beep yes

Basic settings are made in this menu. Transmitter-

speciﬁ c settings, such as volume regulation for

acoustic signals and voice messages output via the

built-in speaker or headset connector, the owner's

name, country setting and even speciﬁ cations for new

model memories. The settings made in this menu on

the lines …

"Pre-set stick mode",•

"Pre-set modulation",•

"Pre-set DSC Output" and•

"Pre-set Pitch min"•

… therefore have no inﬂ uence whatsoever on already

existing model memories; instead, they are only

defaults which are automatically adopted into newly

initialized model memories and can be changed

there individually at any time in the »Basic settings,

model« and »Helicopter type« menus. A change

to the "Pre-set" settings in value ﬁ elds of this menu

therefore only affects those model memories created

new at a later time.

Note:

The settings in this menu are only speciﬁ ed once

in the entire transmitter. Therefore, after opening

this menu in another model memory, the last valid

settings always appear.

Select the desired line with the  selection keys

of the left or right touch pad then tap the center SET

key of the right touch pad. The value in the ﬁ

eld now

displayed in inverse video can be changed. After a

change has been made, the entry can be concluded

with another tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad or the center ESC key of the left touch pad.

Voice volume / Vario volume / Touch-beeps vol.

H-J Sandbrunner

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name

Voice volume

Vario volume

Touch-beeps vol.

7 fr –––

7fr –––

SEL SEL

These three lines can be used to individually set the

volume of the three groups of acoustic signals and

voice messages. This involves selection from among

a total of three variants, whereby each of the variants

offer two or three options for individually regulating

volume even after leaving this menu.

Basic settings

Basic transmitter settings

257

Detail program description - Basic settings

Pre-setting a value

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to move the marker frame to the desired value ﬁ eld in

the column above the left SEL at the display's lower

edge then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right

touch pad. The desired volume for the selected group

can be speciﬁ ed in increments between 0 and 10

in the value ﬁ eld now displayed in inverse video by

using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad.

Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad or the ESC key of the left touch pad will conclude

the process.

Following a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys

of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display will return

to its "7" default value.

via rotary control

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to move the marker frame to the desired value ﬁ eld in

the column above the right SEL label at the display's

lower edge then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the

right touch pad. The message shown below will then

appear in the display:

H-J Sandbrunner

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name

Voive volume

Vario volu

Touch-beeps vol.

7 fr –––

7fr –––

SEL SEL

Move desired

control adj.

Now turn the desired rotary control, for example, the

right retractable knob DG2. Afterward, this knob can

be used anytime to incrementally regulate volume for

the selected group between 0 and 10.

Following a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys

of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display will return

to its "fr" default value.

via three position switch

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to move the marker frame to the column above the

switch symbol at the display's lower edge then brieﬂ y

tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The

message shown below will then appear in the display:

H-J Sandbrunner

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name

Voice volume Sprache

Vario volumetöne

Touch-beeps

7 fr –––

7fr –––

SEL SEL

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Now, assign a switch as described on page 56 in the

section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and

control switches". Ideally a self-neutralizing three

position switch, e.g. like that offered by Graupner

under order no. 33001.5. Afterward, this switch can

be used anytime to incrementally regulate volume for

the selected group between 0 and 10.

Following a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys

of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display will return

to its "---" default value.

Owner

H-J Sandbrunner

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name

Voice volume

Vario volume

Touch-beeps vol.

7 fr –––

7fr –––

SEL SEL

Up to 15 characters can be used to specify the

owner's name. Change to the next screen page (



)

with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad:

!"#$%&’()

Owners name

@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_

?+,–./0123456789:;

¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ

`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~

H-J Sandb

Select the desired characters with the selection

keys of the left touch pad. With a brief tap on the 

selection key of the right touch pad or its center SET

key, move to the next position in which a character

can be selected. A simultaneous tap on the  or

 keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will place a

space character at the current position.

Positioning to any character position within the entry

ﬁ eld can be done with the  keys of the right

touch pad.

A brief tap on the center ESC key of the left touch

pad will cause a return to the previous menu page.

Pre-set stick mode

As a basic principle, there are four different ways to

assign the four control functions, aileron, elevator,

rudder and throttle or brake ﬂ aps for winged models

as well as rolling, pitching, tail rotor and throttle/pitch

for helicopter models to the two joysticks. Just which

of these options is chosen depends on the individual

preferences of the individual model pilot.

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch

pad to select the "Stick mode" line. The option ﬁ eld

will be framed.

258 Detail program description - Basic settings

H-J Sandbrunner

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name

Voice volume

Vario volume 7fr –––

7fr –––

Pre-set stick mode 1

H-J Sandbrunner

SEL

Tap on the SET key brieﬂ y. The currently displayed

stick mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now

use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select

the variant, from 1 to 4, you most frequently use. In

the future this will be used for newly initialized model

memories, but can be changed on an individual basis

for up to 80 model memories.

Following a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys

of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display will return

to stick mode "1".

With another tap on the SET key, the selection ﬁ eld

will be deactivated again to permit a change to

another line.

Winged model stick mode

“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)

elev. down

elev. up

left rudder

right rudder

full throttle

idle

left aileron

right aileron

full throttle

left rudder

right rudder

idle

elev. down

elev. up

left aileron

right aileron

elev. down

elev. up

left aileron

right aileron

Motor Vollgas

idle

left rudder

right rudder

full throttle

idle

left aileron

right aileron

elev. down

elev. up

left rudder

right rudder

Helicopter model stick mode

“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)

pitch axis

tail rotor

pitch axis

tail rotor

throttle

roll

throttle

tail rotor

throttle throttle

pitch axis

roll

pitch axis

roll

Motor/Pitch

throttle

tail rotor

throttle

roll

pitch axis

tail rotor

Pre-set modulation

Standard equipment for the mc-16 transmitter

includes a HoTT transmitter module and, under

the right front cover – as viewed from the front – a

connector socket for an external RF module, see

page 25. Additionally, a transmitter-internal iFS RF

module can be installed and connected. On a model-

speciﬁ c basis, the transmitter can be set to use the

modulation of any one of these three RF modules by

appropriately selecting "HoTT", "EXT. PPM" or "INT.

PPM" in the "Pre-set modulation" line of the »Basic

settings, model« menu. The most frequently used

variant should logically be selected for the "Pre-set

modulation" line in the "General Basic Settings"

menu. In the future this will be used for newly

initialized model memories, but can be changed on

an individual basis for up to 80 model memories.

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:

H-J Sandbrunner

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name

Touch-beeps vol. 7fr –––

Pre-set stick mode 1

H-J Sandbrunner

Pre-set modulation HoTT

SEL

Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to

select the variant from among "HoTT", "EXT. PPM"

and "INT. PPM".

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will return the display back

to modulation "HoTT".

With a brief tap on the SET or ESC key, the selected

ﬁ eld is deactivated to permit a switch to another line.

Pre-set DSC Output

In the line with the same name in the »Basic

settings, model« menu, a separate speciﬁ cation

can be made from among the available modulation

types which is speciﬁ c to each model memory and

will then provided at the DSC socket. This choice

primarily inﬂ uences the maximum number of control

channels which can be attached to the DSC (direct

servo control) socket, and thus also available to a

ﬂ ight simulator or teacher/pupil system. By selecting

"PPM10" this will be control channels 1 … 5, for

"PPM16" channels 1 … 8, for "PPM18" channels 1 …

9 and for "PPM24" channels 1 … 12.

SET SET SEL SET

Rcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/a

n/a

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

259

Detail program description - Basic settings

In a manner similar to "Pre-set stick mode, in this

»General basic settings« menu the selection made

for the "Pre-set DSC Output" line will determine which

of the four possible modulation types will be adopted

as the default variant for a newly initialized model

memory.

If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left

or right touch pad to switch to the "DSC Output" line

then, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the

right touch pad, activate the value window:

H-J Sandbrunner

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name

Pre-set stick mode 1

H-J Sandbrunner

Pre-set modulation HoTT

SEL

Pre-set DSC Output PPM10

Now a choice can be made from among the four

possible modulation types: "PPM10", "PPM16",

"PPM18" and "PPM24", with the selection keys of the

right touch pad. Another tap on the center SET key of

the right touch pad will conclude the entry.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset this option back to

"PPM10".

Pre-set Pitch min

(only relevant to helicopter models)

In a manner similar to the previously described

options "Stick mode" and "DSC Output", enter

the preferred actuation direction for the throttle/

pitch joystick on this line so the choice will already

be present by default for model memories newly

initialized in the future. The functionality of all other

helicopter program options (to the extent they affect

throttle and/or pitch) are dependent on this setting; in

other words the throttle curve, idle trim, Channel 1 

tail rotor mixer, etc.

This means:

"fwd.": minimum front pitch setting, the pitch

joystick (C1) points away from the pilot.

"back": minimum rear pitch setting, the pitch

joystick (C1) points towards the pilot.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the

right touch pad (CLEAR) will set this option to "rear".

Note:

The C1 joystick's control direction for "Throttle min

front/rear" in the ﬁ xed-wing program can be changed

individually in the »Model type« menu.

Contrast, upper display / lower display

In assure optimal legibility of mc-16 HoTT displays

under all weather and temperature conditions, their

contrast settings can be adjusted separately.

Contrast for the forward display, located between the

switch panels, is adjusted by selecting the "Top LCD

contrast" line with the selection keys of the left or right

touch pad then brieﬂ y tapping on the center SET key

of the right touch pad.

Pre-set DSC Output PPM10

SEL

Top LCD contrast 0

Bottom LCD contrast 0

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Pre-set Pitch min. rear

Now display contrast can be adjusted in the value

ﬁ eld displayed in inverse video within a range of ±20

by using the selection keys of the right touch pad.

RX–S QUA: 100%

RX–S STR: 100%

TX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–VOLT:4.8 TMP

L–PACK: 10ms

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE

R-LOW V:4.6 +22°C

RX–S QUA: 100%

RX–S STR: 100%

TX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–VOLT:4.8 TMP

L–PACK: 10ms

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE

R-LOW V:4.6 +22°C

Contrast for the rear display, located between the

touch pads, is adjusted by selecting the "Bottom LCD

contrast" line with the selection keys of the left or right

touch pad then brieﬂ y tapping on the center SET key

of the right touch pad.

Pre-set DSC Output PPM10

SEL

Top LCD contrast 0

Bottom LCD contrast 0

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Pre-set Pitch min. rear

Now display contrast can be adjusted in the value

ﬁ eld displayed in inverse video within a range of ±20

by using the selection keys of the right touch pad.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0:00h

H-J Sandbrunner

Graubele

RX VOLT:4.9V

260 Detail program description - Basic settings

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0:00h

H-J Sandbrunner

Graubele

RX VOLT:4.9V

Simultaneously tapping the  or  selection

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the

inverse video ﬁ eld back to "0".

Display light

This line determines how long the transmitter

display's backlight illumination is to remain on after

switching the transmitter on or after the last activation

of a transmitter operating element.

Available options are "unlim(ited)", "30 s", "60 s",

"120 s" and "off".

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse

video ﬁ eld to "unlimited".

Power on/off beep

A power on/off beep for the transmitter can be

switched on ("yes") and off ("no") in this line.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will switch this option

shown in inverse video back to "yes".

Battery type

SEL

Bottom LCD contrast 0

Battery type Li-Io

Display light unlim.

Power-on/off beep yes

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

This line speciﬁ es whether transmitter power is

provided by a four-cell NiMH battery or a single-cell

LiPo battery. As a consequence of this setting, the

next line will offer a suitable voltage range for the

"Battery warning" threshold.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will switch this option

shown in inverse video back to "Lith.".

Battery warning threshold

SEL

Battery type Li-Io

Display light unlim.

Power-on/off beep yes

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Battery warning 3.60V

You can arbitrarily specify the warning threshold for

the display …

Batt. must

be re-

charged!!

… – contingent on the battery type selection in the line

above – in increments of 0.01 volt between 4.50 and

5.50 V (NimH battery) or 3.40 and 4.20 V (LiIo/LiPo

battery). Make sure that you do not enter a value

which is too low, so that you still have sufﬁ cient time

to safely land your model in the event of a battery

warning.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will switch the ﬁ eld

shown in inverse video back to its factory setting,

4.70 V (NiMh) or 3.60 V (Lith.).

Power-on warning

SEL

Battery type Li-Io

Power-on/off beep yes

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Battery warning 3.60V

Stick warning unlim

In this line you can determine how long the

transmitter should wait after the last actuation of an

operating element until the activation of an optical

and acoustic power-on warning before the transmitter

switches off automatically one minute later.

The values "unlim(ited)", "30 s" and 1, 5, 10, 20, 30

and 60 minutes are optional selections.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse

video ﬁ eld to "unlimited".

Note:

To restart the transmitter after an automatic shut-off,

ﬁ rst push the transmitter's power switch to the right

into its "OFF" position then, after about ﬁ ve seconds,

again into its "ON" position (toward the antenna).

Touch Sense

SEL

Battery type Li-Io

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Battery warning 3.60V

Stick warning unlim

Touch Sense 2

In this line you can select the touch sensitivity of the

touch pads in a range from 1 to 10. The lower this

number is, the more sensitive the touch pad will be to

taps and vice versa.

261

Detail program description - Basic settings

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the ﬁ eld

shown in inverse video back to "2".

Region

SEL

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Battery warning 3.60V

Stick warning unlim

Touch sense 2

Region EURO

The region is needed for compliance with various

regulations (FCC, ETSI, IC etc.). In France, for

example, the operation of a remote control is only

permitted within a limited frequency band. Therefore,

region MUST be changed to "France" for the

transmitter whenever it is operated in France. In

no case may the Universal/EURO mode be used in

France!

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the ﬁ eld

shown in inverse video back to "Euro".

Own phase name 1 … 10

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Stick warning unlim

Touch sense 2

Region EURO

Own phase name 1



Up to ten phase names can be freely speciﬁ ed

for one's own use. Each of these can be up to 7

characters long. The characters of the name are

assembled by selecting them from a list. In addition to

the standard names, these additional names will then

also be available in all model memory locations.

If possible, new phase name entries should begin

with the "Own phase name 1" line.

Change to the character table with a brief tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad:

!"#$%&’()

Own phase name

@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_

?+,–./0123456789:;

¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ

`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~

Now the desired characters can be selected with the

selection keys of the left touch pad. With a brief tap

on the  selection key of the right touch pad or its

center SET key, move to the next position in which a

character can be selected. A simultaneous tap on the

 or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will

place a space character at the current position.

Positioning to any character position within the entry

ﬁ eld can be done with the  keys of the right touch

pad.

A return to the previous menu page is accomplished

with a brief tap on the center ESC key of the left

touch pad.

262 Detail program description - Servo display

Servo display

Display of the servo position

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to scroll to the menu option »Servo display« menu

option in the multi-function menu:

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Mp3 player Basic settings

Servo display Servo test

Brieﬂ y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad

to open this menu option.

–100

+100

However, the visual display of current servo positions

can not only be opened by selecting this menu, but

also – directly from the transmitter's base screen

as well as nearly all other menu positions – with a

simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left touch

pad. A brief tap on the center ESC key of the left

touch pad will cause a return to the respective point

from which it was called.

The current position of each servo is displayed in a

bar diagram between -150 % and +150 % of normal

travel with consideration for the control and servo

settings, the dual-rate/expo functions, the interplay

of all active linear and curve mixers, etc. 0 %

corresponds precisely to the servo center position.

This way, you can quickly check your settings without

having to switch on the receiver. However, this does

not absolve you from ﬁ rst carefully testing all program

steps, as well as on the model, prior to the ﬁ rst

operation of the model in order to eliminate errors!

For winged models the display takes place

according to the following scheme:

Bar 1 = Throttle/brake servo

Bar 2 = Aileron or left aileron

Bar 3 = Elevator

Bar 4 = Rudder

Bar 5 = Right aileron

Bar 6 = Camber-changing ﬂ ap (left) / free

channel

Bar 7 = Right camber-changing ﬂ ap / free

channel

Bar 8 = Free channel / second elevator servo

Bar 9 = Free channel / Left FL2

Bar 10 = Free channel / Right FL2

Bar 11 = Free channel / Left AI2

Bar 12 = Free channel / Right AI2

Bar 13 = Free channel

Bar 14 = Free channel

Bar 15 = Free channel

Bar 16 = Free channel

… and for helicopter models:

Bar 1 = Pitch or roll (2) or pitch (2) servo

Bar 2 = Roll (1) servo

Bar 3 = Pitch (1) servo

Bar 4 = Tail servo (gyro)

Bar 5 = Pitch (2) servo / free channel

Bar 6 = Throttle servo or speed controller

Bar 7 = Gyro sensitivity / free channel

Bar 8 = Speed controller / free channel

Bar 9 = Free channel

Bar 10 = Free channel

Bar 11 = Free channel

Bar 12 = Free channel

Bar 13 = Free channel

Bar 14 = Free channel

Bar 15 = Free channel

Bar 16 = Free channel

Notes:

However, please note that the servo display is •

only based on the original sequence of servos.

This means that any swapping of outputs

which may have been implemented, in either

the »Transmitter output« menu or »Receiver

output« menu, is not taken into account.

Please also note that, by default, bar diagram •

tracking is opposite to the left/right movements of

a joystick.

The number of channels shown in this menu •

correspond to the 16 control channels available

in the mc-16 HoTT transmitter. However, the

number of actually usable channels depends

on the receiver type as well as the number of

servos connected to it and, therefore, may be

considerably lower under certain circumstances.

Use this display during the model programming, •

because you can immediately check all settings

on the transmitter. However, this does not absolve

you from ﬁ rst carefully testing all program steps,

as well as on the model, prior to the ﬁ rst operation

of the model in order to eliminate errors!

263

Detail program description - Servo test

Servo test

Function test of Servo 1 … 16

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad

to scroll to the menu option »Servo test« menu

option in the multi-function menu:

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Mp3 player Basic settings

Servo display Servo test

Tap brieﬂ y on the center SET key of the right touch

pad to open this menu option:

SERVOTEST

activ

off

1234567 8 9 10111213141516

: 0.5s

Any of the inputs 1 … 16 can be activated for the servo

test by selecting with the selection keys of the left or

right touch pad and then brieﬂ y tapping the SET key of

the right touch pad. As soon as you have set only one

of the inputs 1 … 16 to "active", the following notice

appears at the bottom of the display screen:

SERVOTEST

activ

off

1234567 8 9 10111213141516

: 0.5s

CLR = act./deact.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) would now start and

stop, for example, a servo test of input "1" with a

cycle time of 0.5 s.

To change cycle time, select the loop symbol at the

bottom right of the display with the selection keys of

the left or right touch pad.

SERVOTEST

activ

off

1234567 8 9 10111213141516

: 0.5s

CLR = act./deact.

Once this value ﬁ eld has been activated with a brief

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad …

SERVOTEST

activ

off

1234567 8 9 10111213141516

CLR = act./deact. : 0.5s

… the motion cycle can be changed for the value ﬁ eld

shown in inverse video within a range of 0.5 s and

3.0 s in 0.5 s increments. Brieﬂ y tap the center SET

key of the right touch pad to close time selection.

Important notice:

The shut-off of the transmitter does not

automatically end an active servo test. Therefore,

always stop a servo test manually BEFORE

SHUTTING OFF the transmitter, because the

servo test is otherwise restarted after switching

on the transmitter again.

SERVOTEST

activ

off

1234567 8 9 10111213141516

CLR = act./deact. : 2.5s

The "servo test" function, started with a simultaneous

tap on the  or  selection keys of the right

touch pad (CLEAR), automatically operates the

servos as though the corresponding transmitter

controls were being simultaneously and continuously

moved back and forth between -100 % and +100 %

during the preset time. All active mixing and coupling

functions in the respective model memory, therefore,

are effective and the servos move within the speciﬁ ed

servo paths and servo delimitations.

As soon as the servo test has been started by a

simultaneously tap on the  or  selection keys

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) a window will open:

SERVOTEST

activ

off

1234567 8 9 10111213141516

CLR = act./deact. : 2.5s

Servo test act.

Another tap simultaneously on the  or 

selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will

terminate the test.

264 Detail program description - Entry lockout

Entry lockout

Locking the multifunction menu

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to

scroll to menu option …

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Mp3 player Basic settings

Servo display Servo test

Code lock Info display

… in the multi-function menu. Tap brieﬂ y on the

center SET key of the right touch pad to open this

menu option:

CODE LOCK

Desired (new) access code: (_ )

SET

321 3 4

Access to the multifunction menu can be locked

against unauthorized use by a four-digit secret code

comprised of the numbers 1 to 4. This code lock is

entered by way of the selection keys of the left touch

pad according to the scheme shown in the display, for

example :

CODE LOCK

Desired (new) access code: (123_)

CLR

321 3 4

As soon as another tap of a left touch pad selection

key occurs after the fourth number has been entered,

the message shown below will appear in the display:

CODE LOCK

Bitte Geheimzasccess code: (1234)

CLR3

21 3 4

Memorise access

code carefully

A brief tap on the center ESC key of the left touch

pad will conﬁ rm the entered secret code and exit the

menu.

On the contrary, a brief tap on the center SET key of

the right touch pad will conﬁ rm the currently active

CLR ﬁ

eld at the bottom right of the display and thus

erase the entered digits.

Make note of the secret code and keep it safe.

Otherwise, the transmitter must be sent in to

Graupner service for decoding.

The lock becomes active the next time the transmitter

is switched on. However, the control remains ready

for operation. However, a call-up of the multi-function

menu, and thus also a model change, can no longer

be accomplished without entering the correct number

combination.

CODE LOCK

Desired (new) access code: (_ )

SET

321 3 4

A renewed attempt following an incorrect entry is only

possible after the lapse of a time-out.

CODE LOCK

Bitte Geheimzacccess code: (4321)

CLR3

21 3 4

Input error

Time lock

Deletion of the secret code

If the secret code is to be erased later on, tap twice

on the center SET key of the right touch pad right

after calling up this menu option.

CODE LOCK

Desired (new) access code: (1234)

CLR3

21 3 4

The ﬁ rst activation of the center SET key of the right

touch pad will erase the secret code (CLR):

CODE LOCK

Desired (new) access code: (_ )

SET

321 3 4

and the second activation will conﬁ rm the empty entry

ﬁ eld (SET). The message shown will appear in the

display:

265

Detail program description - Entry lockout

CODE LOCK

Bitte Geheimzaccess code: (_ )

SET3

21 3 4

Memorise access

 

none

Now exit the menu with a brief tap on the ESC key of

the left touch pad.

Leaving the menu without input of a secret code

To leave the menu opened out of curiosity or by

accident when no other key has been touched.

Therefore, the display appears as follows:

CODE LOCK

Desired (new) access code: (_ )

SET

321 3 4

Tap once on the center SET key of the right touch

pad. The following display appears:

CODE LOCK

Bitte Geheimzaccess code: (_ )

SET3

21 3 4

Memorise access

 

none

Now exit the menu with a brief tap on the ESC key of

the left touch pad.

Tip:

If you generally want to dispense with a programming

lock, that option should be removed from the

multifunction menu by way of »Suppress menus«.

This will prevent unauthorized persons from entering

a secret code "on the sly".

266 Detail program description - Info display

Info display

Transmitter ID, date, time and memory card

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to

scroll to menu option …

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Mp3 player Basic settings

Servo display Servo test

Code lock Info display

… in the multi-function list. A brief tap on the center

SET key of the right touch pad will open this menu:

RFID

Firmware Version

date

time

SD-CARD

available

1.234

1933MB

99%

ABCDEF12

2011/11/11(Fr )

11:22:33s

1943MB

Transmitter-speciﬁ c information is shown in this menu

and – insofar as necessary and beneﬁ cial

– can also

be changed.

Select the appropriate line with the  selection

keys of the left or right touch pad then brieﬂ y tap on

the center SET key of the right touch pad. The given

default value in the value ﬁ eld displayed in inverse

video can now be changed – insofar possible and

necessary – with the selection keys of the right touch

pad followed by another tap on the center SET key to

conclude the entry.

RFID

Firmware Version

date

time

SD-CARD

1.234

ABCDEF12

2011/11/11(Fr )

11:22:33s

1943MB

The RF identiﬁ cation number of the transmitter is

shown in this line. It is transmitter-speciﬁ c, is only

issued once per transmitter and cannot be changed.

During the connection process, this is sent to the

receiver, among other things, so that it is always

capable of identifying the radio signals of "its"

transmitter.

Firmware Version

RFID

Firmware Version

date

time

SD-CARD

1.234

ABCDEF12

2011/11/11(Fr )

11:22:33s

1943MB

The current version number of the transmitter

software is shown in this line.

Through a comparison of the number shown here

with the update version offered on the Internet

download page of the corresponding product under

www.graupner.de, you can determine whether a

current update of the transmitter operating system is

available.

If applicable, the version number is also required for

inquiries with the service department.

Date

RFID

Firmware Version

date

time

SD-CARD

1.234

ABCDEF12

2011/11/11(Fr )

11:22:33s

1943MB

If necessary, select this line with the selection keys

of the left or right touch pad and, as necessary,

select the month or date ﬁ eld. After activating the

respective value ﬁ eld with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad, the year, month or day can

be set with the selection keys of the right touch pad.

Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad will close the given entry. Years ranging from

2000 through 2135 are available for selection.

The abbreviated day of the week to the right outside

in brackets is automatically generated from the

respective date.

Notes:

If the transmitter is connected to a PC as •

described on page 43, the date and time can

also be set through the PC program provided for

the respective product via the Internet page at

www.graupner.de.

The date and time are protected against data •

loss due to power failure by a buffer battery for

situations like a battery change, see page 18.

267

Detail program description - Info display

Time

RFID

Firmware Version

date

time

SD-CARD

1.234

ABCDEF12

2011/11/11(Fr )

11:22:33s

1943MB

If necessary, select this line with the selection keys

of the left or right touch pad and, as applicable, the

minute ﬁ eld. After activation of the respective value

ﬁ eld by a tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad, the hour or minute can be adjusted with the

selection keys of the right touch pad. Another tap on

the center SET key of the right touch pad will close

the given entry.

In contrast, the seconds display cannot be set

directly; it can only be restarted at "00" with a brief

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Note:

If the transmitter is connected to a PC as •

described on page 43, the date and time can

also be set through the PC program provided for

the respective product via the Internet page at

www.graupner.de.

The date and time are protected against data •

loss due to power failure by a buffer battery for

situations like a battery change, see page 18.

SD card

RFID

Firmware Version

date

time

SD-CARD

1.234

ABCDEF12

2011/11/11(Fr )

11:22:33s

1943MB

In this line the memory capacity of a memory card

inserted in the transmitter, if applicable, is shown

in MB.

Depending on the memory capacity of the inserted

micro SD or micro SDHC memory card, it may take

several minutes until the correct value is shown after

switching on the transmitter.

available

Firmware Version

date

time

SD-CARD

1.234

2011/11/11(Fr )

11:22:33s

1943MB

available 1933MB

Display of the available storage space in MB.

As mentioned before, display of the available storage

space – depending on the capacity of the inserted

memory card – does not appear until some time has

passed after switching on the transmitter.

The display of the available storage space in relation

to the total memory capacity is shown in the line

below:

date

time

SD-CARD

2011/11/11(Fr )

11:22:33s

1943MB

available 1933MB

99%

As mentioned before, display of the available storage

space – depending on the capacity of the inserted

memory card – does not appear until some time has

passed after switching on the transmitter.

268 Programming examples - Winged models

mc-16 HoTT programming

Preparatory measures based on the example of a winged model

Programming models in an mc-16 HoTT …

… is easier than it may appear at ﬁ rst!

The primary prerequisite for "clean" programming,

and this applies not only to the mc-16 HoTT but is

also a principle for all programmable transmitters, is a

mechanically correct installation of all remote control

components in the model! Therefore, it should be

ensured no later than on connection of the linkages

that the servos are in their respective neutral position

and their rudder lever is also in the desired position.

Otherwise you should loosen the rudder and re-

fasten it with an offset of a few lobes. If servos are

positioned with the help of a servo tester, e.g. RC

tester, order no. 2894.12, then the "correct" positions

can be determined very easily.

The possibility of changing the neutral position of a

servo in practically every modern transmitter is only

intended for ﬁ ne-tuning. Greater deviations from "0"

can result to further asymmetries in the course of

the further signal processing in the transmitter. In the

same manner: A car with a bent chassis does not get

any straighter if only the steering wheel is trimmed to

"straight"!

An additional important point is the adjustment of

the rudder paths: This should take place through

a corresponding adjustment of the steering points,

insofar as possible. Ultimately this is far more efﬁ cient

than extensive efforts with the path adjustments in the

transmitter! In this case: Path adjustments serve ﬁ rst

and foremost for to compensate for the manufacturer-

stipulated tolerances for the servos and their ﬁ ne-

tuning, and less for the compensation of carelessness.

If two separate aileron servos are used for a

winged model, the ailerons, controlled through

the corresponding activated wing mixer – see the

following pages – can be assigned with both the ﬂ ap

function and raised with the brake ﬂ aps – however this

would make more sense in a glider or electro glider

than in a motor model.

In this case the rudder arms – starting from the neutral

position – should be tilted forward one lobe, pointing

toward the nose, set to the respective servo.

The mechanical differentiation achieved through this

asymmetric assembly contributes to the fact that the

brake effect of the elevated ailerons increases with

their deﬂ ection and, therefore, does not normally

require a greater path upward than downward.

Correspondingly, when planning to operated

separately controlled ﬂ ap servos, they should also be

integrated into a crow system. Since the brake effect

of this ﬂ ap position referred to as a "crow position"

is inﬂ uenced less by the elevated ailerons than the

downward deﬂ ection of the ﬂ aps, the rudder arms

should be installed somewhat toward the rear in

this case, tilted toward the trailing edge. As a result,

there is a greater available path for the downward

deﬂ ection. With such a combination of lowered ﬂ aps

with raised ailerons, however, the latter should only

be elevated moderately, because they have more of

a stabilizing and controlling function than a braking

function in this type of crow system.

A "tip" for seeing the brake effect in this connection:

lift the ﬂ aps and look over and under the surface from

the front. The greater the projected surface of the

protruding rudder, the greater the brake effect.

Outboard ailerons

Inboard camber-changing flaps

(Similar asymmetric installation of rudder arms can

be meaningful, e.g. for open-cowl ﬂ aps or landing

ﬂ aps, even in a motorized model.)

If a model is completed and mechanically attuned

in this respect, you can basically begin with the

programming of the transmitter. The following

examples, an attempt is made to follow the practice

of ﬁ rst describing the general basic settings and then

ﬁ ne-tuning or specializing them in the subsequent

steps. After the initial ﬂ ight and over the course of the

further ﬂ ying in of a model, it may be necessary to

occasionally adjust some of the settings. As a pilot's

experience increases, however, so does the desire for

enhancements and expansions of settings. For this

reason, the sequence of options is not always adhered

to or some options are even mentioned multiple times.

Of course, just the opposite can also be the case,

that not everyone of the described steps is relevant

for a certain model, just as some users may miss the

description of a certain step for their model …

whatever the case may be, you should consider a

logical assignment of the control mechanisms before

you begin with the model programming.

For models in which the emphasis is on the "motor",

regardless of whether it is powered by an electric or

combustion motor, there should be no problem in this

respect, because the assignment of the two joystick

units essentially lies in the four basic functions

"Power regulation (= throttle)", "Side", "Altitude" and

"Transverse"! However, in the menu …

269

Programming examples - Winged models

»Model type« (beginning on page 94)

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L L T Y PE

Brake Offset Input 1+100%

SEL

… you should determine whether you would like

the minimum throttle position in the "front" or "rear",

because "none (motor)" is entered by the program in

the creation of a model memory as a basic principle.

The difference between "none" and "idle front/rear"

is not only the effect on C1 trimming, which covers

the entire scope of joystick travel with "none" but with

"idle front/rear" only has an effect in the idle direction.

In the process, the "effective direction" of the C1

joystick is adapted accordingly, so that with a change

from "front" to "rear" or vice versa, the rotational

direction of the throttle servo or brake system do not

have to be adapted as well. In addition, with an "idle

front/rear" setting, a warning indication appears in

the display for safety reasons and issues a warning

beep, if the throttle joystick is too far in the full-throttle

direction:

#01 0:00h

Stoppuhr

Flugzeit

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0:00h

Throttle

too

high!

H-J Sandbrunner

Graubele

RX VOLT:4.9V

In any case, it will be necessary to give some thought

to "special functions".

With electro gliders, on the other hand, it is only

occasionally different. In this regard, one must ask

how the drive and brake system are actuated. Certain

solutions have shown to be practical and others have

shown to be less practical.

For example, it is certainly less practical, if you have

to release a joystick for the approach of a glider

model in order to be able to appropriately control

the spoilers or a crow position using one of the other

controls. It may be more advantageous to either

design the function of the C1 joystick to be switchable

(see Example 4, beginning on page 279) or to leave

the control of the brake system at the joystick and to

control the motor through one of the other controls or

even with a switch! Since this type of model does not

normally have a motor, and just a "start assistance"

function to either "lift" the model in the sky with full

force or, in any case, to "tow" it with "half" force by a

wind ﬁ eld, When this is also mounted in a convenient

to grip location, the motor can be switched on and

off without letting loose of one of the joysticks – even

during the landing approach.

If you cannot decide to have your Graupner service

location retroﬁ t a three-function control switch, order

no. 33000.13, for this purpose then use preferably

the single-pole, three-function switch, order no.

33001.25, and mount it to the side of the sender

opposite from the hand in which you hold the model.

In other words: If the model is started from the right

hand, the motor switch should be mounted on the left

side and vice versa.

The idea is the same for the control of ﬂ aps,

regardless of whether only ailerons or ﬂ aps covering

the entire wingspan (combinations) are raised or

lowered. A 3-position switch with a long grip generally

sufﬁ ces for control of camber ﬂ aps, preferably

mounted outboard on the throttle/brake joystick side

There it is always accessible without having to let

loose of the joystick.

If everything is now in order, you can begin with the

programming.

270 Programming examples - Winged models

Initial steps for the programming of a new model

Example: Winged model with two ailerons and – initially – without motor propulsion

In the context of initial commissioning a new

transmitter, in the selection menu …

»General basic settings« (page 256)

Battery type

Battery warning

Touch Sense

Top LCD contrast

Li-Io

Display light

Region

3.60V

EURO

unlim

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name H-J Sandbrunner

Pre-set stick mode 1

Pre-set DSC Output PPM10

Pre-set Pitch min rear

Stick warning unlim

Pre-set modulation

Own phase name

HoTT

Bottom LCD contrast 0

Own phase name 1

Voice volume

Vario volume

Touch-beeps vol.

7fr –––

SEL SEL

7fr –––

Power-on/off beep yes



… some basic information should be entered. This

serves various purposes:

The ﬁ rst three lines of this menu can be used to

individually regulate, in increments between 0 and

10, the volume of voice and signal output emitted via

the built-in loudspeakers or the transmitter's headset

connector. The fourth line of this menu is used to

record the transmitter owner's name and the lines

"Pre-set stick mode", "Pre-set modulation", "Pre-

set DSC Output" and "Pre-set Pitch min" are for the

storage of pre-set values used as defaults for new

models. These are then adopted on the activation of

a new model memory in its basic settings, but can be

changed there at any time.

The "Top / Bottom LCD Contrast" lines can be

used to adapt the contrast of respective displays to

ambient light conditions as necessary by changing

the standard pre-set "0" in a range of ±20 (as an

alternative to the line with the same name in the

»Secret mode« menu page 32).

The setting in the "Display light" line determines

how long display lighting remains illuminated after

the transmitter is switched on or after the last key

actuation.

The selection of "yes/no" in the "Power-on/off beep"

line determines whether the "recognition melody" is

to sound when the transmitter is switched off or on

again.

The "Battery type" line indicates to the transmitter

whether its power comes from a four-cell NiMH

battery or a single-cell LiPo battery and the "Battery

warning" line can be used to individually set the

threshold for the battery warning. Make sure that you

do not enter a value which is too low, so that you still

have sufﬁ cient time to safely land your model in the

event of a battery warning.

If necessary, the "Stick warning" line can be used to

determine how long the transmitter should wait after the

last activation of an operating element before issuing

a visual and acoustic stick warning, followed about a

minute later by the transmitter switching itself off.

On the other hand, the setting made in the "Touch

Sense" line is merely a personal comfort setting. The

lower this number is, the more sensitive the touch

pad will be to taps and vice versa.

In contrast, the setting in the "Region" line is anything

but a matter of taste and is determined by statutory

regulations: Therefore, when in France, only

commission the transmitter with the "France"

setting.

The ten "Own phase name" lines can be used to

create one's own phase names, which are then

valid throughout the transmitter, if none of the pre-

set phase names appear appropriate. An entry itself

is accomplished – as also for owner's name – by

switching to a second display page and selecting the

necessary characters from a character list.

This menu can be exited after completing "general

settings" with a return to the multi-function menu by

way of the center ESC key of the left touch pad.

To program a new model, now use the selection keys

of the left or right touch pad to switch to the menu …

"Model select" (page 69)

…, and use the selection keys of the left or right

touch pad to select a free model memory location.

R16

 free

00:12h

 free

Right after a tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad to conﬁ rm this selection, the type of model

to be programmed will be requested:

271

Programming examples - Winged models

Select model type ( free model memory )

Since the objective is to work with a winged model

in this section, the symbol for a winged model is to

be conﬁ rmed with a tap on the center SET key of

the right touch pad. The display switches back to the

base screen.

Notes:

Of course, you can also use the predeﬁ ned default •

"winged model" supplied with the receiver as

model memory 01 for the programming of your

ﬁ rst model.

Once the "Select model type" option has been •

opened, the process can no longer be canceled!

Even if you switch off the transmitter, this selection

must be made! After a selection has been made,

the selected model memory can only be made

"free" again by subsequent erasing.

If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover •

cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An

appropriate message will appear in the screen:

not possible now

voltage too low

Once this ﬁ rst hurdle has been taken, the binding of

the receiver built into the model to this model memory

can be done in the menu …

»Basic settings, model« (page 76 … 83)

. To this end, switch to the line "Module".

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Info

n/a

Module n/a

HoTT

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

Note:

After conﬁ rmation of the model selection in the base

screen, if you conﬁ rm the message appearing in the

screen for a few seconds …

BIND. N/A

… with a tap on the SET key of the right touch pad,

this line is accessed automatically.

In this line the binding process between model

memory and receiver is initiated, as described in

detail on page 77. Otherwise, you cannot address the

receiver.

Afterward, use the  selection key of the left or right

four-way pad to move up to the ﬁ rst line and begin

with the actual model programming in the "Model

name" line.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS,MODEL

Info

n/a



Module bind

HoTT

The "Model name" can now be entered here and,

on the next line, an informative note about the model

can be entered if necessary in the same manner, by a

brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad

to switch to the character table.

!"#$%&’()

Model name Graub

@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_

?+,–./0123456789:;

¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ

`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~

The pre-sets for "Stick mode", "Modulation" and

"DSC Output" are adopted from data stored in the

»General basic settings« menu and these should

be reviewed and changed as necessary.

In the menu …

Model type

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L L T Y PE

Brake Offset Input 1+100%

SEL

… the principle arrangement of the servos in

the model is selected and communicated to the

transmitter. The following selections are available:

"Motor at C1"

"none"•

Trimming works independently of the joystick

position and the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the

»Wing mixers« menu, beginning page 160", is

available without limitation.

The "Throttle too high" warning message, see

page 30 and/or 94, and the "Motor stop" option

are deactivated.

272 Programming examples - Winged models

"(Idle) front or rear“•

C1 trimming is affected in the front or rear and the

"Motor stop" option is activated.

If the throttle joystick is too far in the full throttle

direction when the transmitter is switched on,

this will be indicated with the warning message

"Throttle too high".

In parallel with this, the "Brake settings" sub-menu

of the »Wing mixers« menu, beginning page 160,

will only then be available if the "Motor" column of

the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, has the

entry "none" for the currently active ﬂ ight phase.

In the next two lines, the principle arrangement of the

servos in the model is selected and communicated to

the transmitter:

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L L T Y PE

Brake Offset Input 1+100%

SEL

Tail type: "normal", "V-tail", "Delt/ﬂ .wing" or "2

Sv EL 3+8"

Aileron/camber ﬂ aps:

1, 2 or 4 AI servos and 0, 1, 2 or 4 FL

servos

Since we want to actuate the brake system of the

"Brake settings" sub-menu under the »Wing mixers«

menu with the C1 joystick, we will leave the outer

right setting in the "Brake Offset" line with "Input 1".

With the "Offset value" to the left of this, you should

only place the mixer neutral point at the point where

the brake system is retracted or inactive. If, in the

process, the offset is not place completely at the end

of the control path, the rest of the path is "idle travel",

which means the mixer is not inﬂ uenced in this range

of the joystick movement.

By now at the latest, servos should be plugged into

the receiver in the standard Graupner’ish sequence:

Empfängerstromversorgung

frei oder QR2 links oder Sonderfunktion

frei oder QR2 rechts oder Sonderfunktion

Seitenruder

Querruder oder Querruder links

Höhenruder oder 1. Höhenruder

frei oder 2. Höhenruder od. Sonderfunktion

Empfängerstromversorgung

Bremsklappen- oder Motorservo

oder Regler bei Elektroantrieb

Querruder rechts oder Sonderfunkt.

Wölbklappe oder Wölbklappe links

Wölbklappe rechts od. frei oder Sonderf.

frei oder WK2 links oder Sonderfunktion

frei oder WK2 rechts oder Sonderfunktion

13 14 T 15 16 S

77 8910 11 12

Empfängerstromversorgung

frei oder Sonderfunktion

Telemetrieanschluss

Empfängerstromversorgung

frei oder Sonderfunktion

Anschluss für SUMO / SUMI-Verbindung

Empfängerstromversorgung

Comments:

If a V-tail unit should move incorrectly either "high/•

low" or "left/right", please observe the information

in the table on page 62 in the right column. The

same process applies for the ailerons and ﬂ aps.

The settings described in the following are based •

on a model with "normal" tail unit and "none

(motor)". The settings are adopted for models

with a V-tail with practically no changes at all.

However, the transfer of this information is not so

simple for delta/ﬂ ying-wing models. Therefore, a

special programming example for this model type

is provided on page 301.

In the menu …

»Servo adjustment« (page 102)

0% 100%Servo 1

Servo 2

Servo 3

Servo 4

Servo 5

Rev cent.

100%

150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

… servos can now be adapted for appropriate

"direction of rotation", "neutral position", "travel"

and "limitation" to the requirements of the model.

In this sense, all settings which serve to compensate

servos and make minor adaptations to the model are

"necessary".

Notes:

The maximum possible throw of a Graupner servo •

is 150 % per side, based on both mechanical and

electrical reasons. For example, if the the sum of

the values of the columns "Center" and "Servo

travel" exceed this limit, the respective servo can

no longer follow the control commands starting

from this point. Therefore, please bear in mind that

mixers and settings in the »Dual Rate / EXPO«

menu also have an inﬂ uence on servo travel.

The settings options provided in this menu •

for asymmetric servo travel do NOT serve for

achieving differentiations for ailerons and/or ﬂ aps.

There are options better suited for this purpose in

the »Wing mixers« menu.

In the last column, "- limit +", the basic settings of

150 % can, and perhaps should be, signiﬁ cantly

reduced.

273

Programming examples - Winged models

The values entered in this position act as a quasi

"limiter", whereby the setting is actually for which

point of travel the respective servo may not exceed,

so that it does not start up mechanically and thus

unnecessarily draw current. In this case it is the end

of available mechanical play on the servo, rudder

and/or steering which is decisive for the value to be

set.

An example of this would be the selection of a

model with cruciform tail, with which the rudder

moves in a wedge-shaped cutout of the elevator. In

order to prevent the rudder on the elevator starting

up and possibly blocking it, the travel is normally

mechanically adjusted (at the linkage) so that

the rudder does not start with the full throw of the

joystick. As long as the rudder is only controlled

with the corresponding joystick, there will not be

any further problems with this. But at the moment,

when in addition to the normal rudder signal a mixer

also inﬂ uences the rudder, such as an "aileron 2 

4 rudder" mixer (aileron to rudder), it is possible that

the two signals can sum to an excessive extent.

A correctly set limit of travel intercedes precisely at

this point and thus reliably prevents the mechanical

starting of the rudder. The limit of travel should,

however, not be too small, so that the rudder throw is

permanently and excessively limited.

Of course, the travel on both sides could, of course,

also be reduced to the that a start-up would not even

occur with an addition of the maximum values. With

this method, however, the prevention of an actually

occurring event would result in a permanent reduction

of the normal rudder throw.

The menu …

»Stick mode« (page 104)

global

Channel 1

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

0.0s

In addition to the generally interesting adjustment of

the increments in the column "Tr. step" (number of

trim increments for each "trim wheel click") for digital

trimming – separate adjustments for each of the four

trim wheels – in the case of the (later) programming

of ﬂ ight phases in the second column of this menu

you can select whether the trimming of transverse,

altitude and side should operate "globally" in equal

measure over all ﬂ ight phases or separately in each

(ﬂ ight) "phase".

The "Time" column, on the other hand, is not of

interest for this initial programming.

The settings made up to this point are sufﬁ cient

to permit basic ﬂ ight of winged and motorized

models – though the latter does require a correctly

set idle joystick direction in the "Motor on C1" line

of the »Model type« menu. However, the "ﬁ ne-

tuning" is still missing. The ﬁ ne-tuning certainly adds

to the enjoyment of ﬂ ying over the course of time.

Therefore, if you can already ﬂ y your model safely,

you should delve into the menu…

»Wing mixers« (page 160 … 175)

… where various options are available, depending on

the speciﬁ cations made in the »Model type« menu,

page 94.

Since this section deals with a model having only 2

servos in the wings, the Multi-ﬂ ap menu beginning on

page 170 is not shown.

Aileron differential

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0%0%

–––

rudder



Therefore, we begin with the "Brake settings" sub-

menu:

off

BRAKE SETTINGS

If this display appears, you model is equipped with

a motor, contrary to the assumption of this section,

and therefore you have selected "front/rear" instead

of "none" in the line "Motor on C1" of the »Model

type« menu, page 94. Therefore, change this setting

temporarily or change the "yes" entry in the "Motor"

column of the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, to

"no" for the currently active ﬂ ight phase – Phase 1 in

this case.

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Name Timer Sw.time

Motor

0.1s

yes 0.1s

–



…

274 Programming examples - Winged models

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

AILE

WK2

Diff. reduct

After this statement about mutual dependencies,

back to the topic:

If the ailerons are to be elevated for braking, an

appropriate value is entered into the "Crow" line after

activating the "AILE" column's value ﬁ eld. In addition,

a value should always be entered in the line below

it, "Diff.Reduct" (differentiation reduction), which

corresponds to the value you entered or would like to

enter on the ﬁ rst page of the »Wing mixers« menu in

the line "Aile.diff." (see ﬁ gure above)! With this entry,

on actuation of the brake joystick, the set aileron

differentiation is hidden again proportionally in order

to increase the downward the throw of the raised

ailerons and thus signiﬁ cantly improve its effect in the

braking phase.

A setting of the " Elevat. curve" mixer is then only

necessary if the ﬂ ight speed of the model changes

too dramatically on actuation of the brake system. In

any case, you should try out the setting at a sufﬁ cient

and readjust, if necessary, whereby you should focus

less on the ﬂ ight position than on maintaining the

"normal" ﬂ ight speed of the model. Otherwise there

is the risk that the model plunges when engaging

the brake system, because it became too slow in the

meantime:

Brake

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +100%

–25%

H+

–

100

O U T P U T

–25%

Elevator

Normal

After exiting the "Brake settings", the "Aileron

differentiation can be set:

This serves to eliminate the negative torque. The

downward deﬂ ected aileron normally generates

a higher level of resistance during the ﬂ ight than

when deﬂ ected upward the same distance, whereby

the model is pulled to the "wrong" side. In order to

prevent this, with the input of a differentiation of the

travel of the respective servo deﬂ ected downward is

reduced accordingly. A value between 20 and 40 %,

in this case, seldom arises, however, the "correct"

setting must be sought.

The option "AI 2  4 RU" (aileron  rudder)

also serves a similar purpose, as well as for the

comfortable control of a model. A value of about

50 % is a practical initial value. However, this function

should be made switchable with the assignment of

a switch if you ever have aerobatic ﬂ ight ambitions.

(The author, for example, switches off this mixer

"automatically" when switching to the "Speed" ﬂ ight

phase, in which he assigns both options to the same

switch accordingly.)

The last option in the »Wing mixers« menu, the

"El 3  6 Fl" mixer, is not yet of interest at the

moment.

If the model-speciﬁ c settings were made thus far,

the initial start can be considered. If course, at ﬁ rst

you should perform a "dry run", meaning you should

carefully check all the settings once again on the

ground. Incorrect programming can damage more

than just the model! In case of doubt, ask the advice

of an experienced model pilot.

If you should ﬁ nd during the testing that one or

multiple settings must be made for the adjustment of

the rudder effects to your control habits, the control

throws are too long or short on the whole, you should

adjust this in the …

»Dual Rate / Expo« (page 120)

… to your own requirements and habits.

"Dual Rate" establishes a relationship between

joystick travel and control travel, see page 120:

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

––––––

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

On the other hand, if the maximum throws are OK

and only the reactions around the center position

are to strong for more sensitive controls, then the

"exponential" functions comes (additionally) into play:

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Normal

If a switch is also assigned, switching can even take

place between two dual-rate/expo settings during the

ﬂ ight.

275

Programming examples - Winged models

This is similar for the option …

»Channel 1 curve« (page 128)

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

–

100

O U T P U T

With this option, one or multiple points of the control

curve of the throttle/brake joystick can be inﬂ uenced

in such a way that a pleasant or even purposeful

behavior is guaranteed.

An example of this would be the "dead" travel of

spoilers. The ﬂ aps ﬁ rst pass through this after a

certain "idle travel" of the brake joystick from the

wing. With a corresponding "bending" of the curve,

the "dead' travel is covered more quickly. The

spoilers come out from the wing earlier and then

the remaining travel can be controlled with greater

sensitivity. (This also applies for the control of a motor

in the same manner, which can be controlled through

C1 as an alternative.)

Finally, the receiver's behavior in the event of a failure

should certainly be established in the menu…

»Fail Safe« (page 208)

FAIL SAFE

Pos

hold

1234567 8 9 10111213141516

DELAY : 0.25s STO

… because "doing nothing" is the worst thing which

can be done for a winged model.

In the transmitter's home position, "Hold" is speciﬁ ed

and "Hold" means that the receiver continuously

sends the last correctly recognized control impulse to

the servos in the model. In the best case scenario the

model ﬂ ies straight ahead for an indeﬁ nite amount of

time and then hopefully "lands" somewhere without

causing signiﬁ cant damage! However, if something

like this happens in the wrong place at the wrong

time, the model may become uncontrollable and

"tear" across the ﬂ ight ﬁ eld completely out of control,

putting the pilot and/or spectators at risk. Therefore,

it would obviously be beneﬁ cial to program the the

function "Motor off" at the very least, in order to

prevent such risks.

With electro gliders, on the other hand, the fail-safe

setting "motor off" can also be used, for example, for

outlanding, to reliably stop the motor or its propeller

by immediately switching off the transmitter after the

landing.

The author usually prefers a "braking ﬁ nish" within

eyeshot to ﬂ oating off "somewhere else".

276 Programming examples - Winged models

Integration of an electric drive into the model programming

An electric drive can be controlled in different ways:

The simplest method to integrate one such drive into

the model programming is with the use of a throttle/

brake joystick (C1). However, since this is already

speciﬁ ed for the brake system in the course of the

model programming described above, either the

switchable solution described beginning on page 279

or even the use of an alternative control is possible.

As a suitable alternative, one of the two 3-position

switches would be better than one of the

proportionals controls. However, either one of the two

side proportional rotary controls are also well suited

to activation of a motor without having to let go of the

joystick. An alternative would also be one of the two-

stage switches. Basically, whatever switch is used

should be located where it is within convenient reach.

Before we turn to the individual examples, it is

important must be noted that all inputs in the

»Control adjust« menu can be selectively

programmed as ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c ("PH" in the

"Type" column) or model memory speciﬁ c ("GL" in the

"Type" column)!

However, since the drive should usually be

available depending on the current ﬂ ight phase,

we recommend leaving the standard default "GL"

("global") in the "Type" column which your are using.

0% +100%I5

Typ SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

offset

Normal

A common option in the following examples 1 … 5,

the automatic tracking of the elevator trimming in

the power ﬂ ight, should also be mentioned at the

beginning of this section:

If it becomes apparent after the initial power ﬂ ights

that the model must be continuously corrected with

the elevator while the motor is switched on, this

situation can be corrected by setting a free mixer and

adjusting it accordingly. For this purpose, switch to

the menu …

»Free mixers«

… and program one of the linear mixers, Linear MIX

1 … 8, or even one of the curve mixers, Curve MIX 9

… 12, from "channel controlling the motor" according

to "Ele", for example:

LinearMIX 1

Typ

from – Begr. +

––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

––––

On its second screen page, the required – usually

low – correction value is entered:

Mix input Offset

–

100

O U T P U T

Linear MIX 1

+4%

SYM ASY SET

STO

+4%

Note:

The adjustment of a curve mixer is described in

detail in the section »Channel 1 curve« starting on

page 128.

Example 1

Proportional control usage

If one of these controls is used, the connection is very

simple. Only the motor controller (speed control) has

to be connected to a free servo connection 5 … 16 of

the receiver.

Bear in mind that, depending on the model type and

number of aileron and ﬂ ap servos, the output 2 + 5 or

6 + 7 are already linked.

Therefore connect your speed controller to the next

free input and assign the selected input – for example,

"Inp. 8" – to one of the transmitter's proportional

controls, for example the left-side proportional rotary

control. This is done in the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 108)

Select the desired line with the  selection keys

of the left or right touch pad. A tap on the the center

SET key of the right touch pad will activate "Switch

and control assignment". Now move the selected

proportional control. After a short time, an entry, e.g.

"Cn2", will appear in the inverse video ﬁ eld.

277

Programming examples - Winged models

one column to the right, to the "- time +" column then

move the selected control close to "full throttle" so the

marker frame is only placed around one value ﬁ eld.

Now enter a value of at least 1 s …

0% +100%I5

Typ SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0

fr ---

Cn2

---

offset

Normal

1.0

… with which a movement of the proportional control

in the "ON" on direction which is too fast is processes

move gently, and you can check immediately this by

switching to the »Servo display«.

Note:

No delay is entered on the "OFF" side, so that the

drive can be switched off instantly at any time. This

does not additionally stress the drive, because it

merely "runs down".

The adjustment of the appropriate control travel and

directions for the motor control (speed control) is

normally carried out in the »Control adjust« menu

in the "- travel +" column. Alternatively, these settings

can also be made in the menu …

»Servo adjustment« (page 102)

+100% 100%Servo 4

Servo 5

Servo 6

Servo 7

Servo 8

Rev cent.

100%

150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

+100% 100%

100%

150% 150%

+100% 100%

100%

150% 150%

+100% 100%

100%

150% 150%

+100% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% +100%I5

Typ SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

Cn2

---

offset

Normal

However, since propulsion must usually be available,

independent of the current ﬂ ight phase, leave the

default value "GL" in the "Typ" column – as already

mentioned earlier in this section.

If applicable, for necessary adjustment of appropriate

control travel for the motor control (speed control),

use one of the arrow keys to switch to the right into

the "- travel +" column.

0% +100%I5

Typ SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

Cn2

---

offset

Normal

This ﬁ elds of this column can be use to set the travel

required, even asymmetric if necessary.

A simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left

touch pad now will switch over to the »Servo

display« where the selected proportional control

can be activated to watch the the bars for channel 8

"wander" from one side to the other and back.

However, if the proportional control is moved

too fast – in practice – the resulting sudden motor

acceleration can brieﬂ y strain the entire drive train

(too much). In this case, be sure to enter a value in

the "- time +" column to counteract such a condition.

Therefore, using one of the selection keys, switch

Example 2

2-way switch usage

This variant realizes a purely ON/OFF function.

On the receiver side, either a simple electronic

switch or – if a gentle motor start-up, for example, is

desired – an appropriate motor control (speed control)

is required.

With the exception of assigning a different

operating element, the settings required for this

are essentially the same as those described under

Example 1. Therefore, the same comments and

recommendations also apply.

Apart from the inﬁ nitely variable motor control under

Example 1 and the two-stage motor control in this

example, the selection of the two transmitter control

types only has an effect on the type of timer control,

see page 284.

Only the nature of the assignment and representation

of the selected switch in the display of the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 108)

As in example 1, change over to the line of a free

input, activate the "Switch and control assignment" in

the second column, page 56, then move the selected

switch, in this case for example switch 2, from the

desired motor OFF position in the direction of motor

ON.

0% +100%I5

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

offset

Normal

---

Here again – as already mentioned earlier in this

section – leave the standard default "GL" in the "Typ"

column.

278 Programming examples - Winged models

The setting of the appropriate control travel for the

motor control (speed control) is made in the "- Travel

+" column. If the motor should up gently with the use

of a motor control (speed control), an appropriate

delay time can be set – as described in Example 1 – in

the "- time +" column:

0% +100%I5

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0

fr ---

---

offset

Normal

--- 1.1

All other settings – as already mentioned earlier in

the example – are made analogous to Example 1.

Therefore, the same comments and recommendations

also apply.

Note:

No delay is entered on the "OFF" side, so that the

drive can be switched off instantly at any time. This

does not additionally stress the drive, because it

merely "runs down".

Example 3

3-way switch usage

This variant realizes a three-stage speed setting,

such as Motor OFF, "half" and full power.

A corresponding motor control (speed control) is

required on the receiver side.

The required settings are basically the same as those

described under Example 1 and 2. Therefore, the

same comments and recommendations also apply.

Apart from the inﬁ nitely variable motor control under

Example 1 and the three-stage motor control in this

example, the selection of the operating element only

has an effect on the type of clock control, see page

284, and the nature of the assignment.

Here again – as already mentioned earlier in this

section – leave the standard default "GL" in the "Typ"

column.

Put the desired 3-way switch into its middle position

then activate "Switch and control assignment" above

the column with the switch symbol, as described on

page 56. Now put the selected 3-way switch forward,

out of its middle position:

0% +100%I5

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

offset

Normal

---

Now put the activated switch from its forward position

back into its middle position.

Now move the marker frame to the left and into the

column above the column now labeled with a second

switch symbol instead of the previous label SEL.

Reactivate "Switch and control assignment" for this

column then move the 3-way switch out of its middle

position toward the rear:

0% +100%I5

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

offset

Normal

The setting of the appropriate control travel for the

motor control (speed control) is made in the "- travel

+" column. The motor should rev up gently with a

motor control (speed control), to this end a suitable

delay time can be set – as described in examples 1

and 2 – in the "- time +" column:

All other settings–as already mentioned

earlier in the example–are made analogous to

Example 1. Therefore, the same comments and

recommendations also apply.

Note:

By shifting the neutral position and subsequent

adjustment of travel, the "half throttle position" can be

inﬂ uenced in the »Control adjust« menu by reducing

travel from the offset value on the side to which the

neutral point has been shifted and adding it to the

other side. For example, an offset value of -20 %

results in +80 % on the minus side of the travel setting

and +120 % on the plus side, and vice versa.

279

Programming examples - Winged models

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1

-90%

SEL

Thr. min front

This idle path ensures that all brake settings remain

at "neutral", even with minor deviations from the

limit of the brake ﬂ ap control. At the same time,

the effective control path is automatically spread to

100 %.

For this reason, in the next step it must be ensured

that the inﬂ uence of the C1 joystick on the motor can

be inﬂ uenced. For this purpose, switch to the menu

…

»Phase settings« (page 142)

... and assign a meaningful name, such as "Normal",

from the list for "Phase 1" after activation of the

selection ﬁ eld in the "Name" column. The asterisk

in the second column indicates which phase is

currently active. As long as no phase switch has

been assigned, this is always Phase 1. "Phase 2"

can be given, appropriate to the example, the name

«Landing».

In the "Ph.Tim" column you can assign a so-called

ﬂ ight phase timer for the measurement of the motor

running time and/or the gliding times as necessary

for each phase. You could, for example, assign one

of the "Timers 1 … 3" to the "Normal" ﬂ ight phase in

order to measure the total motor runtime via the C1

joystick:

»Model type« (beginning page 94)

Here you ﬁ rst specify in the "motor" line whether the

throttle minimum position (= Motor "OFF" position)

should be at the "front" or "rear" - as already

discussed: In the following programming example,

"Motor OFF" and "Brake OFF" are combined at "front":

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1+100%

SEL

Thr. min front

Note:

With the selection of "Throttle min front/rear" the

trimming will then only have an effect in the "idle"

direction of the motor and is not the same as with the

"none" entry, having the same effect at every position

of the C1 joystick. Since the C1 trimming is not

normally used with electric drives, however, this has

no further relevance.

You adjust the "according to your model, in this case

"normal".

In the "Aileron/ﬂ aps" line you enter the correct

number of aileron and ﬂ ap servos – in this example

"2 AIL".

In the last line you leave the standard entries for the

selection of "Brake retracted = front". On the other

hand, if the preference is for "Brake retracted = rear",

select the "Brake offset" line and deﬁ ne the offset

point – as described on page 95 – as "rear". In the

process, if the offset point is not placed completely

at the end of the control travel, the remainder of the

travel is "idle" up to this limit.

Control E-motor and crow alternately with C1 joystick

Example 4

Before we discuss the programming of this fourth

example or turn the to the expansion of the previously

described basic programming, a few words should be

said about the position of the throttle/brake joystick

with "Motor OFF" or "Brake OFF". Normally the C1

control joystick is moved forward for the throttle

control and backward for the extension of the brake.

However, if for this type of "traditional" assignment,

for example, a switchover of the brake system is to

take place for the "Motor OFF" condition (joystick

"back") then a switchover to "full brake" would take

place immediately after the pre-set switchover time

speciﬁ ed in the »Phase settings« menu, and the

opposite will take place when "brakes retracted" is

switched over to propulsion causing the motor to

switch over to "full power" within this time range …

A "glider pilot" can make the best of this

"Emergency" – normally with "brake retracted =

front" – by switching to motor "ON" only if necessary

so that power decreases, if applicable (and hopefully

not forgetting to push the C1 joystick "forward" again

when switching back). A typical "motor pilot", on the

other hand, operates in the opposite manner, only

switching to the brake if necessary, etc... You can

also combine the "Zero point" of both systems to

avoid confusion, whereby a "glider pilot" would tend

prefer the "front" and a "motor pilot", on the other

hand", would likely prefer the "rear".

Whichever the case may be, the mc-16 HoTT

transmitter permits both variants. In the following text,

however, the combination of the two "OFF" positions

to "front" is assumed. However, if you have a different

preference, it is not a problem: The only difference

from the described version lies in the logical selection

of "Throttle min rear/front" and, if applicable, of a

corresponding brake offset in the menu …

280 Programming examples - Winged models

the phase for the front switch position "normal" and

"landing" for the rear position (or vice versa):

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

combi

ABDEF

2Landing

These phase names then appear in all ﬂ ight-phase

dependent menus and, of course, also in the base

screen of the transmitter.

Now switch to the «Landing» ﬂ ight phase and in the

"Crow" line of the sub-menu …

»Brake settings« (page 172)

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Landing

Crow

WK2

Diff. reduct.

… of the »Wing mixers« menu, set the desired

throw of the ailerons by actuation of the C1 joystick

("brake") upward. Then, if applicable, switch to the

"FL" column in order to specify the desired through

of the ﬂ aps with C1 actuation downward (hidden in

the ﬁ gure above). This ﬂ ap position is referred to as

"Crow position" or "Butterﬂ y; see also page 172.

In the line "Diff. reduct." (differentiation reduction),

enter a value which corresponds to the value entered

or want to enter on the ﬁ rst page of the »Wing

mixers« menu in the "Aile.diff." line.

With the "Elevat curve" mixer the normally occurring

"Upward tilting" of the model on the raising of the

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Name Timer Sw.time

Motor

yes 1.1s

no 1.1s

yes 0.1s

–



Normal Clk1

Landing

Then you must assigned these two ﬂ ight phases

to a switch with which you can switch between the

two ﬂ ight phases during the ﬂ ight. In this case, a

single switch is sufﬁ cient. It should be easy to reach,

however, so that you can still switch between "motor"

and "brake" during a landing approach, for example,

without having to release a joystick.

The assignment of the selected switch takes place in

the menu …

»Phase assignment« (page 148)

Select the switch symbol under "C" with one of the

selection keys. Following a brief tap on the center

SET key of the right touch pad, actuate the desired

switch, e.g "2".

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

1 Normal

combi

ABDEF

Both switch positions, in other words ON (I) and

OFF ( ), are initially assigned at the bottom right of

the display to phase «1 Normal». Select this value

ﬁ eld with one of the selection keys then activate the

phase selection list that was set up in the »Phase

settings« menu with a brief tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad. For example, you name

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Name Timer Sw.time

Motor

yes 0.1s

–



Normal Clk1

Landing

Then the timer is controlled through a corresponding

control switch to be deﬁ ned on the C1 joystick. As

soon as you switch to the "Landing" ﬂ ight phase, this

ﬂ ight phase timer is automatically stopped and hidden

in the base screen. More about this can be found on

page 156.

Now move the marker frame over the "Ph.Tim"

column to the "Motor" column to the right. Here you

can decide with "yes/no" in which phase the motor is

controlled by the throttle/brake joystick and the brake

system to be adjusted in the "Brake settings" sub-

menu of the »Wing mixers« menu should be shut off

(= "yes") and vice versa (= "no"):

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Name Timer Sw.time

Motor

yes 0.1s

no 0.1s

yes 0.1s

–



Normal Clk1

Landing

Now move the marker frame once more to the

right and enter an appropriate switching time after

activation of the value ﬁ eld of the "Sw.Time" column;

for example:

281

Programming examples - Winged models

ailerons can be automatically suppressed. The

suitable correction values for the respective value

must be tested out through ﬂ ight. Set this mixer so

that the ﬂ ight speed of the model does not change too

much with the brake system extended in comparison

with the "normal" ﬂ ight speed. Otherwise, there is

the risk, among other things, that the model plunges

when the brake system is retracted, e.g. for the

extension of a landing approach which is too short.

If everything is correctly set so far, only the motor is

controlled with the C1 joystick in the "Normal" ﬂ ight

phase, whereas this should be switched off in the

ﬂ ight phase "landing" (Servo 1 in »Servo display«

independent of "Throttle min front/rear" to -100 %

or adequately for a servo travel setting deviating by

100 %, if necessary). In this ﬂ ight phase the C1 joystick

then only controls the raising of the ailerons and, if

applicable, the lowering of the ﬂ aps with the neutral

point in the C1 control position selected per offset.

282 Programming examples - Winged models

C1 joystick switchable between E-motor and spoiler

Example 5

If, contrary to the assumptions of the preceding

Example 4, the model has additional spoilers or only

spoilers, they can be incorporated into the control of

the model by means of the following programming.

Do this by programming the menus »Model type«,

»Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« in

the same manner as described under Example 4.

The settings described there in the "Brake settings"

sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu are only

then relevant if an additional crow system is to be

employed in parallel with the spoilers.

With the settings described under Example 4, the

control of the E-motor and, if applicable, that of a

crow system will function as usual. Only the control

of a spoiler connected to Output 8, for example, must

additionally be programmed. For this purpose, switch

to the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 108)

… and switch into the «normal» ﬂ ight phase.

Now use the selection keys to switch to the left into

the "Typ" column to set the parameter in this line, e.g.

"I8" from "GL(obal)" to "PH(ase)", so that the settings

too follow become effective on a ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c

basis.

0% +100%I5

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

offset

Normal

SEL

fr ---

Afterward, switch to the "Offset" column and,

following activation of the value ﬁ eld with a brief

tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, change

the offset value for this Input 8 value ﬁ eld now

displayed in inverse video until the spoilers are again

"retracted", e.g.:

0% +100%I5

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

-95% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

offset

Normal

SEL

fr ---

Conﬁ rm this setting with a brief tap on the center

ESC key of the left key pad or the center SET key

of the right touch pad then switch to the left into the

column above SEL. Now switch to the ﬂ ight phase

«Landing» then brieﬂ y tap on the center SET key of

the right touch pad. The display shows the window …

0% +100%I5

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

offset

Landing

SEL

fr --- 0%

Move desired

control adj.

Now move the C1 joystick As soon as this is

recognized, "Cn1" will appear in the display instead

of "fr":

0% +100%I5

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

offset

Landing

SEL

Cn1 --- 0%

Leave the offset value in this ﬂ ight phase

at "0 %". It may be necessary to change the leading

symbol of the travel setting to reverse the control

direction. Do this by switching the travel setting from

+100 % to -100 % in the "travel" column.

Now we are practically ﬁ nished. Check the

programming in the »Servo display« menu, which

you can reach from the base screen of the transmitter

as well as nearly every other menu position with a

simultaneous tap on  keys of the left touch pad.

You will discover that "Servo 1" (motor control) is

controlled in the "Normal" phase and in the "landing"

phase only the spoiler is controlled at "Servo 8" and,

if applicable the aileron and ﬂ ap servos – just as we

intended.

283

For your notes

284 Programming examples - Timer conﬁ rmation with control or switch

SEL

–––

CONTROL SWITCH

Cnt. 1

free

–85%

STO

–––

SEL

free

In order to assign the control switch you just crated to

the desired timer, switch to the menu …

»Timers (in general)« (page 152 … 154)

… and select the line "Top" with the selection keys.

This is the standard line assigned to the stopwatch.

In this line, move the marker frame over the "Timer"

column to the right, to the column above the switch

symbol, using the appropriate selection key of the left

or right touch pad. Now tap twice on the center SET

key of the right touch pad: The ﬁ rst tap will activate

the switch assignment, the second tap will call up the

list of "expanded switches":

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

–––12:34h

1:23h

0:00

–––

Alarm

Timer

Top :Stoppuhr

Centr.Mitte :Flugzeit

Movwünschten Schalter

to die EIN Position

(erw. Schalter: SET)

Control/Logic/fix switch

C2 C4 C5 C6

C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2

C3C1

Now select the previously programmed control

switch, C1 in the example, and assign it to the timer

with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad:

Modeltime

Batt. time

Timer

–––12:34h

1:23h

0:00

0s –––

AlarmTimer

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

The timer in the base screen now starts with

movement of the C1 joystick toward full throttle

and stops if you pull the C1 joystick back over the

switching point.

Example 1 of the preceding pages

If you have decided to continue with the model

programming described on the previous pages in

Example 1 on page 276, ﬁ rst switch to the menu …

»Control switch« (page 135)

… and select the line of a control switch which has

not been assigned yet with the selection keys. After

activation of the control assignment with a brief tap

on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the

following window will appear:

SEL

–––

CONTROL SWITCH

Geb. 1

STO

–––

SEL

frei

free

frei Move desired

control adj.

Now simply move the respective proportional control,

e.g. the left side proportional rotary control from

its motor "OFF" position toward the motor "ON"

direction.

Thereafter, change to the column above STO by

using the appropriate selection key, move the

selected control near its motor "OFF" position then

Examples 4 and 5 of the preceding pages

If model programming is to be continued for

Example 4, page 279 or Example 5, page 282

as described on previous pages or, completely

independent of this example programming, the

C1 joystick (throttle/brake joystick) is to be used for

power regulation, then a control switch can be used

to automatically start and stop the stopwatch. For this

purpose, ﬁ rst switch to the menu …

»Control switch« (page 135)

… and select the line of a control switch which has

not been assigned yet with the selection keys. After

activation of the control assignment with a brief tap

on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the

following window will appear:

SEL

–––

CONTROL SWITCH

Geb. 1

STO

–––

SEL

frei

free

frei Move desired

control adj.

Now simply move the C1 joystick (throttle/brake

joystick) from the motor "OFF" position in the motor

"ON" direction.

Thereafter, change to the column above STO by

using the appropriate selection key, move the C1

joystick close to its motor "OFF" position then set

the switch-point at the selected position with a brief

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

The switch's state will be displayed at the right of the

control number, e.g.:

Timer conﬁ rmation with control or switch

285

Programming examples - Timer conﬁ rmation with control or switch

set the switch-point at the selected position with a

brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

The switch status is shown to the right of the control

number:

SEL

–––

CONTROL SWITCH

Slide2

free

–85%

STO

–––

SEL

free

Note:

Now place the switching point; but do not put it at the

limit position of the control, because safe switching is

not assured when doing so.

Ct1 used in the example here should be "closed"

in the "full throttle" direction and "open" below the

switching point.

Now switch to the menu …

»Timers (in general)« (page 152 … 154)

… and select the line "Top"with the selection keys.

This is the standard line assigned to the stopwatch.

In this line, move the marker frame over the "Timer"

column to the right, to the column above the switch

symbol, using the appropriate selection key of the left

or right touch pad. Now tap twice on the center SET

key of the right touch: The ﬁ rst tap will activate the

switch assignment, the second tap will call up the list

of "expanded switches":

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

–––12:34h

1:23h

0:00

–––

AlarmTimer

Top :Stoppuhr

Centr.Mitte :Flugzeit

Movwünschten Schalter

to die EIN Position

(erw. Schalter: SET)

Control/Logic/fix switch

C2 C4 C5 C6

C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2

C3C1

Now select the previously programmed control switch

"C1" then tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad.

Modeltime

Batt. time

Timer

–––12:34h

1:23h

0:00

0s –––

Alarm

Timer

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

The stopwatch in the basic display now starts with

movement of the proportional rotary control toward

full throttle and stops if it is turned back again over

the switch-point.

Examples 2 and 3 of the preceding pages

If you control your motor with a switch, on the other

hand, you do not need the described control switch

described above. It is completely sufﬁ cient if you

assign the same switch to the timer, so that it also

begins to run when you switch on the motor.

Tip:

If the motor run time for an E-model is limited by the

battery capacity, you can have the stopwatch count

down. Enter the maximum permissible motor run time

in the "Timer" column, e.g. "5 min", and shortly before

expiration of permissible time, e.g. "30 s" before,

have the transmitter issue an acoustic warning signal:

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

–––12:34h

1:23h

5:00

0:00

30s

0s –––

AlarmTimer

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

286 Programming examples - Parallel operating servos

Parallel operating servos

A second servo running in parallel is often required,

such as when brake ﬂ aps or spoilers installed in the

wings or the left and right elevator or a double ﬁ n

should be actuated by a servo or a large rudder ﬂ ap

should be simultaneously controlled by two servos

due to high throw forces.

In principle, this task could also be solved by

connecting the servos together on the model side

using V-cable. However, the disadvantage here is

that servos combined in this manner can no longer

be adjusted individually and separately from the

transmitter – thus negating the potential for ﬁ nely

tuning respective servos to one another with a

computerized remote control system. A similar

situation is given for the so-called "Channel mapping"

feature of the »Telemetry« menu. Here too there are

certain limitations involved when compared to the

transmitter's adjustment possibilities.

The ﬁ rst example, therefore, describes the coupling

of two brake or spoiler servos, the second describes

the operation of two or more throttle servos and the

third describes the coupling of two elevator servos.

The "two rudder servos" example on the next page

describes the coupling of two rudder servos, whereas

Variant 1 is preferable for applications of this type

because the use of a cross-mixer« is quicker and

easier to program. In contrast, the second variant,

also described on the next page, additionally permits

asymmetric and/or non-linear curves through use of

the »Free mixer« menu.

Two brake or spoiler servos

In a situation where there is one installed servo for

operation of brake ﬂ aps and/or spoilers in each wing

half then the pre-set linear control characteristics

for the »Channel 1 curve« menu should remain

unchanged.

Then connect one of the two servos to Output 1,

provided for this purpose by standard, and the

second to an arbitrary free receiver connection

5 … 16, such as Output "8". Subsequently switch

to the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 108)

… and, using the selection keys, assign "Control 1" in

the Input 8 line :

0% +100%I5

Typ SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

Cn1

---

offset

Normal

Since the spoiler on Output 1 can normally only be

operated on a ﬂ ight-phase dependent basis, it is

strongly recommended that the "Typ" column for the

input used is left at its "GL" default setting.

Also the remaining values should be left at their

default settings. If necessary, carry out the required

servo travel adjustments in the »Servo adjustment«

menu. There you can also adjust the travel of servo

1 and 8 to one another, if necessary.

Multiple-motor aircraft

As described above, a model can also be operated

with two or more motors.

The ﬁ rst throttle servo and/or the ﬁ rst motor control

is connected as usual to (receiver) Output 1 and

each additional throttle servo and/or each additional

motor control is connected to a free (receiver) Output

6 … 12. The inputs of respective assigned control

channels are then each assigned to Control 1; for

example :

0% +100%I9

I10

I11

I12

Typ SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

Cn1

---

offset

Normal

Cn1

Important notice:

Since the motor control unit should be available

regardless of a currently active ﬂ ight phase, make

sure to leave the standard default "GL" in the "Type"

column.

Two elevator servos

Two elevator servos should be switched in parallel.

According to the receiver assignment plan, see

page 61, the receiver output 8 is intended for the

connection of the second elevator servo.

This would be taken into account on the software side

in the pre-conﬁ guration of a corresponding mixer. You

can ﬁ nd this in the …

"Model type" (page 94)

In this menu, switch to the "Tail" line using the

selection keys, activate the value ﬁ eld with a brief tap

on the center SET key of the right key pad then select

the entry "2ELSv3+8":

287

Programming examples - Parallel operating servos

Tail type

Motor on C1 none

Aileron/camber flaps 1 QR

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1+100%

SEL

2 EL Sv 3+8

Then do the ﬁ ne-tuning for travel of the two

servos "in the now familiar manner" in the

»Servo adjustment« menu.

Two rudders

We want to switch two rudders "in parallel". The

second rudder is located at the free receiver output 8.

Variant 1

In the menu …

»Dual mixer« (page 206)

… select one of the cross-mixers and enter "8" and

"RU" in its left and center value ﬁ elds, as shown in

the ﬁ gure:

Diff.

DUAL MIXER

Mixer 1

Mixer 2

8RU

Mixer 3

Mixer 4

?? ??

The same deﬂ ection "", which would take

place through "Input 8" must not have an effect here.

Therefore, you should make absolutely sure in the …

»Control adjust« (page 108)

0% +100%I5

Typ SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

offset

Normal

… that "Input 8" "GL(obal)" is set to "free" so the

control function is separate from the control channel

over all ﬂ ight phases.

Alternatively, Input 8 can be set to "no control" in

the »Mix only channel« menu on a ﬂ ight-phase

independent basis by setting Channel 8 to "MIXonly".

MIX ONLY CHANNEL

MIXonly

normal

1234567 8 9 10111213141516

Variant 2

This variant uses the …

»Free mixers« (beginning page 193)

… menu to set a "Tr RU  8". In the "Type" column,

select the setting "Tr" so that the rudder trimming

affects both rudder servos:

LinearMIX 1

type

from – Begr. +

––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

––––

Afterwards, switch to the graphic screen and set a

symmetric mix of +100 %.

Mix input Offset

Linear MIX 1

SYM ASY STO

SET

+100% +100%

Here too, "Input 8" should also be programmed – if

applicable, for all ﬂ ight phases –

to "free" by way

of the »Control adjust« menu. However, control

function "8" can be separated from control channel

"8" more easily in the ﬂ ight-phase independent »Mix

only channel« menu, page 205:

MIX ONLY CHANNEL

MIXonly

normal

1234567 8 9 10111213141516

288 Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phases

Using ﬂ ight phases

Up to 8 different ﬂ ight phases (ﬂ ight conditions) can

be programmed with settings independent of one

another within each the model memory.

Each of these ﬂ ight phases can be called with

a switch or a switch combination. This makes it

possible to program different settings for various ﬂ ight

states, such as «Normal», «Thermal», «Speed»,

«Distance», etc., then make in-ﬂ ight changeovers

in a most convenient manner. However, with the

ﬂ ight phase programming you can also make slight

modiﬁ cations, e.g. of mixers, to try out by switching

during the ﬂ ight in order to ﬁ nd the optimal settings

for each model more easily.

Before actual programming of ﬂ ight phases can

begin, consideration should be given to whether

the digital trimming of transverse, altitude and side

should be "GL(obal)" – in other words, applicable to all

ﬂ ight phases – or per "PH(ase)" – in other words, each

ﬂ ight phase individually variable.

If you decide in favor of a phase-speciﬁ c trimming of

the elevator, for example, switch the menu …

»Stick mode« (page 104)

… and change the standard "global" default accordingly.

The same applies for the number of trimming steps in

the "Tr. step" column:

global

Channel 1

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

0.0s

Example 1 …

… continuing with the previous programming of

an electric glider with 2 aileron servos.

Control of the electric motor is accomplished,

independent of the C1 joystick, with one of the two

side proportional rotary controls or one of the two

standard 3-way switches mounted into the switch

panels. The motor's speed control is connected to

receiver output 8 as described on page 276 and

continued in Examples 1 and 2 This is why "none"

was selected for the "Motor on C1" line in the »Model

type« menu. This not only causes the column "Motor"

in the »Phase settings« menu to be unavailable

but also allows all options to be available without

restriction in the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the

»Wing mixers« menu.

1st Step

»Phase settings« (page 142)

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

0.1s

Name Timer Sw.time

–



Normal

Thermal

Speed

Launch

Initially, one or multiple ﬂ ight phases are provided

with a speciﬁ c identiﬁ cation ("Name") for the

respective ﬂ ight status. This identiﬁ cation has no

inﬂ uence on the programming of the transmitter; it

only serves for an improved differentiation of the

individual ﬂ ight phases and is shown later in all ﬂ ight-

phase dependent menus and in the base screen.

The selection of the respective line, a name and the

setting of the switchover time is done in the "usual"

manner, with a tap on the appropriate key(s) of the

two four-way touch pads.

Note:

With the exception of Phase 1, which should always

be assigned with the name "Normal" since it is

always active, if the ﬂ ight phases are deactivated, it

is completely irrelevant which name is assigned to

which phase!

In everyday use by a model pilot, three to a maximum

of four ﬂ ight phases are usually completely sufﬁ cient:

"Start" with the climb settings•

"Thermal" for "Flying high",•

"Normal" for normal conditions and •

"Speed" for high gear.•

In the "Sw.time" column (switching time) …

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

1.0s

0.1s

Name Timer Sw.time

–



Normal

Thermal

Speed

Launch

… a "blend-in" time can be established for the time in

which a changeover from any other ﬂ ight phase into

this given ﬂ

ight-phase is to be accomplished in order

to permit a "smooth" transition for different servo

289

Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phases

positions. Thus, an increased stress of the model

under certain circumstances with a "hard" change of

rudder or ﬂ ap positions, for example, is prevented

The "Status" column shows you the currently active

ﬂ ight phase with an asterisk "".

2nd Step

In order to actually be able to switch between the

individual ﬂ ight phases, the assignment of one or

multiple switches is necessary. Either one of the two

three-way switches is ideally suited for switching

between up to three ﬂ ight phases.

Each of the two switch end positions starting from the

center position will be assigned to one of the ﬂ ight

phase switches A … F. The assignment of the switch

takes place in the menu …

»Phase assignment« (page 148)

First select "C" with the marker frame. Then brieﬂ y

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad and

move the switch from its center position to one of its

end-positions, for example, downward:

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

1 Normal

combi

ABDEF

Move the switch back to the center position and

then select "D", and after activation of the switch

assignment, move the switch to the other limit position,

for example, to the top:

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

1 Normal

combi

ABDEF

Now the 3-way switch is programmed.

Now and additional switch could be assigned for the

"start" ﬂ ight phase, if applicable. In this case under

"A", so that the "start" phase is always switched

to from every other ﬂ ight phase in parallel to the

switching-on of the motor:

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

1 Normal

combi

ABDEF

The given switch positions must then be assigned

to respective ﬂ ight phases (names). Although some

ﬂ ight phases have already been assigned to names,

the phase name «1 Normal» will always initially

appear at the right in the display; see the ﬁ gures

above.

First move the 3-way switch to one of its limit

positions, for example to the top, and switch with the

marker frame in the display down to the right to set

the ﬂ ight phase name. Brieﬂ y tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad to activate the entry ﬁ eld

then select the desired ﬂ ight phase for this switch

position, in this example «2 Thermal», with the

selection keys:

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

combi

ABDEF

2 Thermal

Proceed in the same manner for the other switch limit

position, which is assigned the name "3 Speed".

If applicable move Switch 2 and assign this switch

combination the name "4 Start".

A brief tap on the center ESC of the left touch pad

or the center SET key of the right touch pad will

complete the time name assignment.

The ﬂ ight-phase dependent model settings made

before the assignment of phase switches are now in

the ﬂ ight phase «1 Normal». This is the phase which

is called with the open «Start» switch in the center

position of the 3-way switch.

3rd Step

In order to not have to carry out all previously made

settings for the model in the "new" ﬂ ight phase

from the ground up, we recommend ﬁ rst copying

the already tested programming of the ﬂ ight phase

"Normal" to the other ﬂ ight phases. This is carried out

in the menu …

»Copy / Erase« (page 72)

Copy flight phase

Erase model

Copy model –> model

Export to SD

Import from SD =>



290 Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phases

Here, select the "Copy ﬂ ight phase" menu item with

the selection keys then brieﬂ y tap the center SET key

of the right touch pad.

In the window which now appears, "Copy from

phase", "1 Normal" is selected …

Copy from phase:

5=>

normal Thermal

Speed Launch

… and a subsequent brief tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad will change the display to

"Copy to phase". Now the target is to be selected

(initially "2 Thermal") and conﬁ rmed by another tap

on the center SET key of the right touch pad. After

conﬁ rmation of the subsequent safety query, all

settings are copied according to the selection.

Proceed in the same manner with the other two

phases ("1 Normal" to "3 Speed" and "1 Normal" to

"4 Start").

4th Step

Now three or four phases are programmed, the

settings are also copied and there is even a "soft"

transfer, but … there are still no ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c

settings.

Now, if applicable, in order to adapt the ﬂ ap positions

to the different requirements of the individual ﬂ ight

phases, in the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 108)

… the standard default "GL" is ﬁ rst changed to "PH"

for "Phase" in the type column:

0% +100%I5

Typ SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

offset

Normal

Then switch to the "Offset" column and make the

settings deviating from the "Normal" ﬂ ight phase for the

ailerons. However, switch to the desired ﬂ ight phase

beforehand, whose name is shown at the bottom in

the display, appropriate to the switch position. Both

positive and negative throw changes are possible.

These settings are to be made separately for each

ﬂ ight phase:

+100%I5

Typ SEL

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

fr ---

---

offset

Thermal

–7%

5th Step

Any necessary phase-speciﬁ c trimming of the

elevator is made with the help of the digital trimming

of the elevator joystick. This requires that you have

at least set the elevator trimming to "Phase" in the

»Stick mode« menu – as already shown in this

programming example.

Alternatively, these settings can also be made in the

»Phase trim« menu …



Normal 0%

Thermal

AI WK WK2

Thermal

Speed

Launch

0% 0%

QR2

6th Step

In the menu …

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

… the ﬂ ight phase name of the newly activated ﬂ ight

phase appears at the bottom edge of the display. If

the switch position is now changed, the name of the

ﬂ ight phase selected with the switch appears, but

with the previously copied settings of the ﬂ ight phase

"Normal". Here you set you values phase-speciﬁ cally

for the aileron differentiation, the share of the mixture

of transverse to side, and if applicable, also a mixture

of altitude to transverse. (The latter increases the

agility over the transverse axis when "Turning".)

Aileron differential

Brake settings

+33%

Aileron +55%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0%0%

–––

rudder

Normal

Note:

The list of displayed options depends on the number

of servos entered in the "Ailerons/ﬂ aps" line in the

»Model type« menu.

Now switch to the sub-menu …

291

Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phases

Aileron differential

Brake settings

+33%

Aileron +55%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0%0%

–––

rudder

Normal

… and enter the raised height of aileron brakes for

individual ﬂ ight phases in the "Crow" line.

With "D.red" (differentiation reduction), you should

enter the value previously set in the aileron

differentiation line in order to suppress it again while

breaking.

In the "Elevat curve" sub-menu, enter a correction

value for the elevator, see page 150.

Note:

The "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing

mixers« menu is switched "off" when: for the "Motor

at C1 front/rear" column of the »Model type« menu

(page 94) AND for the "Motor" column of the »Phase

settings« menu (page 142), a "yes" is entered for the

currently active ﬂ ight phase. Change the ﬂ ight phase,

if applicable.

292 Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phases

Example 2 …

Glider with four ﬂ ap wings, two large ﬂ aps and

tow coupling

The following example is based on the assumption

that you have already mechanically pre-adjusted the

model and you have already ensured the correct

deﬂ ection of all rudders or checked this again in the

scope of this programming and made adjustments,

if applicable, through servo switching at the receiver

and/or through the »Servo adjustment« menu.

This programming example is based on an

assignment of the receiver connections in accordance

with the following diagram:

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

Rudder or elevator/rudder right

Left aileron

Elevator or elevator/rudder left

2nd airbrake or free or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake or 1st airbrake

Right aileron

Left flap

Right flap

Aero-tow release or free or aux. function

free or aux. function

13 14 T 15 16 S

77 8910 11 12

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

Begin with the new programming of the model in a

free model memory location.

Essentially, the »Basic settings, model« menu is

used to bind the receiver to the transmitter. Enter a

model name and select or review the selection of

appropriate stick mode. Later on this menu will also

be used to activate the range test before the start of

ﬂ ight operations.

In the menu …

"Model type" (page 94)

… leave "Motor to C1" at "none" and the tail type at

"Normal". Set "2 AIL 2 FL" into the "Aileron/camber

ﬂ aps" line.

In the "Brake" line, program or leave "In1", because

the brake and spoiler ﬂ ap servos connected to 1 + 8

should be activated later with the corresponding C1

joystick as the control:

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

none

Aileron/camber flaps 2AIL 2FL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1+90%

SEL

STO

The setting in the "Brake Offset" value ﬁ eld deﬁ nes

the neutral position of all mixers speciﬁ ed by the

"Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers«

menu. Place this neutral point at approx. +90 %,

insofar as the brake ﬂ aps should be retracted in the

front position of the C1 joystick. The remaining path

between +90 % and the full throw of the joysticks,

+100 %, is then assigned as idle travel. This assures

that the rudders or ﬂ aps addressed by the mixers of

"Brake settings" remain in their "normal" positions

even for slight deviations from the limit position of

the C1 control. At the same time, the effective control

path is automatically spread to 100 %.

In the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 108)

… assign a switch, for example Input 9, to operate

the aero-tow coupling. In order for this switch to work

independently of the ﬂ ight phase, leave the standard

default "GL" in the "Type" column of this input. With

"– Travel +" you can adjust the control travel for the

switching of the switch:

Using ﬂ ight phases

293

Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phases

0% +100%I6

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

---

offset

GL fr

Normal

---

With a simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left

touch pad, the setting can be checked in the »Servo

display«.

Since the C1 control should actuate Servo 8

simultaneously with Servo 1, establish this link by

way of the »Control adjust« menu.

For this reason, also switch to the line before and

assign "Control 1" to Input 8.

0% +100%I6

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

Cn1

---

offset

GL fr

Normal

SEL

However, please note in this connection, that a non-

linear control curve programmed in the »Channel

1 curve« menu has as little effect on this input as

brake offset set to less than 100 %, which you can

check very easily in the »Servo display« menu.

You can reach this from nearly every menu position

with a simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left

touch pad:

The travel, and if applicable also the direction of

rotation, for spoiler servo 1 as well as the second

spoiler servo connected to Output 8 can be adjusted

in the menu …

Servo adjustment (page 102)

0% 100%Servo 1

Servo 2

Servo 3

Servo 4

Servo 5

Rev cent.

100%

150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

In the Multi-ﬂ ap menu of the …

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

… you now enter the ﬁ rst mixer values for the four

wing ﬂ aps; for example:

FL-Pos.

Diff.

AI-Tr.

Normal AI

+100%

WK2

+66% 0%

+100%

+33%

+33%0%

+100% +66% 0%

FL +100%

0% +100%

Note:

The parameter values shown here are model-

dependent and must be determined by test ﬂ

ights.

In the …

AI determines the percentage share with

which the two ﬂ ap pairs "AI" and "FL" are

to respond to aileron steering. Also check

whether the ailerons are deﬂ ected in the

right direction during the adjustment of the

parameter values.

The adjustment range from -150 % …

+150 % enables the correct throw direction

adjustment regardless of the direction of

rotation of the servos.

AI-Tr. determines the percentage share with which

aileron trimming should effect the AI and FL.

Diff. the entry to specify aileron steering

differentiation for AI and FL ﬂ aps is

made here. Refer to page 161 about the

signiﬁ cance of differentiation.

The adjustment range from -100 % …

+150 % enables the correct differentiation

direction adjustment regardless of the

direction of rotation of the aileron and ﬂ ap

servos.

FL-Pos. The ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c positions for all

camber ﬂ aps present on the given model

are set in this line. In the process, you can

determine the positions the ﬂ aps assume

for each ﬂ ight phase.

Note:

The values appearing in this line are based

on the same data set as in the comparable

position in the »Phase trim« menu, which

is why changes always take effect in both

directions.

FL Since all inputs in the »Control adjust«

menu are set to "free" by default, neither

the ailerons nor the camber ﬂ aps can be

operated with these default settings. In this

respect, you also leave the default entry here.

However, if ﬂ ap positions are to be varied

with a switch or proportional control by

the position speciﬁ ed in the "FL-Pos." line,

assign the desired control to Input 6 in the

»Control adjust« menu and set the desired

reaction to the movement of the control

selected for this purpose by way of

a percentage in this line.

HRWK

this mixer induces a partial reaction from

aileron (AI) and camber ﬂ aps (FL) during

elevator activation.

294 Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phases

The mixing direction is to be selected

so that all ﬂ aps are deﬂ ected downward

with the elevator pulled up and deﬂ ected

upward with the elevator pushed down (=

hydroplane). The mix proportion is normally

in the low double-digit range.

Now, within the »Wing mixers« menu, switch to the

"Brake settings" …

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

+22%

WK2

+66%

Diff. reduct.

WK2

+33% 0%

+33%



Note:

The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor

on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu

(page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase

settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the

currently active ﬂ ight phase. Change the ﬂ ight phase,

if applicable.

Crow Further above in this text section, the C1

joystick was set for brake ﬂ ap steering.

In this line you determine the share

with which the AI and FL should be

included on actuation of C1 in the

manner that both ailerons are deﬂ ected

"slightly" upward and both ﬂ aps are

deﬂ ected as far downward as possible.

Now with a simultaneous tap on the

 keys of the left touch pad, a

change to the »Servo display« menu

can be affected for observation of servo

movements and, in particular, to ensure

that no inﬂ uence on the ﬂ aps takes

place above the adjusted brake offset,

e.g. +90 % and beyond to the throw

limit of the C1 control ("Idle travel" of

the C1 joystick).

Diff. reduct. The value previously entered into

the aileron differentiation line should

also be entered in this "Differentiation

reduction" line to fade this out during

braking.

Elevat. curve

This line is used for the entry of any

correction factor that may be required

for the elevator, see page 174.

Insofar as necessary, again check all ﬂ ap throws and,

by way of the »Servo adjustment« menu, adjust the

servo center, the servo travel and the travel limit.

It may also be time to start the initial ﬂ ight testing,

insofar as all global settings – that is to say, all ﬂ ight-

phase independent settings – are completed.

Two additional ﬂ ight phases are now to be set

up below, each of which requires a somewhat

different ﬂ ap position.

Therefore, switch to the menu …

»Phase settings« (page 142)

… and activate the assignment of phase names in

the "Name" column with a brief tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad:

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim. Sw. time

–



Now give Phase 1 – the "Normal phase" – that is also

the phase which includes the previous settings, the

name "Normal", which you select from a list with the

selection keys.

Phase 2 is given the name "Thermal" and Phase 3 is

given the name "Speed". Now conclude the entries

with a brief tap on the ESC key of the left touch pad

or the SET key of the right touch pad:

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim. SW. time

–



Normal

Thermal

Speed

Now move the marker frame beyond the "Fl.ph.Tim"

column to the right into the column "Sw. time" and set

a "switching time" from any other phase into the given

phase in order to avoid an abrupt phase change; in

other words to avoid erratic changes of ﬂ ap positions.

Now try out different switching times. In this example

we have speciﬁ ed 1 s in each case:

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

1.0s

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.tim. Sw. time

–



Normal

Thermal

Speed

Whether or not one of the phases 1 … 8 currently has

an assigned switch and the state of the switch can be

seen in the "status" column at the far right.

Symbol Meaning

– No switch assigned

+ Phase can be called via switch

Indicates the currently active phase

Since, except for phase 1, all other phases are still

designated with a "-" symbol, now switch in the

menu to …

295

Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phases

»Phase assignment« (page 148)

… and assign the previously deﬁ ned ﬂ ight phases

to appropriate switches with which a selection from

among three phases is possible.

Since there is no particular priority here, assign

for example switch "C" in the display to one of the

two end settings of one of the two 3-way switches.

Afterward put the selected switch again into its middle

position, activate the switch assignment under "D"

then move the selected 3-way switch again out of its

middle position and into the other end position, as

shown below:

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

1 Normal

combi

ABDEF

267

After the switch assignment is complete, use the

selection keys to switch to the bottom right and

activate the assignment of phase names with a brief

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Now close switch "7" by moving the selected 3-way

switch forward.

Assign the name "<2 Thermal>" to this switch

position and leave the name of its "OFF" position

as "<1 normal>".

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

combi

ABDEF

267

2 Thermal

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

combi

ABDEF

267

1 Normal

Finally, move the 3-way switch to the rear toward its

"6 o'clock position" and assign this switch position the

name "<3 Speed>":

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

combi

ABDEF

267

3 Speed

The phase names selected in the programming are

now shown, depending on the switch status, in all

ﬂ ight-phase dependent menus, see the table on

page 140.

Since we have already made some settings in ﬂ ight-

phase dependent menus, such as in the »Wing mixers«

menu, we will now copy these settings to the «Thermal»

ﬂ ight phase. For this purpose, open the menu …

»Copy / Erase« (page 72)

… and switch to the "Copy ﬂ ight phase" line:

Copy flight phase

Erase model

Copy model –> model

Export to SD

Import from SD =>



All eight possible ﬂ ight phases are listed in "Copy

from phase":

Select the ﬂ ight phase to be copied, e.g. 1.

"1 Normal".

Copy from phase:

5=>

Normal Thermal

Speed

With a brief tap on the center 2. SET key of the right

touch pad, switch the window to entry of the target

memory "Copy to phase".

Select phase "2 Thermal" as the target:3.

Kopieren to phase:

5=>

Normal

Speed

Thermal

Conﬁ rm the selection 4. with a brief tap on the center

SET key of the right touch pad.

A security query follows, who should be conﬁ rmed 5.

with "Yes":

Phase to:

to be copied?

1 Normal 2 Thermal

YES

Then repeat the process with ﬂ ight phase "3 Speed".6.

296 Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phases

Now we will program the required settings in the

ﬂ ight phase "Thermal" as an example.

In order to vary camber ﬂ ap positions in the

«Thermal» phase, it is merely necessary to switch

over to the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 108)

… then change Input 6 – as described beginning on

page 108 – from "GL(obal)" to "PH(ase)" and ﬁ nally

assign it to an operating element.

To do this, ﬁ rst use the selection keys to switch into

the "Typ" column for "I6" and change this setting from

"GL" to "PH".

0% +100%I5

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

Cn1

---

offset

GL fr

Thermal

---

SEL

Thereafter change one column to the right into the

column above SEL …

0% +100%I5

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

Cn1

---

offset

GL fr

---

SEL

Thermik

… and now assign this input, as described in the

section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and

control switches" on page 56, the left proportional

slider in the middle console to, for example:

0% +100%I5

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

GL Cn1

---

offset

GL fr

---

SEL

Sl1

Thermal

This control will allow the ailerons (2 + 5) and camber

ﬂ aps (6 + 7) to be continuously adjusted (as camber

ﬂ aps) with a mixer ratio yet to be set via the »Wing

mixers« menu.

If you assign the still free second three-stage switch

to Input 6 instead, you can call three different FL

positions of the ailerons (AIL) and camber changing

ﬂ aps (FL) as well as three elevator positions (Elev)

in the "Thermal" ﬂ ight phase, see the following

page. (These three switch positions correspond to

the center position and the two limit positions of the

previously mentioned proportional rotary control.)

Note:

The FL and AIL ﬂ ap positions in the two limit switch

positions or in the switch center depend on the value

set in the column "- Travel +" as well as the offset

value and the mixer proportion set in the "Multi-ﬂ ap

menu" of the »Wing mixers« menu, see further

below.

Leave the (control) "- travel +" at its standard

symmetric settings of + 100 % and the offset value at

0 %. Specifying a symmetric or asymmetric time for

smooth switching between the three switch positions

- in the example "1.0 s 1.0 s" - in the column "- Time

+" is recommended:

0% +100%I5

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

GL Cn1

---

offset

GL fr

Normal

---

SEL

Sl1 1.0 1.0

In the "Multi-ﬂ ap menu" of the …

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

… menu, subsequently change only the values for

"FL.pos" and "FL" in the «Thermal» ﬂ ight phase:

FL.pos It is here that AI and FL positioning takes

place during the «Thermal» ﬂ ight phase

in the event that the assigned control

(proportional control or 3-way switch) is in

its neutral or middle position.

FL.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr.

Thermal AI

+100%

WK2

+66% 0%

+100%+100%

–9%

+100%

+33%

+33%0%

+100% +66% 0%

FL +100%

0% +100%

–11%

FL Enter in this line the the share of inﬂ uence

for aileron and camber ﬂ ap servos, when

used as camber ﬂ aps, is to be produced by

the selected control (see above) or 3-way

switch. Be sure to set these values high

enough that the ﬂ aps can be controlled with

appropriate sensitivity, for example:

Fl.pos

Diff.

AiI-tr.

Thermal AI

+100%

WK2

+66% 0%

+100%+100%

–9%

+100%

+33%

+33%0%

+100% +66% 0%

FL +20% +25%

–11%

+25%

+20%

297

Programming examples - Using ﬂ ight phases

A simultaneous tap on the  or  key

combination of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset

changed values back to their standard default values.

Note:

Due to the improved lift distribution, the degree of

mix ratios should be set so that the camber ﬂ aps are

slightly "lower" than the ailerons.

With a simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left

touch pad, the reaction of the AI and FL servos can

be checked in the »Servo display« by actuation

of the selected camber ﬂ ap control. (Push the C1

joystick to the front position so that the "AIL" and "FL"

ﬂ ap positions can be better followed on actuation of

the corresponding control.)

Caution:

With aileron actuation the bars of the »Servo

display« move in the same manner, for camber

ﬂ ap actuation they will move in the opposite

manner.

In the control's middle position, the – example's – •

"FL-pos." setting only has a -9 % effect for the AI

and -11 % for the FL.

In one transmitter control end-position, AI and FL •

are again closer to the neutral position because

the mix ratio speciﬁ ed in the example reduces the

FL.pos setting, whereas …

… in the other limit position, AIL and FL reach •

the maximum downward offset prescribed by the

mixer percentage.

In order to set a – corrective – admix for the elevator,

exit the "Multi-ﬂ ap menu" and return to the base

screen of the »Wing mixers« menu:

Brake settings

Aileron +50%

WING MIXERS

Flaps aileron +5%+5%

–––

rudder

Thermal

Multi-flap menu

In the two limit positions of the three-stage switch

the elevator is moved symmetrically in this example

with +5 % (true to side). If, on the other hand, you

use a proportional control, the elevator is deﬂ ected

according to the degree for the control position.

Then make the settings for the "Speed" ﬂ ight phase

in the same manner.

Notes:

The digital trimming of transverse, altitude •

and side work independently of these

settings – depending on the setting selected in

the»Stick mode« menu, page 104 – "global" or for

each "phase".

All setting values are model-dependent. Carry out •

the settings on your ﬁ nished model and/or during

the ﬂ ight.

298 Programming examples - Eight-ﬂ ap wing

Eight-ﬂ ap wing

The standard features of the mc-16 HoTT support

convenient control of up to 8 servos for aileron/

camber ﬂ ap functions.

In the following we will consider a model without

motor drive and without spoilers in the wings. The

example is also based on the assumption that the

model is already mechanically pre-adjusted, that

the deﬂ ection of all rudders to the correct side has

been veriﬁ ed, that these items will be checked again

in the context of programming and that adaptations

will be made as necessary via servo swapping at the

receiver and/or in the Servo adjustment menu.

The servos should be connected to a suitable

receiver as follows:

612

910

Rudder Receiver output

Aileron 2 + 5

Aileron 2 11 + 12

Camber changing ﬂ aps

(exterior) 6 + 7

Camber changing ﬂ aps 2

(interior) 9 + 10

Elevator 3

Rudder 4

For the control of all ﬂ aps, up to two additional

proportional controls are required in addition to

the two joysticks or, alternatively up to two 2-way

switches.

In order to be able to control all servos, ﬁ rst switch to

the menu …

"Model type" (page 94)

… and select "4AIL 4FL" in the "Ailerons/ﬂ aps" line.

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

none

Aileron/camber flaps

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1+100%

SEL

4 AIL 4 FL

In order to also actuate camber ﬂ ap servos 6 + 7

(FL) and 9 + 10 (FL2) as ailerons, set the appropriate

values in the "Multi-ﬂ ap menu" of the …

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

… menu, whereby aileron control of the two camber

ﬂ ap pairs is set in the "AI" line and the "Ail-tr."

line is used to adapt aileron trimming.

FL.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr.

Normal AILE

+100%

FL2

0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%

+77% +55%

0%0%

+100% +77% +55%

AILE2 FLAP

+88%

EL FL 0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%

Any previous settings can be checked in the »Servo

display« menu, which can be called from almost any

menu position with a brief simultaneous tap on the

 keys of the left touch pad.

The servos 6 + 7, 9 + 10 and 11 + 12 now move •

for the aileron control just like servos 2 + 5. Aileron

trimming also affects all of these servos.

The C1 joystick only actuates the servo connected •

to receiver output 1.

Caution:

With aileron actuation the bars of the "Servo

display" move in the same manner and in the

opposite manner with camber changing ﬂ ap

actuation.

The necessary ﬁ ne-tuning of the servos is carried out

in the …

»Servo adjustment« (page 102)

0% 100%Servo 1

Servo 2

Servo 3

Servo 4

Servo 5

Rev cent.

100%

150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

… if necessary.

In doing so, the basic programming of the eight-ﬂ ap

wing is completed.

Camber ﬂ ap positioning and ﬂ ight phases

First program two or more ﬂ ight phases in the

»Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« menus.

Also take this opportunity to change the standard

default "global" for trim in the »Stick mode« menu,

page 104 to "phase", thus allowing modiﬁ cations to

meet individual preferences.

An example of ﬂ ight phase programming can be

found on page 288.

One camber changing ﬂ ap setting per ﬂ ight phase

If one camber ﬂ ap position per ﬂ ight phase is

sufﬁ cient, then in the Multi-ﬂ ap meun" of the …

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

… menu, use the "FL.pos" line to adjust the camber

ﬂ ap position(s) of servo pairs "AILE" (2 + 5), "AIL2"

(11 + 12), "FLAP" (6 + 7) and "FL2" (9 + 10) for each

programmed ﬂ ight phase to meet your preferences.

299

Programming examples - Eight-ﬂ ap wing

FL.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr.

Thermal AILE

+100%

FL2

0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%

+77% +55%

–9%–7%

–5%

+100% +77% +55%

AILE2 FLAP

+88%

–12%

EL FL 0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%

Note:

Whether positive or negative values must be set in

the "FL.pos" line depends on the installation of the

servos, among other things.

However, if the alternative …

variable camber ﬂ ap positions per ﬂ ight phase with

a proportional rotary control setting is preferred,

… then the basic settings for all 8 ﬂ aps can be

additionally varied on a ﬂ ight-phase basis by way of a

single control.

This is accomplished via the …

»Control adjust« (page 108)

… menu, by assigning the same transmitter control in

every ﬂ ight phase to inputs 5, 6 and 11, for example

the proportional slider, and in parallel, reducing travel

to about 50 % or even less so that the trimming of

ﬂ aps has appropriate sensitivity. Deviating throw

travel for individual ﬂ ap pairs can also be matched to

one another on a ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c basis by way

of travel settings in a menu. For this purpose, you

only have to switch the corresponding inputs from the

standard default "GL" (global) to "PH" (phase):

0% +25%I5

Typ

+25%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +25%

+25%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

GL fr

---

offset

PH Sl1

---

SEL

Sl1

Thermal

0% +100%I10

I11

I12

I13

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +25%

+25%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

GL fr

---

offset

GL fr

---

SEL

Sl1

Thermal

Note:

With the use of a switch, set the respective

"Deviation" of the offset point symmetrically or

asymmetrically in the "- Travel +" column.

Elevator compensator with actuation of the

camber changing ﬂ aps

If it should become evident in the ﬂ ight that a

correction of the elevator is necessary after setting

the ﬂ aps, this correction can be made in the …

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

... For this purpose, select the line "FL  EL" and

enter an appropriate ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c value, for

example:

Brake settings

Aileron +50%

WING MIXERS

Flaps aileron +5%+5%

–––

rudder

Thermal

Multi-flap menu

If you have assigned the same control to the inputs

5, 6 and 11 – as speciﬁ ed above – all eight ﬂ aps move

simultaneously while the elevator follows the set

degree of mixture.

Camber changing ﬂ ap movement on elevator

actuation

Camber changing ﬂ ap movement on elevator

actuation – normally only used in "High gear" to

increase the agility over the transverse axis – is also

carried out in the "Multi-ﬂ ap menu" of the...

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

... menu. Enter the desired ﬂ ight-phase dependent

values in the line "EL  FL":

FL.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr.

Thermal AILE

+100%

FL2

0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%

+77% +55%

–9%–7%

–5%

+100% +77% +55%

AILE2 FLAP

+88%

–12%

EL FL 5 5%+107+107% +9+ 9% +111+11%

In addition to the two camber changing ﬂ ap pairs

(servos 6 + 7 and 9 + 10), the two aileron pairs

(servos 2 + 5 and 11 + 12) are now tracked with

the degree of mixture corresponding to the camber

changing ﬂ aps – normally opposite the elevator.

300 Programming examples - Eight-ﬂ ap wing

Brake settings

Note:

The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor

on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu,

page 94, AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase

settings« menu, page 142, are set to "yes" for the

currently active ﬂ ight phase. Change the ﬂ ight phase,

if applicable.

The "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing

mixers« menu is also ﬂ ight-phase speciﬁ c and can

be used to extend aileron pairs (2 + 5) and (11 + 12)

upward as well as camber ﬂ ap pairs "FL" (6 + 7) and

"FL2" (9 + 10) downward, whereas the elevator is

trimmed in parallel to this, see page 174.

In order for the brake system to react to the C1

joystick as desired, however, the mixer neutral

point (offset) of the brake system must be adjusted

accordingly. This takes place in the menu …

"Model type" (page 94)

After selecting the "Brake Off." line, the C1 joystick is

to be moved to the position at which the mixer for the

brake system is to take effect – normally just before

the forward limit position – and after selecting the

appropriate value ﬁ eld, the setpoint is deﬁ ned with a

brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

If the C1 joystick is not moved over this point toward

the pilot, all mixers of the brake system are carried

along according to their respective degree of mixing.

Below this point the mixer remains inactive, whereas

the selection of "dead travel" is possible.

If the model has additional brake ﬂ aps or spoilers and

your receiver has another free Output 1, you can also

control this through the C1 joystick by connecting the

spoiler servo to receiver Output 1.

However, if you control the left and right spoiler each

with its own servo, and not together, the receiver

Output 8 is still available for the connection of the

second spoiler servo. In this case, program the

connection to the second spoiler servo as described

in the section "Servos running in parallel" on

page 286.

Reduction of the aileron and camber changing

ﬂ ap differentiation

For the improvement of the aileron effect in the crow

position, you should automatically suppress any

programmed aileron differentiation.

For this purpose, use "differentiation reduction" in

the "Brake settings" of the »Wing mixers« menu

to continuously reduce the degree of the aileron

differentiation within an adjustable range when

rudders are brought into crow position with the C1

joystick. For more about this, see text beginning on

page 174.

301

Programming examples - Delta and ﬂ ying wing

Of course, the general comments regarding the

installation and the adjustment of the RC system

to a model at the beginning of the wing model

programming on page 268 also applies for delta and

ﬂ

ying wing models! Similarly, the comments for test

ﬂ ying and ﬁ ne-tuning the settings to the programming

of ﬂ ight phases also apply.

left

right

Delta and ﬂ ying wing models differ signiﬁ cantly

from a "normal" ﬂ ight model due to their unique

characteristic shape and geometry. The differences in

the servo arrangement, on the other hand, are more

subtle. For example, with "classic" delta/ﬂ ying wing

models, only two rudders are normally provided. They

are responsible for both "transverse" and "height/

depth", like the side rudder/elevator function on a

V-tail unit.

With more elaborate designs, on the other hand, it

may be the case that one (or two) interior rudders

have only an elevator function and the exterior

ailerons only support the height/depth function, under

certain circumstances. Even with a 4, or indeed up

to 8, ﬂ ap wing the use of camber ﬂ ap functions and/

or even a crow system is nowadays entirely possible.

In all these cases, however, the following assignment

of the receiver outputs should be used, see also

page 61. Unneeded outputs a simply left free:

Receiver power supply

Airbrake- or throttle servo

or speed controller (electric motor)

13 14 T 15 16 S

77 8910 11 12

Receiver power supply

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function or AIL2 / left EL

free or aux. function or AIL2 / right EL

free or aux. function

free or flap / left elevator

free or flap / right elevator

free or aux. function or flap2 / left EL

free or aux. function or flap2 / right EL

free or aux. function

AIL / elevator left

AIL / elevator right

free or aux. function

free or rudder

According to the assignment of the receiver outputs,

in the menu …

»Model type« (page 94)

Tail type

Motor on C1 none

Aileron/camber flaps 2 AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1+100%

SEL

Delt/fl.wing

Delta and ﬂ ying wing

… the necessary settings are made:

"Motor an C1" "none" or "Throttle min front/rear"

"Tail type" "Delt/ﬂ .wing"

"Aileron/camber ﬂ aps"

"2AIL" (appears automatically).

To the extent necessary, expand

default "2 AIL" by 4 AIL or 1, 2 or 4

camber ﬂ aps ("1 FL", "2 FL" or "4 FL").

"Brake" stays as is, only interesting for a

delta wing or ﬂ ying wing of type

"2/4 AIL 1/2/4 FL". In this case, refer

to the text under "Brake offset" on

page 95.

These model type specifying settings primarily affect

the functions made available in the »Wing mixers«

menu. Therefore, the options are discussed separately

for two-ﬂ ap and multi-ﬂ ap models in the following:

Delta/ﬂ ying wing of the type: "2AIL"

Tail type

Motor on C1 none

Aileron/camber flaps

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1+100%

SEL

Delt/fl.wing

2 AIL

By retaining the standard default "2 AIL" in the

"Aileron/camber ﬂ aps" line, elevator and aileron

control, including the trim function, are automatically

mixed by percentage on the software side. However,

on the transmitter side, the percentage effect of the

elevator and aileron joystick can be inﬂ uenced in the

»Dual Rate / Expo« menu, page 120.

Settings in the menu …

302 Programming examples - Delta and ﬂ ying wing

This is only then achieved for "2/4 AIL 1/2/4 FL"

when, in the "Multi-ﬂ aps menu", the …

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

… menu is set appropriately in the "HR  WK" line to

"Aileron, camber ﬂ aps" or, if applicable, "Camber ﬂ ap 2":

FL.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr.

Normal AILE

+100%

WK2

FLAP

0% 0%

+100%

0%0%

+100% 0% 0%

EL FL

+100%

0%0%

0%0% 0%

Note:

Contrary to the separately set aileron trimming, see

below, the trimming is transferred proportionally to the

set mixer value with the mixer "EL  FL".

The following settings are model-speciﬁ c and

may not be adopted without checking that they

are correct!

In the top line of this "Multi-ﬂ ap menu", analogous to

"normal" four, six or eight ﬂ ap wings, the effect of the

aileron joystick will be set to aileron, camber ﬂ ap and,

if applicable to FL2. One line below, in the line "Ail-

tr." line, will set the inﬂ uence of aileron trimming on

ailerons and camber changing ﬂ aps.

The setting of a differentiation is rather tricker due to

the model type and should only take place based on

a feel for the ﬂ ight behavior of the model.

The line "FL" should then be set to the

standard default of +100 % in the "FLAP" (or "FL2")

column – as shown – to 0 %, just to be safe.:

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

… are, if need be, advantageous with the "Aileron

 Rudder" mixers and are "played' with a great deal

of "feel" for ﬂ ying behavior with minor differentiation

values.

Aileron differential

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0%0%

–––

rudder

Normal

Due to the speciﬁ c idiosyncrasies of this model type,

additional settings lead to moments which cannot be

compensated.

Delta/ﬂ ying wing of the type: "2 / 4 AIL 1 / 2 / 4 FL"

Tail type

Motor on C1 none

Aileron/camber flaps

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1+100%

SEL

Delt/fl.wing

2 AIL 2 FL

With delta/ﬂ ying wing constructions with more than

two ﬂ aps, more moments can be compensated for.

For example, the "lifting" moment caused by the

raising of the ailerons (= elevator effect) can be

compensated for with camber changing ﬂ aps lowered

correspondingly wide ( = hydroplane effect).

If you decide in favor of this model type and have

assigned the receiver outputs in accordance with the

connection plan shown above, the aileron function of

the two (exterior) aileron servos will function correctly

immediately, but not the elevator function of the two

aileron servos and, if applicable, the (interior) camber

changing ﬂ aps.

FL.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr.

Normal AILE

+100%

WK2

FLAP

0% 0%

+100%

0%0%

+100% 0% 0%

EL FL

+100%0%

0%0%

0%0% 0%

Even though all inputs are set to "free" by default

in the »Control adjust« menu, should a control be

assigned sometime by mistake … then it will at least

have no effect.

The last line, "EL  FL", was explained at the

beginning of this section.

In principle, the author of this manual had

programmed a delta model years ago operated

with the mc-16 and a crow system as landing

assistance … entirely without tilting moments

through correspondingly attuned wing mixers "Brake

 Aileron" and "Brake  Camber ﬂ ap", whereby

"Aileron" refers to the exterior rudder pair and

"Camber ﬂ ap" refers to the interior rudder pair.

To achieve this now with the mc-16 Hott also, switch

to "Brake settings" in the …

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

… menu, and enter the values for the ailerons to be

raised and the "ﬂ aps" to be lowered in the "Crow"

line so that the occurring moments compensate

one another and the altitude of the model remains

stable. In the process, however, you should leave the

ﬂ aps with enough "play" for the elevator function!!!

Therefore, do not utilize the entire servo travel for the

crow alone; for example:

303

Programming examples - Delta and ﬂ ying wing

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

AILE

+55%

WK2

FLAP

+44%

Diff. reduct

WK2

0% 0%

You can ignore all other settings in this menu.

Note:

The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor

on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu

(page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase

settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the

currently active ﬂ ight phase. Change the ﬂ ight phase,

if applicable.

Similarly, a modern, tapered ﬂ ying wing air craft can

also be operated. With some of these models there

are also interior and exterior rudders: The prior is in

front of the center of gravity and the latter is behind.

A downward throw of the central rudder(s) increases

the ascending forces and has an elevator effect.

An upward throw has the opposite effect. On the

exterior ailerons, on the other hand, the effect is just

the opposite: A downward throw shows an elevator

effect and vice versa. With appropriate adjustment of

the "leading" mixer to the setting of curve mixers in

order to achieve a supporting effect from the external

rudder pair with only extreme joystick deﬂ ection in the

height/depth direction, "everything" is possible here.

The author of this manual uses a curve mixer for his

model, which is deﬁ ned by a total of four points:

Curve MIX 9

Curve

Point

Output

Input 0%

–

100

O U T P U T

EL 5

off

In this example the two interpolation points 1 and 2

are each at 0 % as well as the left edge point at +60 %

and the right edge point at -65 %. In conclusion, the

curve was rounded.

In this case: Regardless of which type of servo

arrangement was selected, any type of differentiation

should be set with caution! On a tail-less model,

differentiations show a single-sided height/depth

elevator effect, so we urgently recommend beginning

at least the initial ﬂ ights with a setting of 0 %! Over

the course of the further ﬂ ight testing, under certain

circumstances it may be advantageous to experiment

with differentiations deviating from zero.

With larger models, rudders in the winglets - the

"ears" mounted on the wing ends - can be beneﬁ cial.

If these are controlled with two separate servos, with

the use of one of the mixers in the menu ...

»Dual mixer« (page 206)

… the rudder signal can be "split" very easily and

even differentiated, whereby the second rudder servo

is connected to one of the still free receiver outputs.

For a model with a "Delt/ﬂ .wing" tail type, receiver

output "5" should still be unoccupied and it can then

be used as indicated below:

Diff.

DUAL MIXER

Mixer 1

Mixer 2

5RU

Mixer 3

Mixer 4

?? ??

+66%

Differentiation is necessary in this case because,

when ﬂ ying curves, the respective exterior rudders

will have a greater curve radius than the interior

rudders, so this is comparable to the front wheel

positions on a car when driving in curves.

Note:

The rudder can only be differentiated as programmed

above!

If these two rudders are also to deﬂ ect outward upon

actuation of a brake system with the C1 joystick,

this can be achieved, for example, by setting an

additional mixer "C1  5" with an appropriate travel

setting. Set the mixer's offset according to personal

preference, "front" (+100 %) or "rear" (-100 %),

because the winglet rudder should deﬂ ect outward

only for proportional extension.

Independent of this, ﬁ nish up by uncoupling the

"false" control function from the control channel

to which the second servo was connected – even

though all inputs in the »Control adjust« menu

are "free" by default – by way of the ﬂ ight-phase

independent menu …

»MIX-only channel« (page 205)

... for safety's sake! In keeping with the above

example, control channel 5 should therefore be set to

"MIX only".

304 Programming examples - F3A model

F3A model

F3A models are a part of the group of motor-driven

winged models. They are powered by a combustion

or electric motor. Models with electric motors can be

used in both the electric acrobatic class F5A and are

also competitive in the international model acrobatic

class F3A.

The basic comments and notices for the mechanical

installation of a remote steering system, which was

already referred to in the ﬁ rst programming example

on page 268, also applies, of course, for F3A models

and does not need to be mentioned here again.

Faultlessly constructed F3A models exhibit a largely

neutral ﬂ ying behavior. Ideally, they react with a good

nature but precisely to control movements without the

individual ﬂ ight axes inﬂ uencing one another.

F3A models are controlled with ailerons, elevator

and rudders. Normally, each aileron is actuated

by a separate servo. There is also the regulation

of the drive output of the motor (throttle function)

and a retractable landing gear in many cases. The

assignment of the channels 1 to 5, therefore, do not

differ from the previously described winged models.

The additional "Retractable landing gear" function is

to be provided on one of the auxiliary channels 6 to

9. It is best to actuate the landing gear with a switch

without center position. In addition, another mix offset

for the carburetor can – if necessary – be provided.

You normally use one of the two proportional

controls on the transmitter, which actuates one of the

unassigned auxiliary channels.

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

Rudder

Aileron or left aileron

Elevator or 1st elevator

free or 2nd elevator or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Throttle servo or speed controller (electric motor)

Right aileron

free or landing gear or aux. function

free or fuel mixture or aux. function

free or aux. function

13 14 T 15 16 S

77 8910 11 12

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

Telemetrieanschluss

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

With the assignment of auxiliary channels at the

transmitter, we recommend making sure that the

operating elements required for this are easily

within reach, because during ﬂ ight – especially in

competition – you have "very little time" to release the

joystick.

Programming procedure

Since the basic programming of the transmitter was

already described in detail on pages 268 … 275, only

F3A-speciﬁ c tips are added here.

In the menu …

»Servo adjustment« (page 102)

0% 100%Servo 1

Servo 2

Servo 3

Servo 4

Servo 5

Rev cent.

100%

150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

… the settings for the servos are carried out.

Experience has shown that working with at least

100 % servo throw is beneﬁ cial, because the control

precision is signiﬁ cantly better if greater servo travel

is used. This should already be taken into account

during the construction of the model in the design

of the rudder linkages. Check the servo's direction

of rotation. The servo center should be adjusted

mechanically, insofar as possible.

Any corrections can be made on the software side in

the third column during the initial test ﬂ ights.

Through the menu …

"Model type" (page 94)

… the idle trim is activated for Channel 1 (normally

"rear", because full throttle is "front"). The trimming

then only works in the idle direction:

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1+100%

SEL

Thr. min rear

The remaining settings are made or left as shown in

the ﬁ gure.

305

Programming examples - F3A model

After the model is test-ﬂ own and trimmed, we

recommend reducing trim travel for the elevator and

ailerons The model has signiﬁ cantly less of a reaction

to a movement of the trim wheel. "Over-trimming"

can be avoided, because with full trim travel, under

certain circumstances, the movement by just one

trimming step can have too strong of an effect:

Therefore, the model which previously pulled slightly

to the left, hangs somewhat to the right after the

trimming. For this purpose, switch to the menu …

»Stick mode« (page 104)

… and reduce the number of trim steps in the "Tr.s

tep" column appropriately:

global

Channel 1

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

Trim

0.0s

Tr.s tep – time +

global 0.0s

0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

Phase

It may also be necessary to assign appropriate

operating elements and inputs for other model

features, e.g. retractable landing gear, fuel-mix, etc.

Make these assignments with the …

»Control adjust« (page 108)

… menu where a speciﬁ c input can be assigned to an

operating element, for example, the landing gear can

be assigned to an ON/OFF switch on Input 6 and the

fuel-mix can be assigned to one of the proportional

sliders in the middle console, e.g. the center slider

to Input 7. However, since it involves ﬂ ight-phase

independent settings, leave the standard default "GL"

in the "Type" column:

+33%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

–––

(Some experts even use up to a +60 % exponential

ratio.)

Since (some) combustion motors do not react linearly

to movements of the throttle joystick, through the

menu …

»Channel 1 curve« (page 128)

… a "bowed" or, in other words, non-linear throttle

curve can be set. Four-cycle motors with Roots

pumps, in particular, such as OS Max FS 120, require

a steep ascension of the curve in the lower speed

range. However, the corresponding values must be

adapted. The C1 control curve for the motor could

appear as follows:

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

Point

Output

Input –50%

–

100

O U T P U T

Normal

Only three interpolation points, "L" at -100 %, "H" at

+100 % and "1" at -50 % give the control travel the

rounded curve above.

Basic procedure:

Move the C1 joystick and, along with it the vertical •

line in the graph display, toward idle to about

0% +100%I5

Typ

+100%

0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

GL fr

Sl2

---

offset

GL fr

Normal

SEL

The control travel of the operating elements must be

adapted and can also be reversed with a negative

travel setting.

Note:

A delay time can be speciﬁ ed for raising and lowering

the retractable landing gear, however, such a time

delay is not effective for landing gear servo C 713 MG,

order no. 3887.

F3A models ﬂ y comparatively fast and thus react

"harshly" to the control movements of the servos.

However, since small control movements and

corrections are not optically perceptible, because this

results in inevitable point deductions in competition,

we recommend setting an exponential control

characteristic of the joystick. For this purpose,

switch to the menu …

»Dual Rate / Expo« (page 120)

Experience has shown positive results with values of

approx. + 30 % on the ailerons, elevator and rudders,

which you set in the right column with the selection

keys. In order to be able to control the F3A model to

run smoothly and cleanly:

306 Programming examples - F3A model

-50 % of control travel then brieﬂ y tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad.

In order to attain the curve shape shown, raise this •

point with the selection keys to approx. 0 % in the

inverse video value ﬁ eld in the "Point" line.

Finally, round the characteristic curve by moving •

the marker frame left, select with a brief tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad then change

the value from "Off" to "On" with the selection

keys.

If additional interpolation points between the left ("L")

and right ("H") end are necessary, repeat Steps 2 and

3 analogously.

Since F3A models normally have two aileron servos,

experience has shown that it is beneﬁ cial to move

both ailerons upward somewhat when landing. In the

process, the model usually approaches somewhat

slower and, above all, more steadily for the landing.

In order to do this it is necessary to program mixers

through the menu …

»Free mixers« (beginning page 193)

... accordingly.

The ailerons are extended as landing assistance

depending on the position of the throttle stick, starting

from approximately half throttle toward idle. The

further the joystick is moved toward idle, the more

the ailerons deﬂ ect upward. Just the opposite applies

when "throttling"; the ailerons are retracted again in

order to prevent a sudden rise of the model.

In order to prevent the model from climbing with the

aileron landing ﬂ aps extended, the elevator must be

mixed in somewhat.

For this purpose, set the two linear mixers shown

in the following display. The activation of the mixers

takes place with one and the same switch, such

as "8", to which both mixers must be assigned with

identical switching direction.

LinearMIX 1

type

from – Begr. +

––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

––––

Then switch to the second respective display screen

in order to adjust the respective mixing degrees. In

both cases the mixer neutral point is at the C1 control

center.

Enter 0 % above the control center after selection of

the ASY ﬁ eld for both mixers and below the control

center toward idle for:

MIX 1: -60 % ... -80 % and

MIX 2: -5 % ... -10 % ...

Example Linear MIX 1:

Mix input

Offset

Linear MIX 1

–70%

SYM ASY SET

STO

With this, the base setup model of an F3A model is

concluded.

Compensation of model-speciﬁ c errors

Unfortunately, there are nearly always minor model-

speciﬁ c "errors" through the mixers of a computer

remote control which must be compensated for.

However, before you begin with these settings,

it should be ensured that the model is faultlessly

constructed, optimally balanced over the longitudinal

and transverse axes and the down thrust and side

thrust are correct.

Inﬂ uence of longitudinal and transverse axes by

the rudder

The actuation of the rudder often inﬂ uences the

behavior of the longitudinal and transverse axes. This

is particularly disruptive in so-called knife-edge ﬂ ying,

in which the lift of the model with the rudder deﬂ ected

should be created by the fuselage alone. In the

process, the model can rotate and change directions

as though it were controlled with the ailerons and

elevator. Therefore, a correction over the transverse

axis (elevator) and/or the longitudinal axis (ailerons)

must be made, if applicable.

This can also be done easily with the »Free mixers«

available in the mc-16 HoTT system. For example, if

the model drifts away to the right over the longitudinal

axis with the rudder extended in knife-edge ﬂ ying, the

aileron can be deﬂ ected slightly to the left with the

mixer. Changes in direction over the transverse axis

can be performed analogously with a mixer on the

elevator:

Correction over the transverse axis (elevator)•

Linear MIX 3: "Rudd  Elev"

Asymmetric setting. The appropriate values must

be tested in ﬂ ight.

Correction over the longitudinal axis (aileron)•

Linear MIX 4: "Rudd  AIL"

Asymmetric setting. The appropriate values must

be tested in ﬂ ight.

Relatively small mixer values are usually sufﬁ cient

in this case, the range lies below 10 %, but can vary

from model to model. With the use of curve mixers,

the mix ratios can be adapted even more precisely

to the corresponding throw of the rudder. Again, no

values are indicated for this, because this would be

model-speciﬁ c.

307

Programming examples - F3A model

Vertical ascent and descent

Some models have a tendency to deviate from the

ideal line in vertical ascents and descents.

In order to compensate for this, it is necessary to

have a center position of the elevator dependent

on the throttle joystick position. If, for example, the

model begins to hold off on its own in the vertical

descent with a throttled motor, some elevator must be

mixed in at this throttle position.

For this purpose, program a free mixer "C1  Elev".

The corresponding mixer values are normally under

5 % and must also be tested in ﬂ ight.

Turning away over the longitudinal axis in idle

If the throttle is reduced, the model may begin to turn

away over the longitudinal axis in idle. This can be

counteracted with the aileron.

However, the more elegant solution is to correct this

effect with a free mixer "C1  Ail".

The input values here are usually very low (approx. 3 %)

and the settings should be made in calm weather.

It often sufﬁ ces to only use the mixer between

half throttle and idle. Therefore program the mixer

asymmetrically, if applicable.

Turning away with the ailerons/landing ﬂ aps

extended

If you move the ailerons upward for the landing, the

result is often a turning away over the longitudinal

axis due to various servo paths of the aileron servos

or due to design precisions. Therefore, the model

begins to automatically hang the left or right wing.

This is also easy to compensate for with a mixer

"C1  AIL" depending on the position of the

ailerons/landing ﬂ aps.

The mixer must be switched on and off with the

same switch with which you can switch the aileron/

landing ﬂ ap function on and off (see previous page).

Therefore, it only works with the aileron/landing ﬂ ap

function activated. The appropriate value must be

tested in ﬂ ight.

One additional comment regarding …

"FAIL-SAFE setting"

You utilize the safety potential of this option by the

safety potential by programming at least the motor

throttle position for combustion models to idle and

the motor function for electrically powered models to

stop for a Fail-Safe case. If interference should occur,

the model is then less likely to ﬂ y off on its own and

cause damage to property or even personal injury. If

you additionally program the fail-safe positions of the

rudders to that the model ﬂ ies in gently sinking circles

in the event of a failure, there is a good chance that

the model even lands relatively gently on its own in

the event of a continuing connection failure. You also

have sufﬁ cient time to re-establish the connection

if the entire 2.4 GHz frequency band is temporarily

disrupted.

In the receiver's condition as supplied, however,

the servos maintain their last validly recognized

position ("hold") in the event of a fail-safe situation. As

described on page 208, you can deﬁ ne a "Fail-safe

position" for each receiver servo output (Fail-safe

mode).

Summary

The settings described on this page are especially

useful for the "expert" who would like to have an

entirely neutral, precisely ﬂ ying F3A model acrobatic

model at his or her disposal.

It should be mentioned this takes a lot of time, effort,

instinct and know-how. Experts even program during

the ﬂ ight. To do this, however, is not suggested

for an advanced beginner who ventures into an

F3A acrobatic model. It would be best to turn to an

experienced pilot and carry out the settings step by

step until the model has the desired neutrality in its

ﬂ ight behavior. Then the pilot can begin to learn the

not always easy to perform acrobatic ﬁ gures with a

model which ﬂ ies faultlessly.

308 Programming examples - Helicopter models

Helicopter models

With this programming example, you must have

already covered the description of the individual

menus and you must be familiar with the use of the

transmitter. In addition, the helicopter's mechanical

construction should correspond exactly to the

corresponding manual. The electronic capabilities

of the transmitter should by no means be used to

straighten out rough mechanical imprecision.

As is often the case in life, there are also various

ways and possibilities to achieve a speciﬁ c goal

when programming the mc-16 HoTT. The following

example should provide you with a clearer structure

for logical programming. If there are multiple

possibilities, the simplest and most clearly arranged

solutions are recommended ﬁ rst. In order for the

helicopter to function faultlessly later on, you are, of

course, free to try out other solutions which may be

better for you.

The programming example is based on the

clockwise-rotating STARLET 50 helicopter from

Graupner with three pivot points each offset 120 °

of the swashplate type "3sv(2 Roll)", beginner

adjustment without increased throttle curve; without

heading-lock gyro system and without transmitter-

side gyro inﬂ uence of the "normal operating mode"

and without speed regulator.

This simple program was also consciously selected

to demonstrate that a helicopter which ﬂ ies really

well can also be attained with relatively little

(programming) effort.

However, we do not want to dispense entirely with the

enhancement possibilities: Therefore, after the basic

description, you will ﬁ nd adjustment information for

the gyro effect, the speed regulators and for the ﬂ ight-

phase programming.

Note:

If you are not interested in the combustion helicopter

described here, but a electric helicopter, please

continue reading anyhow! With the exception of the

omitted idle settings, you can practically adopt most

of the settings described in the following unchanged.

In the scope of the initial commissioning of a new

transmitter, in the selection menu …

»General basic settings« (page 256)

Battery type

Battery warning

Touch Sense

Top LCD Contrast

Li-Io

Display light

Region

3.60V

EURO

unlim.

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name H-J Sandbrunner

Pre-set stick mode 1

Pre-set DSC Output PPM10

Pre-set Pitch min rear

Stick warning: unlim.

Pre-set modulation

Own phase name

HoTT

Bottom LCD Contrast 0

Own phase name 1

Voice volume

Vario volume

Touch-beeps vol.

7fr –––

SEL SEL

7fr –––

Power-on/off beep yes

… some basic information should be entered. This

serves various purposes:

The ﬁ rst three lines of this menu can be used to

individually regulate, in increments between 0 and

10, the volume of voice and signal output emitted via

the built-in loudspeakers or the transmitter's headset

connector. The fourth line of this menu is used to

record the transmitter owner's name Select the

characters for this from an extensive character list on

the second display screen, which can be reached via

309

Programming examples - Helicopter models

the



symbol with a brief tap on the center SET key

of the right touch pad:

!"#$%&’()

Owners name

@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_

?+,–./0123456789:;

¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ

`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~

H-J Sandb

The pre-set for "Stick mode" can be selected

according to the criteria described on page 258.

The same applies to the pre-sets for "Modulation"

and "DSC Output".

The pre-set for "Pitch min" is a matter of personal

control habits.

The pre-sets established here for "Stick mode",

"Modulation", "DSC Output" and "Pitch forward/

back" will be initially adopted when a new model

memory is created but they can also be freely

changed within a given model memory location to any

other available option.

The settings in the "Top/Bottom LCD Contrast" lines

determine the legibility of the given displays under

poor light conditions and the setting in the "Display

light" line determines how long display lighting

remains illuminated after the transmitter is switched

on or after the last key actuation.

The selection of "yes/no" in the "Power-on/off beep"

line determines whether the "recognition melody" is

to sound when the transmitter is switched off or on

again.

The "Battery type" line speciﬁ es whether the

transmitter is supplied with current from a "NiMH or a

“Lith." battery, and the "Battery warning" line below it

speciﬁ es the voltage at which the transmitter's low-

voltage warning should trigger. Do not enter a value

that is too low here, so you have enough time to land

your helicopter.

The setting made in the "Stick warning" line

determines how long the transmitter will wait after the

last actuation of an operating element before issuing

visual and acoustic warning signals to indicate it

is still switched on. Following the warning, you still

have about one minute to actuate the transmitter so

the warning will abate. Otherwise the transmitter will

switch itself off when this minute expires.

The value set in the "Touch Sense" line is a matter

of adapting the transmitter to personal preferences.

And, in the event the transmitter is to be operated in

France, the setting in the "Region" line is important:

The legal regulations in France require that the

"FRANCE" option is selected instead of the default

setting "EURO".

Later on, the ten "Own phase name" lines can be

used to create one's own phase names if none of the

pre-set phase names appear appropriate.

Once these settings have been taken care of,

commissioning continues with the menu …

"Model select" (page 69)

Use the selection keys to pick a free memory

location …

R16

 free

00:12h

 free

… and call it up with a brief tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad. In the display which then

appears, use the  key of the left or right touch pad …

Select model type (free model memory)

… to select the "helicopter" model type. The display

immediately switches to the base screen if the

selection is conﬁ rmed by a brief tap on the center

SET key of the right touch pad.

Notes:

If the "Select model type" option has been •

opened, the process cannot be canceled. Even

if you switch off the transmitter, this selection

must be made! In any case, you can undo this

by subsequently deleting the respective model

memory.

If the "Throttle too high" warning appears, it can •

be erased by turning the right-side proportional

rotary control to its forward limit.

If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover •

cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An

appropriate message will appear in the screen:

not possible now

voltage too low

Once this ﬁ rst hurdle is cleared, the connection of the

receiver built into the model at this model memory

must be made in the menu …

310 Programming examples - Helicopter models

… which must be assembled from characters available

on the second page of the "Model name" line:

!"#$%&’()

Model name Starle

@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_

?+,–./0123456789:;

¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ

`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~

After entering the "Model name", the settings

adopted from »General basic settings« for "Stick

mode" and "DSC Output" are to be checked and

changed as necessary for the given memory location.

The entry ﬁ eld in the "Info" line can be used if needed

for a notice of up to 15 characters in length. This

notice will then be helpful in the selection of models

and so on.

Another option is to be activated in the

"Autorotation" line. Even if you are not an advanced

pilot, the autorotation switch should at least be set as

an emergency shutoff switch for the motor.

Do this by selecting the "Autorotation" line with a

brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch

pad, activate the switch assignment, assign a 2-way

switch, e.g. "2", an put it in its "ON" position.

BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

SET SET

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

Autorotation

The selected switch should be in a location on the

transmitter which is easily within reach – without letting

loose of a joystick – e.g. above the pitch joystick.

»Basic settings, model« (page 84 … 92)

... To this end, switch to the line "Module".

Model name

Stick mode

Module

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

n/a

Info

n/a

Starlet

SEL

HoTT

BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

2345g/090911

Note:

After conﬁ rmation of the model selection in the base

screen, if you conﬁ rm the message appearing in the

screen for a few seconds …

BIND. N/A

… with a tap on the SET key of the right touch pad,

this line will be accessed automatically.

The line "Module" initiates a binding process between

model memory and receiver, as described in detail on

page 88. Otherwise, you cannot address the receiver.

Afterward, use the  selection key of the left or right

four-way pad to move up to the ﬁ rst line and begin

with actual model programming in the "Model name"

line. Now give the model memory an appropriate

name, …

Model name

Stick mode

Module

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

n/a

Info

n/a

Starlet

SEL

HoTT

BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

2345g/090911

Note:

More more information about the setting of this

"emergency shutoff", see the beginning of the second

following double-page.

Another tip:

Make a habit of giving all switches a common switch-

on direction; then a quick glance over the transmitter

prior to the ﬂ ight should sufﬁ ce – all switches off.

Setting options for the "Autorotation C1 position",

"Motor stop", "Marking" and "Stick warning" are not

yet of particular interest …

… and the "Auto Trim" line should only be assigned

to a switch if "Initial trimming" is to be performed

on the helicopter in the context of a trimming ﬂ ight.

Following such a ﬂ ight, this switch should be erased

once again, for reasons of safety.

Additional settings speciﬁ c to helicopters are made in

the menu …

»Helicopter type« (page 98)

In the "Swashplate type" line, select control for

swashplate or pitch function. In this example:

"3Sv(2rol)".

The "Linearis. swashpl." line is not yet of interest.

In the "Rotor direction" line, it is established whether

the rotor – as viewed from above – turns to the right

(clockwise) or left (counter-clockwise). In other words,

whether it rotates counterclockwise or clockwise. In

this example "right".

Check the default for "Pitch min", which was adopted

from »General basic settings«, to conﬁ rm that the

entry "front" or "rear" is in keeping with personal

preferences or should be changed.

311

Programming examples - Helicopter models

Linearis. swashpl.

Swashplate type

1 Servo

Rotor direction right

HELTYPE

Pitch min. rear

SEL

Both "Expo throttle lim." as well as "Thr. limit

warning", in bottom line of this display, are currently

of no interest.

By now, the servos should be plugged into the

receiver in the intended sequence:

Receiver power supply

13 14 T 15 16 S

77 8910 11 12

Receiver power supply

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

Tail rotor servo (gyro system)

Roll 1 servo

Pitch-axis 1 servo

free or speed governor

or aux. function

Roll 2 servo

free or aux. function

Throttle servo or speed controller

Gyro gain

Note:

Please note that on the newer Graupner-mc- and

mx- remote control systems, the ﬁ rst pitch servo and

the throttle servo are swapped in comparison to older

systems.

Mix ratios and mix directions for swashplate pitch, roll

and nick servos are already pre-adjusted to +61 % in

the menu …

»Swashplate mixer« (page 208)

SWASH MIXER

Pitch

Roll

Pitch ax.

+61%

SEL

. If the swashplate mixer should not follow joystick

movements properly, ﬁ rst change the mixing

directions from "+" to "-" before changing servo

directions in the menu …

»Servo adjustment« (page 102)

0% 100%Servo 1

Servo 2

Servo 3

Servo 4

Servo 5

Rev cent.

100%

150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

0% 100%

100%

150% 150%

... This menu can also be used to adapt travel and

direction for individual servos. However, one must

attempt to retain 100 % servo travel so as to achieve

the best possible resolution and control accuracy. The

direction of travel is determined with "Rev." and, in

the process, make sure that the direction is correct.

The tail rotor servo must run so that the nose (!) of

the helicopter follows the tail joystick direction.

In the menu …

»Stick mode« (page 106)

Thr trim

Pitch/thr

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot.

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

0.0s

… the column "Tr. step" is used to set the increment

size of each "click" on the digital trim keys.

The C1 trimming only affects the throttle servo for

the helicopter. At this point there is no need to go

into the particulars of this trimming ("cut-off trim")

once again. Please read more about this on page 58.

(Thanks to digital trimming, trim values can be saved

automatically when a model change is affected. In

the mc-16 HoTT system these can even be stored

automatically when a change of ﬂ ight phase takes

place.).

An additional setting which is speciﬁ c to helicopters

can also be made in this menu in which you determine

which function the trim slider on the pitch joystick

should have. This is accomplished by selecting the

"Throttle limit" setting in the "Throttle" line or leaving

it as it is. This roughly corresponds to trim for the

familiar idle trim function. If the trim indicator marker is

moved all the way forward by "turning" the trim wheel

(remember: "pitch min rear" = "throttle forward") the

throttle limit will later take over the throttle limit for

throttle enable seamlessly in the menu …

312 Programming examples - Helicopter models

»Control adjust« (page 112 … 119)

I13 +100%

I14

I15

Tl16

Typ

+100%

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

Lv1

---

offset

Normal

0.0 0.0

fr ---

SET

… where input "Tl16" is assigned and all other inputs

are "fr(ee)" by default.

This "Tl16" input serves as the throttle limiter. Its

effect is exclusively on output "6", where the throttle

servo is connected. The throttle limiter is assigned by

default to the right-side proportional rotary control.

Once again, as a reminder:

With the user of the "throttle limiter" function, you •

do not have to program a ﬂ ight phase "throttle pre-

selection".

The throttle limiter does not control the throttle •

servo; it only limits the travel of the throttle servo

in the full throttle direction according to its position.

The throttle servo is generally controlled from

the pitch joystick via »Helicopter mixer« menu

setting/s for throttle curve/s, which is why input

6 must absolutely remain "free". Refer to pages

180 through 182 in this manual about this.

The C1 trimming also affects only the throttle servo •

for the helicopter. At this point there is no need to

go into the particulars of this trimming once again.

Please read more about this on page 58. (Thanks

to the digital trimming, trim can be automatically

saved values with a model changeover as well as

with a change of the ﬂ ight phase).

A detailed description of the idle run base setup •

model and the adjustment of idle and throttle limit

can be found beginning on page 117.

Then switch to the "travel" column with the 

selection key of the left or right touch pad and

increase the now inversely highlighted value from

+100 % to +125 % with a fully opened throttle limiter

with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad:

I13 +100%

I14

I15

Tl16

Typ

+100%

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

+100%

0.0 0.0

Lv1

---

offset

Normal

0.0 0.0

fr ---

+125%

SET

In doing so, it is assured that the throttle limiter

releases the entire throttle travel with the pitch

joystick later during ﬂ

ight.

Adjustment notice for electric helicopters:

Since electric drive systems have no need for an

idle setting, the basic conﬁ guration of settings for

an electrically-powered helicopter merely involves

making sure that the control range of the throttle

limiter is both higher and lower than the adjustment

range of the speed controller (usually -100 % to

+100 %) by a safe margin. If necessary, therefore,

the adjustment of the "travel" setting of the throttle

limiter described above must be modiﬁ ed accordingly,

for example, to symmetric 110 %. The further

adjustment, however, can take place analogously to

the combustion helicopter described here.

With this process, you have not carried out the basic

settings for the transmitter as they are needed again

later for further model programming.

The actual helicopter-speciﬁ c settings take place

primarily in the menu …

» Helicopter mixer« (page 176 … 191)

Channel 1

Pitch

Throttle

Tail rot.

Tail rot. 0%

Roll 0%

Throttle

Roll

Throttle

Tail rot.

Nick

Throttle

Tail rot.

Swashplate rotation

Swashplate limiter

0°

off

Gyro suppression 0%



Gyro offset 0%

Normal

The "Pitch" function appears right in the ﬁ rst line. A tap

on the center SET key of the right touch pad will cause

a switch to the corresponding sub-menu. The graphic

representation of the pitch curve appears here; it is

initially only deﬁ ned by the points "L" and "H":

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

–50%

–

100

O U T P U T

Normal

Now place point "1" in the center with a brief tap on

the center SET key of the right touch pad:

313

Programming examples - Helicopter models

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

–

100

O U T P U T

Normal

Always try to make due with these three points

initially; more points can "over-complicate" the matter

and are more of a burden at this point.

The reference point for the hovering should generally

be the mechanical center position of the pitch joystick,

because this position comes closest to the normal

control feel. Although the curve adjustment enables

other settings, you must know exactly what you

are doing. First set the pitch joystick in the center.

The servos which you had previously set according

to manufacturer speciﬁ cations have their levers at

positioned perpendicularly to the servo housing

(normally). A hovering pitch value of 4° to 5° is now

mechanically set at the control rods to the rotor blades.

In principle, all known helicopters ﬂ y with this setting.

Then move the pitch joystick towards maximum pitch

until the limit position. (The vertical line shows you

the current joystick position.) Now change the pitch

curve's point "H" with the selection keys of the right

touch pad such that the main rotor's blades have a

maximum pitch of about 9°. A value of +50 % should

be about right.

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +100%

+50%

–

100

O U T P U T

+50%

Normal

Note:

A rotor blade adjustment gage, such as the Graupner

pitch gage, order no. 61, is quite useful for reading

the angle.

Now move the pitch joystick toward the pitch

minimum position until its limit position. Depending

on the ability of the pilot, adjust the value of point "L"

so that the blade angle of approach is 0 to -4°. Now a

slightly pitched line arises at the hovering points, the

so-called pitch curve, which can appear as follows:

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –100%

–75%

–

100

O U T P U T

–75%

Normal

Now you can, if you like, move the marker frame

upward with the selection keys to the "Curve" line

and after activation of the value ﬁ eld with a brief tap

on the center SET key of the right touch pad, set the

curve function of the mixer to "on".

Pitch

Curve

Point

Output

Input –100%

–75%

–

100

O U T P U T

–75%

Normal

If you now switch to autorotation phase – at the

bottom left of the display the ﬂ ight phase name

"Autorot" appears – the "old" pitch curve is again:

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

–50%

–

100

O U T P U T

Autorot

Now carry out the same setting as before in the

normal phase. Only at point "H“ – at maximum

pitch – is it possible to increase pitch angle by about

2°. In doing so, you will have somewhat more of an

angle to catch the model later on (1).

After setting pitch curve, move the autorotation

switch back then return to the helicopter mixer menu

selection with a brief tap on the center ESC key

of the left touch pad. In that display, change to the

"Channel 1  Throttle" line to set the throttle curve.

The adjustment range for idle trim must ﬁ rst be

matched to the throttle curve. Do this by putting the

pitch joystick into its minimum position then set point

"L" to about +15 %.

Channel 1

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

+15%

L+

–

100

O U T P U T

Throttle

Normal

+15%

With the throttle limiter closed and idle trim completely

open, move the pitch joystick back and forth somewhat

at the minimum limit position. The throttle servo

may not move with it in the process. No you have

established a seamless transition from the idle trim to

the throttle curve. The further settings along the throttle

curve must be carried out later in ﬂ ight.

314 Programming examples - Helicopter models

If you switch from this graphic to the autorotation

phase for testing purposes, the following appears

instead of the accustomed representation:

off

C1 Throttle

Autorot

That means that this mixer is switched off and the

throttle servo is switched to a ﬁ xed value, which can

be adjusted as follows:

Return to the menu list with a tap on the ESC key. As

long as you are still in the autorotation phase, new

sub-menus are listed; speciﬁ cally:

Pitch

–90%

Tail rot. offset AR 0%

Throttle position AR

Gyro suppression 0%

Gyro offset 0%

SEL

Autorot

The line "Thr. setting AR" is important. Enter the value

to the right, depending on servo direction, to either

approximately +125 % or -125 %.

Pitch

–125%

Tail rot. offset AR 0%

Throttle position AR

Gyro suppression 0%

Gyro offset 0%

SEL

Autorot

In doing so, the motor is safely switched off in the

autorotation phase (in case of emergency). Later,

when you have gained enough experience to practice

the autorotation ﬂ ight, a more stable idle can be

entered here.

Adjustment notice for electric helicopters:

Since the motor must also be shut off for electrically

powered helicopters in case of an emergency, this

setting is adopted without change.

The further sub-menus are not important at the

moment. By switching off "autorotation", it returns to

the ﬁ rst menu list.

Select the "Channel 1  Tail rot." settings page

in order to set static torque compensation for the

tail rotor. In this case, also work with a maximum of

three interpolation points; everything else is reserved

for the experienced pilot. Do this by changing the

heading-lock systems from their intended uniform

pre-setting of 0 % at point "L" (minimum pitch) to

-30 % and at the opposite end, at point "H" to +30 %

(maximum pitch). These values may have to be

corrected in ﬂ ight. It may also be necessary to set

point "1" in the middle.

Channel 1

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

–

100

O U T P U T

Tail rot.

Now, for testing purposes, switch back to the

autorotation phase. Here the setting is also

deactivated; the tail servo no longer reacts to pitch

movements (no torque usually arises when the main

rotor is not powered). All additional interpolation

points are not currently of importance yet.

If, contrary to the default setting, the gyro has a

transmitter-side sensitivity setting, another free

proportional control will be needed. This can be

assigned in the …

»Control adjust« (page 112 … 119)

… menu to "Gyr7" input. Activate the control

assignment with a brief tap on the center SET key of

the right touch pad then move the selected control

until its control number appears in the display:

I5 +88%

Thr6

Gyr7

Typ

+111%

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

Sl1

---

offset

Normal

0.0 0.0

SET

fr ---

Conclude this entry with a brief tap on the ESC key of

the left touch pad then change to the column "- travel

+" with the  selection key of the left or right touch

pad. After a tap on the center SET key of the right

touch pad, the gyro's maximum sensitivity can be set

in the value ﬁ eld displayed in inverse video, e.g. to

50 %. To this end, move the selected control into its

middle position or, if applicable also to the side, such

that only one value ﬁ eld is displayed in inverse video:

I5 +88%

Thr6

Gyr7

Typ

+111%

– travel + –time+

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

0% 0.0 0.0

0% +100%

+100%

0.0 0.0

Sl1

---

offset

Normal

0.0 0.0

SET

fr ---

+50%

This produces a ﬁ xed value for as long as the control

remains at the right limit position. The correct value

must be adjusted in ﬂ ight.

315

Programming examples - Helicopter models

In the process, however, always observe the

adjustment instructions accompanying your gyro

sensor, because your helicopter will not be able

to ﬂ y otherwise!

To conclude this initial programming, a few words

should be mentioned about the menu …

»Channel 1 curve« (page 131)

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

–

100

O U T P U T

This function is a type of "convenient exponential

curve" for the throttle/pitch joystick and the mixer

functions connected to it.

If ever, this curve should only be applied "cautiously"

at the very end, when all adjustments have been

made. It should never be used for the throttle/pitch

adjustment! The over-lapping result in "nasty" effects.

With this, all helicopter-speciﬁ c settings which can be

made on the "workbench" are now completed. The

further ﬁ ne-tuning must take place in ﬂ ight. The ﬂ ight-

tested, (hopefully) minor (digital) trim settings are

automatically saved.

Larger deviations should ﬁ rst be mechanically

adjusted or adjusted according to the previously

discussed settings.

Further settings

Following this programming example, you have

provided a helicopter with a basic adjustment for the

hovering training and simple trips. Depending on

your knowledge and experience as a pilot, additional

functions can, of course, also be activated.

If you want to ﬂ y at different speeds and with different

trimming, you activate the so-called "ﬂ ight phases",

which can be called with assigned switches as

an alternative to the previously described "normal

phase". For this purpose, ﬁ rst open the menu …

»Phase settings« (page 146)

… whereby the symbols appearing in the second

column, sometimes only after a switch assignment in

the »Phase assignment« menu, have the following

meanings:

"–": no phase switch present

"+": phase switch present

"": currently active phase

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim. Sw.time

–



Autorot Autorot

However, consider in advance whether these are to

be implemented with individual switches or, more

reasonably, with 3-way switches because as many

as 7 ﬂ ight phases can be activated in addition to

the autorotation phase. The latter possibility is more

logical and usually more clearly laid out.

The "Autorot" line is already selected in the ﬁ gure

above. When activated, the autorotation phase

always has precedence over any other phases you

assign switches to.

However, in the "Name" column you ﬁ rst assign

"meaningful" names to Phases 1 to 3, which are

adopted from a list. These identiﬁ cations serve for the

better differentiation and are shown later in the base

screen and for all ﬂ ight-phase dependent menus, for

example:

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim Sw. time

–



Autorot Autorot

Normal

Hover

Speed

Then, in the fourth column from the left, enter the

switching time with which the FROM phase should

switch TO the next respective phase. Approximately

1 s should sufﬁ ce:

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

1.1s

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim Sw. time

–



Autorot Autorot

Normal

Hover

Speed 1.1s

This value can also be adjusted later according to

your personal preferences. Please observe in the

process that TO the autorotation phase, whose

name is deﬁ ned as "Autorot", is switched without a

time delay. If necessary, enter the time with which a

change FROM the autorotation phase to a different

phase should be affected.

In order to be able to switch between the individual

ﬂ ight phases, the assignment of the individual

switches or the three-stage switch is necessary.

The assignment of the switch takes place in the

menu …

»Phase assignment« (page 148)

Under "C" and "D", for example, assign the one of the

two standard 3-way switches mounted into the switch

panels, e.g.:

316 Programming examples - Helicopter models

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior.

1 Normal

combi

ABDEF

Now the given switch position must be assigned to

the respective ﬂ ight phase in the »Phase settings«

menu. Since these phases already have names,

the name «1 Normal» will initially appear at the right

in the display. If the already assigned autorotation

switch was activated, the following warning message

appears in the display:

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior.

1 Normal

Kombination

ABDEF

Autorot

As a reminder:

The autorotation phase has absolute precedence.

Therefore, move the autorotation switch back again

then put the selected switch, in the example the

three-stage switch connected to switch plug-in

locations 6 and 7, initially to one of its limit positions.

Now use the selection keys to change to the bottom

right and activate this entry ﬁ eld:

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior.

combi

ABDEF

267

1 Normal

Now use the selection keys to select the desired ﬂ ight

phase for this – for example "2 Hover" …

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior.

combi

ABDEF

267

2 Hover

… and conﬁ rm this selection with a brief tap on the

center SET key of the right touch pad or go ahead

and put the switch into its other limit position and

deﬁ ne the name for this new switch position, such as

«3 Speed».

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior.

combi

ABDEF

267

3 Speed

The switch's middle position then receives the name

"1 Normal":

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

combi

ABDEF

267

1 Normal

Note:

Exchanged or different name assignments for the

three switch positions are, of course, also possible.

Thus, for example, implementation of a programmed

speed controller (as described beginning in the next

column) can make a sequence like "normal / hover /

acro" quite logical.

The model settings made before the assignment of

a phase switch are now in the ﬂ ight phase "Normal".

This is the phase which is called after the above

deﬁ nition in the switch center position.

This normal setting, which was already tested in

ﬂ ight, can be copied to a different ﬂ ight phase so that

ﬂ ying can take place in the same manner in every

phase at ﬁ rst. For this purpose, use the menu …

»Copy / Erase« (page 72)

Copy flight phase

Erase model

Copy model –> model

Export to SD

Import from SD =>



With the operation of the ﬂ ight phases, it is possible

to carry out changes in the phase-dependent menu

for each individual phase. Since the mc-16 HoTT

system has digital trimming, in addition to the ﬂ ight-

phase dependent menu settings in the helicopter

317

Programming examples - Helicopter models

program, the trim positions of roll, nick and tail rotor

joystick can also be selected for storage on a ﬂ ight-

phase dependent basis, see »Stick mode« menu,

page 106:

0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0:00h

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

#02

Starlet

RX VOLT:4.9V

Enhancement recommendation: Rotational speed

regulator

At some point in time you may want to install a

rotational speed regulator in the helicopter, such as

mc-Heli-Control, in order to be able to ﬂ y with speeds

automatically kept at a constant. In the process, it

is logical to couple the individual rotational speeds

with the ﬂ ight phases so that further additional

adjustments are possible.

It is mandatory for the transmitter-side programming

that the rotational speed regulator was installed

and programmed according to the manufacturer's

instructions. Of course, the mc-16 HoTT here too

offers multiple possibilities to realize various speeds

in individual phases. A practical proposal which

retains the throttle limiter function can be found

beginning on page 181.

If you have adjusted your helicopter according to

this programming principle, it is not yet a competition

helicopter, but it already permits sophisticated ﬂ ying.

You should only activate additional functions if

the model ﬂ ies faultlessly so that the (desired)

improvements are also easy to follow. Insofar as

possible, activate individual functions on an individual

basis so that you can actually recognize and attribute

the change. Bear in mind that it is not the quantity

of functions used that distinguishes good pilots, but

what they can do in terms of ﬂ ying with relatively little.

318 FCC Information

FCC Information

Graupner mc-16 HoTT #33016

FCC ID: ZKZ-MC-16

FCC Statement

This device complies with Part 15C of the FCC 1.

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference.

(2) This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause

un desired operation.

Changes or modiﬁ cations not expressly approved 2.

by the party responsible for compliance could void

the user‘s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE

This equipment has been tested and found to

comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits

are designed to provide reasonable protection against

harmful interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. However, there

is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a

particular installation. If this equipment does cause

harmful interference to radio or television reception,

which can be determined by turning the equipment

off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct

the interference by one or more of the following

measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.•

Increase the separation between the equipment •

and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a •

circuit different from that to which the receiver is

connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV •

technician for help.

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement

This equipment complies with FCC radiation

exposure limits set forth for un uncontrolled

envirionment. Thisequipment should be installed and

operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between

the antenna and your body.

319Declaration of Conformity

ytimrofnoC fo noitaralceD

Konformitätserklärung gemäß dem Gesetz über Funkanlagen und

Telekomunikationsendeinrichtungen (FTEG) und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE)

Declaration of Conformity in accordiance with the Radio and Telecomunikations Terminal Equipment

Act (FTEG) and Directive 1999/5/EG (R&TTE)

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG

Henriettenstraße 94-96

D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck

erklärt, dass das Produkt:

declares that the product

Geräteklasse:2

Equipment class

den grundlegenden Anforderungen des § 3 und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen des

FTEG (Artikel 3 der R&TTE) entspricht.

complies with the essential requirements of § 3 and the other relevant provisions of the FTEG (Article 3 of the

R&TTE Directive).

Angewendete harmonisierte Normen:

Harmonised standards applied

EN 60950:2006

EN 301 489-1 V1.7.1

EN 301 489-3 V1.4.1

EN 300 328 V1.7.1

Health and safety requirements pursuant to § 3 (1) 1. (Article 3 (1) a))

Protection requirement concernig electromagnetic compatibility

§ 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))

Measures for the efficient use of the radio frequency spectrum

§ 3 (2) (Article 3 (2))

Kirchheim, 14. November 2011 Stefan Graupner, Geschäftsführer

Stefan Graupner, Managing Director

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Henriettenstraße 94-96 D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck Germany

ed.renpuarg@ofni :liaME0-227/12070 :leT Fax: 07021/722-188

Gesundheit und Sicherheit gemäß § 3 (1) 1. (Artikel 3 (1)a))

Schutzanforderungen in Bezug auf elektromagnetische

Verträglichkeit § 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))

Maßnahmen zur effizienten Nutzung des Frequenzspektrums

§ 3 (2) (Artikel 3 (2))

mc-16 HoTT - No. 33016

GR-16 Dual HoTT - No. 33516

0678

320 Warranty Certiﬁ cate

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstrasse 94 - 96,

D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck guarantees this product for

a period of 24 months from date of purchase. The

warranty is only valid for the material or functional

defects already present at the time of the purchase

of the product. Schäden, die auf Abnützung,

Überlastung, falsches Zubehör oder unsachgemäße

Behandlung zurückzuführen sind, sind von der

Garantie ausgeschlossen. Die gesetzlichen Rechte und

Gewährleistunsansprüche des Verbrauchers werden

durch diese Garantie nicht berührt. Bitte überprüfen Sie

vor einer Reklamation oder Rücksendung das Produkt

genau auf Mängel, da wir Ihnen bei Mängelfreiheit die

entstandenen Unkosten in Rechnung stellen müssen.

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstrasse 94 -

96. D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck, Germany guarantees

this product for a period of 24 months from date

of purchase. The guarantee applies only to such

material or operational defects which are present at

the time of purchase of the product. Damage due to

wear, overloading, incompetent handling or the use of

incorrect accessories is not covered by the guarantee.

The user´s legal rights and claims under guarantee are

not affected by this guarantee. Please check the product

carefully for defects before you are make a claim or

send the item to us, since we are obliged to make a

charge for our cost if the product is found to be free of

faults.

La société Graupner GmbH & Co. KG,

Henriettenstraße 94-96, D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck, accorde

sur ce produit une garantie de 24 mois à compter de la

date d’achat. La garantie ne s’applique qu’aux défauts

de matériel et de fonctionnement du produit acheté. Les

dommages dus à une usure, à une surcharge, à l’emploi

d’accessoires non compatibles ou à une manipulation non

conforme sont exclus de la garantie. Cette garantie ne

remet pas en cause les droits légaux des consommateurs.

Avant toute réclamation ou retour de matériel, vériﬁ ez

précisément les défauts ou vices constatés, car si le

matériel est conforme et qu’aucun défaut n’a été constaté

par nos services, nous nous verrions contraints de

facturer le coût de cette intervention.

Garantie-Urkunde

Warranty certiﬁ cate / Certiﬁ cat de garantie

mc-16 HoTT Set

 Order no. 33016

Übergabedatum:

Date of purchase/delivery:

Date d’achat :

Name des Käufers:

Owner´s name:

Nom de I`acheteur :

Straße, Wohnort:

Complete address:

Adresse complète :

Firmenstempel und Unterschrift des Einzelhändlers:

Stamp and signature of dealer:

Cachet et signature du détaillant :

Warranty Certiﬁ cate

Servicestellen / Service / Service après-vente

Graupner Zentralservice

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG

Henriettenstrasse 94 - 96

D-73230 Kirchheim

Service hotline

 (+49) 0 18 05 47 28 76*

Monday … Friday

9:30 - 11:30 & 13:00 - 15:00

United Kingdom

Graupner Service

Brunel Drive

GB, NEWARK, Nottinghamshire

NG242EG

 (+44) 16 36 61 05 39

Sverige

Baltechno Electronics

Box 5307

S 40227 Göteborg

 (+46) 31 70 73 00 0

Schweiz

Graupner Service

Wehntalerstrasse 37

CH 8181 Hoeri

 (+41) 43 26 66 58 3

Luxembourg

Kit Flammang

129, route d’Arlon

L 8009 Strassen

 (+35) 23 12 23 2

France

Graupner France

Gérard Altmayer

86, rue St. Antoine

F 57601 Forbach-Oeting

 (+33) 3 87 85 62 12

Espana

Anguera Hobbies

C/Terrassa 14

E 43206 Reus (Tarragona)

 (+34) 97 77 55 32 0

info@anguera-hobbies.com

Ceská Republika

Slovenská Republika

RC Service Z. Hnizdil

Letecka 666/22

CZ 16100 Praha 6 - Ruzyne

 (+42) 2 33 31 30 95

Belgie/Belgique/Nederland

Jan van Mouwerik

Slot de Houvelaan 30

NL 3155 Maasland VT

 (+31) 10 59 13 59 4

Italia

GiMax

Via Manzoni, no. 8

I 25064 Gussago

 (+39) 030 25 22 73 2 * 0.14 cent / minute from a

German Telecom landline.

Calling price variations

possible for calls from cell

phones or from the land-

lines of other providers.

Wir gewähren auf dieses Erzeugnis eine Garantie von

This product is warrantied for

Sur ce produit nous accordons une garantie de 24 Monaten

months

mois

321For your notes

322 For your notes

323For your notes

HOPPING.TELEMETRY.TRANSMISSION

GRAUPNER GMBH & CO. KG

POSTFACH 1242

D-73220 KIRCHHEIM/TECK

GERMANY

http://www.graupner.de

Changes and delivery options reserved. Available only

through dealerships. A directory of suppliers will be

provided. No liability is accepted for print errors.

Printed in Germany PN.QC-01

Although the information provided in these instructions has

been carefully scrutinized for viability, no form of liability can

be accepted for errors, omissions or print errors. Graupner

reserves the right to change the described hardware and

software features at any time without prior notiﬁ cation.

Graupner and KG MC-16 ComputerSystem Graupner/SJ HoTT User Manual Manual 3

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG ComputerSystem Graupner/SJ HoTT Manual 3

Contents

Manual 3

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation